Fanuc Cimplicity I Cell Operator

FANUC CIMPLICITY
CELL
OPERATORS MANUAL
B-75074EN/04
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible. This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by or in the main body.
B-75074EN/04
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS describes notes, cautions and warnings to be observed for safe handling of those machines that have the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL and FANUC CNC installed. Before using the functions described in this manual, be sure to read SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. When using a function described in this manual, read the relevant portion of the operator's manual of each CNC to fully understand the function. Contents 1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ........s-2 1.2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...........................s-3 1.3 WARNING AND CAUTIONS ON THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL .............................................................s-5
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-75074EN/04
1.1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed. CAUTION Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed. NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-2
B-75074EN/04
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.2
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING 1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 2 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the programmed value, compensation value, current position, and external signal settings. Also, never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is no need to change them. When, however, there is no alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-75074EN/04
CAUTION 1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit. Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly. 2 The operator's manual describes all the basic functions of the CNC, including the optional functions. The selected optional functions vary with the machine. Some functions described in this manual may not, therefore, be supported by your machine. Check the machine specifications previously. 3 Some machine operations and screen functions are implemented by the machine tool builder. For an explanation of their usage and related notes, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. For example: - On some machines, executing a tool function causes the tool change unit to operate. When executing a tool function on such a machine, stand well clear of the tool change unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury to the operator. - Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations, such as rotation of the spindle. Before attempting to use an auxiliary function, therefore, ensure that you are fully aware of the operation to be triggered by that function. NOTE Command programs, parameters, and variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC. Generally, the contents of memory are not lost by a power on/off operation. However, the contents of memory may be erased by mistake, or important data in nonvolatile memory may have to be erased upon recovering from a failure. To enable the restoration of data as soon as possible if such a situation arises, always make a backup of the data in advance.
s-4
B-75074EN/04
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.3
WARNING AND CAUTIONS ON THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL

Warnings and cautions on the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL are provided below and in the text of this manual. Read this manual carefully before using the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL, and observe the warnings, cautions, and notes.
WARNING 1 When using an NC program on an actual NC machine, confirm that the operation of the machine and tool controlled by the NC program is safe, before operating the machine. If an incorrect NC program is used or an NC program is used in a wrong way, the machine and tool can perform an unexpected operation, thus damaging the tool, machine, and workpiece, and exposing humans to a fatal accident. 2 This software does not check whether an NC program transferred by this software operates normally on the NC machine. When using an NC program on an actual NC machine, observe Item 1 above. 3 Even when an NC program once used successfully is reused, the contents of the NC program input to the NC machine can change for a cause such as deteriorated NC program storage media and a change in the communication environment for transfer based on the communication function. When using an NC program on an actual NC machine, observe Item 1 above. In this manual, a program used to specify an NC machine operation is referred to as an NC program. In the manual of an NC machine, an alias such as a machining program, part program, or program may be used for an NC program. If the meaning and purpose of such an alias are the same as for an NC program used in this manual, be sure to observe the warnings above.
s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-75074EN/04
Warning and caution on DNC operation

WARNING 1 When performing DNC operation, check the NC program. If an incorrect NC program is used, the machine and tool can perform an unexpected operation, thus damaging the workpiece and machine, and causing human injury. 2 When performing DNC operation, do not start machine immediately. By using functions such as the single block, feedrate override, and machine lock functions, check that the machine and tool controlled by DNC operation operate safely. If operation is performed using incorrect data, the machine can perform an unexpected operation, thus damaging the workpiece and machine, and causing human injury. CAUTION DNC operation may temporarily stop, depending on the capability of the personal computer, the number of NCs connected, and the size of the communication buffer on the NC side. Moreover, DNC operation may temporarily stop when software irrelevant to NC program transfer such as software for personal computer screen operation is executed. In these cases, reduce the number of machines on which DNC operation is performed simultaneously.
Exclusive file control

NOTE Be careful not to perform multiple operations such as download, upload, edit, copy, move, and delete operations simultaneously for the same NC program.
s-6
B-75074EN/04
PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL that operates on a personal computer (called PC for short). The FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL is an application that runs on the CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition. Using the Ethernet, DNC2, reader/puncher, or Data Server communication function available with an NC produced by FANUC, the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL transfers data such as NC programs between the NC and personal computer. This manual is applicable to FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL Version 2.0.
Organization of this manual

This manual consists of the following parts: PREFACE This part itself I. GENERAL This part outlines each function. II. INSTALLATION This part describes the method of installation. Be sure to read this part before starting installation. III. SETTING This part describes the setting items required to used each function. IV. OPERATION This part describes the method of screen operation. V. USER CUSTOMIZATION This part describes the information required to customize the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL. APPENDIX The setting items required for an NC, error codes, and so forth are described. CIMPLICITY is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. Microsoft, WindowsNT, Windows2000, and WindowsXP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
p-1
PREFACE
B-75074EN/04
Related manuals
This manual also covers FANUC NCs, their communication functions, and CIMPLICITY related to the use of this software. However, this manual does not cover all required information. Refer to the following manuals in addition to this manual: (1) CIMPLICITY CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Basic System Operator's Manual (B-75064EN) CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Option 1 (WebView/ Action Calendar/Statistic Process Management/VCR) Operator's Manual (B-75064EN-5) (This manual describes the method of WebView setting.) (2) To connect a personal computer to an NC using FOCAS1/Ethernet or Data Server FANUC Ethernet Board/Data Server Board Operator's Manual (B-63354EN) FANUC FAST Ethernet Board/FAST Data Server Operator's Manual (B-63644EN) FANUC FAST Ethernet/FAST Data Server Operator's Manual For FANUC Series 30i/300i, 31i/310i, 32i/320i-MODEL A (B-64014EN) (3) To connect a personal computer to an NC using DNC2 FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E) (4) To connect a personal computer to an NC using Reader/Puncher RS-232-C/RS-422 Interface CONNECTION MANUAL (B-60043E) Connection manual, maintenance manual, and operator's manual of an NC to be connected using the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL
Licensing agreement
The terms and conditions set forth by FANUC must be agreed upon by a customer who purchases the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL. These terms and conditions represent the licensing agreement between the customer and FANUC LTD. (referred to as FANUC) related to the software product (referred to as this software) purchased by the customer. Article 1 Licensing of right for use FANUC grants the customer the following right related to this software: <1> This software may be used on one computer. <2> When this software is used on multiple computers, the customer shall obtain licenses for this software as many as the number of computers even if this software is not used at the same time on those computers. <3> When this software is read through the network to the temporary memory of each computer, the customer shall obtain licenses for this software as many as the number of computers used. <4> Only one copy of this software may be produced for backup.
p-2
B-75074EN/04
PREFACE
Article 2 Copyright FANUC possesses the copyright of this software. Accordingly, the customer shall not copy this software for any purpose except for the purpose stipulated in Article 1 "Licensing of right for use". Article 3 Restrictions The customer shall not transfer, lend, sell, distribute, lease, or rent this software to a third party. Article 4 Warranty If the distributed media and manual of this software contains a physical defect, and the customer so notifies FANUC within ninety days after the reception of this software, FANUC replaces this software with a new one at no cost. Article 5 Exemption FANUC does not provide any warranty and guarantee related to this software except the warranty stipulated in Article 4, "Warranty". Namely, FANUC is not liable for any direct or indirect damages arising from the use of this software.
Abbreviations
In this manual, the following abbreviations may be used:
Formal name FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Personal computer Operating system Abbreviation CIMPLICITY i CELL, i CELL CIMPLICITY HMI PC OS %iCELL% (Used when the path of a particular file name in the i CELL is described) If the installation path is not changed at installation time, %iCELL% is usually: C:\Program Files\FANUC\iCELL
Directory where the i Cell is installed
p-3
B-75074EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1 I. GENERAL 1 2 3 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 3 ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL ............................................ 4 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ................................................................ 6
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 CNC............................................................................................................... 9 PERSONAL COMPUTER/HARDWARE ...................................................... 18 PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE ...................................................... 21 NETWORK CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 24 CONTRACT WITH INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS ............................. 26 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 28 NC PROGRAM TRANSFER........................................................................ 30
4.2.1 4.2.2 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC Program Management Screen...........30 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC...........................................................32
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT........................................................... 27
4.1 4.2
4.3 4.4
NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................ 34 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION ................................................... 36

4.4.1 4.4.2 Details of the Subprogram Batch Transfer Function..............................................38 Details of the Subprogram Expanded Transfer Function .......................................39 Details of List File Batch Transfer Function ..........................................................41 Details of List File Expended Transfer Function ...................................................42 List File Transfer Monitor and Control Function...................................................42
4.5
LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................................................. 40

4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3
OPERATION MONITOR........................................................................ 44
5.1 OPERATION RESULT SCREEN................................................................. 45
5.1.1 5.1.2 Creating Operation Results ....................................................................................45 Display Information ...............................................................................................46 Workpiece Machining Result Data ........................................................................48 Display Information ...............................................................................................49 Display Format Alteration......................................................................................53
c-1
5.2
WORKPIECE MACHINING RESULTS........................................................ 48

5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.4
B-75074EN/04
Planned Parts Count Input......................................................................................54 Display Information ...............................................................................................55
5.3
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................ 55

5.3.1
6 7 8
NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION .......................................................... 57 NC MAINTENANCE .............................................................................. 59 MAIL FUNCTION .................................................................................. 63

8.1 IMPLEMENTATION OF THE MAIL FUNCTION BY DIAL-UP CONNECTION............................................................................................. 64 IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND WEB FUNCTION WITH 24-HOUR CONNECTION ............................................................................ 67
WEB FUNCTION................................................................................... 66
9.1
II. INSTALLATION 1 2 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................... 71 PREPARATION..................................................................................... 72

2.1 PREPARATION (FOR Windows XP)........................................................... 74
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP ....................................74 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP ..........................................75 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP ...............................................76 Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server ................................76 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server .....................................................................................................................77 Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP ...............................................77 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows XP .................................78 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows XP......78 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 .................................79 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 .......................................80 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000 ............................................81 Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000............................................81 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000...82 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 ............................................82 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 ..............................83 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows 2000...83
2.2
PREPARATION (FOR Windows 2000)........................................................ 79

2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8
2.3
PREPARATION (FOR Windows NT)........................................................... 84

c-2
B-75074EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT ....................................84 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT..........................................85 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT ...............................................86 Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT...........................................87 Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT ..............................................88 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT .....89 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT ...............................................89 Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows NT ...........................90 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows NT......90
INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 91
3.1 3.2 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 92 INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE TCP/IP SERVICE FILE ............................................................................................ 98 UNINSTALLATION .................................................................................... 101 BACKUP .................................................................................................... 103
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 Opening the IcellBkupRstr Dialog Box ...............................................................103 Selecting Information to be Backed Up ...............................................................104 Confirming Backup Archive File Paths ...............................................................105 Starting Backup ....................................................................................................106 Confirming the Contents of the Backup Archive File..........................................106 Saving the Backup Archive File...........................................................................107 Installing i CELL..................................................................................................108 Copying the Backup Archive File ........................................................................108 Selecting Information to be Restored ...................................................................108 Starting Restoration..............................................................................................109
4 5
UNINSTALLATION ............................................................................. 100

4.1 5.1
BACKUP AND RESTORATION.......................................................... 102
5.2
RESTORATION......................................................................................... 108
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4
III. SETTING 1 2 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 113 BASIC FUNCTIONS............................................................................ 114

2.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 115
2.1.1 2.1.2 Setting up the Number of Machines According to Order Password ....................115 Setting up the Number of Machines to be Connected and the Functions to be Used ....................................................................................................................117
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6
B-75074EN/04
Setting up Machine Information...........................................................................117 Setting up Communication ...................................................................................117 Setting up NC Program Management...................................................................117 Setting up i CELL ................................................................................................118 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box ...............................................................119 Overview ..............................................................................................................119 Menus ...................................................................................................................120 How to Change Settings .......................................................................................121 Work Flows for Adding and Deleting Machines .................................................122 Setting Change and CIMPLICITY Project...........................................................124 Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project..........................................................125 Displaying a Dialog Box When the Project Has Not Been Updated....................126 If an Attempt to Reflect Point Settings to CIMPLICITY Fails ............................127
2.2
DIALOG BOX CONFIGURATION.............................................................. 119

2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9
2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION ..................................................... 128 PROJECT PROPERTY ............................................................................. 129 MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................................................ 130 COMMUNICATION.................................................................................... 133
2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 Setting up Communication ...................................................................................133 Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication ....................................................134 Confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication Setting ................................138 DNC2 Communication Setting.............................................................................142 Reader/Puncher Communication Setting .............................................................144 Data Server Communication Setting ....................................................................146 Confirming Data Server Communication Setting ................................................148 General Tab ..........................................................................................................152 Communication Setting ........................................................................................155 Download Tab ......................................................................................................156 Upload Tab ...........................................................................................................158
2.7
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT MACHINE SETTINGS ........................ 151

2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4
2.8 2.9
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS ..................... 159 i CELL MACHINE ...................................................................................... 161
2.9.1 2.9.2 Workpiece Process Result ....................................................................................165 Automatic Data Backup .......................................................................................169
2.10 2.11 2.12
WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .......... 173 DATABASE MAINTENANCE..................................................................... 176 NC SETTINGS........................................................................................... 179
c-4
B-75074EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 Machining Result .................................................................................................179 Workpieces Process Result...................................................................................179 Tool Life...............................................................................................................181
MAIL .................................................................................................... 182

3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 183
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 Trigger Point and Trigger Criteria........................................................................183 Mail Destinations .................................................................................................183 Mail Message and Message Point ........................................................................184 Flow of Setting .....................................................................................................185
3.2 3.3 3.4
MAILER ..................................................................................................... 186 MAIL CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 187 SEND TEST............................................................................................... 191 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 193
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 Web Screen Flow .................................................................................................193 Logon Screen........................................................................................................194 Machine Selection Screen ....................................................................................194 Machine Detail Screen .........................................................................................195 Setting Flow .........................................................................................................196
WEB .................................................................................................... 192

4.1
4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
WEB INITIAL CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 197 POINT FOR WEB ...................................................................................... 198 ITEM NAME............................................................................................... 200 DISPLAY TABLE ....................................................................................... 201 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 202 PREPARATION ......................................................................................... 203
5.2.1 5.2.2 Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and Communication ....................................................................................................203 Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories ...........................................209
5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 Available drive required for sharing the i CELL installation directory........... 209 Available drive required for sharing the NC program root directory .............. 210
CIMPLICITY VIEWER ......................................................................... 202

5.1 5.2
5.2.3
Setting for Sharing the Server PC (Required When Windows XP Is Used) ........213 Procedure for Setting the Server PC.....................................................................221 Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC ...................................................................226
5.3
SETTING ................................................................................................... 221

5.3.1 5.3.2
5.4
CHECKS.................................................................................................... 229
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.1 5.4.2
B-75074EN/04
Checking Communication between the Viewer PC and Each NC .......................229 Checking CIMPLICITY Viewer Communication ...............................................231
5.5 5.6
EXECUTION.............................................................................................. 232 CANCELING THE SETTINGS................................................................... 232
IV. OPERATION 1 2 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 235 SCREEN OPERATION........................................................................ 236

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT ....................................................... 237 TERMINATING THE i CELL PROJECT .................................................... 238 SWITCHING AMONG THE SCREENS ..................................................... 239 ITEMS COMMON TO THE SCREENS...................................................... 242
2.4.1 Names of Screen Components..............................................................................242
MAIN MENU ........................................................................................ 244

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 245 ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU................................................................ 245 TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU ............................................................ 246 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 246 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 248 SCREEN OPERATION (1) OVERVIEW SCREEN .................................... 249 SCREEN OPERATION (2) SCREEN LIST FOR EACH OVERVIEW MACHINE .................................................................................................. 251 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED MACHINES ..................... 252
4.4.1 4.4.2 Copying an Overview Prepared Beforehand........................................................252 Editing the Overview Screen................................................................................253
OVERVIEW MENU.............................................................................. 247

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT......................................................... 255

5.1 5.2 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 256 SCREEN OPERATION.............................................................................. 259
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 About The NC Program Management Window ...................................................259 Work with the File List in the PC.........................................................................262 Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files (and Directories) in the PC .....265 Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files in the PC ..........................................269 Creating New Directories in the PC .....................................................................272 Downloading and Uploading NC Programs.........................................................273
5.2.6.1 Communication with the NC memory ............................................................. 273
c-6
B-75074EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.6.2 Communication with a Data Server (FTP server)............................................ 284
5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10
Copying, Moving, Deleting, and Renaming Connection Destination Files (Directories)..........................................................................................................288 Referencing and Editing Connection Destination Files .......................................293 Creating a New Connection Destination Directory..............................................297 Setting Options .....................................................................................................298 Structure of Edit List File Screen .........................................................................301 Editing List Files ..................................................................................................304 Structure of List File Monitor Screen...................................................................309 List File Monitor Operations................................................................................311
5.3
EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS ................................................. 301

5.3.1 5.3.2
5.4
LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS ........................................ 309

5.4.1 5.4.2
MACHINING RESULTS ...................................................................... 314

6.1 6.2 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 315 SCREEN OPERATION.............................................................................. 316 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 321 SCREEN OPERATION.............................................................................. 322 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 333 SCREEN OPERATION.............................................................................. 334 ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY .................................................................. 338 PROGRAM CHECK................................................................................... 340 PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................................ 341 DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 343 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 345 SCREEN OPERATION.............................................................................. 346 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY ..................................................................... 348
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 History Data Display ............................................................................................349 Outputting History Data .......................................................................................349 Clearing History Data...........................................................................................350 Operation History Display....................................................................................352 Outputting History Data .......................................................................................353 Clearing History Data...........................................................................................354
c-7
WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS .................................................. 320

7.1 7.2
NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION ........................................................ 332

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6
NC MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 344

9.1 9.2 9.3
9.4
OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY............................................................. 351

9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.4.4
B-75074EN/04
History Signal Setting ..........................................................................................354 Data Backup .........................................................................................................356 Data Restoration ...................................................................................................357 File List Refreshing ..............................................................................................357 File Deletion .........................................................................................................358 FROM Data Backup .............................................................................................360 FROM Data Restoration.......................................................................................361 SRAM Data Backup .............................................................................................362 File List Refreshing ..............................................................................................362 FROM Data Deletion ...........................................................................................363
9.5
VARIOUS DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION.............................................. 355

9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4
9.6
FROM/SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION........................................ 359

9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3 9.6.4 9.6.5
9.7 10.1 10.2 11.1 11.2 11.3
BACKUP DATA DISPLAY ......................................................................... 364 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 367 SCREEN OPERATION.............................................................................. 368 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 372 SCREEN OPERATION (1) ALARM MESSAGE SCREEN......................... 374 SCREEN OPERATION (2) ALARM LOG DISPLAY SCREEN................... 377
10 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 366
11 ALARM AND WARNING..................................................................... 371
V. USER CUSTOMIZATION 1 2 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 381 ADDING SCREENS ............................................................................ 382

2.1 SCREEN SYSTEM OF THE i CELL .......................................................... 383
2.1.1 2.1.2 Screen Configuration............................................................................................383 Screen Switching..................................................................................................384 Determination of Basic Items ...............................................................................385 Modification to the Function Switch Tab.............................................................387 Creation of a Basic Screen ...................................................................................389 Creation of a Standard Screen and Function Screen ............................................392
2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 File creation ..................................................................................................... 392 Setting the screen variables (screen level variables)........................................ 393 Screen switching.............................................................................................. 395
2.2
SCREEN ADDITION.................................................................................. 385

2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4
2.3
GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL................................. 396

c-8
B-75074EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 General-Purpose Tab (Function Switch Tab) Control..........................................396 Back Button..........................................................................................................397 Title Bar................................................................................................................397 Message Line........................................................................................................398 Warning and Alarm Lamps ..................................................................................399 File Modification..................................................................................................400 ErrorMessage........................................................................................................401
2.5.1.1 2.5.1.2 Method............................................................................................................. 401 Example of usage............................................................................................. 402
2.4 2.5
ScreenID.ini ............................................................................................... 400

2.4.1 2.5.1
iCELL_ErrorMessage ................................................................................ 401
2.6
iCELLDef ................................................................................................... 403

2.6.1 iCELLRW ............................................................................................................403
2.6.1.1 2.6.1.2 2.6.1.3 2.6.1.4 Method............................................................................................................. 403 Public variables................................................................................................ 408 Properties ......................................................................................................... 410 Example of usage............................................................................................. 416
2.7
MACHINE SELECTION CONTROL .......................................................... 418

2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 Overview ..............................................................................................................418 Property ................................................................................................................418 Method .................................................................................................................421 Event ....................................................................................................................423 Example of Usage ................................................................................................423
DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................... 425

3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 425
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 Operating the Database with the i CELL .............................................................425 i CELL Database ..................................................................................................426 i CELL Database Configuration...........................................................................426 RunTimeAConfig - Machine Result Setting Table ..............................................427 RunTimeAData - Machining Result Data Table ..................................................427 WKPCMcnName - Workpieces Process Result Setting Table.............................429 WKPCWorkName - Workpiece ID Setting Table ...............................................430 WKPCLastStateConfig - Machining End ID Setting ...........................................430 WKPCUserConfig - User Area ID Setting Table.................................................430 WKPCPlan - Planned Workpiece Machining Count Setting Table .....................431 WKPCData - Workpieces Process Result Data Table..........................................431
c-9
3.2
MACHINING RESULT ............................................................................... 427

3.2.1 3.2.2
3.3
WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT......................................................... 429

3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.7 3.3.8
B-75074EN/04
WKPCDspMcnCnd - Progress Status Display Table...........................................433 WKPCDspLastState - Machining End State Display Table.................................434
REFERENCING THE DATABASE...................................................... 435

4.1 4.2 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 436 REFERENCING THE ACCESS DATABASE FROM EXCEL..................... 436
4.2.1 4.2.2 Referencing the Database .....................................................................................437 Displaying Acquired Data ....................................................................................442 Method of Operation ............................................................................................445 Description of VBA Scripts .................................................................................448
4.3.2.1 4.3.2.2 4.3.2.3 Database operation procedure.......................................................................... 449 Data display processing procedures................................................................. 449 Timer processing procedures ........................................................................... 450
4.3
SAMPLE MACHINING RESULT SCREEN................................................ 445

4.3.1 4.3.2
4.4
SAMPLE WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SCREEN.......................... 452

4.4.1 4.4.2 Method of Operation ............................................................................................453 Description of VBA Scripts .................................................................................455
4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 Database operation procedures ........................................................................ 455 Data display processing procedures................................................................. 466
APPENDIX A HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY............................. 469

A.1 HOT TO INSTALL CIMPLICITY................................................................. 470
A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 Installing CIMPLICITY .......................................................................................470 How to Start Installation.......................................................................................471 Newly Installing CIMPLICITY HMI...................................................................472 Installing New Options with CIMPLICITY HMI ................................................476 Registering Use of CIMPLICITY HMI Software ................................................477 Newly Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI..........................................................478 Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI Options and Upgrading the Functions ........480 Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License .........................................................481
A.2
REGISTERING USE OF CIMPLICITY....................................................... 477

A.2.1 A.2.2 A.2.3 A.2.4
NC SETTING ....................................................................................... 482

B.1 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, AND Series 0i-B/C......................... 483
B.1.1 B.1.2 Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for the First Time .......................................................................................................483 FOCAS2/Ethernet Parameter Screen....................................................................484
c-10
B-75074EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.1.3 B.1.4 Configuring a Small-scale Network .....................................................................487 Configuring a Large-scale Network .....................................................................487 Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for the First Time .......................................................................................................488 B.2.2 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions..............................................................489
B.2.2.1 B.2.2.2 B.2.2.3 FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen................................................................ 489 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 492 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 492 Setting the FTP file transfer function parameters ............................................ 493 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 496 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 496
B.2
SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-B .............. 488

B.2.1
B.2.3
Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions ..............................................................493

B.2.3.1 B.2.3.2 B.2.3.3
B.3
SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B AND Series 0i-B/C ............................................................................................. 497
B.3.1 B.3.2 Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for the First Time .......................................................................................................497 Setting the FTP Server .........................................................................................498
B.3.2.1 B.3.2.2 B.3.2.3 Ethernet parameter screen................................................................................ 498 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 502 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 502 Ethernet parameter screen................................................................................ 503 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 506 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 506
B.3.3
Setting the Connection Host.................................................................................503

B.3.3.1 B.3.3.2 B.3.3.3
B.4
SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 507
B.4.1 B.4.2 B.4.3 B.4.4 Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for the First Time .......................................................................................................507 FOCAS2/Ethernet Screen.....................................................................................508 Configuring a Small-scale Network .....................................................................511 Configuring a Large-scale Network .....................................................................511 Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for the First Time .......................................................................................................512 B.5.2 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions..............................................................513
B.5.2.1 B.5.2.2 B.5.2.3 FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen................................................................ 513 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 517 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 517
B.5
SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A .............. 512

B.5.1
c-11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.5.3
B-75074EN/04
Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions ..............................................................518

B.5.3.1 B.5.3.2 B.5.3.3 Parameter setting screen for the FTP file transfer function ............................. 518 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 522 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 522
B.6
SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A........................ 523

B.6.1 B.6.2 Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for the First Time .......................................................................................................523 Setting the FTP Server .........................................................................................524
B.6.2.1 B.6.2.2 B.6.2.3 Data Server setting screen ............................................................................... 524 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 527 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 527 Parameter setting screen for Data Server functions......................................... 528 Configuring a small-scale network .................................................................. 532 Configuring a large-scale network................................................................... 532
B.6.3
Setting the Connection Host.................................................................................528

B.6.3.1 B.6.3.2 B.6.3.3
B.7 B.8
SETTING UP DNC2 .................................................................................. 533 SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER........................................................... 534 DNC2......................................................................................................... 536 READER/PUNCHER ................................................................................. 542 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ERROR CODES.................................... 551 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 562
E.1.1 E.1.2 CIMPLICITY Points and i CELL ........................................................................562 Point Naming Rules..............................................................................................563 Machine-Specific Points.......................................................................................564 i CELL -Common Points......................................................................................571
EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS .................................................... 535

C.1 C.2
D E
ERROR CODES .................................................................................. 550

D.1 E.1
DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS.................................................... 561
E.2
LIST OF POINTS....................................................................................... 564

E.2.1 E.2.2
SETTING UP PC ................................................................................. 572

F.1 SETTING UP IIS........................................................................................ 573
F.1.1 F.1.2 F.1.3 F.1.4 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows NT.........................573 Constructing Web Sites for Windows NT............................................................574 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows 2000......................580 Constructing Web Sites for Windows 2000 .........................................................581 Peer Web Services for Windows NT....................................................................586
c-12
F.2
SETTING UP FTP SERVER...................................................................... 586

F.2.1
B-75074EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F.2.2 Internet Information Service for Windows 2000..................................................589
G H
CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET.................................................... 594

G.1 H.1 H.2 EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIALUP CONNECTION ............................. 595 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 597 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 598
CALLING FANUC LADDER-III ........................................................... 597
c-13
I. GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
1.OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
This part (GENERAL) outlines the i CELL.
Organization of this part
-3-
2.ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL

The FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL is a software package for centrally manage multiple CNC machine tools connected to a network. The i CELL supports normal operations such as part machining and machining result collection to improve productivity, and also supports prompt recovery in case of a failure. With the enhanced network function, the system can be remotely monitored from a personal computer or i-mode cellular phone. The i CELL has an operation support function and a remote support and service function for supporting failure recovery. The major operation support capabilities are: NC program management: Input/output of machining programs between the personal computer and each NC CNC display and operation: CNC state display and operation handling from the personal computer Operation monitoring: Monitoring of machine operation and collection of machining results Maintenance: Saving and restoring of a variety of NC data items
FANUC CIMPLICITY
Windows XP/2000 Windows NT 4.0
i CELL
Maintenace function Software Prepared By User Remote Monitoring
Remote Site Monitoring by Web View Monitoring by i mode *
CIMPLICITY HMI
CNC Display Operation Management & Operation Monitoring NC Program
*1 i-mode provides service Reader/Puncher
DNC2
DATA SERVER
FOCAS2 / Ethernet
Ethernet Monitoring by CIMPLICITY Viewer
RS-232-C
RS-232-C
CNC machine tool
The i CELL is developed using CIMPLICITY HMI, which has found applications in SCADA (monitoring control and data collection) software. The user can utilize a wide variety of functions available with this tool. Moreover, the tool can be modified to meet the operation of the user, and user-specific screens and functions can be added. In addition, by using the enhanced network function of CIMPLICITY HMI, a distributed system where multiple personal computers are installed at necessary locations can be built easily. Multiple CIMPLICITY viewer personal computers can reference a personal
-4-
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL 2.ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL
computer (server) that is performing central management with the i CELL. With the Web view function, operating status monitored with the i CELL can be monitored from a remote personal computer via the Internet by using a browser such as Internet Explorer. (The Web view is an option of CIMPLICITY.) An i-mode cellular phone can externally monitor some of operating statuses being monitored with the i CELL. A specified event such as the completion of machining and the occurrence of an error can be posted by mail to another personal computer or cellular phone. For the former monitoring, connection with the Internet must be maintained at all times. The i CELL supports communication using FOCAS2/Ethernet, DNC2, Reader/Puncher, and Data Server, so it is available for all NC models including the newest NC and old models. However, the usable function depends on the communication function. The i CELL connected to an NC using the Reader/Puncher interface can be used as a replacement of a FANUC NC program input/output device. By introducing the i CELL, the utilization of production equipment can be improved, and quick recovery can be performed if a failure occurs. FANUC hopes that the i CELL will be fully utilized as a package for building a system and providing a base for operation.
-5-
3.OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
This chapter describes the operating environment for using the i CELL.
Communication functions, and available CNCs and functions

i CELL supports four communication functions, FOCAS2/Ethernet, DNC2, Reader/Puncher, and Data Server. The following table lists the functions that are available from each communication protocol and NC type.
NOTE To use an NC communication function, the CNC option is required. For details, see Section 3.1, "CNC".
Communication function and NC type Ethernet FOCAS2/Ethernet Series 16i /18i /21i A Series 16i /18i /21i B Series 30i /31i /32i A Power Mate i D/H Series 0i B/0i C Data Server Series 16i /18i /21i Series 30i /31i /32i A Series 0i B/0i C DNC2 Series 0C Series 15A/B Series 16/18 Series 16i /18i /21i Reader/Puncher NC that supports Reader/Puncher communication (*8)
i CELL functions
Overview Machining result Workpiece process result Alarm Tool life NC display, operation and maintenance NC program management Operator message PC operation NC operation
(*4) (*4) (*4)
(*4) (*4) (*4) -
(*4) (*4) (*4) -
(*4) (*4) (*4) -

(*2)
(*4)
(*2)
(*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*4) -

(*2)
(*4)
(*2)
(*5) (*5) (*5) (*7) -
(*1) (*1) (*1) (*6) (*6) (*6) (*7) (*7)
(*4) -
(*4) -
-6-
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
NOTE *1 Set an FTP server on the PC side, and set the setting information (port number, IP address, user name, password, login directory) in the parameters for the FTP file transfer function of the NC. *2 Function under development *3 The following functions for Series 30i /31i /32i-A are under development: Alarm history screen, operator message history screen, operation history screen, alarm/operator message/operation history acquisition based on the automatic history acquisition function, and FROM/SRAM backup and restoration screen. *4 Options related to FOCAS2/Ethernet are required. *5 When an NC program is to be input to and output from the NC memory, an option related to FOCAS2/Ethernet is required. When an NC program is to be input to and output from a Data Server, the Data Server needs to be set as an FTP server. *6 Set an FTP server on the PC side, and set the setting information (port number, IP address, user name, password, login directory) in the parameters of the Data Server. *7 When the eight-digit O number option is used, NC program I/O operation cannot be performed. *8 Connection is impossible if the Series 15i and Series 30i /31i /32i-A are in use.
CNC connection option

Up to five NCs can be connected using FOCAS2/Ethernet (including the FOCAS2/Ethernet function of the Data Server) by setting the password supplied with i CELL to the PC. When you want to connect six or more NCs or connect an NC using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher, purchase a desired CNC connection option listed below and set the password to the PC. You can expand the number of connected NCs up to 20.
Name 5 CNC connection option 10 CNC connection option 15 CNC connection option Specification A08B-9510-J940 A08B-9510-J941 A08B-9510-J942
However, when the FOCAS2/Ethernet function of the Data Server is not used but only the function for input to and output from the hard disk of the Data Server is used from the NC program management screen, the NC with the Data Server is not counted in the number of NCs that require the options above. When a connection is made to a PC that has an FTP server, and files are transferred using the NC program management screen, the PC is not counted in the number of PCs that require the options above.
-7-
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
In other words, when only the FTP client function of the NC program management screen is used, the connection destination, namely, a Data Server or PC, is not counted in the number of units that require the options above. So, when I/O operation to and from the NC memory is to be performed using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function of a Data Server, the NC that has the Data Server is counted in the number of NCs that require the options above.
-8-
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
3.1
CNC
Usable CNCs
- When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used
An Ethernet is required for the following CNCs: Series 30i-MODEL A, Series 300i-MODEL A, Series 300is-MODEL A Series 31i-MODEL A, Series 310i-MODEL A, Series 310is-MODEL A Series 32i-MODEL A, Series 320i-MODEL A, Series 320is-MODEL A Series 16i-MODEL A/B, Series 160i-MODEL A/B, Series 160is-MODEL A/B Series 18i-MODEL A/B, Series 180i-MODEL A/B, Series 180is-MODEL A/B Series 21i-MODEL A/B, Series 210i-MODEL A/B, Series 210is-MODEL A/B Power Mate i-MODEL D/H, Series 0i-MODEL B/C
NOTE 1 When the i CELL is operated, maximum four FOCAS2/Ethernet clients are used. Among these, two clients are used all times. One of the remaining two is used only when the NC operation/display screen, NC maintenance screen, or tool life management screen is displayed. The other is used only when history data is collected using the automatic history backup function. (When the execution of one automatic backup operation per day is specified, the client is used at that time only.) With the embedded Ethernet function, no more than five FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be used. Accordingly, when the embedded Ethernet function is used, one NC can communicate with only one i CELL product. An option board is required for one NC to communicate with multiple i CELL products. The table below indicates the number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients usable with various Ethernet boards, and the number of clients used by the i CELL.
Type of Ethernet board Embedded Ethernet board Data Server board FAST Ethernet board FAST Data Server Number of FOCAS2/ Ethernet clients 5 10 20 Number of clients used by the i CELL
3 To connect six or more NCs, a CNC connection option is required.

-9-
3.OPERATING ENVIRONMENT - When the DNC2 is used
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
An DNC2 is required for the following CNCs: Series 0-MODEL C, Series 15-MODEL A/B Series 16-MODEL A/B/C, Series 18-MODEL A/B/C Series 16i-MODEL A/B, Series 18i-MODEL A/B Series 21i-MODEL A/B
NOTE 1 The i CELL can be used with one-path control CNC. The i CELL cannot be used with two-path or three-path control CNC. 2 DNC2 cannot be used with a CNC that uses the 8-digit O number option. 3 When DNC2 is used, a CNC connection option is required, which can connect as many CNCs as or more than the number of CNCs to be connected using DNC2. - When the Reader/Puncher is used
Reader/Puncher can be used on the CNC supported the Reader/Puncher interface. i CELL can be connected to a CNC using the Reader/Puncher interface to be used as a replacement of a FANUC CNC program input/output device as listed below: FANUC Handy File FANUC PROGRAM File / FANUC PROGRAM File Mate FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER FANUC FA CARD ADAPTER
NOTE 1 The i CELL can be used with one-path or two-path control CNC. The i CELL cannot be used with three-path control CNC. 2 When Reader/Puncher is used, a CNC connection option is required, which can connect as many CNCs as or more than the number of CNCs to be connected using Reader/Puncher. 3 To display the NC program list of the i CELL on the NC screen, the floppy cassette directory display option is required on the NC.
- 10 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
- When the Data Server is used

With the following CNCs, the FAST Data Server or Data Server of 10BASE-T type is used: Series 30i-MODEL A, Series 300i-MODEL A, Series 300is -MODEL A Series 31i-MODEL A, Series 310i-MODEL A, Series 310is -MODEL A Series 32i-MODEL A, Series 320i-MODEL A, Series 320is -MODEL A Series 16i-MODEL A/B, Series 160i-MODEL A/B, Series 160is -MODEL A/B Series 18i-MODEL A/B, Series 180i-MODEL A/B, Series 180is -MODEL A/B Series 21i-MODEL A/B, Series 210i-MODEL A/B, Series 210is -MODEL A/B
NOTE 1 When the FTP server function of the Data Server of 10BASE-T type is used, only one i CELL product (FTP client) can be connected at the same time. If an attempt is made to connect more than one i CELL product at the same time, a second i CELL product and up are placed in the wait state. When multiple i CELL products are to be connected to one NC, the FAST Data Server is required. The table below indicates the number of FTP clients that can be connected to the Data Server board and the number of FTP clients used by the i CELL.
Type of Data Server board Data Server of 10BASE-T type FAST Data Server Number of connectable FTP clients 1 5 Number of FTP clients used by the i CELL
2 The Data Server of 10BASE-5 type does not have the FOCAS2/Ethernet and FTP functions. So, only NC program input/output by operation from the NC side can be performed. When another i CELL function is to be used, the Data Server needs to be replaced with a Data Server of 10BASE-T type or FAST Data Server.
- 11 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options

The table below indicates the Ethernet boards or Data Server boards usable with the i CELL, and required CNC options.
Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and required options Applicable Drawing CNC option Name model number FS16i /18i /21i A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) Ethernet board for A02B-0236-J292 -TA/MA A02B-0207-J800 (*2) LCD-mounted type FS16i /18i /21i CNC A02B-0281-J292 A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) -TB/MB A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) FS16i /18i /21i ATA Data Server A02B-0236-J145 A02B-0207-J800 (*2) -TA/MA board for A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) LCD-mounted type FS16i /18i /21i A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) CNC A02B-0281-J145 -TB/MB A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) FS16i /18i /21i A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0265-J291 -TA/MA A02B-0207-J800 (*2) Ethernet board for stand-alone type CNC FS16i /18i /21i A02B-0281-J298 A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) -TB/MB A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) FS16i /18i /21i A02B-0265-J145 ATA Data Server A02B-0207-J800 (*2) -TA/MA board for stand-alone A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) FS16i /18i /21i type CNC A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0281-J148 -TB/MB A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) FS16i /18i A02B-0265-J154 A02B-0207-J800 (*2) -TA/MA RISC+ATA Data A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) Server board for A02B-0281-J158 FS16i /18i stand-alone type CNC A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0281-J160 -TB/MB A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) (*4) Ethernet board Power Mate i -D/H FS16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS0i-TC/MC FS16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS0i-TB/MB FS16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS0i-TC/MC A02B-0259-J230 A02B-0236-J293 A02B-0281-J293 A02B-0281-J293 A02B-0265-J293 A02B-0281-J299 A02B-0281-J299 A02B-0236-J140 A02B-0281-J146 A02B-0281-J146 A02B-0259-J862 (*5) A02B-0259-J847 (*6) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Control software
A02B-0236-J561 #6561
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
FAST Ethernet board for LCD-mounted type CNC
FAST Ethernet board for stand-alone type CNC
A02B-0259-J561 #6561 A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #656W A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #656W
ATA FAST Data Server for LCD-mounted type CNC
- 12 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
No. 21 22 23
24
25
Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and required options Applicable Drawing CNC option Name model number A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) FS16i /18i /21i ATA FAST Data A02B-0265-J140 A02B-0207-J800 (*2) -TA/MA Server for stand-alone A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) type CNC FS16i /18i /21i A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0281-J149 -TB/MB A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) Built-in I/O board A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) FS0i -TB/MB stand-alone type CNC A02B-0299-H021 A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) (with Data Server) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) FS16i /18i A02B-0265-J157 A02B-0207-J800 (*2) -MA RISC+ATA FAST A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) Data Server for A02B-0281-J161 FS16i /18i stand-alone type CNC A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0281-J162 -MB A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3) (*4) Embedded Ethernet for LCD-mounted type CNC and stand-alone type CNC Embedded Ethernet for LCD-mounted type CNC and stand-alone type CNC(*8) FAST Ethernet board FAST Ethernet board for LCD-mounted type CNC and stand-alone type CNC Embedded Ethernet for LCD-mounted type CNC and stand-alone type CNC Embedded Ethernet for LCD-mounted type CNC and stand-alone type CNC
(*13)
Control software A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #6567 A02B-0281-J561 #6567
A02B-0281-J561 #6567
26
FS16i /18i -TB/MB
Not required (*7) A02B-0281-J571 #656A
27
FS21i -TB/MB Power Mate i -D/H FS30i /31i /32i -A
Not required (*8) A02B-0259-J862 A02B-0259-J847 A02B-XXXX-S707 A02B-XXXX-S737

(*5) (*6)
28
A02B-0259-J293
A02B-0259-J555 #6567 A02B-0303-J561 #6569 A02B-0303-J572 #656F
29
A02B-0303-J146
(*9)
(*10) (*11)
30
FS30i /31i -A
Not required
(*12)
31
FS32i -A
Not required
(*13)
A02B-0303-J571 #656E A02B-0303-J572 #656F
(*1) A02B-XXXX-S707: Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i/0i-B /0i-C This option is required when the overview, machining result, and NC program management functions based on an external board are used. This option is not required when the FTP client function only is used. Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type:
0236 (16i -TA) 0237 (16i -MA) 0281 (16i -TB) 0282 (16i -MB) 0238 (18i -TA) 0239 (18i -MA) 0283 (18i -TB) 0284 (18i -MB) 0247 (21i TA) 0248 (21i MA) 0285 (21i TB) 0286 (21i MB) 0299 (0i TB) 0300 (0i MB) 0309 (0i TC) 0310 (0i MC)
- 13 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
This option is required when the FOCAS2/Ethernet function is used. (*2) A02B-0207-J800: Extended driver library for Series 16i/18i/21i This option is required when Model A is used. This option is not required for Model B, regardless of whether the embedded function or external board is used. (*3) A02B-XXXX-S737: Data Server function This option is required when the Data Server function is used. To use the FTP client function, the Data Server function is required. So, this option is required. Specify a drawing number in XXXX according to the NC type. See (*1). (*4) A02B-0281-J160 is the high-speed version of A02B-0281-J158. A02B-0281-J162 is the high-speed version of A02B-0281-J161. (*5) A02B-0259-J862: Ethernet function for Power Mate i-D/H (*6) A02B-0259-J847: Extended driver library for Power Mate i-D/H (*7) When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series 16i/18i-TB/MB, no option is required on the NC side. (*8) When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series 21i-TB/MB, the main CPU board with the embedded Ethernet function needs to be specified. No option is required on the NC side. (*9) A02B-0303-J146: FAST Ethernet board for LCD-mounted type CNC and stand-alone type CNC With this board, either or both of the Ethernet function and the Data Server function can be used, depending on the CNC option used. (*10)A02B-XXXX-S707: Ethernet functions for Series 30i/31i/32i-A This option is required when the overview, machining result, and NC program management functions are used. This option is not required when the FTP client function only is used. In XXXX, specify one of the drawing numbers indicated below, depending on the NC type.
0303 (30i-A) 0307 (31i -A) 0308 (32iA)
(*11)A02B-XXXX-S737: Data Server functions for Series 30i/31i/32i-A This option is required when the Data Server function is used. To use the FTP client function, the Data Server function is required. So, this option is required. In XXXX, specify a drawing number, depending on the NC type. See (*10). (*12)When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series 30i/31i -A, no option is required on the NC side. (*13)When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series 32i -A, the main CPU board with the embedded Ethernet function needs to be specified. No option is required on the NC side.
- 14 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
DNC2 boards and CNC options

The table below indicates the DNC2 boards usable with the i CELL, and required CNC options.
DNC2 boards and required options Applicable Drawing CNC option model number A16B-2200-0775 FS0 -TC/MC 2 DNC2 card for control unit B Option 1 board Main unit A Option 1 board Main unit E Option 1 board Main unit F (*3) Option 1 board Main unit I Option 1 board Main unit A Serial communication board for LCD-mounted type CNC Serial communication board for stand-alone type CNC FS16 /18 -TC/MC FS16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS16i /18i /21i -TB/MB A02B-0098-J055 A02B-XXXX-J878 (*1) A02B-XXXX-J927 (*1) A02B-XXXX-J828 (*1) A02B-0098-K121 (*2) A02B-XXXX-J878 (*1) A02B-XXXX-J927 (*1) A02B-XXXX-J828 (*1)
No
Name DNC2 card for control unit A
Control software
A02B-0098-J543 #0688
3 4 5 6
A02B-0162-J031 A02B-0162-J035 FS15 -TB/MB A02B-0162-J036 A02B-0162-J192 A02B-XXXX-J908 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J902 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J956 (*5) A02B-0162-J600 (*4)
A02B-0162-J590 #60N0
A02B-0200-J030
A02B-0200-J532 #B426
8 9 10 11
A02B-0236-J030 A02B-0281-J030 A02B-0265-J030 A02B-0281-J032 A02B-XXXX-J908 (*6) A02B-XXXX-J902 (*6) A02B-XXXX-J956 (*6) A02B-0236-J532 #B427
NOTE DNC2 cannot be used with a CNC that uses the 8-digit O number option.
(*1) A02B-XXXX-J878 : DNC2 for Series 0 A02B-XXXX-J927 : External control of I/O devices for Series 0 A02B-XXXX-J828 : Background edit for Series 0 Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type:
0098 (0-TC) 0099 (0-MC)
(*2) A02B-0098-K121: Mounting metal fixture for control unit A This is necessary when the DNC2 card for control unit A is used. (*3) This is usable only with the Series 15-MB. (*4) A02B-0162-J600: DNC2 for Series 15 In addition to this option, a CRT display circuit option that matches the corresponding board is required.
- 15 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
(*5) A02B-XXXX-J908 : DNC2 for Series 16/18 A02B-XXXX-J902 : External control of I/O devices for Series 16/18 A02B-XXXX-J956 : Background edit for Series 16/18 Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type:
0222 (16 -TC) 0223 (16 -MC) 0228 (18 -TC) 0229 (18 -MC)
(*6) A02B-XXXX-J908 : DNC2 for Series 16i/18i/21i A02B-XXXX-J902 : External control of I/O devices for Series 16i/18i/21i A02B-XXXX-J956 : Background edit for Series 16i/18i/21i Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type:
0236 (16i -TA) 0237 (16i -MA) 0281 (16i -TB) 0282 (16i -MB) 0238 (18i -TA) 0239 (18i -MA) 0283 (18i -TB) 0284 (18i -MB) 0247 (21i -TA) 0248 (21i MA) 0285 (21i -TB) 0286 (21i -MB)
- 16 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
CNC options for functions other than the Ethernet, Data Server, and DNC2 functions
The table indicates an option required for each function used. However, the options below are standard with the Series 0i-MODEL B/C. The i CELL function which can be used by the communication function is different.
No. 1 Option name Parts count and operating time display Custom macro B Corresponding function in the part IV Operation 6. Machining results 7. Workpiece process results 2 9.5 Various data backup/restoration 7. Workpiece process results 9.3 Alarm history display 11 Alarm and warning 9.5 Various data backup/restoration 9.5 Various data backup/restoration 10. Tool line management Remarks When the operation result collection function is used When the workpiece machining result collection function is used When custom macro variable data is input/output When the workpiece machining result collection function is used, and the custom macro common area has no free space When the external operator message history data is used When the external operator message display function is used (*1) When the pitch error compensation data is input/output When a workpiece origin offset is input/output When the tool life management function is used If these options are not selected when the actual spindle speed S [min-1] is displayed with the M series, a value calculated from the spindle motor speed instead of a feedback value from the position coder can be displayed by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 3118 to 1.
Custom macro B and custom macro variable addition External message function or external data input function Pitch error compensation function Workpiece coordinate system Tool life management (*2)
5 6 7
Threading/ synchronous feed and position coder
8.3 Actual position display 8.4 Program check
*1
*2
With the Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL A/B and Series 0i-MODEL B/C, four external operator messages can be displayed by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 to 1. With Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL A, however, the NCs with the following versions or later are required: 16i-TA B1F1 version 14 16i-MA B0F1 version 15 18i-TA BEF1 version 14 18i-MA BDF1 version 15 21i-TA DEF1 version 9 21i-MA DDF1 version 9 With the Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life management function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1.
NOTE The following Ethernet-related options are not required: Basic operation package 1 A02B-0207-J810 CNC screen display function A02B-0207-J850
NC program modification
In workpiece machining result collection, a subprogram for writing information such as a workpiece ID and machining state to custom macro variables in the NC program needs to be called. For a sample subprogram, see Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpieces Process Result", in Part III, "SETTING".
- 17 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
3.2
Computer
PERSONAL COMPUTER/HARDWARE
The hardware used to operate the i CELL is described below.
Select <1> or <2> below. Also select the item(s) required for the communication protocol to be used from <3>. <1> Computer compatible with IBM PC/AT CPU: Pentium with 233 MHz or more is recommended. Physical memory: 128MB or more Virtual memory: 200MB or more HDD: 300MB or more A keyboard, mouse, and CD-ROM are required.
NOTE Software required varies according to the function used. Check the computer manufacturer to confirm that the software products listed in Section 3.3, "PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE", can run on the personal computer used. Some computers may not be able to run Windows 2000 Server or NT 4.0 Server. These operating systems are necessary to use the WEB function.
<2> FANUC PANEL i Personal computer suitable for use in the FA floor Physical memory: 128MB or more Virtual memory: 200MB or more Touch panel available (option) Display unit: 12.4-inch, 15-inch A CD-ROM is required.
NOTE When the FANUC PANEL i is used, the Web function cannot be used. To use the Web function, Windows 2000 Server or Windows NT 4.0 Server is required as the OS. However, the FANUC PANEL i does not support this OS.
- 18 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
<3> Communication hardware Ethernet board (if the FOCAS2/Ethernet or Data Server protocol is used) RS-232C port (if the DNC2 protocol is used) RS-232C expansion board (if the DNC2 or Reader/Puncher protocol is used) The RS-232C expansion board to be used should be one of the following Digi International products. AccelePort 4p kit (4 ports, DTE, DB25 male) AccelePort 8p kit (8 ports, DTE, DB25 male)
Display
Resolution: 1024 768 dots or more Color: 16 colors or more
Internet communication unit

When the mail function or Web function is used, the ISDN line and dial-up router for ISDN are required. When the mail function and Web function are not used, the ISDN line and dial-up router for ISDN are not required. Dial-up router for ISDN Example: NTT-ME MN128-SOHO SLOTIN
- 19 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
RS-232C connection cable

The following interface specifications apply between the PC and NC.
If the RS-232C expansion board is AccelePort 4p/8p DTE, DB25 male. PC side DSUB 25pin (Female) Signal Pin SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG GND 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 NC side DSUB 25pin (Male) Signal Pin SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 1 RS-232C main unit port PC side DSUB 9pin (Female) Signal Pin SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG GND 3 2 7 8 4 6 1 5 NC side DSUB 25pin (Mail) Signal Pin SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 1
NOTE 1 The shape of each connector shown in the figure may differ from that of the connectors of the PC or NC you are actually using. Before preparing an RS-232C cable, check the shape of each connector of your PC and NC. 2 No port on the PC can be used with Reader/Puncher. 3 Refer to FANUC's "RS-232C/RS-422 Interface Connection Manual" (B-60043E) for detailed explanations about how to create connection cables. 4 Transmission may stop during DNC operation, depending on the performance of the PC in use or the size of a communication buffer in the NC. Transmission may stop also depending on the way the screen is operated on. If transmission stops, decrease the communication rate or the number of units that are simultaneously subjected to DNC operation.
- 20 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
3.3
PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE
Operating system and related software

Using Windows NT (A) When the Web function is used
All of <1> to <3> below are required. <1> Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 ServicePack 6a and later <2> Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0 (Included in Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack. Obtain this product from Microsoft.) <3> Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and later
(B) Cases other than (A) above

<1> or <2>, and <3> below are required. <1> Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 ServicePack 6a and later (Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0 required for the Web function is not required.) <2> Microsoft Windows NT WorkStation 4.0 ServicePack 6a and later <3> Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and later
NOTE To use the i CELL with Windows NT4.0, the user needs to belong to the Power Users group. To make various settings on the setting screen, the user needs to belong to the Administrators group. Using Windows 2000 (A) When the Web function is used
All of <1> to <3> below are required. <1> Microsoft Windows 2000 Server ServicePack 4 and later <2> Microsoft Internet Information Server 5.0 (A full installation of <1> has <2> installed by default.) <3> Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and later

<1> or <2>, and <3> below are required. <1> Microsoft Windows 2000 Server ServicePack 4 and later (Microsoft Internet Information Server 5.0 required for the Web function is not required.) <2> Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional ServicePack 4 and later <3> Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and later
- 21 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
NOTE To use the i CELL with Windows 2000, the user needs to belong to the Power Users group. To make various settings on the setting screen, the user needs to belong to the Administrators group. Using Windows XP (A) When the Web function is used
All of <1> to <3> below are required. <1> Microsoft Windows 2003 Server <2> Microsoft Internet Information Server 6.0 <3> Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and later

<1> or <2>, and <3> below are required. <1> Microsoft Windows 2003 Server <2> Microsoft Windows XP Professional ServicePack 1, 1a, and later <3> Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and later
(C) When using Windows XP as a WebView client

Windows XP may not include Java VM required for a WebView client. In such a case, install JRE (Java runtime environment), which can be downloaded from the following site free of charge: http://www.java.com/en/index.jsp
NOTE 1 To set or operate i CELL with Windows XP, the user needs to belong to the Administrators group (computer administrators). 2 The user switch function of Windows XP is not supported. NOTE The following Ethernet-related software is not required: FOCAS2 libraryA02B-0207-K737 Basic Operation Package 1A02B-0207-K752 Basic Operation Package 2A02B-0207-K755 Disks for CNC screen display functions A02B-0207-K776
- 22 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
CIMPLICITY system
i CELL can operate on the following CIMPLICITY versions: CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 (English or Japanese version) Running both the Japanese and English versions of CIMPLICITY requires CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 Service Pack 2. Service Pack 2 is included in the installation CD of i CELL. The Japanese version of i CELL comes with the CIMPLICITY system, but the English version of i CELL does not. See the following description, "Installation CD contents."
NOTE Even if CIMPLICITY is already used, a personal computer and CIMPLICITY need to be purchased when the license for "Unlimited I/O" is not granted. To execute multiple projects with CIMPLICITY at the same time, the license for "Unlimited I/O" is required. If this license is not granted, a project of the user and i CELL project cannot be executed at the same time. The user is to prepare a personal computer for the i CELL, and CIMPLICITY additionally. If the user's project and i CELL project are integrated with each other, the projects are no longer multiple projects and can be used simultaneously.
Installation CD contents
The Japanese version of i CELL is delivered on two CDs. The first CD is the installation CD for the Japanese version of i CELL. The second CD contains the Japanese version of CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1. Please purchase the licenses for the CIMPLICITY main package and the option you want to use. The English version of i CELL is delivered on a single CD, that is, the installation CD. Unlike the Japanese version, the English version comes with no CIMPLICITY CD. Please purchase the CD for CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1, and the licenses for CIMPLICITY main package and the option you want to use. For both the Japanese and English versions, the installation CD contains CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 Service Pack 2.
- 23 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
3.4
NETWORK CONFIGURATION
When i CELL is used with the Ethernet, the method of setting on the setting screen varies, depending on the network configuration. Check the network configuration. Specifically, check if the i CELL server PC and NCs belong to the same network as shown in Fig. 3.4(a), or if the i CELL server PC belongs to one network and NCs belong to another network, and the i CELL server PC and NCs are connected with each other via a router as shown in Fig. 3.4(b). (The configuration checked here is used in the setting of "Enable C4 Server" in Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication" in Part III, "SETTING".)
Network A
Basic configuration
Server PC
NC
NC
Server PC Router
The PC belongs to a network separated with a router from the network to which the NCs belong.
The server PC and the NCs must belong to the same network. NC
Network B
NC
Fig.3.4(a) Network configuration (1)
Fig.3.4(b) Network configuration (2)
Network configuration for the CIMPLICITY viewer

i CELL can be used with the CIMPLICITY viewer. In this case, one server PC and one or more viewer PCs are used. If the server PC belongs to the same network as the NC units, the server PC need not belong to the same network as the viewer PC. Therefore, both the configurations shown in Fig.3.4(c) and Fig.3.4(d) are usable.
Network A Server PC NC NC Viewer PC Server PC NC NC IP routing is required. Router Network B The server PC, NCs, and viewer PC belong to the same network. The server PC and NCs belong to the same network, but the viewer PC belongs to a separate network. Viewer PC
Communication by FOCAS2/Ethernet
Fig.3.4(c) Network configuration (3)
Fig.3.4(d) Network configuration (4)
Similarly to the server PC, the viewer PC uses the FOCAS2/Ethernet protocol to communicate with NCs.
- 24 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
It is therefore necessary to set up the IP routing function in the router shown in Fig.3.4(d) in such a way that network A, to which the NCs belong, can communicate with network B, to which the viewer PC belongs, using TCP/IP. Set up the router in such a way that a port number set up for a port for TCP in each NC can be routed.
NOTE The method of setting up IP routing varies depending on what router you use. If you use i CELL and the CIMPLICITY viewer this way, be sure to check the setting method in advance.
The configuration shown in Fig. 3.4 (e) is an example of providing the server PC with router functions and using two networks. Also in this configuration, the viewer PC communicates with NCs, using FOCAS2/Ethernet. It is necessary to set up the IP routing function in the server PC in such a way that networks A and B can communicate with each other, using TCP/IP. Set up the server PC in such a way that a port number set up for a port for TCP in each NC can be routed.
Network A
NIC (A) Two NICs (Network Interface Cards), A and B, are set in the server PC to configure two networks. The server PC is provided with router functions in addition to its Server PC/router NIC (B)
NC IP routing is necessary.
NC
Network B Viewer PC
Fig.3.4(e) Usable network configuration (5)
NOTE The method of setting two NICs in the server PC for having the server PC operate also as a router varies depending on what operating system you use in your server PC. If you use i CELL and the CIMPLICITY viewer this way, be sure to check the setting method in advance.
- 25 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
3.5
CONTRACT WITH INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS

When the user does not use the mail and Web functions, no contract with an Internet service provider is required. For connection with a provider, use the ISDN line.
(A) When the mail function only is used with dial-up connection
ISDN dial-up connection Example: NTT Communications OCN dial access
(B) When the mail function is used with 24-hour connection, and when the Web function is used
ISDN 24-hour connection Example: NTT Communications OCN economy
- 26 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
4.NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 27 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.1
OVERVIEW
NC program management connects a personal computer as a NC program file server to multiple NCs. NC program management also allows connection with a Data Server or PC. For communication with a Data Server or PC, the operating side needs to be an FTP client, and the operated side needs to be an FTP server. When the connection target is a PC, the same operation as for a Data Server can be performed by operating NC program management. The following table lists the functions available for each communication function.
NOTE When the communication function is a Data Server, replace the "NC memory" in the following table with "hard disk drive or ATA flash card built onto (connected to) the Data Server board" or "ATA flash card built onto (connected to) a Fast Data Server" depending on the device to connect.
Function Communication protocol FOCAS2/ Reader/ Data DNC2 Ethernet puncher Server O O (*1) O O -
Sending and receiving of NC programs by operating the personal computer An NC program on the personal computer can be downloaded to the NC memory. The folders and the NC programs contained in the folders on the personal computer can be downloaded in a batch to the NC memory. When a main program is downloaded, the subprograms used by the main program can automatically be retrieved and downloaded. Moreover, multiple main programs can be registered in a list file, and can be downloaded sequentially. NC programs can be uploaded from the NC memory to the personal computer. The folders and the NC programs contained in the folders in the NC memory can be uploaded in a batch to the personal computer. Sending and receiving of NC programs by operating the NC By operating the NC, an NC program on the personal computer can be downloaded to the NC memory. When a main program is downloaded by operating the NC, the subprograms used by the main program can automatically be retrieved and downloaded. Moreover, multiple main programs can be registered in a list file, and can be downloaded sequentially. By operating the NC, NC programs can be uploaded from the NC memory to the personal computer.
O O (*1)
O -
O -
(*2)
(*3)
(*2)
(*3)
(*2)
(*3)
- 28 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL

Communication protocol FOCAS2/ Reader/ Data DNC2 Ethernet puncher Server O O
Function
Management of NC program files in the NC memory by operating the personal computer A list of NC programs held in the NC memory can be displayed on O the NC program management screen on the personal computer. Editing and referencing NC programs held in the NC memory. An NC program held in the NC memory can be edited and referenced. O A specified NC program can be automatically uploaded to the personal computer for editing or referencing on the personal computer. If an NC program on the personal computer has been edited, download the NC program to the NC after confirmation. An NC program or directory held in the NC memory can be deleted O by operating the personal computer. In the NC memory, a directory is created from the personal O (*1) computer. An NC program name or directory name in the NC memory is O (*1) modified from the personal computer. Management of NC programs for multi paths The NC programs of each path are managed under an arbitrary directory. O
O -
O O O
Management of NC program files on the personal computer by operating the NC A list of NC programs on the personal computer can be displayed on (*2) the NC screen. An NC program file on the personal computer can be deleted by (*2) operating the NC.
O O
(*3)
(*3)
*1 *2
*3
This function can be used only with Series 30i/31i/32i. A function that can be executed by using the FTP file transfer function of embedded Ethernet is available. However, NC program management cannot be used. For details, refer to the operator's manual of each NC. A function that can be executed by setting a Data Server as an FTP client and setting a personal computer as an FTP server is available. However, NC program management cannot be used. For details, refer to the operator's manual of each Data Server.
NOTE When the Reader/Puncher communication protocol is used, some functions listed above may be unavailable or an additional NC option may be required, depending on the NC model.
- 29 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.2
4.2.1
NC PROGRAM TRANSFER
This section describes NC program transfer by operating the NC program management screen and NC.
NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC Program Management Screen

NC programs can be transferred by operating the NC program management screen on the personal computer. NC programs downloaded to the NC are placed under a directory specified for each machine. Such a directory is referred to as a default directory. NC programs uploaded from the NC are stored in a default directory. If a communication function other than the Reader/Puncher function is used and the personal computer used is a server, files can be transferred to and from an arbitrary directory. If the personal computer is a viewer personal computer, files can be transferred to and from only the default directory.
File system of the personal computer Drive A Set as the default directory of machine 1 Directory C Arbitrary directory
Directory B
Set as the default directory of machine 2 Directory D
File transfer between directory C and machine 1 Machine 1
Directory E File transfer between directory E and machine 1 File transfer between directory E and machine 2
Directory F
Machine 2
File transfer between directory F and machine 2
= File (NC program) = Directory, drive
- 30 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
The NC program management screen displays this default directory or an arbitrary directory, and a list of NC programs in the NC memory or Data Server (FTP server). The operator transfers NC programs by operating this screen.
List of files in the default directory or an arbitrary directory of a machine
List of NC programs in the NC memory or Data Server (FTP server) of a machine
List of connection target devices (machine list, FTP server list), and directory list tree of connected machines
NC programs can be downloaded and uploaded by drag and drop operation.
NC programs can also be transferred using the screen menu.
For the method of default directory setting, see Subsection 2.7.1, "General Setting", in Part III, "SETTING". For the method of NC program management screen operation, see Chapter 5, "NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", in Part IV, "OPERATION".
- 31 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.2.2
NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC

To transfer an NC program by operating the NC, you cannot specify the directory path to a file on the personal computer on the NC. On the NC, specify an NC program with the file name, file number, or NC program number of the NC program. NC program management associates the file name, file number, or NC program number directed by the NC with a file stored on the personal computer. At this time, the file name, file number, or NC program number is used as a key. NC program management searches the files in the default directory for the NC program to be transferred using the key. With FOCAS2/Ethernet and the Data Server, however, the concepts of key and relating files are not applicable. There are restrictions on the method for specifying the file name, file number, or NC program number and on available keys, depending on the NC type and communication protocol. See Appendix C, "EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS" or CNC Operators Manual for main methods for selecting an NC program by operating the NC. The following table lists restrictions on operations depending on the communication function.
Restrictions depending on the communication function Used key NC program transfer type NC program File name number
Communication function
File number
DNC2 Reader/puncher FOCAS2/Ethernet Data Server
Downloading by operating the NC Uploading by operating the NC Downloading by operating the NC Uploading by operating the NC Downloading by operating the NC Uploading by operating the NC Downloading by operating the NC Uploading by operating the NC
B A B B A B C B C C C B The FTP file transfer function of embedded Ethernet is used. The Data Server function (FTP client) is used for transfer.
A : Available as a key B : Unavailable as a key C : Whether the key is available depends on the operated NC type.
- 32 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
The following table lists the methods for determining an NC program to be downloaded by operating.
Methods for determining an NC program to be downloaded by operating the NC Used key Method for determining an NC program to be transferred
File name NC program number File number Default directory for machine 1 on the personal computer
Searches the default directory for a file with the specified name. Searches the default directory for file Oxxxx.DAT (xxxx: NC program number, DAT: Default extension). The default extension can be changed. Sorts the files in the default directory in ASCII order and finds a file whose ordinal position number is the same as the file number.
When file name "FILE_B.TXT" is used as the key, this file is downloaded. 1 2 3 4 5 6 FILE_A.TXT FILE_B.TXT O0001.DAT O0003.DAT WORK1.DOC WORK2.DOC When NC program number "6" is used as the key, this file is downloaded. When NC program number "3" is used as the key, this file is downloaded.
Machine 1
The following table lists the methods for storing a file uploaded by operating the NC.
Methods for storing an NC program uploaded by operating the NC Used key Method for storing an NC program
File name NC program number
Uses the key as the file name without modification and stores the file in the default directory. Stores the file in the default directory with file name Oxxxx.DAT (xxxx: NC program number as the key, DAT: Default extension).
When "O0001" in the NC is uploaded and stored on the personal computer with file name "O0001" used as the key
Default directory for machine 1 on the personal computer

O0001 O0001.DAT
Machine 1
When "O0001" in the NC is uploaded and stored on the personal computer with NC program number "1" used as the key
See Appendix C, "NC OPERATION EXAMPLES" for how an NC operation is associated with a key used on the personal computer FA.
- 33 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.3
NC PROGRAM FORMAT
NC programs used with the system are managed under the formats indicated below. The program field must contain a main program including an NC program number, or must contain a subprogram.
% % ; ;
Example 1: Main program ending with M30 OXXXX; . . . Part program . . . ;M30;
% %
<file name>; . . . Part program . . . ;M30;

Example 2: Main program ending with M02 OXXXX; . . . Part program . . . ;M02;
% %
; ;
% %

Example 3: Subprogram ending with M99 OXXXX; . . . Part program . . . ;M99;
% %
; ;
% %
";" is used to mark an "end of block". Actually, ";" is the EOB code determined for the NC as with an LF code. "XXXX" represents an NC program number. A 4-digit number or 8-digit number can be used. With a CNC supporting file name management like Series 30i/31i/32i, a file name in the format <file-name> can be used in addition to an NC program number. The usable number of characters and the usable characters are as follows: Number of characters 32 characters or less Characters Alphabetic characters (uppercase/lowercase), numbers, four symbols , +, _, and . (all in half size). However, the file names "." and ".." cannot be used.
NOTE A CNC that supports file name management like Series 30i/31i/32i can distinguish uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters from each other. However, Windows OS does not have this capability. So, a file named AAA and a file named aaa can be created with a CNC. However, if files AAA and aaa are uploaded to the personal computer in this order, file AAA is replaced with file aaa updated later.
- 34 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
Use ASCII as the character code for NC programs. Some editors may be set to create a file using Unicode. An error occurs if an attempt is made to transfer an NC program created using Unicode. Whether an NC program is created using Unicode can be checked according to the procedure below. 1. Open the NC program in Notepad, then select [File][Save As]. 2. If the check box for "Save in Unicode" in the Save As dialog box is checked, the NC program is saved using Unicode. If the NC program is saved using Unicode, uncheck the check box for "Save in Unicode", then save the NC program again.
- 35 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.4
SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION

When an NC program is downloaded, and a subprogram call is included in the NC program, the subprogram transfer function downloads the subprogram as well. With a CNC supporting file name management, a subprogram can be specified by file name.
Subprogram transfer function
NOTE This function can be used on a machine that uses the FOCAS2/Ethernet function or the Reader/Puncher function. This function can be used for communication with the default directory when the Reader/Puncher function is used.
Subprogram transfer is divided into two types: batch transfer and expanded transfer. (1) Batch transfer A main program is analyzed. If a subprogram call is specified, the subprogram is transferred after the main program. (2) Expanded transfer A main program is analyzed. If a subprogram call is specified, the main program is transferred with the subprogram expanded in the main program. On the NC program management setting screen, the user can choose from three subprogram transfer options for each machine: "no transfer, batch transfer, and expanded transfer".
% O0001 (MAIN START) M98P5001 (MAIN END) M30 O5001 (SUB START) (SUB END) M99 % % O0001 (MAIN START) (SUB START) (SUB END) (MAIN END) M30 %
Main program % O0001 (MAIN START) M98P5001 (MAIN END) M30 %
Subprogram % O5001 (SUB START) (SUB END) M99 %
Subprogram batch transfer
Subprogram expanded transfer
- 36 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
Subprogram file name

A subprogram file name must be described in the format "O" + 4- or 8-digit-number + "." + 3-character-extension. For example, a subprogram file name may be O0001.DAT. A 3-character extension must be registered in [Subprogram extension] of the [General] panel on the NC program management setting screen. (To use an NC program with an 8-digit O number, the 8-digit O number option is required on the CNC.) With a CNC supporting file name management, the format "<"+file-name+">" can be used. When a file name is used, the three-character extension cannot be used.
Subprogram file format

In a subprogram file, one O number or file name and one M99 code must be described. See Example 3 in Section 4.2, "NC PROGRAM FORMAT". A subprogram containing multiple O numbers, file names and/or multiple M99 codes cannot be transferred. An error occurs if an attempt is made to call a subprogram that contains M02 or M30 instead of M99.
Subprogram file storage directory

Up to three subprogram file storage directories can be specified in [Subprogram search directory 1-3] of the [Download] panel on the NC program management setting screen. A setting can also be made so that a search operation starts with the same directory as for the main program without setting Subprogram search directory 1 beforehand. Each of three directories has a subprogram search priority set. When each of the first directory and the second directory holds a subprogram of the same name, for example, the subprogram of the first directory is transferred.
NOTE Only the directories set in [Subprogram search directory 1-3] are searched for a subprogram. When storing a subprogram in the default directory, specify the same directory as the default direction in any of [Subprogram search directory 1-3].
Disabling subprogram call

Even when the main program calls a subprogram, the transfer of the subprogram can be disabled. For example, a setting can be made so that the transfer of subprograms in the eight thousands and nine thousands is disabled because those subprograms are held in the NC memory. The transfer of subprograms can be disabled by specifying subprogram numbers in steps of one thousand in [Subprograms not transferred] of the [Download] panel on the NC program management setting screen.
Subprogram call code setting

A call code for transferring a subprogram can be set. This capability supports three types of calls: M98, G65, and G66. In accordance with a set call type only, subprograms are called. A subprogram call code can be set in [Call type] of the [Download] panel on the NC program management setting screen.
- 37 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.4.1
Details of the Subprogram Batch Transfer Function

A main program can use four subprogram call formats: (1) M98PxxxxLyy (2) M98Pyyxxxx (3) G65PxxxxLyy (4) G66PxxxxLyy (5) M98P<file name>Lyy (6) G65P<file name>Lyy (7) G66P<file name>Lyy In these formats, xxxx represents a program number, and yy represents the number of call repeats. The number of repeats can be omitted. When format (2) is used, a 4- or 8-digit program number must be specified. With a CNC supporting file name management, a subprogram can be called by file name as in (5) through (7). In a batch transfer, however, the number of repeats is ignored because a subprogram called several times by the main program is transferred only once. Subprogram calling can be nested to a depth of 15 levels with Series 30i /31i /32i, or to a depth of 8 levels with the other NC series. If a subprogram called by the main program is found to be nonexistent, an error occurs when an attempt is made to transfer the nonexistent subprogram after the transfer of the main program.
Subprogram call format
NOTE 1 The program number xxxx or file name must be directly specifiable. A program number specified with a macro variable cannot be transferred. 2 M99Pnnnn (function for returning to a sequence number) cannot be used. When a subprogram is read up to M99, the end of the subprogram is assumed. Control returns to the main program, and Pnnnn is ignored. 3 Instructions such as branch instructions (GOTO, IF, WHILE) are not processed, but are transferred to the NC without modification.
- 38 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
4.4.2
Details of the Subprogram Expanded Transfer Function

A main program can use four subprogram call formats: (1) M98PxxxxLyy (2) M98Pyyxxxx (3) G65PxxxxLyy (4) G66PxxxxLyy (5) M98P<file name>Lyy (6) G65P<file name>Lyy (7) G66P<file name>Lyy In these formats, xxxx represents a program number, and yy represents the number of call repeats. The number of repeats can be omitted. When format (2) is used, a 4- or 8-digit program number must be specified. With a CNC supporting file name management, a subprogram can be called by file name as in (5) through (7). In an expanded transfer, a subprogram called several times by the main program is transferred the specified number of times, with the subprogram expanded each time in the main program. Subprogram calling can be nested to a depth of 15 levels with Series 30i /31i /32i, or to a depth of 8 levels with the other NC series. When a subprogram called by the main program is found to be nonexistent in the set directory, an error occurs. This means that the transfer of the main program stops halfway, and the subprogram is not transferred.
Subprogram call format
NOTE 1 The program number xxxx or file name must be directly specifiable. A program number specified with a macro variable cannot be transferred. 2 M99Pnnnn (function for returning to a sequence number) cannot be used. When a subprogram is read up to M99, the end of the subprogram is assumed. Control returns to the main program, and Pnnnn is ignored. 3 Instructions such as branch instructions (GOTO, IF, WHILE) are not processed, but are transferred to the CNC without modification. 4 In an expanded transfer, the transfer of a subprogram alone is impossible. If a subprogram alone is transferred, an error indicating that the main program contains M99 occurs. 5 In a block that calls a subprogram, no other address can be specified. Example:When the block M98P9000G00X00Y00 is sent in an expanded transfer, the subprogram O9000.DAT can be transferred, but the portion of G00X00Y00 cannot be transferred.
- 39 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.5
LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

The list file transfer function transfers multiple NC programs described in "List file" to the NC. With a CNC supporting file name management, file names can be written in a list file. A list file is created on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen. In a list file, up to 9999 NC programs can be registered.
List file transfer function
NOTE On a machine that uses FOCAS2/Ethernet and the Reader/Puncher function, this function can be used to perform communication with the default directory.
The list file transfer function is divided into two types: batch transfer and expanded transfer. List batch transfer This function sequentially transfers the NC programs registered in a list file. This function assumes that multiple main programs are registered in the NC memory. List expanded transfer This function deletes O numbers, file names, and M30 from the NC programs registered in a list file, and transfers the NC programs as a single NC program. This function assumes that multiple main programs are linked into a single program for DNC operation. On the NC Program Management screen, the user can choose between two list file transfer options for each machine: "batch transfer and expanded transfer".
O0001.DAT % O0001 (O0001 DATA) M30 % O0002.DAT % O0002 (O0002 DATA) M30 % O0003.DAT % O0003 (O0003 DATA) M30 % List file creation screen List batch transfer List file O0001.LST + O0001.DAT O0002.DAT O0003.DAT
% O0001 (O0001 DATA) M30 O0002 (O0002 DATA) M30 O0003 (O0003 DATA) M30 % List expanded transfer % O0001 (O0001 DATA) (O0002 DATA) (O0003 DATA) M30 %
- 40 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
List file name

A 3-character extension for a list file must be registered in [List file extension] of the [General] panel on the NC Program Management screen. A list file can be created and edited only on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen. When a list file is saved, the list file extension is automatically set. So, the user need not consider a file name when creating a list file. When [List file extension] is registered on the NC program management setting screen, a different extension only can be set in each of [Default extension] and [Subprogram extension]. So, for example, the main program O0001.DAT and the list file O0001.LST can be created. The list file transfer function is enabled when the NC makes a request for transfer of a file with a list file extension.
List file format

A list file can be created and edited only on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen, so that the user need not consider the list file format when creating a list file with an editor.
List file storage directory

Store a list file in the directory specified in [Default directory] on the NC program management setting screen. Before a list file can be specified by file number or file name from the NC after a list of files on the personal computer is displayed, the list file must be stored in [Default directory].
Combinations of the list file transfer and subprogram transfer functions

The following combinations are possible:
List file transfer type Batch Expanded Subprogram transfer type Batch Expanded O O X O
4.5.1
Details of List File Batch Transfer Function

The NC programs registered in a list file are transferred in the order of registration. The contents of registered NC program files are transferred without deleting O numbers, file names, and M02, M30, and M99 codes. When a request is made for batch transfer of a list file specifying both a main program and subprogram, both of the main program and subprogram are transferred.
NOTE 1 Batch transfer of NC programs that have no O number or file name is disabled. If such an attempt is made, an error occurs. 2 Batch transfer of NC programs that have the same O number or file name is disabled. If such an attempt is made, an error occurs.
- 41 -
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
4.5.2
Details of List File Expended Transfer Function

The multiple main NC programs registered in a list file are transferred after being linked into a single NC program. The O numbers, file names, and M30 and M02 codes in the registered NC programs are not transferred. As the O number or file name transferred at the start of an expanded transfer, the user can specify one of the following on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen: (1) O number or file name of the first NC program registered in the list file (2) O number specified in [Set ONo. in Developing] on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen. (3) O number specified in [Set FileName in Developing] on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen. Expanded transfer allows the user to transfer an NC program that has no O number or file name. In this case, an O number or file name must be specified according to (2) and (3) above. At the end of an expanded transfer, an M30 code is transferred.
NOTE 1 Expanded transfer of a list file specifying a main program and subprogram is disabled. If such an attempt is made, the M02/M03 code in the main program is deleted, but the M99 code in the subprogram is transferred without being deleted. 2 Expanded transfer of NC programs that have the same O number or file name is disabled. If such an attempt is made, an error occurs.
4.5.3
List File Transfer Monitor and Control Function

The list file monitor screen enables transfer monitor display and exercises control functions such as temporary stop, transfer skip, transfer sequence alteration, and so forth for those NC programs not transferred yet in a list file.
Monitor display of list file transfer

During list file transfer, up to which NC program have been transferred can be displayed. When DNC operation is performed based on the expanded transfer of multiple main programs, this function allows the user to check the extent of transfer.
- 42 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
NOTE 1 When using this function, check [Wait for send buffer to become 0 before proceeding to next record in expanded transfer] of the [Download] panel on the machine setting screen. 2 Actual data transfer is affected by the send buffer on the personal computer and the NC receive buffer, so the data displayed on the monitor screen may differ from the data displayed on the NC screen. For example, an NC program displayed as being transferred on the monitor screen may not be received yet by the NC. Among the NC programs registered in a list file, the NC programs whose transfer is not started yet can be displayed correctly.
List file transfer control functions

During list file transfer, those NC programs that are not transferred yet can be controlled as described below. (1) Temporary stop Immediately before transfer of a specified NC program, transfer stops temporarily. NC programs registered after the NC program specified for temporary stop can be deleted or rearranged for transfer sequence alteration, or new NC programs can be added to those NC programs. (2) Skip A specified NC program is not transferred. Instead, the NC program registered after the specified NC program is transferred. (3) Sequence alteration NC programs registered after an NC program specified for temporary stop can be rearranged for transfer sequence alteration. (4) NC program deletion and addition NC programs registered after an NC program specified for temporary stop can be deleted, or new NC programs can be added to those NC programs.
NOTE A list file referenced for list file transfer to an NC is a copy of a list file created for each NC on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen. A list file is copied for each NC immediately before start of transfer. A list file copied for each NC is displayed and edited on the list file monitor screen. So, the temporary stop, sequence alteration, deletion, and addition of NC programs on the list file monitor screen are temporary modifications valid during list file transfer only. A modification that needs to be reflected in each transfer must be made on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen before list file transfer.
- 43 -
5.OPERATION MONITOR
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION MONITOR
The operation monitor function monitors the operating status of the machine and collects machining results. The operation monitor function has the screens described below.
Operation result screen

A power-on time, operating time, cutting time, and machined parts count are read periodically from the NC, and are summarized monthly for display.
NOTE 1 The NC must have the operating time and parts count display option selected. 2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required. The DNC2 function, however, cannot be used with Series 0.
Workpiece machining result screen

Data such as the machined parts count and machining end state of each workpiece is summarized and displayed. A macro program for writing machining information for each workpiece into the custom macro area needs to be inserted into the NC program.
NOTE 1 The NC must have the custom macro B option selected. 2 If the custom macro common area does not have a free space, the custom macro variable addition option is required. 3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.
Tool life management screen

This screen is the same as the tool life screen of the NC.
NOTE 1 The NC must have the tool life management option selected. With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life management function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1. 2 There are not the tool life management function and option for that in Power Mate i. 3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required. 4 This function for Series 30i /31i /32i is under development.
- 44 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
5.OPERATION MONITOR
5.1
5.1.1
OPERATION RESULT SCREEN

Data created by the operating time and parts count display option of the NC is read periodically and is summarized monthly for display.
Creating Operation Results

The following data created by the operating time and parts count display option of the NC is used: Power-on time [minutes] Cumulative power-on time of the NC. With Series 30i /31i /32i, Series 16/18/21i, PowerMate i, and Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6750 is used. Operating time [seconds] Cumulative automatic operating time of the NC. With Series 30i /31i /32i, Series 16/18/21i, PowerMate i, and Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6751 added to the value of parameter No. 6752 is used. Cutting time [seconds] Cumulative time for cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03). With Series 30i /31i /32i, Series 16/18/21i, PowerMate i, and Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6753 added to the value of parameter No. 6754 is used. Machined parts count [quantity] Cumulative number of machined parts counted by M02 and M30. With Series 30i /31i /32i, Series 16/18/21i, PowerMate i, and Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6712 is used.
These data items are read every 30 seconds. Read data is registered in the database every day. When the operation result screen is activated, and a month for display is specified, the collected data of the specified month is read from the database for display.
NOTE 1 The NC must have the operating time and parts count display option selected. 2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required. The DNC2 function, however, cannot be used with Series 0.
- 45 -
5.OPERATION MONITOR
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
5.1.2
Display Information
For a specified NC, power-on time, operating time, and cutting time data is displayed as bar charts.
Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, and cutting time (bar charts)
Monthly report on machined parts count (bar chart)

For a specified NC, machined parts count data is displayed as a bar chart.
- 46 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
5.OPERATION MONITOR
Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, operating time, cutting time, and parts count (table)
For a specified NC, power-on time, operating time, operating time, cutting time, and parts count data is displayed as a table.
- 47 -
5.OPERATION MONITOR
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
5.2
WORKPIECE MACHINING RESULTS

Based on data (machine ID, workpiece ID, O number, start time, end time, machining end ID, user area ID, and sequence number) collected at the start and end of machining, workpiece machining results are displayed. Information displayed includes "Current progress status display" for indicating the progress status of the workpiece currently being machined, "Log display" for indicating the machining time and end state of each machined workpiece, and "Machining end state display" for indicating summarized end state.
5.2.1
Workpiece Machining Result Data

To create workpiece machining result data, data transferred between the NC and i CELL needs to be assigned to custom macro variables. Then, by using an NC program, values are to be entered into the assigned custom macro variables. (For a part of data, values are directly entered.) For the assignment of data items to custom macro variables and the input of values to custom macro variables, see Subsection 2.9.1, "Workpiece Process Result", in Part III, "SETTING", and see also Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpieces Process Result", in Part III, "SETTING". When workpiece machining results are displayed, a character string can be displayed instead of an ID. For correspondence between IDs and character strings, see Section 2.10, "WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION", in Part III, "SETTING".
NOTE 1 The NC must have the custom macro B option selected. 2 If the custom macro common area does not have a free space, the custom macro variable addition option is required. 3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.
- 48 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
5.OPERATION MONITOR
5.2.2
Display Information
When each machine has a workpiece currently being machined (when the start time is latest, and end time, machining end ID, and user area ID data to be obtained at machining end time is not obtained yet), workpiece progress status is display for each machine. If a workpiece machining time and the planned parts count of the current date are set, the end time of the machining of the planned parts count of the date (scheduled completion time) is displayed. For the setting of a machining time, see Section 2.10, "WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION", in Part III, "SETTING". For the setting of a planned parts count, see Section 7.2, "SCREEN OPERATION", in Part IV, "OPERATION". The display items are: Machine Workpiece O number Start time Scheduled end time Normally machined parts count Planned parts count Scheduled completion time The user can choose whether to display an O number. For display alteration, see Section 7.2, "SCREEN OPERATION", in Part IV, "OPERATION". Example of display
Current progress status display
- 49 -
5.OPERATION MONITOR
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
Log display
Log information such as the machining times and end states of machined workpieces is displayed sequentially in the order from the latest to oldest log start time. The user can choose from four types of display: no specification, machine specification, workpiece specification, and machine/workpiece specification. For each of these options, the user can choose from three report options: daily report, monthly report, and period specification. Display with no specification Regardless of machines and workpieces, all log information is displayed. Display with machine specification Regardless of workpieces, the log information of a specified machine only is displayed. Sequence numbers are displayed. If sequence numbers are not successive (if data collection fails), a comment is displayed. If the displayed sequence numbers are 1, 2, 5, ..., for example, "No log: 2" is displayed between the sequence numbers 2 and 5. This means that the data of sequence numbers 3 and 4 could not be collected. A data collection failure can occur because the i CELL fails to read a transition of the machining start signal from OFF (0) to ON (1) (when the ON time is too short) or data is collected during data deletion. Check the time interval for making a machining start signal transition from ON to OFF (Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpieces Process Result", in Part III, "SETTING") and check the data deletion execution time (Section 2.11, "DATABASE MAINTENANCE", in Part III, "SETTING"). Display with workpiece specification Regardless of machines, the log information of a specified workpiece only is displayed. Display with machine/workpiece specification The log information of only a specified combination of a machine and workpiece is displayed. The display items are listed below. However, the actually displayed items depend on whether a specification is provided. Machine (when no machine is specified) Workpiece (when no workpieces is specified) O number (displayed only when workpiece display is provided) Machining start time Machining end time Machining time Machining end state User area Sequence number (machine specification only) The user can choose whether to display an O number and user area. For display alteration, see Section 7.2, "SCREEN OPERATION", in Part IV, "OPERATION".
- 50 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
5.OPERATION MONITOR
Example of display (no specification)
Machining end state display

The summarized results based on the display number of a machining end ID set on the setting screen are displayed. Two formats of display are available: table format and pie chart format.
Table format
As with log display, the user can choose from four types of display: no specification, machine specification, workpiece specification, and machine/workpiece specification. For each of these options, the user can choose from three report options: daily report, monthly report, and period specification. The display items are listed below. However, the actually displayed items depend on whether a specification is provided. Machine (when no machine is specified) Workpiece (when no workpieces is specified) Total machined parts count Planned machined parts count End state summaries (up to 5 in display number order) Others When the user selects a number in the No. column and clicks the pie chart button in the case of display with no specification, display with machine specification, or display with workpiece specification, the data of the selected row can be represented in pie chart format.
- 51 -
5.OPERATION MONITOR
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
Example of display (with workpiece specification)
Pie chart format

In pie chart format, data is displayed for a workpiece. So, the user can choose from two types of display: workpiece specification and machine/workpiece specification. For each of these options, the user can choose from three report options: daily report, monthly report, and period specification. A remaining parts count (planned parts count -normally machined parts counted) and progress (normally machined parts count/planned parts count) are also displayed. Example of display (with workpiece specification)
- 52 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
5.OPERATION MONITOR
5.2.3
Display Format Alteration

For the particular items (machine, workpiece, O number, user area, and date and time) of the machine specification list box, workpiece specification list box, progress status display, log display, and machining end state display, the display format can be altered from the screen. Example of display format alteration screen
- 53 -
5.OPERATION MONITOR
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
5.2.4
Planned Parts Count Input

A planned parts count used for current progress status display and machining end state display (table or pie chart) can be altered from the screen. Example of machine/workpiece extraction screen Select machines, workpieces, and dates for planned parts count input.
Example of planned parts count input screen For extracted machines/workpieces, input planned parts counts.
- 54 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
5.OPERATION MONITOR
5.3
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

This screen has the same effect as the tool life screen of the NC. Two types of display are available: tool group list display and tool group detail display.
NOTE 1 The NC must have the tool life management option selected. With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life management function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1. 2 There are not the tool life management function and option for that in Power Mate i. 3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required. 4 This function for Series 30i /31i /32i is under development.
5.3.1
Display Information
A list of tool groups registered with a specified machine and path is displayed.
Tool group list display
The details of a tool group number selected on this display screen can be viewed on the tool group detail display screen.
- 55 -
5.OPERATION MONITOR
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
Tool group detail display

The details of a tool group number selected on the tool group list display screen are displayed. Example of display
- 56 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
6.NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION
NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION

With the NC display and operation function, NC state can be displayed and parameters can be set for each NC. This function can display the following NC states: 1. CNC status 2. O number and program number 3. Current position 4. Actual speed 5. Modal information 6. Program check screen 7. Diagnosis screen The NC operation function enables the following operation: 1. NC parameter setting
NOTE 1 For actual speed display with the M series, the threading/synchronous feed option and a position coder are required. If this option is not specified, a value calculated from the spindle motor speed instead of a feedback value from the position coder can be displayed by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 3118 to 1. 2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.
NC display and operation screen

Examples of NC display and operation screens are given below. By selecting an NC machine and path number, the state display screen or operation screen for each NC can be displayed. Current position display screen Program check screen
- 57 -

Parameter setting screen
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
Diagnosis data screen
- 58 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
7.NC MAINTENANCE
NC MAINTENANCE
In NC maintenance, operations such as input/output of NC maintenance information and various types of data can be performed for each NC. For NC maintenance, the following functions are available: 1. Alarm history display and external operator message history display 2. Operation history display and history signal setting 3. Various data backup/restoration 4. FROM backup/restoration and SRAM backup 5. Automatic backup of various data items and display of history data
NOTE 1 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required. 2 When the i CELL is used on the CIMPLICITY viewer, history data automatically backed up cannot be displayed. 3 With Series 30i /31i /32i, only the function for backing up and restoring various types of data can be used. Other functions are under development.
NC maintenance screen
Examples of NC maintenance screens are given below. By selecting an NC machine and path number, the maintenance screen for each NC can be displayed. Alarm history screen Operation history screen
Alarm history data and operation history data displayed can be output to a file.
- 59 -
7.NC MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
Various data backup/restoration screen
The various data backup/restoration screen enables the following data to be backed up and restored: (1) NC parameters (2) Tool offset data (3) Pitch error compensation data (4) Custom macro variables (numbers in the five hundreds) (5) Workpiece origin offset data
NOTE For pitch error compensation data, the pitch error compensation function (option) is required. For custom macro variables, custom macro B (option) is required. For workpiece origin offset data, the workpiece coordinate system (option) is required.
FROM backup/restoration and SRAM backup screen
This screen enables FROM data to be backed up, restored, and deleted, and enables SRAM data to be backed up.
NOTE As FROM data, only user files created by the machine tool builder or user in the FROM can be backed up, restored, and deleted. The system files provided by FANUC cannot be backed up, restored, and deleted. In order to restore SRAM data, the NC boot function needs to be used.
- 60 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
7.NC MAINTENANCE
In automatic backup, the following NC data can be automatically backed up to the personal computer: Alarm history data Operation history data Message history data NC parameters Tool offset data Pitch error compensation data Custom macro variables (numbers in the five hundreds) Workpiece origin offset data Alarm history data and message history data are saved to a file in the order of occurrence time after duplicate data is automatically deleted.
NOTE The function for backing up an alarm history, operation history, and message history of Series 30i /31i /32i is under development. Only NC parameters, tool offset data, pitch error compensation data, custom macro variables, and workpiece origin offset data can be backed up.
The flow of automatic backup is shown below.
i CELL setting screen (1) (2)
i CELL auto-backup resident
(3)
NC
process (4) (3)
i CELL maintenance screen
Auto-backup setting file
Auto-backup data file
(1) The operator is to set the following on the i CELL setting screen: Target machine Backup timing Type of data to be backed up The specification data is saved to the setting file. (2) The i CELL automatic backup resident process periodically checks the contents of the setting file. (3) The i CELL automatic backup resident process backs up data from the NC to the data file each time automatic backup operation is to be performed. (4) The operator can check history data on the i CELL main screen.
- 61 -
7.NC MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
Screen for displaying various backup data items
On the backup data display screen, automatically backed up alarm history data, message history data, and operation history data can be displayed. A display period can be specified.
NOTE To use message history data, the option for external message or external data input is required on the NC. Messages displayed on the NC vary from one machine to another. For details, refer to the operator's manual of each machine.
- 62 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
8.MAIL FUNCTION
MAIL FUNCTION
The i CELL runs on CIMPLICITY, and CIMPLICITY manages the data of the connected CNC as a point. When a point satisfies a condition, the mail function sends a message to an i-mode cellular phone or remote personal computer. A point that determines mail transmission timing is referred to as a trigger timing, and a condition that determines the value of a trigger point for sending mail is referred to as a trigger condition. The value of a point can be embedded in a mail message. A point whose value is embedded in a mail message is referred to as a message point. The following items can be set on the setting screen: Trigger point and trigger condition Mail destination Mail message and message point With the mail function, an event that occurred on a machine managed with the i CELL can be posted.
NOTE The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required.
- 63 -
8.MAIL FUNCTION
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
8.1
IMPLEMENTATION OF THE MAIL FUNCTION BY DIAL-UP CONNECTION

The i CELL mail function uses a dial-up connection for Internet connection. The jobs described below are required to make a dial-up connection. The i CELL function can be used with 24-hour connection. For the method of 24-hour connection, see Section 9.1, "IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND WEB FUNCTION WITH 24-HOUR CONNECTION" in this Part. The user needs enter into a contract with a provider for dial-up connection. Based on information given by the provider after the conclusion of the contract, perform settings such as DNS on the personal computer. For a sample notification from a provider and an example of setting on the personal computer, see Appendix G.1, "EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIAL-UP CONNECTION". The personal computer needs to be connected with a dial-up router. For the method of connection, refer to the relevant manual of the dial-up router.
i-mode cellular phone or remote personal computer 100.100.100.100
Internet service provider Mail server 172.16.0.10
Internet
172.16.0.1 Router
ISDN line Mail function Factory

Note) 192.168.0.x represents a private IP address. 100.100.100.100 and 172.16.x.x represent global IP addresses.
i CELL
172.16.15.2 192.168.0.100
172.16.15.1 Dial-up router 192.168.0.1
Hub
192.168.0.101
192.168.0.102
192.168.0.103
- 64 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
8.MAIL FUNCTION
For connection with a provider, use the ISDN line. Some related terms are described below briefly.
Dial-up connection
Dialing as required to make a line connection to the access point of an Internet service provider. This mode of connection is the most popular mode for one personal computer to use the Internet. In dial-up connection, each time a connection is made, the provider assigns a global IP address temporarily.
Mail server
Server for sending and receiving e-mail. In general, providers may have a server for mail transmission (SMTP server) (corresponding to a mail post) and a server for reception (POP server) (corresponding to a mail box) separately or may have a server used for both purposes.
DNS (Domain Name System) server

Server that converts an IP address to a character string that can be easily remembered by humans. For example, a DNS server relates the IP address, 123.123.123.123, of a personal computer to the name, taro, of the personal computer for management. Other personal computers can query the DNS server to find that the IP address of the personal computer named taro is 123.123.123.123. In general, providers have two DNS servers. The first server is referred to as the primary DNS server, and the second server is referred to as the secondary DNS server.
- 65 -
9.WEB FUNCTION
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
WEB FUNCTION
With the Web function, CNC data collected by the i CELL can be checked from an i-mode cellular phone or remote personal computer. A point to be displayed can be specified for each machine. The value of a point can be converted to a character string for display. The following items can be set on the setting screen: Web initialization Point for Web Item name Display table With the Web function, brief machine operation status managed by the i CELL can be checked.
NOTE The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required.
- 66 -
B-75074EN/04
GENERAL
9.WEB FUNCTION
9.1
IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND WEB FUNCTION WITH 24-HOUR CONNECTION
In order to use the i CELL Web function, a 24-hour connection is needed. For a 24-hour connection, the jobs described below are required. A contract with a provider for a 24-hour connection is needed. Settings such as for DNS are made on the personal computer. On the personal computer, IIS needs to be set. See Appendix F.1, "SETTING UP IIS". The personal computer needs to be connected with a dial-up router. For the method of connection, refer to the relevant manual of the dial-up router.
i-mode cellular phone or remote personal computer 100.100.100.100 Internet service provider Mail server 172.16.0.10
Internet
172.16.0.1 Router
ISDN line Mail function Web function 172.16.15.2 192.168.0.100 Factory 172.16.15.1 192.168.0.1 Dial-up router Hub Note) To provide security, operate the dial-up router as a firewall.
i CELL
192.168.0.101
192.168.0.102
192.168.0.103
- 67 -
9.WEB FUNCTION
GENERAL
B-75074EN/04
A related term is described below briefly.
24-hour connection (leased line connection)

Line that is connected at all times to the destination, unlike a general switched line. No dialing is required for connection. For 24-hour connection, multiple fixed global IP addresses are assigned by the provider.
- 68 -
II. INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
1.OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Part II, "Installation" consists of the following chapters: 1. 2. OVERVIEW This is the chapter you are reading now. PREPARATION This chapter describes what you should do before installing i CELL and a remote system. INSTALLATION This chapter explains how to install i CELL. UNINSTALLATION This chapter explains how to uninstall i CELL. BACKUP AND RESTORATION This chapter explains how to back up and restore i CELL.
Configuration of Part II
3. 4. 5.
- 71 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
PREPARATION
This chapter describes the items you need to set up before installing i CELL in a PC. The items you need to prepare differ depending on the functions to be used with i CELL and the used OS. Look at the following table. For each function, make the settings as described in sections indicated with sequentially.
NOTE When the OS is Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server, see Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.8, which describe preparations to be made for Windows XP. When the OS is Windows 2000, see Subsections 2.2.1 to 2.2.8, which describe preparations to be made for Windows 2000. When the OS is Windows NT, see Subsections 2.3.1 to 2.3.9, which describe preparations to be made for Windows NT.
Used OS Function to be used Basic Mail Web function function function Section that describes each item to be set up 2.1.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP 2.1.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP 2.1.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP 2.1.4 Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server 2.1.5 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server 2.1.6 Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP 2.1.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows XP 2.1.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows XP 2.2.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 2.2.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 2.2.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000 2.2.4 Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000 2.2.5 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000 2.2.6 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 2.2.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 2.2.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows 2000
Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server
Windows 2000
- 72 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
Function to be used Basic Mail Web function function function
2.PREPARATION
Used OS
Section that describes each item to be set up 2.3.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT 2.3.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT 2.3.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT 2.3.4 Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT 2.3.5 Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT 2.3.6 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT 2.3.7 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT 2.3.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows NT 2.3.9 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows NT
Windows NT
- 73 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.1
PREPARATION (FOR Windows XP)

This section describes the items you need to prepare when using Windows XP as the OS. When the Web function is used, the Windows 2003 Server, which is the server OS of Windows XP, is needed.
2.1.1
Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP

NOTE The user who makes the setting described in this section must have the "administrator privilege".
Installing the TCP/IP protocol service

i CELL uses the network protocol called transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) that enables communication over the network. Before installing i CELL, therefore, you must install the TCP/IP protocol service on Windows XP. You can check the TCP/IP is installed on Windows XP using the following procedure. Select [Control Panel] [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection]. Check whether the [Local Area Connection Properties] list box contains "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)." If the TCP/IP is not installed, install it using [Local Area Connection Properties]. Refer to "Windows XP Setup Guide" for explanations about how to install the TCP/IP.
Checking on localhost
The term localhost is a special host name used by the TCP/IP protocol to indicate the host of interest. It is registered automatically when Windows XP is installed. Deleting this setting hampers the normal operation of i CELL. Before installing the system described in this manual, check whether localhost has been registered in the hosts file. Supposing that Windows XP is installed in the "c:\windows" directory, the hosts file is in the location stated below. (The directory where Windows XP is installed is registered in the system environment variable "windir". It can be checked by activating [System] on [Control Panel].) "c:\windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts Open this file with a test editor such as Notepad, and look for the following line (usually it is at or near the beginning of the file).
127.0.01 localhost
If this line is not in the hosts file, add it.
- 74 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.1.2
Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP

To communicate with NCs using Ethernet, set the TCP/IP. 1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel], and activate [Network]. 2. Select [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection].
The IP address and subnet mask must always be set. The default gateway setting may be required depending on the network configuration in use. Contact the network administrator in your company. Also see Section 3.4, "NETWORK CONFIGURATION," in Part I, "GENERAL." To use a dial-up router with the i CELL mail or Web function, set the IP address of the dial-up router for the default gateway.
- 75 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.1.3
Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP

To use a dialup router with the i CELL mail function, you need to set up the domain name system (DNS) of the dialup router. If you do not use the mail function, you do not need to make this setting. 1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel], and activate [Network]. 2. Select [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection] and [Properties]. 3. [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] [General] and enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers in [Use the following DNS server addresses] and click [OK].
2.1.4
Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server

When Windows 2003 Server is installed in a standard configuration, IIS 6.0 is automatically installed. You do not need to install IIS 6.0 separately.
- 76 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.1.5
Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server
To use the Web function, you need to register the new user "IUSR_ICELL". If you do not use the Web function, you do not need to make this setting.
1. 2. 3. Select [Start] [Programs] [Administrative Tools] and activate [Computer Management]. On [Computer Management], select [System Tools] [Local Users and Groups] [Users] and activate [New User] in [Action]. Create a new user with specifying IUSR_ICELL for [User name] and none for [Password] and turning the [Password never expires] check box on.
2.1.6
Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP

NOTE The user who installs IE must have the "administrator privilege".
IE 6.0 (Internet Explorer Version 6.0) is installed together with Windows XP, so that IE 6.0 need not be installed additionally.
- 77 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.1.7
Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows XP

Before installing i CELL, install CIMPLICITY. See Appendix A, "HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY," for how to install CIMPLICITY.
NOTE 1 The user who installs CIMPLICITY must have the "administrator privilege". 2 If you changes the computer name after installing CIMPLICITY, you need to reinstall CIMPLICITY. Determine the computer name before installation.
i CELL can operate on the following CIMPLICITY versions: CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 (English or Japanese version) The Japanese version of i CELL comes with the CIMPLICITY system, but the English version of i CELL does not.
2.1.8
Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows XP

After installing CIMPLICITY, install CIMPLICITY Service Pack 2. Execute the following file on the installation CD: \HMI6.1SP2 \setup.bat
- 78 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.2
PREPARATION (FOR Windows 2000)

This section describes the items you need to prepare when using Windows 2000 as the OS. When the Web function is used, the Windows 2003 Server, which is the server OS of Windows XP, is needed.
2.2.1
Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000


i CELL uses the network protocol called transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) that enables communication over the network. Before installing i CELL, therefore, you must install the TCP/IP protocol service on Windows 2000. You can check the TCP/IP is installed on Windows 2000 using the following procedure. Select [Control Panel] [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection]. Check whether the [Local Area Connection Properties] list box contains "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)." If the TCP/IP is not installed, install it using [Local Area Connection Properties]. Refer to "Windows 2000 Setup Guide" for explanations about how to install the TCP/IP.
The term localhost is a special host name used by the TCP/IP protocol to indicate the host of interest. It is registered automatically when Windows 2000 is installed. Deleting this setting hampers the normal operation of i CELL. Before installing the system described in this manual, check whether localhost has been registered in the hosts file. Supposing that Windows 2000 is installed in the "c:\winnt" directory, the hosts file is in the location stated below. (The directory where Windows 2000 is installed is registered in the system environment variable "windir". It can be checked by activating [System] on [Control Panel].) "c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts" Open this file with a test editor such as Notepad, and look for the following line (usually it is at or near the beginning of the file).
127.0.01 localhost
- 79 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.2.2
Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

To communicate with NCs using Ethernet, set the TCP/IP. 1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel], and activate [Network]. 2. Select [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection].
- 80 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.2.3
Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000

To use a dialup router with the i CELL mail function, you need to set up the domain name system (DNS) of the dialup router. If you do not use the mail function, you do not need to make this setting. 1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel], and activate [Network]. 2. Select [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection] and [Properties]. 3. [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] [General] and enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers in [Use the following DNS server addresses] and click [OK].
2.2.4
Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000

When Windows 2000 Server is installed in a standard configuration, IIS 5.0 is automatically installed. You do not need to install IIS 5.0 separately.
- 81 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.2.5
Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000
1. 2. 3. Select [Start] [Programs] [Administrative Tools] and activate [Computer Management]. On [Computer Management], select [System Tools] [Local Users and Groups] [Users] and activate [New User] in [Action]. Create a new user with specifying IUSR_ICELL for [User name] and none for [Password] and turning the [Password never expires] check box on.
2.2.6
Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

Before installing CIMPLICITY, install IE5.5 (Internet Explorer Version 5.5). When installing IE5.5, you can select either of "Minimum" and "Standard". IE5.5 saved to CD-ROM can be purchased for 1,000 yen or so by ordering it at the Microsoft Web site.
- 82 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.2.7
Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

Before installing i CELL, install CIMPLICITY. See Appendix A, "HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY," for how to install CIMPLICITY.
NOTE 1 The user who installs CIMPLICITY must have the "administrator privilege". 2 If you changes the computer name after installing CIMPLICITY, you need to reinstall CIMPLICITY. Determine the computer name before installation.
2.2.8
Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows 2000
After installing CIMPLICITY, install CIMPLICITY Service Pack 2. Execute the following file on the installation CD: \HMI6.1SP2\setup.bat
- 83 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.3
2.3.1
PREPARATION (FOR Windows NT)

This section describes the items you need to prepare when using Windows NT as the OS.
Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT


i CELL uses the network protocol called transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) that enables communication over the network. Before installing i CELL, therefore, you must install the TCP/IP protocol service on Windows NT. You can check whether the TCP/IP protocol is installed on Windows NT by activating [Network] on [Control Panel] and searching the [Network Protocols] list box for [TCP/IP Protocol]. If the TCP/IP has not been installed, install it using [Network] on [Control Panel]. Refer to "Windows NT Setup Guide" for explanations about how to install the TCP/IP.
The term localhost is a special host name used by the TCP/IP protocol to indicate the host of interest. It is registered automatically when Windows NT is installed. Deleting this setting hampers the normal operation of i CELL. Before installing the system described in this manual, check whether localhost has been registered in the hosts file. Supposing that Windows NT is installed in the "c:\winnt" directory, the hosts file is in the location stated below. (The directory where Windows NT is installed is registered in the system environment variable "windir". It can be checked by activating [System] on [Control Panel].) "c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts" Open this file with a test editor such as Notepad, and look for the following line (usually it is at or near the beginning of the file).
127.0.01 localhost
- 84 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.3.2
Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT

To communicate with NCs using Ethernet, set the TCP/IP. 1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel], and activate [Network].
- 85 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.3.3
Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT

To use a dialup router with the i CELL mail function, you need to set up the domain name system (DNS) of the dialup router. If you do not use the mail function, you do not need to make this setting. 1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel], and activate [Network]. 2. Select [Protocol] [TCP/IP Protocol] [Properties] [DNS], click [Add] in [DNS Service Search Order], and enter the IP address of your DNS server, and then click [Add].
- 86 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.3.4
Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT

To install a CIMPLICITY viewer run-time environment, set up ODBC. You do not need to set up ODBC when installing a server run-time or development environment, or viewer development environment. (When ODBC setup is not required, setting up ODBC causes no problem.) Set up ODBC using the following procedure.
1. 2. 3. Start the PC, and insert the i CELL installation CD-ROM into the drive. The i CELL installer starts. Click the [Cancel] button. Execute the following file from the installation CD. \ODBC\Mdac_Typ.exe
- 87 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.3.5
Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT

Installing Internet Information Server 4.0 (IIS4.0) requires the following software A to D. Software A can be purchased from a software vender. B to E saved to CD-ROM can be each purchased for 1,000 yen or so by ordering them at the Microsoft Web site (http://www.microsoft.com/japan/support/). A. Windows NT Server 4.0 operating system (always required) B. Windows NT Service Pack 3 (whether this is required is determined at steps <1> and <2>) C. Windows NT Service Pack 6a (always required) D. Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack (always required; includes IIS4.0) E. Internet Explorer 5.5 (always required) It is difficult to additionally install IIS4.0 in a Windows NT Server PC where IE5.x is already installed. If it is impossible to install IIS4.0 with the following procedure, you should start by getting a new PC and installing Windows NT Server in it. To install Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack, follow this procedure. <1> Check the version of Service Pack (hereafter abbreviated as SP) applied to Windows NT Server. When you execute the version information command from the help menu of File Explorer, the message "Service Pack?" appears. <2> If the current version is earlier than SP3, apply SP3. <3> Check the version of Internet Explorer (hereafter abbreviated as IE). The version is displayed by executing the version information command from the help menu. <4> If IE5 or later is already installed, uninstall it. <5> Install Option Pack. A message prompting you to install IE4.01 appears. Install IE4.01 from Option Pack. Option Pack can run even if "minimum" is selected for the options when Option Pack is installed. IIS4.0 shall be set up after i CELL is installed. See Appendix F.1, "SETTING UP IIS", for detailed explanations about how to set up IIS4.0. <6> Install SP6a. When you are trying to install SP6a, the following message may appear to indicate that it is impossible to install SP6a.
Start <1> Check the version of Service Pack

Earlier than 3?
No
Yes <2> Install Service Pack 3
<3> Check the version of Internet Explorer. 5 or later? Yes <4> Uninstall IE5.x. No
<5> Install Option Pack.
<6> Install Service Pack 6a.
End
In this case, install SP6a by following the solution procedure presented in the Microsoft-issued support information (document code Q250867) "It is impossible to install Service Pack 6a if there is a highly encrypted IE" (which can be downloaded from the Microsoft Web site).
- 88 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
2.PREPARATION
2.3.6
Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT

1. 2. Select [Start] [Program] [Administrative Tool (Common)], and activate [Domain User Manager]. In [Domain User Manager,] add a new user by specifying [Username] IUSR_ICELL , [Password] (none), and [Password Never Expires].
2.3.7
Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT

Before installing CIMPLICITY, install IE5.5 (Internet Explorer Version 5.5). When installing IE5.5, you can select either of "Minimum" and "Standard". IE5.5 saved to CD-ROM can be purchased for 1,000 yen or so by ordering it at the Microsoft Web site.
- 89 -
2.PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
2.3.8
Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows NT

Before installing i CELL, install CIMPLICITY. See Appendix A, "HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY," for explanations about how to install CIMPLICITY.
NOTE 1 The user who makes the setting described in this section must have the "administrator privilege". 2 If you changes the computer name after installing CIMPLICITY, you need to reinstall CIMPLICITY. Determine the computer name before installation.
2.3.9
Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows NT

After installing CIMPLICITY, install CIMPLICITY Service Pack 2. Execute the following file on the installation CD: \Hmi6.1Sp2\setup.bat
- 90 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
3.INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
The following sections explain how to install i CELL.
- 91 -
3.INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
3.1
INSTALLATION
i CELL is installed by executing a setup program from CD-ROM.
NOTE 1 The user who install i CELL must have the "administrator privilege". 2 Before starting the installation procedure, stop all application programs. 3 The message "UDP Number for C4 Service" appears during installation. The displayed information must match the setting in the NC. Take note of this information. When you forgot to take note of this information, see "UDP number for C4 service" described in Section 3.2, "INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE TCP/IP SERVICE FILE".
The setup procedure follows: 1. Start the computer, and insert the installation CD-ROM into the drive. The installer's start window appears automatically. Click the [Next] button.
- 92 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
3.INSTALLATION
2.
The software license agreement terms appear. Read them carefully, and if you agree, click the [Yes] button.
3.
On the installation component select screen, the buttons indicating the server and viewer components of the CIMPLICITY viewer are displayed. When you want to install i CELL on the server PC of the CIMPLICITY viewer or does not want to use the CIMPLICITY viewer, select the "server" component. When you want to install i CELL on the viewer PC of the CIMPLICITY viewer, select the "viewer" component.
- 93 -
3.INSTALLATION
4.
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
Select a folder for installation. Check [Destination Folder], and if it is ok, click the [Next] button. To install i CELL in a different folder, click [Browse] and select the desined folder, then click the [Next] button.
Configuration of the directories where i CELL and the related information are installed
When determining the directories where i CELL and the related information are to be installed, you should use the following configuration.
<1> ...\iCELL (You select this directory when you install i CELL.) <2> <3> CimProject (This is created automatically during installation.) NcData (You create directories for NcData.) (Directory for NC001) (Directory for NC002)
i CELL has a dialog box for backup and restoration. Backup and restoration can be performed for individual directories separately. (See Chapter 5, "Backup and Restoration", for explanations about how to use the backup dialog box.) If all files under <1> are selected for backup, all of the programs necessary to run i CELL, setting data, result data, CIMPLICITY dialog boxes are backed up. If all files under <2> are selected for backup, setting data, result data, and CIMPLICITY dialog boxes are backed up. However, the programs necessary to run i CELL are not backed up because they are not altered by changing settings. The directories for saving NC data can be set up freely on the NC Program Transfer setting screen. However, you should save NC data to locations described at <3>. Above the directory for each machine, create an NC data root directory. To use the CIMPLICITY viewer, this directory configuration must be used.
- 94 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
3.INSTALLATION
Using the directory configuration shown above enables you to use three backup levels, each of which is selected according to what was done. <1> Backup is performed after i CELL is installed and confirmed for normal operation. <2> Backup is performed after a new machine is connected to i CELL, or any CIMPLICITY dialog box is changed. <3> Back up NC data each time it is changed, regardless of <1> or <2>.
Note on installation on Windows 2000 or Windows XP

If the NC program root directory is not in the i CELL installation directory or in a drive other than that contains the i CELL installation directory, you need to add the right to access the entities in the NC program root directory. Add the access right using the following procedure: <1> Select [Start] [Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt] to display the command prompt. <2> Move to the NC program root directory. Example) When the NC program root directory is "D:\NcData", enter "cd /d D:\NcData". <3> Execute the following command: cacls nc-program-root-directory /t /e /g everyone:f Example) "cacls D:\NcData /t /e /g everyone:f" when the NC program root directory is "D:\NcData" 5. Select a program folder where icons are to be saved. Usually select the default value displayed on the screen, and click the [Next] button.
- 95 -
3.INSTALLATION
6.
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
Before file copy is started, a dialog box appears which prompts you to check what you specified so far. If it is ok, click the [Next] button. Installation begins.
7.
The message "UDP Number for C4 Service" shown below appears during installation. You need to enter the value indicated in this message as "Port number for UDP" for all NCs. (A value other than "8192" may be indicated depending on the environment of the PC.) Take note of this value. See "UDP number for C4 service" described in Section 3.2, "INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE TCP/IP SERVICE FILE" for details.
8.
The ReadMe file and the user register card are displayed. The ReadMe file contains the cautions and other information that have not been included in the ReadMe file manual. Be sure to read the ReadMe file.
NOTE Please fill in the user registration card and send it to us. When the user registration card is displayed, print it on your printer, and fill in the printed form. If you want to print it later, for example, because your PC has no printer, use the following file: RegistJ.txt in the root directory on the installation CD The fax address and post address are presented on the user registration card. To read the ReadMe file later, open ReadMeJ.txt in the root directory on the installation CD.
- 96 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
3.INSTALLATION
9.
Once the setup is completed, the following message appears. Turn the PC power off and on again.
- 97 -
3.INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
3.2
INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE TCP/IP SERVICE FILE

When i CELL is installed, i CELL entries are automatically registered with the TCP/IP service file so that Windows TCP/IP protocol can be used. The following table lists the services that are automatically registered.
Table 3.2 Automatically registered services Service name Port number Protocol
FANUC_PCFA_APP FANUC_PCFA_CDA FANUC_PCFA_COMM FANUC_C4_SERVER FANUC_C4_API
4096 4097 4098 8192 (*1) 8193
tcp tcp tcp udp tcp
NOTE *1 This value is a "port number for UDP" to be entered in the "ETHPRM" dialog box of the NC.
If a port number listed in the Table 3.2 "Automatically registered services" is turned out to be already in use when an attempt is made to register a service with the port number, the service is assigned with a number larger than the maximum existing number in the services file. Therefore, no existing service will be nullified. Before automatic registration with the services file is started, a backup copy of it is created and saved to the same directory as for it. Supposing that the directory where Windows is set up is "c:\winnt", the services file and its automatically created backup file are in the following directories: c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\ The directory where Windows system is installed is registered in the system environment variable "windir". It can be checked by activating [System] on [Control Panel]. The automatically created backup file is named "services.YYYYMMDDhhmm" (where YYYY is the year, MM is the month, DD is the day, hh is the hour, and mm is the minute) from the time of automatic registration.
- 98 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
3.INSTALLATION
UDP number for C4 service

As described in *1 under the table above, the same value as the FANUC_C4_SERVER service UDP port number automatically registered in the services file must be set in the corresponding parameter for all NCs. The automatically set port number is displayed in the "UDP Number for C4 Service" dialog box during installation. Set this value as a "Port number for UDP" in the "ETHPRM" dialog box of the NC. If you forgot to take note of the value in the "UDP Number for C4 Service" dialog box displayed during installation, you can use the following procedure to display the value automatically set up in the PC. (1) Open the i CELL Configuration dialog box. See Subsection 2.2.1, "Opening the Configuration Dialog Box", in Part III, "Setting", for the operating procedure. (2) Select "Communication" under Machine Information from the tree to display the Communication dialog box, and click the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button. The Communication Configuration Confirmation dialog box appears. See Section 2.5, "MACHINE INFORMATION", in Part III, "Setting", for the operating procedure. (3) In the Communication Configuration Confirmation dialog box, selecting the [C4Service] tab causes the "UDP number for C4 service" currently set up in the PC to be displayed as follows:
Value set in the PC
(4) Close the Communication Configuration Confirmation dialog box and the i CELL Configuration dialog box.
Editing the TCP/IP services file

To set up a value other than the one displayed as the "UDP number for C4 service" during installation, you need to edit the services file, using a text editor such as NotePad. Be careful not to enter any value already in use.
WARNING Do not edit the services file unless you have working knowledge about the Ethernet and TCP/IP. If you edit it incorrectly, it is likely that not only i CELL but also all Ethernet communication processes on Windows may become inoperable. NOTE Once the services file is edited, you need to turn the power off and on again to put the editing in effect.
- 99 -
4.UNINSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
UNINSTALLATION
- 100 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
4.UNINSTALLATION
4.1
UNINSTALLATION
i CELL can be uninstalled using [Add/Remove Programs] on [Control Panel].
NOTE 1 The user who uninstalls i CELL must have the administrator privilege. 2 Before starting the uninstallation procedure, stop all application programs. 3 When i CELL is uninstalled, all of the contents of the CimProject directory under the directory where i CELL is installed are deleted. Backup necessary files such as modified screens and NC programs beforehand.
Uninstall "CIMPLICITY i CELL". Any files that were set up after installation are left installed. Use Explorer to delete them. Windows 2000 or Windows XP
Windows NT
- 101 -
5.BACKUP AND RESTORATION
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
BACKUP AND RESTORATION
- 102 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
5.1
BACKUP
If you changed the settings of i CELL or customized any i CELL dialog box, be sure to back up i CELL, using the following procedure. When i CELL is backed up, its multiple files and directories are assembled and compacted into a single backup archive file. i CELL can be restored from this file according to the procedure described in Section 5.2, "RESTORATION".
NOTE Before starting backing up i CELL, be sure to terminate the i CELL project.
5.1.1
Opening the IcellBkupRstr Dialog Box

Click the [Start] button, select [Programs] - [CIMPLICITY i CELL], and activate the [Backup & Restore] icon.
- 103 -
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
5.1.2
Selecting Information to be Backed Up

This subsection assumes that the NC data is stored using the directory configuration explained in step 5 (determining folders for installation) in Section 3.1, "INSTALLATION".
<1> ...\iCELL (You select this directory when you install i CELL.) <2> <3> CimProject (This is created automatically during installation.) NcData (You create directories for NcData.) (Directory for NC001) (Directory for NC002)
In the "Select Backup/Restore Directory" frame, select what to back up, using an option button. All of i CELL: All entities in the %iCELL% directory (where i CELL is installed) at <1> in the above chart are backup targets. All i CELL files are backed up. CimProject Only: The data under the %iCELL%\CimProject directory shown by <2> in the figure above and various types of log data of i CELL are backed up. (Various types of log data of i CELL are not restored.) The CIMPLICITY settings, its dialog boxes, NC program communication settings, and collected result data are backed up. The DLL or EXE files that are necessary for i CELL to run but not affected by changes to the settings are not backed up. If you changed the settings or dialog boxes of i CELL, select this option. Any Directory: All entities in the directory specified in the text box are backup targets. If the directory configuration shown above is used, simply entering the directory name shown at <3> causes the NC programs to be backed up. Using the directory configuration shown above enables you to use three backup levels, each of which is selected according to what was done. <1> Backup is performed after i CELL is installed and confirmed for normal operation. <2> Backup is performed after a new machine is connected to i CELL, or any CIMPLICITY dialog box is changed. <3> Back up NC data each time it is changed, regardless of <1> or <2>.
- 104 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
5.1.3
Confirming Backup Archive File Paths

A default backup archive file path is set up according to an option selected in the "Select Backup/Restore Directory" frame. The default path names used are as follows: All of i CELL : %iCELL%\..\iCellAll. ibk CimProject Only : %iCELL%\..\iCellCimPro. ibk Any Directory : None; the user should specify a file name. If "All of i CELL" or "CimProject Only" is selected, a backup archive file is created by default in a directory one above the directory %iCELL% where i CELL is installed. To use a backup file name not specified by default, enter a desired path name in the [File Path] text box. A backup file can be selected using a selection dialog box displayed by clicking the small button at the right of the text box.
NOTE Before starting backup, make sure that there is an enough free area on the hard disk. A rough estimate of a backup archive file created at installation is as follows: All of i CELL : About 5 MB CimProject Only: About 1 MB Backup is performed during operation, a larger free area is necessary, because result data is collected during operation.
- 105 -
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
5.1.4
Starting Backup
Clicking the <Backup> button starts backup. If a backup file having the same name as specified now already exists, a prompt message appears to ask whether you want to delete the existing backup file and create a new one under the specified name. During backup, the following window for indicating the backup file name appears.
When backup is completed, the following window appears to display a list of files backed up. Click the <Close> button.
5.1.5
Confirming the Contents of the Backup Archive File

After entering a backup archive file name in the [File Path] text box, clicking the <Backup File List> button lists the information backed up.
- 106 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
5.1.6
Saving the Backup Archive File

Save the backup archive file to an MO, CD-R, or floppy disk. One floppy disk cannot hold the backup archive file unless it is divided, because it is too large to fit on one floppy disk. The iCellBkupRstr dialog box allows the backup archive file to be divided so that it can be saved to more than one floppy file. Use the following procedure.
Dividing and saving the backup archive file to floppy disks

(1) Specify a backup archive file to be divided. In the [Backup/Restore File] frame, specify a backup archive file in the [File Path] text box. A file can be selected by clicking the small button at the right of the text box. At the end of backup, the file name is automatically entered in the text box. (2) Click the <Save with split> button to save the file to floppy disks. When the button is clicked, the number of floppy disks required to hold the divided file is displayed. Get ready as many formatted floppy disks as the quantity displayed.
(3) When you are prompted to insert a floppy disk, set a floppy disk not write-protected into the drive, and click the <OK> button. Label the floppy disk, for example, "Backup: All of i CELL (1/4)".
(4) If a floppy disk has no enough free area, the following dialog box appears. Select a desired process and continue backup.
- 107 -
INSTALLATION
B-75074EN/04
5.2
5.2.1
RESTORATION
To restore data from the backup file, follow the procedure described below.
Installing i CELL
If the PC is repaired, and Windows is re-installed in it, i CELL must also be re-installed. If you have not re-installed i CELL, start with the following subsection.
5.2.2
Copying the Backup Archive File

Copy the backup archive file created as described in Section 5.1, "BACKUP", back to the place where the file was initially stored. If the file has been divided and saved to more than one floppy disk, follow this procedure to copy it from the floppy disks to the hard disk.
Restoring the backup archive file divided and saved to more than one floppy disk
(1) Set the first of the floppy disks that hold the backup archive file into the floppy disk drive of the PC, and clock the <Restore to HDD> button. (2) When you are prompted to insert another floppy disk, set the floppy disk with the correct sequence number, and click the <OK> button.
5.2.3
Selecting Information to be Restored

In the "Select Backup/Restore Directory" frame, select a desired option button.
- 108 -
B-75074EN/04
INSTALLATION
5.2.4
Starting Restoration
Clicking the <Restore> button starts restoration. During restriction, the following window appears to display the name of the files to be restored.
When restoration is completed, a window appears which lists the restored files. Click the <Close> button to close the window.
- 109 -
III. SETTING
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
1.OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Part III, Setting, explains how to set up i CELL. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Overview This chapter Basic Setup This chapter describes the basic setup of i CELL. Be sure to read it. Mail This chapter explains how to set up the mail function. Web This chapter explains how to set up the Web function. CIMPLICITY Viewer This chapter explains how to set up the CIMPLICITY Viewer function.
Configuration of this part
- 113 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
BASIC FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains how to set up the basic functions of i CELL. To run i CELL, you need to specify what machines (NC) to connect, how to communicate with the machines, and which i CELL function to be enabled for each machine. Some items must be set up in such a way that they match the settings of the NC. Set up i CELL according to your machine configuration as explained below. If you are going to use i CELL with the mail and Web functions based on the i-mode cellular phone, also read 3, MAIL, and 4, WEB. It is necessary to make it a development server temporarily by using OEM Key when a setting is changed when run time server of CIMPLICITY is used. Refer to the chapter system management, in the CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Basic System Operator's Manual (B-75064EN) for the details of OEM Key.
- 114 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.1
OVERVIEW
i CELL supports four communication functions, FOCAS2/Ethernet, DNC2, Reader/Puncher, and Data Server. The following table lists the functions that are available from each communication function and NC type. For each function, see Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" in Part I, "GENERAL". To use i CELL, follow the flowchart shown below.
Setting up the number of machines according to the order password. Setting up the number of machines to be connected and the functions to be used. Setting up machine information. Setting up communication. Setting up NC program management. Setting up i CELL.
The following subsections briefly describe the setup procedure for i CELL according to this flowchart.
2.1.1
Setting up the Number of Machines According to Order Password

Purchasing i CELL allows you to connect up to five machines, using FOCAS2/Ethernet (including a Data Server). To use any other communication function or connect more machines, you should purchase a CNC connection option separately. When only NC program management is used by making a connection with an FTP server, however, the machine is not counted in the required number of machines. In this case, see Section 2.8, "NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS". The i CELL main package and CNC connection option come with order passwords. Registering an order password with i CELL allows you to connect as many machines as the number indicated with the purchased option.
Order password type i CELL main package (five machines) Option for connecting additional CNCs (5, 10, or 15 CNCs) Connectable communication function FOCAS2/Ethernet, Data Server FOCAS2/Ethernet, DNC2, Reader/Puncher, Data Server
- 115 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
If you register an order password for the i CELL main package and that for the 10-CNC connection function, for example, you can connect up to 15 machines, up to ten of which are connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher.
Register the order password of the i CELL main package. (Five machines can be connected using FOCAS1/Ethernet.) Register the order password of the 10-CNC connection function. (Ten machines can be connected using FOCAS1/Ethernet, DNC2, and Reader/Puncher.)
Number of machines connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher : 0 Maximum machine count :0
0 5
10 15
NOTE Even when only up to five machines are to be connected, if one of them is to be connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher, you must purchase the 5-CNC connection function option in addition to the i CELL main package.
The order password is 24 alphanumeric characters. Its term of validity is limited.
NOTE It is impossible to register the password with i CELL after the term of validity.
The order password can be registered only once. It is impossible to register one order password with i CELL on a single PC more than once. It is also impossible to register one order password with i CELL on different PCs more than once. When you connect up to five machines using FOCAS2/Ethernet only with the i CELL main package, you also need to register the order password for the i CELL main package. The Machine Count Configuration dialog box is used to register the order password. This dialog box is displayed by selecting Project from the menu bar, then Machine Count Configuration from the Project menu.
- 116 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.1.2
Setting up the Number of Machines to be Connected and the Functions to be Used

Order password-based machine count management is performed in units of five. The Machine Connect Configuration dialog box determines the number of machines to be actually connected. As many settings as the number of machines are displayed in the dialog box. The number of machines to be connected can be specified within a machine count range specified with the order password. i CELL connects to the CNC, monitors its status, and manages NC programs. It is also provided with mail and Web functions. Setting up the functions to be used lets you specify whether to use the mail and Web functions. Setting up the number of machines to be connected and the functions to be used is performed, using the Project Property dialog box. The dialog box is displayed by selecting Project from the menu bar, then Property from the Project menu.
2.1.3
Setting up Machine Information

Setting up machine information lets you specify a machine name and NC type for individual machines. Setting up machine information is performed by selecting Machine Information from the tree.
2.1.4
Setting up Communication
Setting up communication lets you specify a communication protocol and its accompanying data (such as IP address for FOCAS2/Ethernet) for individual machines. Setting up communication is performed by selecting Communication from the tree.
2.1.5
Setting up NC Program Management

Setting up NC program management lets you specify information (such as the directory used to manage NC programs in each NC) related to NC program management. Setting up NC program management is performed by selecting NC Program Management from the tree.
- 117 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.1.6
Setting up i CELL
i CELL is provided with the overview, machining result, workpiece process result, and tool life functions. Setting up i CELL lets you specify which function to be used for individual machines. The functions you can select differ depending on the communication function and NC type. It also lets you specify information common to all machines. Setting up i CELL is performed by selecting i CELL from the tree.
- 118 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.2
2.2.1
DIALOG BOX CONFIGURATION

Opening the Configuration Dialog Box
To open the Configuration dialog box of i CELL, from the Windows Start menu, select Start, Program, CIMPLICITY i CELL, and Configuration.
2.2.2
Overview
Shown below is the Configuration dialog box.
The Configuration dialog box consists of a tree in the left section and a grid in the right section. i CELL has a wide variety of items to be specified. These items are grouped in major categories and displayed in a tree form in the left section. When an item is selected from the tree, its details are displayed in the grid. The items displayed in the tree differ depending on what you specify. In some cases, the tree has a hierarchical structure. Clicking the icon + expands branches under it. Clicking the icon - closes the currently expanded branches. You can relocate the border between the tree and grid by dragging and dropping it with the mouse. You can also change the width of each column in the grid by dragging and dropping its border with the mouse.
- 119 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.2.3
Menus
The following summarizes the functions of each menu.
File Menu Exit Update Point Configuration Closes the Configuration dialog box. Reflects point settings to CIMPLICITY module as required. Reflects point settings to CIMPLICITY module. This command is not usually used. See Subsection 2.2.9, If an Attempt to Reflect Point Settings to CIMPLICITY Fails, for details. Creates data for an item selected from the tree. This may or may not be possible depending on the category of the selected item. Displays a dialog box for changing the setting of an item selected from the grid. Deletes data for a row selected from the grid. Displays a dialog box for setting up the entire i CELL project. Displays a dialog box for registering an order password.
Edit Menu New
Property Delete Project Menu Property Machine Count Configuration Help Menu Version
Displays the revision of i CELL.
- 120 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.2.4
How to Change Settings

Selecting an item from the tree in the left section (<1> in the following figure) displays, in the grid in the right section, a summary of data about the selected item. Double-clicking a row in the grid (<2> in the following figure) displays a dialog box for changing the setting in that row.
<1>
Adding and editing settings
<2>
You can display the same dialog box also by selecting (clicking) the row in the grid and selecting Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu. If an item has a fixed number of pieces of data, the necessary data is prepared in the grid in advance. If not, you create data by selecting Edit from the menu bar, then New from the Edit menu.
Deleting settings
After selecting (clicking) a row from the grid, selecting Edit from the menu bar, then Delete from the Edit menu causes the setting to be deleted.
- 121 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.2.5
Work Flows for Adding and Deleting Machines

Machines are added in the following work flow. <1> Select Project from the menu bar, then Machine Count Configuration from the Project menu to display the Machine Count Configuration dialog box. Register an order password, using the dialog box. <2> Select Project from the menu bar, then Property from the Project menu to display the Project Property dialog box. In this dialog box, specify the number of machines to be connected, then ensure that NC Connection, NC Program Management, and i CELL are selected as functions to be used. Select also the mail and Web functions if necessary. <3> Selecting Machine Information from the tree displays the settings for each machine in the grid. Double-click the machine to be set up to display the Machine Information dialog box. In this dialog box, specify the name of the machine and its NC type. <4> Selecting Communication from the tree displays the settings for each machine in the grid. Double-click the machine to be set up to display the Communication dialog box. In this dialog box, specify a communication protocol and the related items (such as FOCAS2/Ethernet IP address). <5> Selecting NC Program Management from the tree displays the settings for each machine in the grid. Double-clicking the machine to be set up displays the machine setup dialog box. In this dialog box, specify a directory for managing the NC programs for that machine. <6> Double-clicking i CELL in the tree displays Machine and System under it. Selecting Machine displays the settings for each machine in the grid. Double-click the machine to be set up to display the i CELL Machine dialog box. In this dialog box, specify the desired i CELL functions. <7> Set up mail and Web if necessary. See Chapters 3, Mail, and 4, Web, for detailed explanations about how to set up mail and Web. In the tree, make settings sequentially from top to bottom (from Machine Information to i CELL).
Add settings sequentially, starting at the highest category.
Adding machines
- 122 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Deleting machines
To the contrary to addition, when deleting machines, delete their settings by going up the tree from i CELL to Machine Information. <1> A machine cannot be deleted if the mail or Web function uses data for the machine. To delete the machine, set up the mail or Web function so that it will not use data for the machine. <2> Select i CELL and Machine from the tree. In the grid, select the machine to be deleted by double-clicking to display the i CELL Machine dialog box. On the Machine tab, click the Disable All button, then the OK button. <3> Select Machine Information from the tree. In the grid, select the machine to be deleted by clicking it. Select Edit from the menu bar, then Delete from the Edit menu. When a confirmation message appears, click the OK button. The machine is deleted.
- 123 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.2.6
Setting Change and CIMPLICITY Project

i CELL is software that runs on CIMPLICITY module. When a CIMPLICITY i CELL project is operating, restrictions are imposed on the changing of the values of some items.
Restrictions on the i CELL project Setting item Machine information name item NC program management - FTP client setting Turning ON/OFF NC display/operation/maintenance of i CELL-machine and backup data setting Communication NC program - machine setting Items other than NC display/operation/maintenance of i CELL-machine
Even when an i CELL project is being executed, a setting can be changed.
When a setting is changed, the i CELL project needs to be restarted. When a setting is changed, the i CELL project needs to be ended, updated, and restarted.
If an item that belongs to "Even when an i CELL project is being executed, a setting can be changed" is modified, no message is displayed even when the setting screen ends. i CELL can be used without modification. If an item that belongs to "When a setting is changed, the i CELL project needs to be restarted." is modified, the following message appears when the setting screen ends:
Restart the i CELL project according to the instruction. If an item that belongs to "When a setting is changed, the i CELL project needs to be ended, updated, and restarted." is modified, the following message appears when the setting screen ends:
Update and restart the i CELL project according to the instruction. If the i CELL project is being executed, stop the i CELL project then update and restart the i CELL project.
- 124 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.2.7
Stopping
Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project

To stop the i CELL project, follow this procedure. <1> From the Windows Start menu, select Start, and Program, CIMPLICITY i CELL, then i CELL Project. The CIMPLICITY workbench appears. <2> On the CIMPLICITY workbench, check the status of the toolbar. If the toolbar appears as shown below, it means that the i CELL project is at a stop. Nothing need be done.
Check these icons.
If the toolbar appears as shown below, it means that the i CELL project is running. To stop the project, click the button .
Check these icons.
<3> Exit the CIMPLICITY workbench.
Updating
To update the i CELL project, follow this procedure. <1> Start the CIMPLICITY workbench. <2> On the toolbar of the CIMPLICITY workbench, click the setting update button.
Update button
<3> Exit the CIMPLICITY workbench. If the project is not running when you attempt to open the Configuration dialog box of i CELL, it is started automatically.
- 125 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.2.8
Displaying a Dialog Box When the Project Has Not Been Updated
If the settings on the i CELL setting screen were changed, but the CIMPLICITY project was not updated, the following dialog box appears when the project is started.
Starting the project from the workbench

If the project is started from the workbench, the following dialog box appears.
Select Yes. The project is updated before it is started.
Starting the project when displaying the i CELL screen
If an attempt is made to display the i CELL screen when the project is not running (selecting Program from the Windows Start menu and then CIMPLICITY i CELL and main menu), the following dialog box appears.
Select No. The project will not be started. The i CELL screen is displayed. Then, exit the screen. Update the project and then display the i CELL screen, while referring to Subsection 2.2.7, Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project.
NOTE Selecting Yes starts the project without updating it. So the data displayed on the screen is incorrect. The status of each NC and other information may be displayed as black rectangles.
- 126 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.2.9
If an Attempt to Reflect Point Settings to CIMPLICITY Fails

Before closing the Configuration dialog box, reflect point settings to CIMPLICITY if necessary. If this processing fails, the following dialog box appears.
Clicking the OK button closes the Configuration dialog box. In this case, open the Configuration dialog box of i CELL again, and select File from the menu bar, then Update Point Configuration from the File menu. The CIMPLICITY point configuration settings are updated according to the settings of i CELL.
- 127 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.3
MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION

Selecting Project from the menu bar of the Configuration dialog box, then Machine Count Configuration from the Project menu displays the Machine Count Configuration dialog box.
This dialog box lets you register an order password.

Registration of Order Password Machine Registered Order Password and Machine Count DNC2/Reader Puncher Machine Count Total Machine Count Enter a 24-digit order password. Clicking the Action button causes what you entered to be registered. This box indicates the number of machines that corresponds to the entered order password. This box lists the order passwords that are already registered as well as the number of machines related to each of the order password. This box indicates the number of machines that can be connected using the DNC2 or Reader/Puncher communication protocol. This box indicates the total number of machines that corresponds to the registered order passwords.
If an entered order password is correct, the number of machines corresponding to the order password and whether the term of validity for the order password has expired are displayed as shown below.
If the term of validity has expired, the following display appears, disabling registration.
When you register the order password for the i CELL main package, the value of Total Machine Count is incremented by 5. When you register the order password for a CNC connection option, the values of DNC2/Reader Puncher Machine Count and of Total Machine Count are incremented by the number indicated with the option.
- 128 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.4
PROJECT PROPERTY
Selecting Project from the menu bar of the Configuration dialog box, then Property from the Project menu displays the Project Property dialog box.
This dialog box lets you make the settings related to the entire i CELL project.
Connect Machine Count Specify the number of machines you want to connect. You can specify as many machines as the total number of machines allowed for the available order passwords. The range of numbers you can enter is displayed to the right of the entry box. CAUTION It is impossible to include, as a target for deletion, any machine for which functions are enabled in i CELL settings. To include a machine as a target for deletion, make sure that all i CELL functions are disabled for the machine.
If you want to use any functions from NC Connection to Web in the i CELL project, turn on the corresponding check boxes to select the functions. The tree displays the setting items for the selected functions.
NC Connection To transfer data between CIMPLICITY and the NC, turn on this check box. The checked state cannot be changed. To perform NC program management on a PC, turn on this check box. The checked state cannot be changed. To use i CELL, turn on this check box. The checked state cannot be changed. To use the mail function, turn on this check box. To use the Web function, turn on this check box. This item can be selected only on a Windows 2003 server , Windows 2000 server or Windows NT server. For a Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000 Professional or Windows NT workstation, the Web function cannot be selected because it is unavailable. Set a method of reading data from the CNC. Check the default, namely, "Parallel".
NC Program Management iCELL Mail Web
Read Data from CNC
Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the Project Property dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discards what you specified when closing the dialog box.
- 129 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.5
MACHINE INFORMATION
Selecting Machine Information from the tree lists, in the grid, the machines that were previously set up.
If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click the row of a machine row in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the Machine Information dialog box appears.
The setting items of this dialog box are explained below:

Number Name This box displays the machine number for the machine selected from the grid. It cannot be changed. This box lets you specify the name of the selected machine. The machine name is up to 20 alphanumeric characters. It must always be specified. Select the NC type of the machine. Select the NC specification (path) of the machine. The displayed options differ depending on the selected NC type. With Series 30i/31i/32i, detailed path information is set using "Paths" and "Paths detail setting", so that this box is not used. Set the number of CNC paths. This box is usable only with Series 30i/31i/32i.
NC Type NC Spec.
Paths
- 130 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
Paths details setting PMC Spec.
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Set M (machining type) or T (lathe type) for each CNC path. This box is usable only with Series 30i/31i/32i. Select the PMC specification of the machine. Available only when NC Type is FS15B.
Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the Machine Information dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discards what you specified before closing the dialog box. Once the i CELL function is set up, the Machine Information dialog box appears as shown below.
If the title of the dialog box contains the phrase (Point is defined), you cannot change either of the NC Type, NC Spec. and PMC Type settings. To change the NC Type, NC Spec. or PMC Type setting, clear all the i CELL functions. To clear all the i CELL functions, select i CELL and Machine from the tree, then double-click the target machines in the grid. The i CELL Machine dialog box appears. On the Machine tab of this dialog box, click Disable All button, then the OK button. If the NC Type, NC Spec., and PMC Type are changed for the machine for which a communication protocol has been set up, the communication protocol is cleared to None. The following dialog box appears.
Selecting OK clears the communication protocol and saves the changes. Selecting Cancel deletes the changes. If you clear a communication protocol, set one again.
- 131 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Automatic machine information update function based on communication (FOCAS2/Ethernet)

When communication is performed with the CNC by using FOCAS2/Ethernet, a machine setting can be automatically made by obtaining various types of data from the CNC without setting the machine on this screen. In this case, enter the desired machine name only. The automatic machine information update function based on communication is described in Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication".
- 132 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.6
2.6.1
COMMUNICATION
Setting up Communication
Selecting Communication from the tree lists, in the grid, the communication settings for the machines that have been set up.
If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click the row of a machine in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the Communication dialog box appears.
Shown above is an example of selecting a machine for which no communication protocol has been set. In this dialog box, select a communication protocol to be used. Selecting a communication protocol displays a setting screen specific to the selected communication protocol. A setting screen specific to a communication protocol appears also if you select a machine for which the communication protocol has been set.
NOTE If no machine name is set up, it is impossible to set up communication.

If the selected DNC2 or Reader/Puncher communication protocol does not match the number of machines you tried to connect, the following dialog box appears.
Set up the communication protocol within a range of the number of machines connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher. Alternatively, add an option for connecting additional CNCs to increase the number of machines that can be connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher.
- 133 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.6.2
Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication

Selecting FOCAS2/Ethernet in the Communication protocol box displays the following:
The setting items of this dialog box are explained below:

IP Address This box lets you enter the IP address for the NC. There is no default value. Enter the same IP address as already specified for the NC. This box lets you enter the TCP port number for the NC. The default value is 8193. Enter the same TCP port number as already specified for the NC. This box lets you specify a timeout value (in seconds) for communication with the NC. Use a default value of 10. This box lets you set whether to enable the C4 server function for the PC to determine the power-off of the NC. Set this item according to the network configuration. When the PC and NCs belong to the same network as shown in Fig. 2.6.2(a), enable the function (default). When a router is used between the PC and NCs as shown in Fig. 2.6.2(b), disable the function.
TCP Port Number
FwLib Timeout
Enable C4 Server
- 134 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Network A
Server PC
NC
NC
Server PC Router
The server PC and NCs belong to different networks, with a router connecting the PC and NCs.
Network B
The server PC and NCs belong to the same network. NC

Fig. 2.6.2(a) Network configuration (1) C4 server enabled
NC
Fig. 2.6.2(b) Network configuration (2) C4 server disabled
C4 Server Timeout
Retry Count
Re-connection on Communication Error
- Disable - Enable
- Select by Point
Retry Interval
This box lets you specify a timeout value (in counts) to decide whether to turn off the NC power. This box can be set only when the Enable C4 Server check box is checked. Use a default value of 2. This box lets you specify how many times communication with the NC is to be attempted after a request for communication is rejected. Use a default value of 5. This box lets you specify whether to make a reconnection automatically and a reconnection method if a communication error occurs for a poor communication line quality. This box can be set only when the Enable C4 Server check box is checked. Check Disable (default). Does not make a reconnection automatically. Makes a reconnection automatically. When the quality of the communication line is poor, another error can occur soon even if Enable is checked and a reconnection is made. If a communication error occurs frequently, do not reply on the reconnection function but improve the quality of the communication line. Note that you may be unaware of frequently occurring errors if Enable is checked. If a reconnection is made using this function, the log "Retry Connection(1)" is created in the "CimCNC connection error log". Specifies whether to make a reconnection by using the value of the point FNCmmmpp.F_COM_RETRY (with mmm representing a 3-digit machine number and pp representing a 2-digit path number). If a communication error occurs, i CELL sets the point to True. To make a reconnection, set the point to False. If a reconnection is made using this function, the log "Retry Connection(2)" is created in the "CimCNC connection error log". When using this function, the user needs to add a script that monitors the point and sets the point to False when the point is set to True. This box lets you specify an interval between retries for communication with the NC to be made after a request for communication is rejected. Use a default value of 500.
- 135 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Enable
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Confirm the Communication Configuration Update Machine information by comm.
This check box lets you specify whether to enable communication with the NC. To communicate with the NC, turn on the check box. There is no default value. Checks that communication between the NC and PC is enabled. When you click <OK>, the settings of Section 2.5, "MACHINE INFORMATION", are updated by communication with the NC. If there is a setting difference between the machine information and the data read from the NC, the difference is displayed to check if the setting is to be updated. When using this function, check the check box. No default value is assigned. This function can be used only when the Enable C4 Server check box is checked.
NOTE 1 After setting the communication protocol to FOCAS2/Ethernet, first click the Default button to select the default values. After this, set up the IP address and TCP port number. 2 When the Enable C4 Server check box is checked, the power state of the CNC is checked based on data sent periodically from the CNC. In this case, the overview screen provides a power-off indication 2 to 3 seconds after the power to the CNC is turned off. When the Enable C4 Server check box is not checked, the power state of the CNC is checked based on a communication time-out error. So, after the power to the CNC is turned off, the overview screen does not provide a power-off indication for a while. 3 Before checking the "Update Machine information by comm." check box, check that communication between the PC and NC is enabled, by clicking the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button.
For an item above that is commented with There is no default value, clicking the Default button does not change its value. For an item indicated with a default value, clicking the Default button selects the default value. <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button to check whether it is possible to perform communication between the PC and NC.
- 136 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Once you set up the i CELL function, the Communication dialog box appears as shown below.
If the title of the dialog box contains the phrase (Point is defined), you cannot change the communication protocol. To change the communication protocol, clear all the i CELL functions. To clear all the i CELL functions, select i CELL and Machine from the tree, then double-click the target machine in the grid. The i CELL Machine dialog box appears. On the Machine tab of this dialog box, click Disable All button, then the OK button.
- 137 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.6.3
Confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication Setting

Clicking the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button on the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication setting screen displays a screen for confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication setting.
NOTE The buttons in the dialog box are used to check communication errors (if any). Do not use them during normal operation.
Displays for the correct setup

When the IP addresses for the PC and NC are set up correctly, and the NC power is on, the dialog box appears as shown below.
<1> PING test...
<2> Get System Information test...
<3> C4Api test...
<1> PING test... is a result of testing the PING command in the NC. <2> Get System Information test... is the system information of the NC. CNC Type: Indicates an NC type. 15 Series 15i (Caution: This model cannot be connected to i CELL.) 16 Series 16i 18 Series 18i 21 Series 21i 30 Series 30i 31 Series 31i 32 Series 32i PD Power Mate i -D
- 138 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
PH Power Mate i -H 0 Series 0i M/T: Indicates an M/T type. M Machining center T Lathe MM M series two-path control TT T series two-/three-path control MT T series with the complex machining function P Punch/press (Caution: This model cannot be connected to i CELL.) L Laser (Caution: This model cannot be connected to i CELL.) Series : Indicates the CNC software series number, using a four-digit character string. Version : Indicates the CNC software version number, using a four-digit character string. Max Axes : Indicates the maximum number of controllable axes. Axes : Indicates the number of controlled axes. <3> C4Api test... indicates whether the NC power is on or off. Live=True means it is recognized that the NC power is on. Live=False means it is recognized that the NC power is off.
NOTE When the "Enable C4 Server" check box is cleared in communication setting, Live=True/False in <3> need not be checked.
Incorrect setting (1)

If an IP address set up for the NC or PC is incorrect, or the NC power is off, the dialog box may appear as shown below.
If the Reply From... line does not appear, the probable causes are: (1) The NC power is off. (2) The NC IP address is different from the one set up in the Configuration dialog box. (3) The NC network address or the host address is incorrect. Refer to an applicable Ethernet board manual for explanations about the IP address.
- 139 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04

When the IP addresses set up for the PC and NC are correct, and the NC power is on, if any other kind of setting is incorrect, the dialog box may appear as shown below.
If the Get System Information test... line does not appear, the probable causes are: (1) An IP address for the PC or the devices for which a TCP/IP has been set up, rather than for the NC, has been specified. (2) The TCP port number set for the NC is incorrect. If the message No option (Extended driver and libraries function) is displayed, the NC lacks the extended driver library option. The embedded Ethernet protocol does not need this option, though.
- 140 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS

When the IP addresses set up for the PC and NC are correct, and the NC power is on, if any other kind of setting is incorrect, the dialog box may appear as shown below.
Unlike the display of correct settings, C4Api test... contains Live=False. In this case, the probable causes are: (1) The PC's Udp port setting displayed when i CELL was installed in the PC does not match the UDP port number set up for the NC. On the [C4Svc] tab, the PC's Udp port setting for the current PC appears as shown below. Ensure that it matches the UDP port number set up for the NC. If it does not match, change the UDP port number set up for the NC so that it matches the following display.
(2) The Time Interval for the NC is 0. Enter 50.
NOTE When the "Enable C4 Server" check box is cleared in communication setting, Live=True/False need not be checked. The "Time Interval" for the NC need not be set either.
- 141 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.6.4
DNC2 Communication Setting

Selecting the DNC2 communication protocol displays the following:
The setting items of this dialog box are explained below.

Port This box lets you enter the name of a port that performs serial communication. There is no default value. Specify a serial port to which the machine is connected. This box lets you enter a baud rate for serial communication. The default value is 9600. Specify the same baud rate as set in the NC. This box lets you enter the length of data to be transferred by serial communication. Use a default value of 7. This box lets you enter the data code to be used in serial communication. Use a default value of ASCII. This box lets you enter the parity check type to be used in serial communication. Use a default value of EVEN. This box lets you enter the number of stop bits to be used in serial communication. Use a default value of 2. This box lets you specify whether to enable communication with the NC. To communicate with the NC, turn on the check box. There is no default value.
BaudRate
Data Length
Data Code
Parity
Stop Bit
Enable
NOTE After setting the communication protocol to DNC2, first click the Default button to select the default values. After this, set up the port and baud rate.
- 142 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
For an item commented with There is no default value in the above description, clicking the Default button does not change its value. For an item indicated with a default value, clicking the Default button selects the default value. No setting item under Option need be changed. Use the following default values, which are selected by clicking the Default button.
Retry NAK Retry Data Length Timeout EOT Timeout Output Timeout A.L. Timeout 5 3 256 5 5 1 120
Once you set up the i CELL functions, the Communication dialog box title appears as shown below.
If the title of the dialog box contains the phrase (Point is defined), you cannot change the communication protocol. To change the communication protocol, clear all the i CELL functions. To clear all the i CELL functions, select i CELL and Machine from the tree, then double-click the target machine in the grid. The i CELL Machine dialog box appears. On the Machine tab of this dialog box, click the Disable All button, then the OK button.
- 143 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.6.5
Reader/Puncher Communication Setting

Selecting the Reader/Puncher communication protocol displays the following:

Port This box lets you enter the name of a port that performs serial communication. There is no default value. Specify a serial port to which the machine is connected. This box lets you enter a baud rate for serial communication. The default value is 9600. Specify the same baud rate as set in the NC. This box lets you enter the length of data to be transferred by serial communication. Use a default value of 8. This box lets you enter the data code to be used in serial communication. Use a default value of ISO. This box lets you enter the parity check type to be used in serial communication. Use a default value of NONE. This box lets you enter the number of stop bits to be used in serial communication. Use a default value of 2. This box lets you specify whether to enable communication with the NC. To communicate with the NC, turn on the check box. There is no default value.
BaudRate
Data Length
Data Code
Parity
Stop Bit
Enable
- 144 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
NOTE After setting the communication protocol to Reader/Puncher, first click the Default button to select the default values. After this, set up the port and baud rate.
For an item commented with There is no default value in the above description, clicking the Default button does not change its value. For an item indicated with a default value, clicking the Default button selects the default value. No setting item under Option need be changed. Use the following default values, which are selected by clicking the Default button.
TV Check Send DC2 and DC4 Send ER(%) at the head and the end Check Check Check
- 145 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.6.6
Data Server Communication Setting

NOTE When only the Data Server function of the NC is used and no other i CELL functions are used, see Section 2.8, "NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS".
The setting screen of each communication protocol has a "Use Data Server" check box. When transferring NC programs on the NC program management screen by using the Data Server function of the NC, check this check box. A tab for Data Server setting is displayed.
Check here.

Use the same IP address as FOCAS2/Ethernet Displayed only when the communication protocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet. This box is checked by default. If the IP address of the Data Server on the NC is the same as that of FOCAS2/Ethernet, check this box. Otherwise, clear this box. When this box is cleared, the next IP address item can be set. Specify the IP address of the Data Server. No default value is assigned. Set the same value as the "IP Address" of the Data Server set on the NC.
IP Address
- 146 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
User Name
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Set a user name to be used for logging in to the Data Server. No default value is assigned. Set the same name as "User Name"(of FTP server) specified in the Data Server setting on the NC. Set a password for logging in to the Data Server. No default value is assigned. Set the same value as "Password" (of FTP server) specified in the Data Server setting on the NC. Set a login directory for logging in to the Data Server. No default value is assigned. Set the same value as "Login DIR" (of FTP server) specified in the Data Server setting on the NC. Set a port number to be used for making a connection to the Data Server. The default value is 21. Set the same value as "Port Number" of the Data Server specified on the NC. Usually, the default value 21 is used.
Password
Login Dir
Port Number
After setting an IP address, user name, and password, click the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button. PING and FTP login tests are conducted to confirm the communication setting. For details, see Subsection 2.6.7, "Confirming Data Server Communication Setting".
- 147 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.6.7
Confirming Data Server Communication Setting

When you click the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button on the Data Server communication setting screen, the communication setting confirmation screen appears. An example of correct setting and examples of incorrect settings are provided below together with countermeasures. The communication setting confirmation screen is also used in Section 2.8, "NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS". This screen is used to confirm both Data Server communication and FTP server communication, so that a Data Server and FTP server are collectively called a "communication destination".
Correct setting
(1) PING test
(2) FTP Connect & Disconnect test
(3) FTP Directory List test
When the settings are correct, all of (1) through (3) are displayed. The information below is displayed. (1) In "PING test", the results of testing the PING command on the communication destination are displayed. When a communication setting is made correctly, the communication destination returns "Reply from ..." as shown above. (2) In "FTP Connect & Disconnect test", the results of conducting a connection test to the communication destination are displayed. When a communication setting is made correctly, the current directory after login such as "257 "/NCDATA" is current directory" indicated on the bottom line is displayed. (3) In "FTP Directory List test", the results of conducting a communication destination directory display test are displayed. If the communication setting is correct, a list of the files or directories in the currently logged-in directory is displayed. After conducting this test, log out.
- 148 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Meanings of messages displayed in FTP Connect test

The message displayed with a number depends on the specifications of the communication destination software. The table below indicates the meanings of numbers and examples of display on the Data Server.
Number
220 331 230 257 530
Meaning and example of display on Data Server The communication destination is ready for accepting a new user. Example) FANUC FTP server ready. Login is started and the password is requested. Example) User name okay, need password. Login is completed. Example) User logged in, proceed. A path name (current directory in the test) was created. Example) /NCDATA is current directory. Login operation is not performed. Example) Not logged in.
Method of retest on the communication setting confirmation screen

This screen is activated from the communication setting screen. Using the procedure below, a retest for communication confirmation can be conducted without quitting this screen and returning to the communication setting screen. (1) Enter the desired communication destination in [IpAddr]. (2) Enter the user name in [Usrname]. (3) Enter the password in [Password]. (4) Click the <Connect Test> button. When a communication confirmation is made by a retest, reenter the retest information on the communication setting screen.

If the IP address of the communication destination is not set correctly, or the power to the communication destination is off, the following indication may be provided in "(1) PING test".
When the "Reply From ..." line is not displayed, check the following: (1) The power to the NC is off, or the cable is disconnected. (2) The IP address of the NC does not match the setting on the setting screen. (3) The settings of the NC network address and host address are incorrect.
- 149 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS Incorrect setting (2)
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
When a connection is made to an NC with the Data Server function not enabled or to a PC with the FTP server function not enabled, "<2> FTP Connect Test" may fail even if "<1> PING test" is successful. In such a case, a message indicating the readiness for user acceptance such as "220 FANUC FTP Server ready" is not displayed from the communication destination, but "Cannot connect ..." is displayed. Set a correct communication destination. The screen display below provides an example where the communication destination is an NC that does not have the Data Server function.

When a set user name or password is incorrect, "<2> FTP Connect Test" may fail even if "<1> PING test" is successful. In such a case, a message indicating the readiness for user acceptance such as "220 FANUC FTP Server ready." is displayed from the communication destination, and a message indicating a failure in login such as "530 Not logged in." is displayed. Check the user name and password. The screen display below provides an example of incorrect password setting. A similar screen is displayed if an incorrect user name is entered.
- 150 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.7
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT MACHINE SETTINGS

Selecting NC Program Management Machine Settings from the tree lists, in the grid, the NC program management settings for the machines that have been set up.
If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click the row of a machine in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the NC Program Transfer setting dialog box appears.
Settings are grouped on a different tab.
Save what you specified.
Closes the NC Program Transfer setting dialog box.
The tabs displayed in the NC Program Transfer setting dialog box vary depending on what communication protocol is in use. The example shown above applies to FOCAS2/Ethernet. For DNC2 and Reader/Puncher, the following apply. Tabs for DNC2 Tabs for Reader/Puncher
- 151 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.7.1
General Tab
The General tab lets you specify a directory for NC programs to be sent or received, file extensions, and O number digit. The setting items on this tab are explained below:
Directory Setting frame

Default Directory This box lets you specify what directory in the PC is to be used to manage the NC programs for each NC. It is possible to assign a directory to each NC. It is also possible to assign one directory to all or multiple NCs so that NC programs can be shared. Clicking the button at right of the text box displays a file list. Select a default directory from the file list.
NOTE If one directory is assigned to all or multiple NCs, it is impossible to create NC programs having the same O-number but different contents.
Create default directories as shown below:
1 C:\Program Files\Fanuc\iCELL (Selected at installation.) 2 CimProject (Automatically created during installation.) 3 NcData (Create a parent directory for the default directory.) 001 (Create a default directory for NC001.) 002 (Create a default directory for NC002.)
This default directory configuration enables efficient backup to be performed. See Section 5.1, BACKUP, of Part II, Installation.
- 152 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
File Extension Settings frame

Default Extension Enter a default extension in this text box. Usually leave the default extension .dat without changing it. A file having the file extension entered here is displayed as NC program in the type box in the NC Program Management dialog box when file details are displayed. Enter the extension to be used for a subprogram in this text box. Usually specify the same extension as the default file extension. Enter the extension to be used for a list file in this text box. Specify an extension different from the default extension or subprogram extension. If it is the same as the default extension or subprogram extension, an error is detected when the file is saved.
Extension of Sub Program Extension of List File
NOTE 1 The DNC2 communication protocol does not support subprogram transfer or list file transfer. So, it is impossible to set a value in the subprogram and list file extension boxes.
If the communication protocol in use is DNC2, these item names are dimmed, disabling any value from being entered.
2 When a connection is made with Series 30i/31i/32i, Default Extension and Extension of Sub Program cannot be set (an extension is required with a list file). With these series of CNCs, an NC program can be managed using a file name including an extension, so that the setting of an extension is unnecessary. When a file named "Shaft001.main" is created in the CNC memory and is uploaded to i CELL, for example, the file name is "Shaft001.main.dat" if the extension ".dat" is set with i CELL. To avoid this kind of file name confusion, no extension is set.
- 153 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
O number digit frame

8-digit program number [Use OXXXXXXXX.dat format file name for O1-99999999] Check this check box when using the 8-digit O number option with the CNC. When a file with an O number is to be downloaded, a file name not in the OXXXX.dat format but in the OXXXXXXXX.dat format is found. For uploading from the CNC, a file in the format OXXXXXXXX.dat is created on the PC. This check box is not displayed when the 8-digit O number option is not specified with the CNC or a communication protocol such as DNC2 that cannot use an 8-digit O number is set. This check box can also be set with the function "Update Machine information by comm." described in Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication". When this function is used, whether to use the 8-digit O number option with the CNC is set. So, do not make any modification on this screen. When a file with an O number is to be downloaded, not a file in the format OXXXXXXXX.dat but a file in the format OXXXX.dat is found for a 4-digit O number from 1 to 9999. For uploading from the CNC, a file in the format OXXXX.dat is created on the PC. This setting is disabled for an O number of O10000 or up, and a file in the format OXXXXXXXX.dat is used. This option can be used only when "8-digit program number" above is checked.
Compatible with 4-digit [Use OXXXX.dat format file name for O1-O9999 only]
- 154 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.7.2
Communication Setting
The communication tab appears only when the communication protocol in use is Reader/Puncher.
This dialog box displays communication settings. It does not allow them to be changed. Clicking the Set Details button lets you set details of Reader/Puncher communication. For these items, clicking the Default button in the Communication setting dialog box selects default values. Usually, it is unnecessary to change the default settings.
- 155 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.7.3
Download Tab
Download tab is displayed only if Reader/Puncher FOCAS2/Ethernet is used for communication protocol. or
The Download tab lets you specify downloading. The setting items of this tab are explained below:
Transfer Styles for Sub Programs frame

The for Sub Program... frame lets you specify a transmission method for subprograms.
Ignore Concatenate (Send one after another) Merge (Replace calling line) Subprograms are not sent. Only specified NC programs are downloaded. The main program is searched for subprogram calls. Subprograms are sent after the main program is sent. The main program is searched for subprogram calls. When the main program is being sent, subprograms are embedded in the main program so that they can be sent together with the main program.
Next, subprogram transmission is set up.

Calling Type The code to be used for subprogram calling can be set up. M98, G65, and G66 can be combined for setting.
- 156 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
Masks of Sub Programs
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
1st Directory Searching Sub Program 2nd Directory Searching Sub Program 3rd Directory Searching Sub Program Search Sub Program from Main program's directory
It is possible to disable transmission of subprograms even if their calling is found. Subprograms can be specified in units of 1000. It is possible to specify, for example, that subprograms 8000 to 8999 and 9000 to 9999 are not to be sent because they are in NC memory. Up to three directories can be specified as storage for subprograms. Numbers 1 to 3 represent the order in which the directories are searched through. To put another way, if the subprograms having the same name are in the [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] and [2nd Directory Searching Sub Program], the one in [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] is sent. An entered directory name can be deleted by pressing the backspace key. If this check box is checked, a subprogram search operation is performed in such a way that the folder including the main program is searched instead of 1st Directory Searching Sub Program then 2nd Directory Searching Sub Program and 3rd Directory Searching Sub Program are searched. When this check box is checked, 1st Directory Searching Sub Program cannot be set.
NOTE 1 Only the directories set up in the [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] to [3rd Directory Searching Sub Program] are searched for subprograms. (If [Search Sub Program from Main program's directory] is checked, only the folder including the main program, and the directories set in [2nd Directory Searching Sub Program] and [3rd Directory Searching Sub Program] are searched.) If a directory is set up in the [Default Directory] but not in any of the [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] to the [3rd Directory Searching Sub Program], no subprogram is searched for. 2 In the same way as for default directories, configure the [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] to the [3rd Directory Searching Sub Program] as child directories of NcData so that backup files can be created easily.
Transfer Styles for NC Programs Registered in List File frame

This frame lets you set up list file transmission. The setting items in this frame are explained below:
Concatenate Merge Files registered in the list file are sent separately. The multiple main NC programs registered in the list file are transferred after being linked into a single NC program. Turn on this check box if Merge is selected.
Wait for transfer buffers to become 0 before the next record at an extension
- 157 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.7.4
Upload Tab
Upload File Saving frame
This frame lets you specify how to save uploaded files. The setting items in this frame are explained below. When you click Default button on Communication Setting screen, items are set like shown above. Usually, make the settings shown above so that they match the line-end setting used by Windows. If they do not match, NotePad cannot read uploaded files.
Append ER[%] at the head and the end Append CR+LF at the end and Save NC Program Append LF at the end and Save NC Program Append Nothing at the end and Save NC Program This item must be turned on.
Files are saved with the Windows-style line end character. Files are saved with the UNIX-style line end character.
Files are saved with the exact line end character received from the NC.
- 158 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.8
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS

On the NC program management screen, a connection can be made with an FTP server operating on another personal computer to enable FTP-based NC program transfer.
PC CAD, etc. FTP server
PC
i CELL
FTP client
NC FTP server
NC FTP server ...
Ethernet
For this purpose, make an FTP client setting to specify a condition for i CELL to log in to the FTP server as an FTP client. Moreover, when only the Data Server function of the NC is used and the other i CELL functions are not used, make an FTP client setting to specify a condition for logging in to the FTP server of the NC. From the tree, select NC Program Management then FTP Client Settings. A list of the FTP client settings currently made is displayed in the grid.
To edit a setting already registered, double-click the machine line of the grid, or click the line of the grid then select Edit then Property from the menu. To register a new setting, double-click the blank line at the end of the grid or select Edit then New from the menu.
- 159 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
The client setting dialog box is displayed, regardless of which operation was chosen.
The example of screen display above is used for creation. For editing, a value is set in the item of Name, and the value of the Name item cannot be modified. The table below indicates the meanings of the setting items.
Name IP Address User Name Password Login Dir Port Number
Set a name for identification in login to the FTP server. Specify the IP address of the FTP server. Set a user name to be used for logging in to the FTP server. Set a password to be used for logging in to the FTP server. Set a login directory to be used for logging in to the FTP server. Set a port number to be used for connection to the FTP server. Usually, the default value 21 is used.
Upon completion of communication setting, click the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button for confirmation. For details, see Subsection 2.6.7, "Confirming Data Server Communication Setting".
- 160 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.9
i CELL MACHINE
Selecting i CELL and Machine from the tree lists, in the grid, the i CELL machine settings for the machines that have been set up.
If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click the row of a machine in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the i CELL Machine dialog box appears.
This dialog box displays the settings for the machine selected from the grid. Turn on the i CELL functions used for that machine. The overview, machining result, workpiece process result, alarm, tool life functions, NC Disp, Ope and Mainte and Operator Message correspond to the respective i CELL screens. Clicking the Enable All button enables all the functions. Clicking the Disable All button disables all the functions. The overview and alarm functions are turned on automatically when any other function is turned on because they are basic functions.
NOTE The functions that can be selected depend on the types of the communication protocol and NC that are in use. See Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT", in Part I, "GENERAL".
- 161 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Setting the number of axis

For communication using FOCAS2/Ethernet, the number of axes of the NC needs to be set. If the power to the NC is on and communication is enabled, the number of axes is automatically obtained from the NC. In this case, no action is required. (1) If the number of axes has not been set even once When the i CELL machine setting screen is opened a. The power to the NC is on and communication is enabled The number of axes is automatically obtained from the NC and set. No action is required. b. The power to the NC is off, and communication is disabled. The number of axes is not automatically set. The number of axes needs to be set manually. (2) If the number of axes has been set at least once The number of axes is not automatically modified. If the number of axes is changed afterwards, modify the setting manually, or obtain the number of axes from the NC by operating the screen. If the number of axes is not set even when the i CELL function is checked on the i CELL machine setting screen, pressing the OK button displays the following dialog box:
- 162 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
The procedure for setting the number of axes is described below. (1) Press the Number of Axes button on the i CELL machine setting screen. The screen for setting the number of axes is displayed.
(2) The list on the left side of the screen displays an NC path and the number of axes of the path. When the number of axes is not set, a hyphen (-) is indicated. (3) If the power to the NC is on and communication is enabled, press the Get from NC button. The number of axes for all paths is automatically obtained from the NC and set. (4) If the number of axes cannot be obtained from the NC, set a value manually. (a) On the list, click the line of a path for which the number of axes is to be set. (b) In the box for inputting the number of axes, set the number of axes of the path. (c) Press the OK button. The entered value is displayed in the list. (d) Repeat steps (a) to (c) for all paths. (5) When the setting of the number of axes is completed, press the Return button.
NOTE Whenever possible, obtain the number of axes from the NC for setting instead of manual input.
Setting the number of operator messages

When operator messages are displayed on a machine that communicates using FOCAS2/Ethernet, the number of messages may need to be specified, depending on the model of NC. If the power to the NC is on and communication is enabled, the number of messages is automatically obtained from the NC. In this case, no action is required. Models of NCs that require the number of messages to be specified: Series 16i/18i/21i, Series 0i Use bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 to specify the number of messages. For details, refer to the parameter manual of each NC.
- 163 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
For other models of NCs, the number of messages need not be specified. 1. For NCs that require the number of messages to be specified The radio button for the number of messages can be operated. (1) If the number of messages has not be set even once When the i CELL machine setting screen is opened a. The power to the NC is on and communication is enabled. The number of messages is automatically obtained from the NC and set. No action is required.
b. The power to the NC is off and communication is disabled. The number of messages is not automatically set. The number of messages needs to be set manually.
(2) If the number of messages has been set at least once The number of messages is not automatically modified. If the number of messages is changed afterwards by modifying the NC parameter, modify the setting manually, or obtain the number of messages from the NC by pressing the Get from the NC button. 2. For models of NCs that do not require the number of messages to be specified One of the radio buttons for Number of Msg is selected. The radio button cannot be operated to modify the value.
If the number of messages is not set even when Operator Message is checked on the i CELL machine setting screen, pressing the OK button displays the following dialog box:
Select the number of messages manually, or press the Get from NC button after turning on the power to the NC and enabling communication.
NOTE Whenever possible, obtain the number of messages from the NC for setting instead of manual input.
- 164 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.9.1
Overview
Workpiece Process Result

Using the workpiece process result requires that the NC inform i CELL of the beginning and end of the process, and, if necessary, the workpiece ID and process end ID. This information transfer between the NC and i CELL is performed using the custom macro variables of the NC. The NC changes the values of custom macro variables that mean the beginning and end of the process, using an NC program. i CELL reads these values periodically to judge on the beginning and end of the NC process, and records the result in a database.
i CELL
Judge on the beginning of the process. Judge on the end of the process. Write the workpiece process result to a database. Workpiece machining 1 0 Custom macro variable for the end of the process
NC NC program
Periodical reading
1 0 Custom macro variable for the beginning of the process
Accordingly, the following procedure is needed to set up the workpiece process result. <1> Determine what items are to be acquired from the NC. <2> Determine to which custom macro variables the items to be acquired are to be assigned.
Items to be acquired from the NC

i CELL collects the following required and optional items from the NC, using the Workpiece Process Result tab.
Required items Optional items
Sequence Number, Process Begin, Process End, Handshake ON/OFF Workpiece ID, O Number, Process End ID, User Area ID
Handshaking with the NC for informing of the beginning and end of the process requires the items listed below.
Items required in handshaking
Confirmation of Begin, Confirmation of End
- 165 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Handshaking with the NC

The NC informs i CELL of the beginning and end of the process in two ways. The first way uses handshaking, and the second way does not. <1> Not using handshaking The NC keeps the value of a custom macro variable for notification of the beginning and end of the process at 1 for a certain time then resets it to 0. The NC cannot detect whether i CELL has read the change in the custom macro variable value, but it continues machining even if i CELL is not operating. No workpiece process result is collected if i CELL is not operating, however. Beginning and end of the process 1 (The value is changed by the NC.) 0 <2> Using handshaking The NC changes the value of the custom macro variable for notification of the beginning and end of the process to 1, and then waits until the value of the custom macro variable for confirmation of the beginning and end becomes 1. When the latter variable becomes 1, the NC resets the former variable to 0. This method can accurately inform i CELL of the beginning and end of the process. However, handshaking is impossible unless i CELL is operating. If i CELL is not operating, the NC cannot start machining until the handshaking timer in the machining subprogram detects a timeout. Confirmation of the beginning and end 1 (The value is changed by i CELL.) 0 Beginning and end of the process (The value is changed by the NC.) 1 0
Even if this method is in use, resetting a custom macro variable for specifying whether to use handshaking to 0 disables handshaking.
Custom macro variable assignment

Once you have decided the item on which data is to be collected from the NC, assign the item to a custom macro variable not being used by the NC. Set the variable number of that custom macro variable in the Workpieces Process Result tab of i CELL. Also create an NC program for informing of the beginning and end of the process, using the custom macro variable. Read the following descriptions for explanations about a Workpieces Process Result tab of i CELL. Also see Subsection 2.12.2, Workpieces Process Result, for explanations about NC programs. If you want to display character strings, rather than digits, for the workpiece ID and process end ID in the workpieces process result dialog box, see Section 2.10, WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
- 166 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Setting
When the Workpieces Process Result tab is selected from the i CELL Machine dialog box, it appears as shown below:
This tab lets you specify the numbers of custom macro variables to be used for informing of the values of the beginning and end of the process, workpiece ID, O number, process end ID, and user area ID. To use handshaking in informing of the beginning and end of the process, turn on Handshake with NC. The following four items must always be set up.
Sequence Number Process Begin Process End Handshake ON/OFF
This is the number of a custom macro variable for which the sequence number that represents a machining number is set. This is the number of a custom macro variable for informing of the beginning of the process. This is the number of a custom macro variable for informing of the end of the process. This is the number of a custom macro variable for informing from the NC whether to use handshaking.
- 167 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
The following two items are necessary only when Handshake with NC is turned on.
Confirmation of Begin
Confirmation of End
This is the number of a custom macro variable for handshaking with Process Begin. When the NC sets the Process Begin custom macro variable to 1, the PC sets this (Confirmation of Begin) variable to 1 to inform the NC that it recognized the beginning of the process. This is the number of a custom macro variable for handshaking with Process End. When the NC sets the Process End custom macro variable to 1, the PC sets this (Confirmation of End) variable to 1 to inform the NC that it recognized the end of the process.
The following four items are optional. If the NC is to inform the PC of their values, turn on the corresponding checkboxes and specify custom macro variable numbers.
Workpiece ID
O Number
Process End ID User Area ID
This is the number of a custom macro variable for representing the ID of the workpiece that was processed. This is the number of a custom macro variable for representing the O number of the program executed for machining. This is the number of a custom macro variable for representing the end status of the process. This is the number of a custom macro variable for representing the ID that the user can use freely.
Clicking the Assign in order from Sequence Number button sequentially assigns values to the items that can be set up, starting at the Sequence Number. The values set on this tab must match those in the NC program used in informing of the workpiece process result.
- 168 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.9.2
Automatic Data Backup

With i CELL, various types of NC data can be automatically backed up at regular intervals. Check the NC Disp, Ope and Mainte check box of the function tab on the i CELL machine setting screen. The Backup Data button is enabled.
Check
Enabled
Press the Backup Data button to display the backup data screen shown below.
(1) Select a data type.
(2) The settings registered for a selected data type are displayed.
(3) Backup condition
The operation procedure is described below. (1) Select a type of data to be backed up. (2) The settings registered for a selected data type are displayed as a list on the right side of the screen. (3) To add a setting, specify a backup condition and press the Add button. To edit a setting already registered, select the setting from the list. Then, the registered backup condition is displayed. Edit the condition and press the Correct button. To delete a setting already registered, select the setting from the list, then press the Delete button.
- 169 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
The meanings of the setting items are as follows:

Data Type
Frequency
Time
Format
Days
Select a type of NC data to be backed up from the following: Alarm history Operation history Message history Parameter Tool offset Pitch error compensation Custom macro Workpiece origin offset Select a frequency of backup from the following: Invalidity: Backup operation is not performed. Daily: Backup operation is performed daily. Monday - Sunday: Backup operation is performed on a specified day of the week. Specified day: Backup operation is performed on a specified day of each month. Select a number and select Cycle or Time. When Cycle is selected, a specified number means a backup interval. When Time is selected, a specified number means the time when backup operation is to be performed. Only when Alarm history, Operation history, or Message history is specified in Data Type, "CSV" format or "TXT" format can be selected. For the other types of data, "TXT" format is used. For alarm, operation, and message history data, specify the number of past days to preserve data of that period. For the other types of data, specify the number of past days to preserve backup files of that period. Data whose preservation period has elapsed is discarded. When 0 is specified, data is not discarded.
For one type of data, multiple backup conditions can be registered. In this case, data is backed up at the timing determined by ORing all conditions. For the same type of data, the same format and the same number of preservation days need to be set. The maintenance screen of i CELL can be used to search for and display alarm history data, operation history data, and message history data.
- 170 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
NOTE 1 An alarm history involves huge amounts of data. So, do not back up this type of data more frequently than daily. 2 If a backup operation is performed during acquisition of workpieces process result data, workpieces process result data may not be acquired or correct workpieces process result data may not be acquired. Do not perform a backup operation during acquisition of workpieces process result data. 3 For pitch error compensation data, the optional pitch error compensation function is required. For custom macro variable data, the custom macro B option is required. For workpiece origin offset data, the workpiece coordinate system option is required. 4 With the Power Mate i, message history data and workpiece origin offset data cannot be backed up. 5 The function for backing up an alarm history, operation history, and message history of FS30i/31i/32i is under development. 6 With series other than Series 30i/31i/32i, an alarm history, operation history, and message history are backed up, but parameters, tool offset data, pitch error compensation data, custom macros, and workpiece origin offset data are not backed up if the NC is in operation at the time of backup operation. With Series 30i/31i/32i, parameters, tool offset data, pitch error compensation data, custom macros, and workpiece origin offset data are backed up even if the NC is in operation at the time of backup operation. 7 Alarm history data, operation history data, and message history data older than the specified number of preservation days is not backed up.
Backed up data is saved under the following directory: %iCELL%\AutoBkupFolder Here, the drive name depends on the location where i CELL is installed. The table below indicates the names of files created. History data
Data type File name CSV format TXT format
Alarm history Operation history Message history
AAA_Alhis.csv AAA_Ophis.csv AAA_Omhis.csv
AAA_Alhis.txt AAA_Ophis.txt AAA_Omhis.txt
In the table above:

- 171 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
AAA represents a machine number. If a machine number is shorter than three digits, O is placed at the start. Variable data
Data type File name
Parameter Tool offset Pitch error compensation Custom macro Workpiece origin offset
AAA_BB_param_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt AAA_BB_tlofs_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt AAA_BB_pcherr_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt AAA_BB_cmval_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt AAA_BB_wzofs_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt
In the table above: AAA represents a machine number, and BB represents a path number. For a one-digit number, O is placed at the start. YYYYMMDD_HHNN represents date (year/month/day)_time (hours/minutes) when data was backed up.
- 172 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.10
WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

NOTE If any of the following operations is performed during acquisition of workpieces process result data, workpieces process result data may not be acquired, or correct workpieces process result data may not be acquired: Data backup using the automatic data backup function Data input/output operation using the maintenance screen NC program input/output using the NC program management screen During acquisition of workpieces process result data, do not perform these operations.
Selecting i CELL, System, and Workpieces Process Result from the tree displays the following Workpieces Process Result System Configuration dialog box, which is applied to all machines in common.
If you want to have the workpiece ID, process end ID, and user area ID that were received from the NC with the workpiece process result function represented using names rather than ID values on the screen, associate the ID values with the names, using this dialog box. Clicking the Add button adds a new association of an ID with a name. After selecting a row from the grid, clicking the Edit button enables the contents of the selected row to be changed. After selecting a row from the grid, clicking the Delete button deletes the contents of the selected row. The settings made in this dialog box are common to all machines. Whether to use these settings for each machine is determined according to the workpiece process result options set up for the machine. See the previous section, i CELL Machine.
- 173 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Workpiece ID
The Workpiece ID tab lets you set up the scheduled machining time in addition to the workpiece ID and workpiece name.
The meaning of each item on this tab and the entry rules are explained below.
Workpiece ID Workpiece Name
Estimated Time for Process
Workpiece ID value received from the NC, ranging from 1 to 99999999. Character string used to display a workpiece ID received from the NC on the screen, consisting of up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Time (in seconds) needed to process the workpiece, ranging from 0 to 99999999. It is used to obtain that scheduled time for completion of all the workpieces which is to be displayed as the status of progress in the workpieces process result dialog box.
Process End ID
The Process End ID tab lets you set up the display order in addition to the process end ID and the end status of the process.
Process End ID
Process End
Display Order
Process end ID received from the NC, ranging from 1 to 9999. The value 1 means a normal end. It is used to obtain the number of workpieces yet to be processed from the total number of workpieces to be processed. Any value other than 1 is assumed to indicate an abnormal end. Be sure to set the value 1 and the display number 1 as well. Character string used to display the process end ID received from the NC on the screen, consisting of up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Digit from 0 to 5, indicating the sequence of displays on the screen, used in counting the processed workpieces in the process end status. Items having display order numbers 1 to 5 are grouped by display order number to count the processed workpieces for display on the screen. Items having display order number 0 are counted as Others for display on the screen. Be sure to set 1 for Process End ID set to 1.
- 174 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
User Area ID
The User Area ID tab lets you set up the user area ID and user area.
User Area ID User Area
User area ID value received from the NC, ranging from 1 to 9999. Character string used in displaying the user area ID received from the NC on the screen, consisting of up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
- 175 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
2.11
DATABASE MAINTENANCE
Selecting i CELL, System, and Database Maintenance from the tree displays the Database Maintenance dialog box.
If the machining result and workpiece process result functions are in use, the data in the database increases day by day as machining progresses. The database cannot limitlessly hold data. So, you need to specify how much data is to be saved in the database using the Data Saving Criteria frame. i CELL checks the contents of the database once everyday. If any piece of data does not meet the specified Data Saving Criteria, it is automatically deleted from the database. The targets of setting include the Machining Result and WorkPieces Process Result databases. They have the same setting items.
Data Count
Period of Time
Turning on this item enables as many items of data as specified in the input field at the right to be saved. If there is more data to be saved, older data is removed from the database so that the database will hold a specified number of data items. Unless Data Count is on, data deletion is not triggered at a specified count. The numbers that can be entered range from 0 to 100,000. Data Count is on by default. The default value is 50,000. Turning on this item enables data to be kept for the period specified in the input field at the right. Any data kept for the specified period is deleted. Unless Period of Time is on, data deletion is not triggered after the specified period. The numbers that can be entered range from 0 to 50. The period can be represented in days, months, and years. Period of Time is off by default.
You need to turn on at least one of the Data Count and Period of Time. (Both can be turned on.)
- 176 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
Even if Data Count is off, only up to 100,000 items of data can be saved in the database. If there is more data to be saved, older data is removed from the database so that the database will hold 100,000 items of data. Machining result data is created once every day, and such data corresponds to one-day list display data and one-day graph display data on the machining result screen. When 50,000 is set as the number of data items to be deleted, the data for the past 50,000 days is preserved. When five NCs are connected, the data for the past 10,000 days is preserved on each NC. Workpieces process result data is created when machining start information is sent from the NC, and such data corresponds to one line when log information is displayed on the workpieces process result screen. When 50,000 is set as the number of data items to be deleted, the data for the past 50,000 processes is preserved. The cycle times of processes differ from each other, so that the amount of data preserved on each NC cannot be calculated.
NOTE As for Data Count and Period of Time under Machining Result, set sufficiently large values so that data related to workpieces being processed will not be deleted. If the specified period is shorter than the time required for machining the workpiece or the specified data count is smaller than the number of data items added by other machines during the processing of the workpiece, no correct data will be displayed.
Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without saving what you specified.
Time of deletion
Once everyday, i CELL checks the database and deletes any data not meeting the specified data saving criteria. This processing is performed at 12:00 p.m. by default. However, the processing cannot be performed unless i CELL is running at the data deletion time. If it is apparent that i CELL will not be running at the default data deletion time, you need to change the data deletion time. To delete the data deletion time, follow this procedure. <1> If the i CELL project is running, stop it. See Subsection 2.2.7, Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project, for explanations about how to stop the project. <2> From the Windows Start menu, select Program, CIMPLICITY i CELL, and i CELL Project.
- 177 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
<3> The CIMPLICITY workbench appears. In the tree in the left section of the screen, double-click Event Editor under Basic Control Engine.
<4> The CIMPROJECT - CIMPLICITY Event Editor dialog box appears.
Double-click FNC_AUTO_DEL in the Event ID list in the left section of the screen. <5> The Modify Event - FNC_AUTO_DEL dialog box appears.
In Event time on the second line, specify when data is to be deleted from the database. Do not change the other items. Clicking the OK button closes the dialog box and brings you back to the Event Editor. To exit the Event Editor, select File from the menu bar and Exit from the File menu. <6> Update the i CELL project. See Subsection 2.2.7, Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project, for explanations about how to update the project. Data deletion will be performed at the newly specified time next time i CELL runs.
- 178 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.12
2.12.1
NC SETTINGS
This section explains those settings to be made on the NC which are necessary to use i CELL.
Machining Result
Using the machining result requires that the NC have the Machining Time and Parts Count Display options.
2.12.2
Overview
Workpieces Process Result

Using the workpiece process result requires that the NC inform i CELL of the beginning and end of the process, and if necessary, workpiece ID and process end ID. This information transfer between the NC and i CELL is performed using an NC's custom macro area.
Securing a custom macro area

Secure the custom macro area set up in the Configuration dialog box. Be sure to enter 0 (not to use handshaking) or 1 (to use handshaking) in the custom macro area that was set up.
Creating NC programs
If the process beginning or end signal changes from 0 to 1, a program for collecting result data is executed in the background of CIMPLICITY. The NC program must be created according to the interface signal timing chart.
- When the machining process begins Sequence number setting Workpiece ID setting O number setting NC
Process begin signal
NC
Confirmation-of-beginning signal PC (handshaking in use) - When the machining process ends Process end ID setting User area ID setting NC
Process end signal Confirmation-of-end signal (handshaking in use)
NC PC
- Caution Common to when handshaking is in use and not in use Only for when handshaking is in use
- 179 -
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
The following shows an example of an NC program for implementing this timing chart. The custom macro variables used in this example are assigned as listed below. To use different variables, change their numbers to those to be used, using the NC program.
Interface signal Custom macro variable #500 #501 #502 Range of values
Sequence number Beginning of the process End of the process Handshaking Confirmation of beginning Confirmation of end Workpiece ID O number Process end ID User area ID
#503 #504 #505 #506 #507 #508 #509
Any integer from 1 to 99999999 0 or 1 0 or 1 0: Handshaking not to be used. 1: Handshaking to be used 0 or 1, to be changed by i CELL 0 or 1, to be changed by i CELL Any integer from 1 to 99999999 Any integer from 1 to 9999 Any integer from 1 to 9999 Any integer from 1 to 9999
- Main program
O0101; G65 P201 D1 H101; - <1> NC statement for machining... G65 P301; - <2> M30; <1> Custom macro 1 (when the process begins) is called. D and H represent, respectively, the argument addresses of custom macro variables #7 and #11. In this example, 1 is assigned to #7, and 101, to #11. Custom macro 1 causes these specified values to be assigned to the workpiece ID and O number custom macro variables. <2> Custom macro 2 (when the process ends) is called. Before the calling, the process end ID and user area ID custom macro variable areas must be loaded with values.
- 180 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
2.BASIC FUNCTIONS
- Custom macro 1 (Process Begin)

O0201; #1=0; #2=10; IF[#500LT99999999]GOTO100; #500=0; N100; #500=#500+1; #506=#7; #507=#11; #501=1; IF[#503EQ1]GOTO300; G04X3.0; GOTO400; N200; G04X0.5; #1=#1+1; N300; IF[#504EQ1]GOTO400; IF[#1LT#2]GOTO200; #3000=1(START TIMEOUT); N400; #501=0; M99; Initialize a loop count. Loop count Check the value of the Sequence Number. If the sequence number is 99999999, reset it to 0. Increment the sequence number by 1. Assign the workpiece ID. Assign the O number. Turn on the process begin signal. Check whether to use handshaking. Wait for 3 seconds if handshaking is no in use.
Wait for 0.5 seconds. Increment the loop count by 1. Check the confirmation-of-beginning signal. Check the loop count. Error message Turn off the process begin signal.
- Custom macro 2 (when the process ends)

O0301; #1=0; #2=10; #502=1; IF[#503EQ1]GOTO300; G04X3.0; GOTO400; N200; G04X0.5; #1=#1+1; N300; IF[#505EQ1]GOTO400; IF[#1LT#2]GOTO200; #3000=2(END TIMEOUT); N400; #502=0; M99; Initialize the loop count. Loop count Turn on the process end signal. Check whether to use handshaking. Wait for 3 seconds if handshaking is not in use.
Wait for 0.5 seconds. Increment the loop count by 1. Check the confirmation-of-end signal. Check the loop count. Error message Turn off the process end signal.
2.12.3
Tool Life
Using the tool life function requires that the NC be provided with the tool life management option. With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, however, the tool life management function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1. There are not the tool life management function and option for that in Power Mate i.
- 181 -
3.MAIL
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
MAIL
To use the mail function of i CELL to send mail to an i-mode cellular phone or PC, set up the mail function as explained in this chapter.
NOTE The mail function is unavailable for a machine for which Reader/Puncher or FTP is used as the communication protocol.
- 182 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
3.MAIL
3.1
3.1.1
OVERVIEW
Trigger Point and Trigger Criteria
i CELL can send mail when the value of a CIMPLICITY point changes. A point for determining when to send mail is known as a trigger point. You can select one of the three criteria listed below to specify the way the trigger point value changes so that mail can be sent.
Trigger criterion Description Mail is sent when the trigger point value changes from a number other than 0 to 0. Mail is sent when the trigger point value changes from a number other than 0 to 0. Mail is sent when any change occurs at the trigger point value.
Zero Non Zero Non Zero Zero Value Change
Only one piece of mail can be sent from one trigger point. Two or more different pieces of mail can be set from one trigger point.
3.1.2
Mail Destinations
Mail from one trigger point can be sent to up to two destinations. The same mail is sent to the two destinations.
- 183 -
3.MAIL
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
3.1.3
Mail Message and Message Point

The mail message consists of fixed character strings and replacement character strings.
Character string type
Fixed character string
Replacement character string
Description Character strings specified when the mail function is set up become a mail message. Mail message is generated by replacing the replacement character strings specified when the mail function is set up with a machine number, machine name, and the point value corresponding to the tripper point that meets a trigger criterion.
The following table lists the replacement character strings.

Replacement character string Description
<N> <M> <L> <T> <P1> <P2> <P3>
This character string is replaced with the number of a machine at a trigger point. This character string is replaced with the name of a machine at a trigger point. This character string is replaced with the series number of a machine at a trigger point. This character string is replaced with a trigger point name. This character string is replaced with the point value specified at message point 1. This character string is replaced with the point value specified at message point 2. This character string is replaced with the point value specified at message point 3.
The term message point refers to that portion of a mail message which is replaced with a point value when the trigger criterion at the trigger point is satisfied. Up to three message points can be used for one mail message. Example: Assume the following settings. Machine number: 1 Machine name: MCN1 Trigger point: FNC00101.F_AL Trigger criterion: Zero Non Zero Mail message: Alarm <P1> occurred at <M> Message point 1: FNC00101.F_ALARM0 If an alarm condition occurs in the NC, the FNC00101.F_AL value changes from 0 to 1. At the same time, the value (such as 71) for the alarm number is set in FNC00101.F_ALARM0. When the trigger criterion for the trigger point is satisfied, the message point value is embedded in the mail message, thus causing the mail message Alarm 71 occurred at MCN1 to be sent. Up to 999 pieces of mail can be registered.
- 184 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
3.MAIL
3.1.4
Flow of Setting
After selecting Project from the menu bar and Property from the Project menu, turning on the mail function causes the item mail to appear in the tree. There are Mailer, Mail Configuration, and Send Test under Mail.
The setting items in this dialog box are explained below.

Mailer Mail Configuration Send Test
Sets items related to the mailer of your Internet provider. Specifies when each mail message is to be output. Allows you to conduct a test to check whether mail messages are sent correctly using the settings for Mailer.
So, you first make settings with Mailer and then check that mail is sent properly, using Send Test. You also specify Mail Configuration as required. Mailer lets you specify whether to enable mail transmission.
Mail transmission Description Mail is sent automatically according to the setting at Mail Configuration. The contents of Mail Configuration cannot be changed. No mail is sent. The contents of Mail Configuration can be changed.
Enable
Disable
To change the setting at Mail Configuration, follow this procedure. <1> With Mailer, disable mail transmission. <2> With Mail Configuration, change its contents as required. <3> With Mailer, enable mail transmission.
NOTE Note that if you forget to enable mail transmission after the contents of Mail Configuration is changed, mail transmission remains disabled.
- 185 -
3.MAIL
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
3.2
MAILER
Selecting Mail and Mailer from the tree displays the Mailer Configuration dialog box.

Send Mail
Mail Server
Mail Source Address
Turning on this item causes mail to be sent automatically according to the setting. It is impossible to change the setting for mail transmission. Turning off this item disables mail transmission. It is possible to change the setting for mail transmission. This box lets you set up the IP address or domain name of the mail server of your Internet provider. The IP address and domain name can each consist of up to 255 characters. This box lets you set up the mail address of the PC on which i CELL is running. The provider gives you the mail address (at which you can receive mail) when you enter a contract with an Internet provider. The mail address consists of up to 255 characters.
Mail sent from i CELL is sent to the addressee through the mail server specified at Mail Server.
- 186 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
3.MAIL
3.3
MAIL CONFIGURATION
Selecting Mail and Mail Configuration from the tree lists the currently registered settings for mail transmission in the grid.
To add a new mail transmission setting, select Edit from the menu bar, then New from the Edit menu. To delete a mail transmission setting, click a desired row in the grid, and select Edit from the menu bar, then Delete from the Edit menu. If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the Mail Send Configuration dialog box appears.
- 187 -
3.MAIL
SETTING
B-75074EN/04

Number Trigger Point
Trigger Criteria
Mail Destination 1 Mail Destination 2
Mail Message
Message Point 1 Message Point 2 Message Point 3
Enable
This box indicates a number for identifying the current mail transmission settings. It cannot be changed. This box lets you select the timing of mail transmission. Click the Select button, and select a desired point from those registered with CIMPLICITY. These text box lets you specify on what change to the trigger point value mail is to be sent. One of Zero Non Zero, Non Zero Zero, and Value Change can be selected. These boxes let you specify the addressee of mail. It can be selected from mail addresses previously saved to a text file. Each mail address can consist of up to 255 characters. This box lets you set up the body of mail. You can select it from those previously saved to a text file by clicking the Select button. These text boxes let you select a message point that is to be replaced with a point value in the mail message. Click the Select button to select one from a list of previously registered points. Clicking the Clear button clears the point setting. Mail is sent only when Enable is on. When Enable is off, no mail is sent even if the trigger point meets the trigger criteria.
If you use a message point in the Mail Send Configuration dialog box, be sure to assign a point name to the message point. You can previously save mail destinations and mail messages, respectively, to the text files listed below, so you can select from the files, using the dialog box.
Item Mail Destination Mail Message Name of text file for saving settings MailAddress.txt MailFormat.txt
These files must be placed in the following directory. FANUC\i CELL\CimProject\Fanuc\Data In either file, one data item must be confined within one line. Samples of these files are available after i CELL is installed. i CELL places no limit to the length of a mail message to be sent. Note, however, that some cellular phones have a limit to the length (in characters) of a mail message they can receive.
- 188 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
3.MAIL
Applying to all other machines

What you specify for a machine in the Mail Send Configuration dialog box can be applied to other machines. To put another way, once you made settings for one machine, you can change the machine number with the same settings retained so that they can be used for another machine. Click All Machine... button. The All Machine Configuration dialog box appears.
In this dialog box, the List of applicable machine box displays a list of machines to which what you specified in the Mail Send Configuration dialog box can be applied. Select a desired machine and click the Add button. The selected machine is moved to the List of target machine box. Once you moved all desired machines to the List of target machine box, click the OK button. Mail settings are created for these machines. Clicking the Cancel button brings you back to the Mail Send Configuration dialog box without changing anything.
- 189 -
3.MAIL
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Conditions for applying the settings of one machine to all other machines
For the settings of one machine to be applied to all other machines, the following conditions must be satisfied. <1> All points (trigger and message points) used in the Mail Send Configuration dialog box are in the format FNCxxxyy.<data-type>, and the same machine number is specified for all the points. <2> The data type for the points used in the Mail Send Configuration dialog box is registered for all other machines. In the format stated above, xxx is a three-digit machine number, and yy is a two-digit series number. <data-type> represents a data type that the NC has; for example, F_AL represents an NC alarm signal. In the Mail Send Configuration dialog box, a point that is not in this format can also be set up for a machine. In this case, however, its setting cannot be applied to other machines. Example) Assume the following points are registered for each machine.
Machine
1.MCN1 2.MCN2 3.MCN3
Point FNC00101.F_AL, FNC00101.F_ALARM0 FNC00201.F_AL, FNC00201.F_ALARM0 FNC00301.F_AL
If you already set up the trigger point FNC00101.F_ALand the message point FNC00101.F_ALARM0 in the Mail Send Configuration dialog box, the settings can be applied to the machines MCN1 and MCN2, but not to the machine MCN3 (because FNC00301.F_ALARM0 has not be registered for MCN3).
- 190 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
3.MAIL
3.4
SEND TEST
Selecting Mail and Send Test from the tree displays the Send Test dialog box. This dialog box causes mail to be sent no matter what is the status of the connected machine. However, the mail message is sent without being changed; any replacement character is not replaced with a value. Performing a mail transmission test requires specifying correct values in Mail Server and Mail Source Address in the Mailer Configuration dialog box in addition to the settings in the Send Test dialog box. No other setting is required. The operation of the Send Test dialog box does not depend on whether Send Mail in the Mailer Configuration dialog box is on.

Mail Destination 1 Mail Destination 2
Mail Message
These text boxes let you specify the addressee of mail. It can be selected from mail addresses previously saved to a text file. Each mail address can consist of up to 255 characters. This box lets you set up the body of mail. You can select it from those previously saved to a text file by clicking the Select button. If the mail message contains a replacement character string, it is sent together with the mail message. No value substitutes the replacement character string.
The settings you made in Mail Destination 1, Mail Destination 2, and Mail Message in this dialog box are saved to the same text files used with the Mail Send Configuration dialog box. After the settings are made, clicking the Send button sends the mail. The following table lists the error numbers that are displayed if an attempt to send mail fails, and their meanings.
Error number 1 4,5 6 7 8 9 Meaning Failure to connect to the mail server Failure to send the mail source address Failure to send the mail address of the destination Failure to start mail transmission Failure to send the mail message Failure to end mail transmission
- 191 -
4.WEB
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
WEB
To use the i CELL Web function based on the i-mode cellular phone, set up the Web function as explained in this chapter.
NOTE The Web function is unavailable for a machine for which Reader/Puncher or FTP is used as the communication protocol.
- 192 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
4.WEB
4.1
4.1.1
OVERVIEW
Web Screen Flow
i CELL can display Web screens on the i-mode cellular phone. The Web screens include the logon, machine selection, and machine detail screens.
FANUC
iCELL ID: KEY: 1.MCN1 2.MCN2 3.MCN3
iCELL
5/15 13:14:42 O O X
iCELL
1.MCN1
Status
ProgNo PartsNo
1
O0100 300
ENTER
Refresh Back
Refresh Back
<Machine detail screen>
<Logon screen>
<Machine selection screen>
When an i-mode cellular phone connects to i CELL, the logon screen first appears on the phone. When you enter your logon ID and logon key on the logon screen and press the ENTER key, the machine selection screen appears. The logon key you entered appears as asterisks. The machine selection screen displays the machine status with a mark. Selecting a machine displays the machine detail screen for the selected machine. The machine detail screen displays the point values for the selected machine according to its setting. i CELL updates its Web data once every 30 seconds or so. So the data displayed on the i-mode cellular phone is rewritten once every 30 seconds or so no matter how often you press the Update button on the i-mode cellular phone.
- 193 -
4.WEB
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
4.1.2
Logon Screen
On the logon screen, you enter your logon ID and logon key. Only when they match the values previously set up in the Web Initial Configuration dialog box, you can go to the next screen. The character strings to be displayed as the titles on the first two lines are also set up in the Web Initial Configuration dialog box.
FANUC
iCELL ID: KEY: Title 1 Title 2 Logon ID Logon key (to be set up on the Web Initial Configuration dialog box)
ENTER
<Logon screen>
4.1.3
Machine Selection Screen

The machine selection screen displays a list of machine numbers and names that can be displayed over the Web. It can also display the status of each machine using a mark.
iCELL
5/15 13:14:42 1.MCN1 2.MCN2 3.MCN3 O O X Status of each machine: Status of the display table Title 2 set up in the Web Initial Configuration dialog box Latest update time
Refresh Back
<Machine selection screen>
When you select machines, you are brought to the machine detail screen.
- 194 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
4.WEB
4.1.4
Machine Detail Screen

The machine detail screen displays the status of each machine. The status data is the point value of each machine. You can specify the point value that is to be displayed for each machine, using the Web Point Configuration dialog box.
iCELL
1.MCN1 Title 2 set up in the Web Initial Configuration dialog box Number and name of a machine selected on the machine selection screen Items and point values set up in the Web Point Configuration dialog box
Status
ProgNo PartsNo
1
O0100 300
Refresh Back
The item names, Status, ProgNo, and PartsNo, displayed in the above figure can be changed to those set up in the Item Name Configuration dialog box. For some items, character strings corresponding to point values, rather than point values themselves, can be displayed. The character strings are those set up on the display table setup screen.
iCELL
1.MCN1
Change the display character string for the item name: To be specified in the Item Name Configuration dialog box
Status
ProgNo PartsNo
Machining
O0100 300
Display with a character string rather than a value: To be specified in the Display Table Configuration dialog box
Refresh back
It is possible to display up to 20 point values per machine over the Web.
- 195 -
4.WEB
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
4.1.5
Setting Flow
After selecting Project from the menu bar, then Property from the Project menu, turning on the Web function displays the item Web in the tree. There are the items Web Initial Configuration, Point for Web, Item Name, and Display Table under Web.
In the Web Initial Configuration dialog box, set up the login screen. In the Web Point Configuration dialog box, set up points to be displayed for each machine. In addition, set up the item name and display table as required.
- 196 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
4.WEB
4.2
WEB INITIAL CONFIGURATION

Selecting Web and Web Initial Configuration from the tree displays the Web Initial Configuration dialog box.

Title 1
Title 2
Logon ID
Logon Key Logon Key Confirmation
This box lets you specify a character string to be displayed as a title on line 1 of the logon screen. The title can consist of up to four full-size or eight half-size characters. This box lets you specify a character string to be displayed as a title on line 2 of the logon screen and on line 1 of the machine selection screen. The title can consist of up to four full-size or eight half-size characters. This box lets you specify a logon ID that is to be entered on the logon screen of the i-mode cellular phone. The logon ID can consist of up to eight half-size characters. It can contain no full-size character. These boxes let you specify a logon key that is to be entered on the logon screen of the i-mode cellular phone. The value you entered appears as asterisks. Be sure to enter the same character string in both boxes. A logon key can consist of up to eight half-size characters. It can contain no full-size character.
- 197 -
4.WEB
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
4.3
POINT FOR WEB

Selecting Web and Point for Web from the tree lists the settings of the currently registered Web points in the grid.
Each row in the grid corresponds to one machine. The grid can contain as many rows as the maximum number of machines set up with Property in the Project menu. If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the Web Point Configuration dialog box appears.

Machine Machine Name Display
Points for Status to GoodShots and Variable0 to Variable9
These boxes display the machine number and name selected from the grid. Neither machine number nor name can be changed here. Turning on this item causes point values to be displayed over the Web. Turning it off disables them from being displayed. These list boxes let you select points to be displayed over the Web. Selecting <NONE> for an item disables the item from being displayed on the machine detail screen.
- 198 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
Display Table for Status and Variable0 to Variable9
4.WEB
Turning on Display Table causes a character string corresponding to a point value set up in the respective display tables to be displayed on the Web machine detail screen. Turning it off causes the point value itself to be displayed on the machine detail screen.
The following table lists the items whose point values are converted into the format of individual items for display on the Web screen.
Item
ProgNo
SeqNo
RunTime CutRate CycleTime
Display format Oxxxx where xxxx is a point value. If the digits in the value are fewer than four digits, the unoccupied digits are filled with zeros. Nxxxxx where xxxxx is a point value. If the digits in the value are fewer than five digits, the unoccupied digits are filled with zeros. Displayed in the format hh:mm with the point value assumed to be the number of seconds. xxx% where xxx is a point value. x.xx where x.xx is a point value.
Clicking the Change all to <NONE> button resets all points to <NONE>. Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the Web Point Configuration dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discards what you entered. If a point value is meaningless (for example, if the NC is not turned on), *** appears on the machine detail screen.
- 199 -
4.WEB
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
4.4
ITEM NAME
Selecting Web and Item Name from the tree lists display names for the currently set items in the grid. Character strings listed under Display Name are displayed as item names on the machine detail screen over the Web.
If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the Display Name Configuration dialog box appears.
The Display Name box lets you enter an item name to be displayed on the Web screen. The item name can consist of up to four full-size or eight half-size characters. Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the Display Name Configuration dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without saving what you entered.
- 200 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
4.WEB
4.5
DISPLAY TABLE
Selecting Web and Display Table from the tree displays the Status and Variable0 to Variable9 display tables under Display Table. Selecting the display table in which you want to change settings lists the settings in the grid.
If you turn on Display Table in the Web Point Configuration dialog box, the character strings in the display names corresponding to point values 0 to 9 are displayed as item values on the Web screen. If a point value is not 0 to 9, (NSV) is displayed on the machine detail screen; NSV stands for No Such Value. Only if Status is selected, its display name and mark are displayed. If Variable0 to Variable9 are selected, only their display names are displayed. The value of the mark for Status is used to display the status of each machine on the machine selection screen. If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, the Display Data Configuration dialog box appears.
This dialog box lets you specify the values of a display name and mark. The display name can consist of up to four full-size or eight half-size characters. The mark can consist of one full-size or up to two half-size characters. Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the Display Data Configuration dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button closes dialog box without saving what you entered.
- 201 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
5
5.1
CIMPLICITY VIEWER
This chapter describes how to use i CELL on the CIMPLICITY viewer.
OVERVIEW
You can also use all i CELL functions on the CIMPLICITY viewer. Information on an NC connected to the server PC can be displayed on the viewer PC. Before using i CELL on the CIMPLICITY viewer, you need to set the CIMPLICITY viewer using the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen. Set required items on both the server and viewer PCs.
NOTE Before using the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen, be sure to create a backup of the entities in the i CELL installation directory.
Note on installation
On the installation component select screen, the buttons indicating the server and viewer components of the CIMPLICITY viewer are displayed. When you want to install i CELL on the server PC of the CIMPLICITY viewer or does not want to use the CIMPLICITY viewer, select the server component. When you want to install i CELL on the viewer PC of the CIMPLICITY viewer, select the viewer component.
Network configuration
To use the CIMPLICITY viewer for i CELL, both the server and viewer PCs must be able to communicate with NCs using FOCAS2/Ethernet. When you want to use a router between the server and viewer PCs, you need to set up IP routing. See Section 3.4, NETWORK CONFIGURATION, in Part I, GENERAL, for details. After setting up the CIMPLICITY viewer for i CELL, confirm that NCs can be connected from the viewer PC according to the procedure described in Subsection 5.4.1, Checking Communication between the Viewer PC and Each NC.
- 202 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
5.2
5.2.1
PREPARATION
This section describes the conditions for operating i CELL on the CIMPLICITY viewer and items prepared for setup.
Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and Communication

This subsection describes how to check the conditions for operating the CIMPLICITY viewer and how to make basic network setup for server and viewer PCs. To use the CIMPLICITY viewer for i CELL, the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen is used to set items. This subsection describes the items to be checked and set before the use of the screen. This subsection aims to confirm that server and viewer PCs can communicate with each other.
CIMPLICITY point count

For the server PC, a system with at least 75 points is required. A 50-point system does not support WebView or CIMPLICITY viewer. For the viewer PC with a server license, a system with at least 75 points is also required. For the viewer PC with a viewer license, communication with a PC with any license is enabled. On a system for which no license is given, both server and viewer PCs can be used only within 4 days after installation.
Computer name and work group

Each computer name must consist of up to 9 characters and cannot contain a blank character or any 2-byte character such as kanji. (Valid examples: SERVER1, VIEWER1) Computers must belong to the same work group. When a domain server is used, the computers must belong to the same domain. Check the computer name and work group as follows: (1) Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel] [Network] and display the [Identification] tab. (2) Check the computer name and work group. If any requirement is not satisfied, change the computer name or work group. Refer to Windows Setup Guide for explanations about how to change them.
- 203 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocol

The TCP/IP network protocol needs to have already been incorporated into both of the server PC and viewer PC. Moreover, when CIMPLICITY HMI Version4.0 is used on Windows NT4.0, the NetBEUI protocol needs to have already been incorporated into both of the server PC and viewer PC. Check if these protocols are incorporated, as described below.
- For Windows NT
(1) Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel] [Network] and display the [Protocols] tab. (2) On the [Protocols] tab, check TCP/IP Protocol is displayed as network protocols. (3) When using CIMPLICITY HMI 4.0, check also that "NetBEUI Protocol" is indicated.
- For Windows 2000 or Windows XP

(1) Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel] [Network and Dial-up Connections] [Local Area Connection] [Property] and display the [General] tab. (2) Check Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is displayed as components and whether the check marks for these items are on. (With Windows 2000 or later, CIMPLICITY HMI 4.0 is no longer used. So, whether the NetBEUI protocol is installed need not be checked.) If the TCP/IP or NetBEUI protocol is not installed, install it. Refer to Windows Setup Guide for explanations about how to install them.
Subnet mask
For the TCP/IP, all of server and viewer PCs and NCs must use the same subnet mask. Check the subnet mask of each PC as follows.
- For Windows NT
(1) Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel] [Network] and display the [Protocols] tab. (2) On the [Protocols] tab, select TCP/IP Protocol among the displayed network protocols and click the [Property] button. (3) Check [Subnet mask].

(1) Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel] [Network and Dial-up Connections] [Local Area Connection] [Property] and display the [General] tab. (2) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) among the displayed components and click the [Property] button. (3) Check [Subnet mask].
- 204 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
If a different subnet mask is used, change it. Refer to Windows Setup Guide for explanations about how to change a subnet mask. Refer to the operator's manual for the Ethernet board in use for explanations about how to set the subnet mask for an NC.
When a router is used between the server and viewer PCs

- Setting the router IP address
When using a router between the server and viewer PCs, you need to set the default gateway address for each PC and the router IP address for each NC. Set the IP address of the router as the default gateway address and router IP address. Because similarly to the server PC, the viewer PC uses FOCAS2/Ethernet to communicate with NCs, you need to set up IP routing for the router.
Network A
Communication using FOCAS2/Ethernet
IP routing setup is required.
IP address for network A: 192.168.1.99 NC
Router
Server PC
IP address for network B: 192.168.2.99 Network B
Viewer PC IP address 192.168.1.30 Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 Default gateway address 192.168.1.99 IP address 192.168.1.31 Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 Router IP address 192.168.1.99
IP address 192.168.2.40 Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 Default gateway address 192.168.2.99
Setting example for a network configuration in which a router is used
- 205 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER - Adding items in the hosts file
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
When using a router between the server and viewer PCs, you also need to edit the hosts file. The hosts file is in System32\drivers\etc in the Windows installation directory (for example, C:\WinNT). In the hosts file on the server PC, add the computer name and IP address of the viewer PC. When multiple viewer PCs are used, add the computer name and IP address of each viewer PC. In the hosts file on the viewer PC, add the computer name and IP address of the server PC. You should find setting 127.0.0.1 localhost in the host file. Add the computer name and IP address just under the line. Edit the hosts file with a text editor such as Notepad. Be careful not to modify or delete any item that has been set. It is desirable to create a copy of the host file in the same directory before editing.
Network A
Computer name of the server PC SERVER01 IP address 192.168.1.30 Items added to the hosts file on the server PC 192.168.2.40 192.168.2.41 VIEWER01 VIEWER02
NC
Router
Network B
Computer name of viewer PC <1> VIEWER01 IP address 192.168.2.40
Computer name of viewer PC <2> VIEWER02 IP address 192.168.2.41
Items added to the hosts file on each of viewer PCs <1> and <2> (same line for <1> and <2>) 192.168.1.30
Example of adding items to the hosts files
SERVER01
- 206 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
Checking communication between the server and viewer PCs

After completion of setup described above, confirm that the server and viewer PCs can communicate with each other. Activate the i CELL FethDgn program and confirm that the server and viewer PCs can communicate with each other using their computer names. (1) First, confirm that the viewer PC can be connected from the server PC. Execute Ethernet Diagnose in program group CIMPLICITY i CELL on the server PC. (2) The following screen appears:
(3) Enter the name of the destination viewer PC in the [IpAddr] text field on the screen and click the [Ping] button. When the settings are correct, Reply is displayed as shown below:
(4) In this example, the viewer PC name is VIEWER01 and the IP address is 192.168.2.40. For a communication test, confirm that the correct IP address of the viewer PC is displayed for Reply. When multiple viewer PCs are connected, check communication with each viewer PC. (5) Then, confirm that the server PC can be connected from the viewer PC. On the viewer PC, activate the FethDgn program as described in step (1).
- 207 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
(6) Enter the name of the destination server PC in the [IpAddr] text field on the screen and click the [Ping] button. When the settings are correct, Reply is displayed as shown in the figure in step (3). Confirm that the IP address of the server PC is displayed for Reply.
Troubleshooting
If the server and viewer PCs cannot communicate with each other, either of the following messages appears: (A) Bad IP address (Get Host Name) XXXXXX: No IP address corresponding to input computer name XXXXXX can be obtained. (B) ICMP_Error:0 An IP address corresponding to input computer name XXXXXX was obtained, but communication with the IP address is disabled. Take action for each message as follows. (A) For "Bad IP address (Get Host Name) XXXXXX" (1) Check that the input destination computer name is correct. (2) Enter the IP address corresponding to the destination computer name in [IpAddr] and click the [Ping] button again. If communication is disabled with the computer name, but enabled with the IP address, add the computer name and IP address of the communication destination to the hosts file, restart the personal computer, then perform a communication test again. See "Adding items in the hosts file" in "When a router is used between the server and viewer PCs." (3) If the error cannot be removed by the above operation, a software setting error and/or hardware error may occur. Check the following items: Computer names and work group name Whether the TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocol are installed Whether the correct IP address and subnet mask are set Whether the hub and Ethernet cable are connected properly Whether when the used Ethernet cable is connected to another network in which communication is enabled, communication is also enabled When a router is used, whether the IP address of the router is set for the default gateway on each PC and router IP address on each NC. See "Setting the router IP address" in "When a router is used between the server and viewer PCs." (B) For "ICMP_Error:0" Check items listed in step (3) in (A).
- 208 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
5.2.2
Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories

To use i CELL on the CIMPLICITY viewer, the server and viewer PCs need to share CIM files, various types of setup files, and NC program directories. To share directories, one or two available drives for sharing are required on the server and viewer PCs. Before setting items on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen, you need to allocate required available drives.
5.2.2.1
Available drive required for sharing the i CELL installation directory

The CIM files and various types of setup files are all stored in the i CELL installation directory. The server and viewer PCs share this directory. To share this directory, one available drive is always required on the server and viewer PCs.
NOTE A shared drive with the same name is required on the server and viewer PCs. When specifying R: for the drive for sharing the i CELL installation directory on the server PC, create a drive named R: on the viewer PC. Before setting a drive on the server PC, therefore, check that a drive with the same name is available on the viewer PC.
Just by allocating an available drive with the same name on the server and viewer PCs, the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen automatically performs directory sharing and mapping to the drive.
- 209 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
5.2.2.2
Available drive required for sharing the NC program root directory

The directory containing NC programs must also be shared between the server and viewer PCs. Because different directories for storing NC programs can be set for different machines, create a parent directory containing these directories and make the PCs share the parent directory (called this parent directory "NC program root directory" below).
NOTE To use the CIMPLICITY viewer, create the NC program directory for each machine in one NC program root directory. When you do not use the CIMPLICITY viewer, you do not need to create the directory as above.
The number of drives for sharing the NC program root directory differs depending on the location of the NC program root directory.
(1) When the NC program root directory is in the i CELL installation directory
When the NC program root directory is created in the i CELL installation directory as recommended in "Configuration of the directories where i CELL and the related information are installed" in Section 3.1, "INSTALLATION," in Part II, "INSTALLATION," in the i CELL manual, no drive is required for the NC root directory. The number of drives with the same names that are prepared on the server and viewer PCs is, therefore, one.
A drive for sharing the i CELL installation directory is required.
No shared drive is required because the NC program root directory is in the i CELL installation directory. NC data directory for NC 001 NC data directory for NC 002
In this case, one drive for sharing the i CELL installation directory is required on the server and viewer PCs. For example, when the server PC is SERVER01, a shared drive is set on the server and viewer PCs on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen as shown below:
- 210 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
NOTE A shared drive with the same name is required on the server and viewer PCs. When specifying R: for the drive for sharing the i CELL installation directory on the server PC, set a drive named R: on the viewer PC. Before setting a drive on the server PC, therefore, check that a drive with the same name is available on the viewer PC.
(2) When the NC program root directory is not in the i CELL installation directory
The method recommended in "Configuration of the directories where i CELL and the related information are installed" in Section 3.1, "INSTALLATION," in Part II, "INSTALLATION," in the i CELL manual may not be used, and the NC program root directory may not be in the i CELL installation directory or may be in another drive. In this case, a drive for sharing the NC program root directory is required. The number of drives with the same names that are prepared on the server and viewer PCs is, therefore, two.
A drive for sharing the i CELL installation directory is required.
A drive for sharing the NC program root directory is required. NC data directory for NC 001 NC data directory for NC 002
For example, when the server PC is SERVER01, shared drives are set on the server and viewer PCs on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen as shown below:
NOTE A shared drive with the same name is required on the server and viewer PCs. When specifying R: for the drive for sharing the i CELL installation directory on the server PC, set a drive named R: on the viewer PC. This also applies to the NC program root directory. Before setting a drive on the server PC, therefore, check that a drive with the same name is available on the viewer PC.
- 211 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Exclusive control on NC program operation

You can also operate the NC Program Management screen on the viewer PC, but the NC programs are stored on the server PC. Note that on the viewer PC, you operate an NC program shared on the network using the NC Program Management screen. The NC Program Management screen has a function for editing an NC program using the selected editor. At the installation of i CELL, Windows Notepad is selected as the editor. Because this editor has no exclusive control function, however, on the viewer PC, you can edit or delete an NC program edited, downloaded, or uploaded on the server PC. Change Notepad to an editor with an exclusive control function.
Note on preparation on Windows 2000 and Windows XP

If the NC program root directory is not in the i CELL installation directory or is in a drive other than that contains the i CELL installation directory, you need to add the right to access the entities in the NC program root directory. Add the access right using the following procedure: <1> Select [Start] [Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt] to display the command prompt. <2> Move to the NC program root directory. Example) When the NC program root directory is "D:\NcData", enter "cd /d D:\NcData". <3> Execute the following command: cacls nc-program-root-directory /t /e /g everyone:f Example) "cacls D:\NcData /t /e /g everyone:f" when the NC program root directory is "D:\NcData"
- 212 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
5.2.3
Setting for Sharing the Server PC (Required When Windows XP Is Used)

When Windows XP is used, a setting for sharing the i CELL installation directory and NC program directory must be made before making settings on the CIMPLICITY viewer setting screen with the i CELL server PC. Make a setting for sharing the directories according to the procedure below. With the i CELL viewer PC, the work described below is not required. In the description below, it is assumed that i CELL is installed on a PC ([Server01]) that belongs not to a domain but to a work group and is not connected to the Internet. If another network configuration is employed, make a setting according to the help information of Windows XP. 1 Check the work group to which the computer belongs. From the Start menu, click [Settings] [Control Panel] [System] to display the System Properties. Next, click the [Computer Name] tab then note down the work group.
After noting down the work group, click <Cancel> to close the dialog box.
- 213 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
2
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
Display the i CELL installation directory with Explorer then right-click to display the property menu. When the property menu is displayed, select the "Sharing" tab then execute the "Network Setup Wizard".
When the "Network Setup Wizard" is executed, the dialog box shown below is displayed. Click <Next>.
- 214 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, click <Next>.
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Other] then click <Next>.
- 215 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
5
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [This computer belongs to a network that does not have an Internet connection] then click <Next>.
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check the name of the computer used then click <Next>.
- 216 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
Enter the work group name noted down in step 1 in [Workgroup name] then click <Next>.
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check the displayed information then click <Next>.
- 217 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
9
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Just finish the wizard; I don't need to run the wizard on other computers] then check <Next>.
10
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, click <Finish>.
- 218 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
11
When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Share this folder on the network].
After checking [Share this folder on the network], check [Allow network users to change my files] then click <OK>. The share name need not be modified.
This completes the setting for sharing the i CELL installation directory.
- 219 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
12
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
If the NC program directory is not included in the i CELL installation directory, make a setting for sharing the NC program directory as well. The Network Setup Wizard has already been executed, so it is easy to make a setting for sharing the NC program directory. Display the NC program directory with Explorer. Next, right-click then click [Sharing and security]. When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Share this folder on the network] and [Allow network users to change my files] then click <OK>.
- 220 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
5.3
SETTING
This section describes the items you set using the i CELL "CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen" on the server and viewer PCs.
5.3.1
Procedure for Setting the Server PC

NOTE The user who makes the setting described in this subsection must have the administrator privilege.
Terminating the i CELL project
If the i CELL screen is displayed, use the [Quit] button on the main menu to close the screen. If the button at the upper-right corner of the CimView screen is clicked or [Quit] in the [File] menu on the CimView screen is executed to close the screen, you cannot make normal setting. Then, terminate the i CELL project. When you want to change an item that has already been set on the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen, close the i CELL screen and terminate the i CELL project on all viewer PCs.
Backup
Execute Backup & Restore in program group CIMPLICITY i CELL and create a backup file with specifying i CELL All.
Checking the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operation

Check that the server and viewer PCs satisfy the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operation, referencing Subsection 5.2.1, "Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and Communication."
Allocating available drives

Allocate available drives, referencing Subsection 5.2.2, "Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories."
Setting for sharing the server PC (when Windows XP is used)

Make a setting for sharing the i CELL installation directory and NC program directory according to Subsection 5.2.3, "Setting for Sharing the Server PC".
Starting the viewer PC

A communication test with the viewer PC will be performed during setup of the server PC on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen. Start the viewer PC in advance.
- 221 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
CIMPLICITY Options window on the server PC

Activate CIMPLICITY Options in HMI in program group CIMPLICITY. On the Startup Options tab, check that the [Accept connections] check box is on.
i CELL project options
Execute i CELL Project in program group CIMPLICITY i CELL. Then, select Project Properties to display the Project Properties window. On the Options tab, check that the [Enable project broadcast] check box is on.
- 222 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
Operation on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen on the server PC

(1) Open the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen. Execute CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP in program group CIMPLICITY i CELL.
<1> <2> <3>
<1>
(2) Check the TCP/IP setting using the ping command. Check that the server PC can communicate with the viewer PC using the TCP/IP. A. Execute the [ping] command from the [Tools] menu. The FethDgn program is activated. B. Enter the computer name of the viewer PC in [IP Addr] of the FethDgn program. C. Click the [Ping] button of the FethDgn program. When the server PC can communicate with the viewer PC, the IP address of the viewer PC is displayed for "Reply" as shown below:
If "Reply" is not displayed, check the setting so that "Reply" is displayed, referencing Subsection 5.2.1, "Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and Communication." D. To communicate with multiple viewer PCs, check communication with all viewer PCs. (3) Select the drive for the i CELL installation directory. Use the [Drive] combo box (<1>) to select the drive to be used for the i CELL installation directory.
- 223 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
(4) Select the NC program root directory. Click the <2> button and select the NC program root directory from the directory list. The NC program root directory must be the parent directory of the default directory of each machine that is set on the i CELL Configuration dialog box. Example) When the following directories are set on the i CELL Configuration dialog box Machine 1 C:\Program Files\Fanuc\NcData\01 Machine 2 C:\Program Files\Fanuc\NcData\02 Set C:\Program Files\Fanuc\NcData as the NC program root directory. When the selected NC program root directory is in the i CELL installation directory, step (5) is not required.
NOTE To change an NC program default directory, use the following procedure: <1> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP, cancel the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for the server and viewer PCs. <2> On the i CELL Configuration dialog box, change the default directory. <3> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP, make the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for the server and viewer PCs again.
(5) Select the drive for the NC program root directory. Use the [Drive] combo box (<3>) to select the drive to be used for the "NC program root directory." (6) Click the [Set] button (<4>) to make what you specified effective. The settings that are made once are effective until they are canceled. Restart the server PC and log in. The items related to sharing are set again based on the settings. (7) Check that the drives can be shared.
- For Windows NT
Activate Explorer and execute [Map Network Drive] from the [Tools] menu. The server PC name is displayed in the [Shared Directories] tree. Click the server PC name.

Activate Explorer, execute [Map Network Drive] from the [Tools] menu, and click the <Browse> button. A list of work groups is displayed. Expand the work group to which the server and viewer PCs belong, then the server PC.
- 224 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
When i CELL_InstallDir and i CELL_NcDataRoot are displayed, the drives are shared. If the setting for the NC program root directory is not made, however, i CELL_NcDataRoot is not displayed. In the example shown in the following figure, the setting is made on the server PC SERVER01 and viewer PC VIEWER01 that belong to work group "FA-SYSTEM." Note that to use the CIMPLICITY viewer, the server and viewer PCs must belong to the same work group. The CIMPLICITY viewer can be used only when the server and viewer PCs are displayed under the same work group as shown in the figure. (When the PCs are managed using a domain, they must belong to the same domain.)
- For Windows NT
- 225 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
5.3.2
Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC

NOTE The user who makes the setting described in this subsection must have the administrator privilege.
Terminating the i CELL project
If the i CELL screen is displayed, use the [Quit] button on the main menu to close the screen. If the ( button at the upper right corner of the CimView screen is clicked or [Quit] in the [File] menu on the CimView screen is executed to close the screen, you cannot make normal setting. Then, terminate the i CELL project. When you want to change an item that has already been set on the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen, also terminate the server PC.
Backup
Execute Backup & Restore in program group CIMPLICITY i CELL and create a backup file with specifying i CELL All.
Checking the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operation

Check that the server and viewer PCs satisfy the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operation, referencing Subsection 5.2.1, "Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and Communication."
Allocating available drives

Allocate available drives, referencing Subsection 5.2.2, "Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories."
Starting the server PC

A communication test with the server PC will be performed during setup of the viewer PC on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen. Start the server PC in advance.
Login name and password to connect the server PC

To connect the viewer PC to the server PC, the login name and password granted by the server PC are required. Contact a system administrator.
- 226 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
Operation on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen on the viewer PC

(1) Open the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen. Execute CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP in program group CIMPLICITY i CELL.
<1> <3> <4>
<2> <5>
<6> <7> <8>
(2) Enter the i CELL server PC name. Enter the name (not the IP address) of the i CELL server PC in the [Server PC Name] text box (<1>). (3) When there is a router between the server and viewer PCs, check [Connect to Server PC's C4 Service] in the [Option] menu. (4) Check the TCP/IP setting using the ping command. Check that the viewer PC can communicate with the server PC using the TCP/IP. A. Click the [Server Ping] button (<2>). B. When the viewer PC can communicate with the server PC, the IP address of the server PC is displayed for "Reply" as shown below:
If "Reply" is not displayed, check the setting so that "Reply" is displayed, referencing Subsection 5.2.1, "Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and Communication."
- 227 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
(5) Enter the login user name. Enter the user name for logging in to the i CELL server PC in the [Connect As] text box (<3>). (6) Enter the login password. Enter the password for logging in to the i CELL server PC in the [Password] text box (<4>). (7) Click the [Display Server PC Information] button (<5>). When the viewer PC can be connected to the server PC, information set on the server PC is displayed in <6> and <7>. <6>: Name of the shared drive for the i CELL installation directory <7>: Name of the shared drive for the NC program root directory If these names are not displayed, invalid data is entered in step (2), (5), or (6). Check the data. (8) When a router is used between the server and viewer PCs, check [Connect to Server PC's C4 Service] in the [Option] menu. (9) Click the [Set] button (<8>) to make what you specified effective. (10) The settings that are made once are effective until they are canceled. Restart the viewer PC and log in. The items related to sharing are set again based on the settings. When the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen is opened on the viewer PC set once, operations in steps (2), (5), and (6) are performed automatically.
NOTE To change an NC program default directory, use the following procedure: <1> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP, cancel the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for the server and viewer PCs. <2> On the i CELL Configuration dialog box, change the default directory. <3> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP, make the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for the server and viewer PCs again.
- 228 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
5.4
CHECKS
This section describes the checks required after CIMPLICITY viewer setup. If the CIMPLICITY viewer does not operate normally, review the settings.
NOTE The items checked in this section contain the settings made in Sections 5.1 to 5.3. Start checking after completion of all settings.
5.4.1
Checking Communication between the Viewer PC and Each NC

When the CIMPLICITY viewer function is used with i CELL, the viewer PC needs to communicate with NCs using the TCP/IP. Check that the viewer PC can communicate with NCs using the following procedure. (1) Activate the FethDgn program on the viewer PC. On the viewer PC, execute Ethernet Diagnose in program group "CIMPLICITY i CELL." (2) On the displayed screen, click the [Ping] tab and enter the IP address of a destination NC in the [IpAddr] text field and click the [Ping] button. When the settings are correct, "Reply" is displayed as shown below:
Check that the IP address of the NC is displayed for "Reply." If the above messages are not displayed, check the following items: On the server PC, activate the FethDgn program and perform the same check. If the above messages are not displayed also on the server PC, make the settings on the server PC and subsequent settings again. When there is a router between the server and viewer PCs, the router gateway setting is required for the viewer PC and NCs.
- 229 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
(3) Click the [FOCAS2] tab on the screen and click the [GetNcInfo] button. When the settings are correct, NC identification information is displayed as shown below:
If NC identification information is not displayed, check the following item: On the server PC, activate the FethDgn program and perform the same check. If NC identification information is not displayed also on the server PC, make the settings on the server PC and subsequent settings again. (4) If "Enable C4 Server" is checked in communication setting of i CELL, click the [C4 Api] tab on the screen then click the [Test] button. When the settings are correct, "Live=True" is displayed as shown below:
- 230 -
B-75074EN/04
SETTING
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
If "Live=True" is not displayed, check the following items: On the server PC, activate the FethDgn program and perform the same check. If "Live=True" is not displayed also on the server PC, make the settings on the server PC and subsequent settings again. When there is a router between the server and viewer PCs, you need to check [Connect to Server PC's C4 Services] in the [Option] menu during "CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP" operation on the viewer PC. Check the operation in step (8) in "Operation on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen on the viewer PC" in Subsection 5.3.2, "Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC."
5.4.2
Checking CIMPLICITY Viewer Communication

(1) On the server PC Execute the i CELL project. You do not need to activate [Main Menu]. (2) On the viewer PC From the Start menu, select Programs CIMPLICITY HMI CIMPLICITY Options to open the CIMPLICITY Options screen. Then, select the Projects tab and click the [Start as viewer] button. "VIEWER" is displayed in the [Running projects] field. (3) On the viewer PC From the Start menu, select Programs CIMPLICITY HMI Point Control Panel. (4) On the viewer PC On the Point Control Panel, select Edit Add Points. Enter the name of the server PC in the [Project] text box on the "Select a Point" screen. (5) Enter "$PROJECT" in the [Point ID] text box on the "Select a Point" screen and click the [Browse] button. The $PROJECT point of the project running on the server PC is displayed at the bottom of the screen as an option. Double-click the point. (6) When "CIMPROJECT" is displayed as the value of the $PROJECT point, communication between the server and viewer PCs is performed.
- 231 -
5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER
SETTING
B-75074EN/04
5.5
EXECUTION
This section describes how to execute the CIMPLICITY viewer on i CELL. (1) On the server PC, execute the i CELL project and [Main Menu]. (2) On the viewer PC, execute Main Menu in program group CIMPLICITY i CELL.
NOTE When the CIMPLICITY viewer is used with Windows XP, the NC program management screen cannot be used with the viewer PC until the main menu is executed even if a project is executed on the server PC. When the CIMPLICITY viewer is used with Windows 2000 or Windows NT, the NC program management screen can be used with the viewer PC if a project is executed on the server PC.
5.6
CANCELING THE SETTINGS

To cancel the settings, use the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen. Execute "CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP" in program group "CIMPLICITY i CELL."
NOTE The user who cancels the settings must have the administrator privilege. Note the following points when canceling the settings. <1> Stop i CELL. Also stop the CIMPLICITY project. <2> Before canceling the settings on the server PC, cancel the settings on the viewer PC. <3> Before canceling the settings, confirm that the shared drives, iCELL_InstallDir and iCELL_NcDataRoot are not accessed. Also confirm that the contents of the shared drives are not displayed using Explorer.
Procedure for canceling the CIMPLICITY viewer settings on the viewer PC

Click the Unset button. The settings are canceled.
Procedure for canceling the CIMPLICITY viewer settings on the server PC

Click the Unset button. The settings are canceled.
- 232 -
IV. OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
1.OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the methods of activating and terminating the i CELL project of CIMPLICITY and the method of operating each i CELL screen. For the method of remote support operation, refer to the operator's manual of remote support. The table below indicates the procedure for activating, operating, and terminating the i CELL, and the chapters and sections of the manual to be referenced.
Procedure Activation 1 2 Description Activation of the i CELL project Activation of the main menu Relevant chapter/section of the manual (part for operation) 2.1 ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT 3.2 ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU 3. MAIN MENU 4. OVERVIEW MENU 5. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 6. MACHINING RESULTS 7. WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS 8. NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION 9. NC MAINTENANCE 10. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 11. ALARMS AND WARNINGS 3.3 TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU 2.2 TERMINATING THE i CELL PROJECT
Operation
Operation of various screens
4 Termination 5
Termination of the main menu Termination of the i CELL project
- 235 -
2.SCREEN OPERATION
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
SCREEN OPERATION
This chapter describes the method of activating the i CELL project, the structure for calling each screen, and the name and operation of each component common to the screens.
- 236 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
2.SCREEN OPERATION
2.1
ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT

The i CELL screens are created on CIMPLICITY. Before the i CELL screens can be displayed and executed, the i CELL project created by FANUC must be operating on CIMPLICITY. The method of activating the i CELL project is described below. <1> Choose the [Start] button on the menu of Windows. Next, choose [Programs], then activate the [iCELL Project] icon of [CIMPLICITY iCELL]. The CIMPLICITY workbench shown below appears. <2> Check the state of the toolbar on the CIMPLICITY workbench. (1) When the CIMPLICITY workbench is displayed as shown button below, the i CELL project is terminated. Click the to execute the i CELL project.
Check here.
When the project selection dialog box appears, click the <Start> button to start the project.
NOTE Clicking the Cancel button also displays the main menu. In this case, however, the CIMPLICITY project is not started, so that the screen does not operate normally.
When the i CELL project is activated, the login dialog box appears. Enter the following information: User ID: ADMINISTRATOR Password: None After user ID and password input, click the <OK> button.
- 237 -
2.SCREEN OPERATION
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
(2) When the CIMPLICITY workbench is displayed as shown below, the i CELL project is already executed. So, activate the main menu according to <4> below.
<4> Activate the main menu. For the method of main menu activation, see Section 3.2, "ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU". After main menu activation, the CIMPLICITY workbench may be terminated or may continue being displayed.
Check here.
2.2
TERMINATING THE i CELL PROJECT

This section describes the method of terminating the i CELL project. <1> Terminate the main menu. For the method of main menu termination, see Section 3.3, "TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU". <2> Choose the [Start] button on the menu of Windows. Next, choose [Programs], then activate the [iCELL Project] icon of [CIMPLICITY iCELL]. The CIMPLICITY workbench shown below appears. <3> Check the state of the toolbar on the CIMPLICITY workbench. (1) When the CIMPLICITY workbench is displayed as shown below, the i CELL project is terminated. No operation is required.
(2) When the CIMPLICITY workbench is displayed as shown below, the i CELL project is activated. Click the button to terminate the i CELL project.
Check here.
<3> Terminate the CIMPLICITY workbench.
Check here.
- 238 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
2.SCREEN OPERATION
2.3
SWITCHING AMONG THE SCREENS

This section describes the method of switching among the screens.
Screen configuration
The screen configuration related to screen switching only is briefly described below.
<1> Function selection tabs
<3> Previousscreen button
<2> Screen switch buttons
<1> Function selection tabs A function selection tab is used to call the corresponding function. When you click a tab, the screen for managing the selected function is displayed. When a selected function has multiple screens, a submenu for calling a desired screen is displayed. <2> Screen switch buttons When the function corresponding to a selected tab has multiple screens, these buttons are displayed. For example, the operation monitoring tab involves the machining result screen, process result screen, and the tool life management screen. When the operation monitoring tab is selected, the machining result screen first appears. To display the process result screen, click the [Proc. Result] button. <3> Previous-screen button This button returns the screen display to the previous screen.
- 239 -
2.SCREEN OPERATION
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Two methods of switching

Each screen is divided into functions. On each screen, a machine number to be displayed can be selected. Two methods are available for switching the screen display. One method uses the overview menu. The procedure is: <1> From the overview menu, select a machine to be displayed. <2> When a machine is selected, the screen list buttons appear. Choose a desired one from the screen list buttons. The other method uses the function selection tabs. The procedure is: <1> Select the tab of a desired function. <2> On the displayed screen, select a machine to be displayed.
Switching using the overview menu

By using an example of displaying the workpiece process result screen, the screen switching method is described below. <1> Select the overview tab.
XXXXX screen
XXXXXXXX
Arbitrary screen
<2> The overview screen appears. Click the status display indicating the path number of a machine to be displayed.
Overview Screen Select a desired machine.
MCN001
MCN002
MCN003
MCN004 MCN005
- 240 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
2.SCREEN OPERATION
<3> A screen list usable with machine 01 is displayed. When you click the <Workpiece Process Result> button, the workpiece process result screen appears.
Overview Screen Machine 01 related screen
Select a desired screen.

MCN001
Directory Display Workpiece Process Result Machining Result
Switching using a function selection tab

Before using the function selection tabs, you need to know which screen belongs to which tab. By using an example of displaying the workpiece process result screen, the screen switching method is described below. <1> Select the operation monitoring tag involving the workpiece process screen.
XXXXX screen
XXXXXXXX
Arbitrary screen
<2> The operation monitoring tab involves multiple screens. The machining result screen first appears. To display the workpiece process result screen, click the [Proc. Result] button.
- 241 -
2.SCREEN OPERATION
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
2.4
ITEMS COMMON TO THE SCREENS

By using the machining result screen as an example, this section describes the names and operation methods common to the screens.
NOTE The NC Program Management screen and the remote support screen do not share these common screen elements.
2.4.1
Names of Screen Components

The names of screen components are indicated below.
<1> Screen title <4> Message indication line
<3> Warning and alarm lamps <2> Current date and time <5> Message confirmation button
<6> Machine selection
<1> Screen title A screen title is displayed in the format: function name - screen name. <2> Current date and time The current date and time is displayed.
- 242 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
2.SCREEN OPERATION
<3> Warning and alarm lamps (1) Warning lamp: If an error occurs in i CELL background processing such as machining result collection, the lamp blinks in yellow. Clicking the warning lamp activates the warning log display screen, and displays an error log. (2) Alarm lamp: If an alarm is raised in any NC connected, the alarm lamp blinks in red. If an operator message is issued, the lamp blinks in magenta. If there are both an alarm state and an operator message, the lamp blinks in the color of alarm, that is, in red. Clicking the blinking alarm lamp causes the alarm message screen to appear. The screen first shows the information of an NC with the smallest machine number of the NCs having an alarm state or operator message. If there are both an alarm state and an operator message, the information of an NC in an alarm state takes precedence. <4> Message indication line The message indication line displays an operation method or error message. If a message is displayed in this line, operation is disabled until you click the message confirmation button described in <5> below. <5> Message confirmation button The message confirmation button appears only when a message is displayed. (The figure displays the button for explanation.) Upon confirmation of a message displayed in the message indication line, click this button. <6> Machine number selection Select a machine number or machine name in the combo box. Depending on the screen, a combo box for path number selection is also displayed.
- 243 -
3.MAIN MENU
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
MAIN MENU
- 244 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
3.MAIN MENU
3.1
OUTLINE
The main menu is the highest-order screen of the i CELL. The i CELL is activated on this screen, and is terminated on this screen. Before activating the main menu, perform operation according to Section 2.1, "ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT".
3.2
ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU

Choose the [Start] button. Next, choose [Programs], then activate the [Main Menu] icon of [CIMPLICITY iCELL]. The main menu is activated.
NOTE When activating the i CELL screen, be sure to use the [Main Menu] icon. When the main menu is activated, the background programs required for the i CELL are activated.
- 245 -
3.MAIN MENU
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
3.3
TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU

To terminate the main menu, click the Quit button of the main menu.
NOTE When terminating the i CELL screen, use the <Quit> button of the main menu. When CimView is terminated, the main menu display can be terminated, but the background programs activated together with the main menu cannot be terminated.
3.4
OPERATION
The operation buttons on the main menu have the following functions:
OvewView NC Program Management Operation Monitoring NC Display and Operation Alarm and Warning Maintenance Remote Support Displays the overview screen. Displays the NC Program Management screen. Displays the machining result and tool life management screens. Displays the NC display and operation screen. Displays the alarm and warning screen. Displays the maintenance screen. Displays the remote support screen.
NOTE When the main menu is displayed by using WebView, the NC Program Management button and the Remote Support button are not displayed.
- 246 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
4.OVERVIEW MENU
OVERVIEW MENU
- 247 -
4.OVERVIEW MENU
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
4.1
OUTLINE
The overview menu displays the status of each machine connected to the i CELL as a list on a path-by-path basis. When you click the status display on the overview menu, the overview machine screen is displayed.
NOTE If the Reader/Puncher interface is used as the communication protocol, the status of each path is not displayed.
- 248 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
4.OVERVIEW MENU
4.2
SCREEN OPERATION (1) OVERVIEW SCREEN

The overview screen is activated by choosing the [OverView] button on the main menu. The figure below shows an example where one NC is connected.
Method of activation
<1> Machine number display <2> Machine name display <4> Status display for each path <3> Path number display
<5> Machine figure display
<1> Machine number display

A machine number set on the setting screen is displayed.
<2> Machine name display

A machine name set on the setting screen is displayed.
<3> Path number display

A path number set on the setting screen is displayed in the format: "P" + path number. Clicking this field displays the overview machine screen.
- 249 -
4.OVERVIEW MENU
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
<4> Status display for each path

Machine status is displayed for each path. Clicking this field displays the overview machine screen. When a machine with multiple paths is connected, status information is displayed for each path. The following statuses are displayed:
Power off Reset, Stopped, Hold, Running State where the power to the NC is not turned on or communication is not performed Based on the STL, SPL, and OP signals of the NC, a state in automatic operation is displayed. For details, see the table below. STL SPL OP Reset OFF OFF OFF Stopped OFF OFF ON Hold OFF ON ON Running ON OFF ON The emergency stop state is set. An alarm is issued. This state appears if a machine connected with DNC2 is displayed on the NC Program Management screen. If the connection is made by DNC2, statuses such as Activated and Alarm cannot be displayed while the NC Program Management screen is active. Machining results cannot be obtained either. This state is indicated as Com.Hold.
Emergency Alarm Com. Hold

A machine figure created in the bit map format is displayed. For the method of modifying a displayed machine figure, see the description of "Modifying a machine figure" in Section 4.4, "CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED MACHINES".
- 250 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
4.OVERVIEW MENU
4.3
SCREEN OPERATION (2) SCREEN LIST FOR EACH OVERVIEW MACHINE

When you click the [Status Display] object on the overview menu, the screen list for each overview machine is activated.
<1> Machine number display
<2> Machine name display <4> Status display for each path
<6> Used to activate each screen
<1> through <5> on the left side of the screen are the same as on the overview screen. When you click a button in the middle of the screen, the screen indicated on the button is activated. The activated screen displays information about the machine number selected on this screen. Just the functions assigned to each machine on the i CELL setup screen are displayed. For instance, if the workpiece process result function is not assigned to machine 1, the Workpieces Process Result button does not appear.
- 251 -
4.OVERVIEW MENU
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
4.4
CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED MACHINES

At the time of installation, up to five machines can be displayed on the overview screen. If additional machines are connected using the Additional CNC connecting option, the number of machines displayed on the overview screen needs to be increased. To increase the number of machines displayed on the overview screen, two methods are available: (A) Copy an overview screen prepared beforehand for 10 machines, 15 machines, or 20 machines. (B) Edit the screen for displaying five machines at installation time on the CimEdit screen of CIMPLICITY to add objects for machine information display. Method (A), which uses a copy of an overview screen prepared beforehand, is much easier. However, information added by the user to the overview screen for five machines is not displayed on a copied screen. In such a case, edit the screen by using method (B). Each method is described below.
4.4.1
Copying an Overview Prepared Beforehand

With the i CELL, overview screens for 10 machines, 15 machines, and 20 machines are available in addition to the overview screen for 5 machines used at installation time. If additional machines are connected using the Additional CNC connecting option, these overview screens can be copied for use. Use the procedure below for copying an overview screen. (1) Delete the current screen. The overview screen used at installation time is stored at the location indicated below. (%iCELL% is the directory where i CELL is installed.)
Directory name File name %iCELL%\CimProject\Screens OverViewMenu.cim
(2) Select an overview screen to be used. Select an overview screen according to the number of machines to be connected. The overview screens for 10 machines,15 machines, and 20 machines are stored at the locations indicated below.
Directory name File name for 10 machines File name for 15 machines File name for 20 machines %iCELL%\CimProject\Screens OverViewMenu10.cim OverViewMenu15.cim OverViewMenu20.cim
(3) Copy the overview screen to be used, and rename it. With the file explorer, copy the overview screen to be used, and rename the screen to OverViewMenu.cim. Change the name of the copied file, keeping each file in (2) unchanged. Machine drawing bit map files to be displayed on the overview screen are also available for 20 machines under the same directory as for the overview screen. These files are automatically called from the overview screen, so that no modification to the files is required even when the number of machines is changed.
- 252 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
4.OVERVIEW MENU
4.4.2
Editing the Overview Screen

When adding machines by editing the overview screen, use the procedure below.
Opening the overview screen with CimEdit

Open the overview screen with CimEdit of CIMPLICITY. (For the method of CimEdit operation, refer to the relevant manual of CIMPLICITY.) The overview screen is stored at the following location: Directory name : %iCELL%\CimProject\Screens File name : OverViewMenu.cim (%iCELL% is the directory where the i CELL is installed.)
Changing the number of objects

To change the number of machines, change the number of status group objects and machine figure objects. The figure below provides an example of opening the overview screen with CimEdit.
<1> Status group object
For machine 1
For machine 2
For machine 3 For machine 4 For machine 5
<2> Machine figure object
By default, the number of status group objects is 5, and the number of machine figure objects is 5. Change these numbers as required. To decrease these numbers, delete unnecessary objects. To increase these numbers, copy and paste desired objects. To each machine, only a status group object or only a machine figure object can be assigned.
- 253 -
4.OVERVIEW MENU
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Naming each object

When a machine is added, assign a name to a copied and pasted object. (When the number of connected machines is decreased, the remaining object names are valid, and need not be changed.) Select a desired object from CimEdit, display the property dialog box by right-clicking. Assign the following name corresponding to a machine number to [Object name] of the [General] tab: Object : Object name Status group : McnStat + machine number Machine figure : McnImage + machine number When the number of connected machines is increased to 6, for example, an object created for machine number 6 is named as follows: Status group : McnStat6 Machine figure : McnImage6 When increasing the number of connected machines to 6, name the status group object and machine figure object as shown below.
McnSlct1
McnStat2
McnStat3
McnStat4
McnStat5
McnStat6
McnImage1
McnImage2
McnImage3
McnImage4
McnImage5
McnImage6
- 254 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 255 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
5.1
OUTLINE
NC Program Management is the software package that allows a computer to function as an NC program file sever to connect multiple NCs. NC Program Management also allows connection with a Data Server or PC. For communication with a Data Server or PC, the operating side needs to be an FTP client, and the operated side needs to be an FTP server. When the connection target is a PC, the same operation as for a Data Server can be performed by operating NC Program Management. The functions that can be carried out by NC Program Management depend on the communication protocol used, as indicated below. (1) Communication by FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 The following can be performed just by operations on the NC Program Management screen of the computer. A computer can download an NC program to NC. A computer can upload an NC program from NC. NC Program Management can show the list of NC programs stored in the NC memory. NC Program Management can delete an NC program stored in NC. NC programs in NC memory can be edited and referenced. A specified NC program is automatically uploaded to the personal computer, and edited or referenced on the personal computer. If an NC program on the personal computer is rewritten, download the NC program to the NC after confirmation. NC programs for each path can be managed in any directory. (For FOCAS2/Ethernet only) With Series 30i/31i/32i, the following processing can be performed as well: Folders containing files on the personal computer can be downloaded directly to NC memory. Folders containing files in NC memory can be uploaded directly to the personal computer. Folders in NC memory can be deleted. Files and folders in NC memory can be renamed. A new directory can be created in NC memory. Files in NC memory can be copied and moved to different folders. The processing below can be performed by operating the NC. With FOCAS2/Ethernet, however, only the FTP file transfer function of embedded Ethernet can be used. An NC program can be downloaded from a computer to the NC. An NC program can be uploaded from the NC to a computer.
- 256 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
For NC operation, refer to the operator's manual of each NC in the case of FOCAS2/Ethernet, and see Appendix C.1, "DNC2", in the case of DNC2.
NOTE While the NC Program Management screen is displaying a machine connected by DNC2, status signals such as Activated and Alarm or machining results cannot be obtained from the machine. In this state, "Com.Hold" is displayed in the status field of the overview menu screen.
(2) Reader/Puncher communication The following can be performed by operating the NC. An NC program can be downloaded from a computer to the NC. An NC program can be uploaded from the NC to a computer. A DNC operation can be carried out through the use of an NC program in a computer. The File List in a computer can be displayed on the NC screen. A file can be deleted from a computer. For details of NC "READER/PUNCHER." operations, see Appendix C.2,
(3) Data Server communication The following can be performed just by operations on the NC Program Management screen of the computer. Files of the personal computer can be downloaded to the connection destination. Files of the connection destination can be uploaded to the personal computer. The directory list and File List of the connection destination can be displayed on the NC Program Management screen on the personal computer. Files and directories of the connection destination can be deleted. Files and directories of the connection destination can be renamed. A directory can be created on the connection destination. A file of the connection destination can be edited or referenced. A specified file can be automatically uploaded to the personal computer and can be edited or referenced on the personal computer. If a file on the personal computer is rewritten at the time of editing, the file can be downloaded to the connection destination after confirmation. A file of the connection destination can be copied or moved to a directory.
- 257 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
The processing below can be performed by operating the NC. NC programs in the personal computer can be downloaded into the NC memory and Data Server. NC programs in the NC memory and Data Server can be updated to the personal computer. By using an NC program in the personal computer, DNC operation can be performed. The File List on the personal computer can be displayed on the NC screen. Files and directories in the personal computer can be deleted. For NC operation, refer to the operator's manual of each Data Server.
NOTE 1 When a Data Server has a FOCAS2/Ethernet-related option selected, the FOCAS2/Ethernet function can also be used. Refer also to the relevant document. 2 When a file is copied or moved, the file is once uploaded to the personal computer then is downloaded to a specified directory to perform a virtual copy or move operation.
- 258 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.2
SCREEN OPERATION
For activation, use one of the following methods: From the [Main Menu], use the [NC Program Management] button for activation. On the [Overview - Screen List for Each Machine] screen, use the [Program Directory] button for activation. From the [Main Menu], use the [NC Program Management] button for activation.
5.2.1
About The NC Program Management Window

The following figure is NC Program Management screen. Basically, the upper part of the screen is the management screen on PC side (personal computer) and the lower part of the screen is the management screen on connection destination.
Scroll Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Management screen on PC side Slider
PC Directory Trees
Machine List of Connection Target
File List
Management screen of connection destination Split Bar Current Management Status Bar Status Bar
PC side (upper part)

- PCDirectory Trees
The PC Directory Trees appear on the upper left part of the NC Program Management screen. In the PC Directory Trees, My Computer (a directory in Windows) is displayed. Files can be transferred between directories without using Windows Explorer. In addition, files can directly be downloaded to and uploaded from the connection destination.
- 259 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
- File List
The PC side File List is displayed in the upper right part of the NC Program Management screen. The PC side File List shows a list of files in the directory currently selected in the PC Directory Trees.
- Current Management Status Bar

The Current Management Status Bar on the PC side shows the path of the directory currently selected in the PC Directory Trees. The current management status bar also indicates whether the selected directory is the default directory or not.
Connection destination (lower part)

- Machine List of Connection Target
The Machine List of Connection Target is displayed in the lower left part of the NC Program Management screen. The Machine List of Connection Target shows the Machine List and the FTP Server List. (1) Machine List The Machine List indicates the machines that can be used by NC Program Management. When a machine is selected from the Machine List, the default directory assigned to the machine is selected in the PC Directory Trees, and files in the default directory are listed in the PC side File List. (2) FTP Server List FTP Server List indicates the FTP servers that can be used by NC Program Management. However, if no FTP client is set on the i CELL setting screen, no FTP server is indicated. FTP servers have no default directory. So, even when an FTP server is selected from the FTP Server List, the directory selected in the PC Directory Trees remains unchanged. If the connection destination is Series 30i/31i/32i or an FTP server (data server), the directory list is indicated in a tree structure when the PC is connected to the connection destination.
- File List
The File List of the connection destination is displayed in the lower right part of the NC Program Management screen. The File List of the connection destination shows a list of files on the machine (or FTP server) currently selected in the Machine List of Connection Target. When the machine or FTP server is not connected, nothing is displayed.
- Current Management Status Bar

The Current Management Status Bar of the connection destination shows information (such as the machine name and communication protocol) about the machine currently selected in the Machine List of Connection Target. When the machine is not connected, only the machine name is displayed.
- 260 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows the total number of files in the File List currently selected. When a command that requires certain processing time is executed such as a command for changing directories or a command for performing connection processing, a message appears in the Status Bar, indicating that processing is in progress.
Scroll Bar
The Scroll Bar is used to scroll the PC Directory Trees, the Machine List of Connection Target, or the File List to bring a part currently hidden into view.
Slider
The Slider is used to change pages of the PC side File List. When the total number of files in the selected directory exceeds the maximum number of files that can be displayed on one page of the File List, the remaining files are displayed on the second and subsequent pages. Any value within the range 100 to 5000 can be set in the Options screen as the maximum number of files that can be displayed in one page of the File List.
Menu Bar
The Menu Bar contains the commands for handling NC Program Management.
Tool Bar
The Tool Bar contains the shortcut buttons providing quick access to the often utilized commands .
Split Bar
You can place the mouse on the Split Bar between the PC Directory Trees or Machine List of Connection Target and the File List or on the Split Bar between the management screen on the PC side and the management screen of the connection destination, and drag to a desired position to adjust the widths and heights of these display areas.
- 261 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
5.2.2
Work with the File List in the PC

1 When the NC Program Management screen is activated for the first time, My Computer is expanded in the PC Directory Trees, and the Machine List and the FTP Server Lists are expanded in the Machine List of Connection Target.
Changing the current management directory on the PC side
When you click a directory in the PC Directory Trees, it is selected as the current management directory on the PC side, and the contents of the directory are listed in the PC side File List.
When you click a machine in the Machine List of Connection Target, the default directory set for the machine is selected in the PC Directory Trees, and the contents of the directory are listed in the PC side File List. When no default directory has been set for the machine, the displayed information in the PC Directory Trees and the PC side File List remains unchanged.
- 262 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
You can select the connection destination machine also from the list box on the left side of the tool bar. (Machine List and FTP Server List only)
Changing the display format of the PC side File List

To display large icons of files, choose the [Large Icons] from the [Upper File List] of [View] menu, or click the [Large Icons] button on the tool bar. To display only names of files, click the [List] command from the [Upper File List] of [View] menu, or click the [List] button on the tool bar. To display complete information about each file, click the [Details] command from the [Upper File List] of [View] menu, or click the [Details] button on the tool bar.
- 263 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Display sequence of the PC side File List

To sort files alphabetically by name, choose the [Sort by Name] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [Upper File List] of [View] menu. To sort files by type, choose the [Sort by Type] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [Upper File List] of [View] menu. To sort files by size, choose the [Sort by Size] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [Upper File List] of [View] menu. To sort files by date, choose the [Sort by Date] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [Upper File List] of [View] menu.
When complete information of files are displayed, you can sort files by clicking one of the [Name], [Type], [Size], [Last modification date] column in the top of the File List.
Updating the display of the PC side File List

1 Press the F5 function key or choose the [Refresh] command from the [View] menu. The File List is updated. The display of the PC side File List is updated to the most recent information. The PC Directory Trees, the Machine List of Connection Target, and the File List of the connection destination are also updated at the same time.
- 264 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.2.3
Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files (and Directories) in the PC

This subsection explains how to copy, move, delete, and rename files in the PC. The subsection also explains how to delete and rename directories.
Copying Files in the PC

1 In the PC side File List, click the file you want to copy. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the [Ctrl] key.
Perform a menu operation or drag and drop operation. A) Menu operation In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Copy] command. Alternatively, press the [Ctrl+C] keys. Then, the selected file is registered in the work list. (The work list is not displayed.) Proceed to step 3. B) Drag and drop operation Drag the selected file to a directory in the PC Directory Trees or the PC side File List, and drop the file while holding down the [Ctrl] key. (The dragged and dropped file is not registered in the work list.) The [Copy File] dialog box is displayed. Proceed to step 5.
- 265 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
3 4 5
Select and click the copy destination in the directories in the PC Directory Trees or the PC side File List. In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking in the PC side File List, click the [Paste] command. Alternatively, click the [Ctrl+V] keys. Then, the [Copy File] dialog box appears. Click the <Copy> button.
NOTE 1 When a copy source and copy destination are located in the same directory, the file cannot be copied. 2 Even when a file has been copied, the registered file is not cleared from the work list. Such a file can be copied to another directory in succession. 3 You can clear registered files from the work list by pressing the [Esc] key.
- 266 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Moving Files in the PC

1 2 Choose the file you want to move from the PC side File List. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the [Ctrl] key. Perform a menu operation or drag and drop operation. A) Menu operation In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Cut] command. Alternatively, press the [Ctrl+X] keys. Then, the selected file is registered in the work list. (The work list is not displayed.) Proceed to step 3. B) Drag and drop operation Drag the selected file to a directory in the PC Directory Trees or the PC side File List, and drop the file. (The dragged and dropped file is not registered in the work list.) The [Move File] dialog box is displayed. Proceed to step 5. From the directories of the PC Directory Trees or the PC side File List, select and click a move destination. Click the [Paste] command on the [File] menu or the right-click menu in the PC side File List, or press the [Ctrl+V] keys. The [Move File] dialog box is displayed. Click the <Move> button.
3 4 5
NOTE 1 When a move source and move destination are located in the same directory, the file cannot be moved. 2 When the [Move File] dialog box is closed, the registered file is cleared from the work list. 3 You can clear registered files from the work list by pressing the [Esc] key.
- 267 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Deleting Files and Directories in the PC

1 Choose the file and directory (hereinafter simply referred to as the file) you want to delete from the PC side File List. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the [Ctrl] key. When one of the following operations is performed, the [Delete File] dialog box appears: Press the [Delete] key. Click the [Delete] command in the [File] menu. In the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click [Delete] command. If the <Delete> button is clicked, the selected file is deleted from the NC memory. If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the deletion is canceled.
NOTE 1 When a directory is deleted, all files and directories included in the directory are deleted. 2 Deleted files and directories are completely removed from the PC. Take special care when deleting files and directories.
Renaming the file or directory in the PC

1 2 3 Choose the file or directory you want to rename from the PC side File List. In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Rename] command. Then, the [Rename File] dialog box appears. Enter a new name of the file, and click the <Change> button. Unless you enter a name in the text box, the <Change> button does not become effective.
- 268 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.2.4
Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files in the PC

1 2 Choose the file you want to browse in the PC side File List. In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [View] command. Then, the viewer set for the selected file is activated.
Browsing Files in the PC
When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List screen is started. Refer to 5.3 EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS for details of operations in the Edit File List screen. If an item other than the list file is selected, the viewer set in the [Option] dialog box is activated. To terminate reference operation, click [Exit] on the menu.
- 269 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NOTE 1 File Viewer allows you to view only one file at once. 2 File Viewer is a text viewer. It does not allow you to view binary files. 3 The largest file size that File Viewer allows you to view is 32 Kbytes. When you browse files exceeding this size limit, only the first 32 Kbytes of the file are displayed. 4 You can also specify third-party viewer software in the [Options] dialog box. Refer to "5.2.10 Setting Options.
Editing Files in the PC

NOTE 1 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in the [Options] dialog box, the [Edit] menu is not displayed. 2 Files in work directory cannot be edited.
1 2 Choose the file you want to edit in the File List. In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Edit] command. Then, the editor set for the selected file is activated.
When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List screen is started. Refer to 5.3 EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS for details of operations in the Edit File List screen. When the file is selected outside of the File List, the editor set in the [Options] dialog box is started.
- 270 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Creating New Files in the PC

NOTE 1 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in the Options menu, the [New File] menu is not displayed. 2 You can create files only when you have selected the default directory of the selected machine.
1 2 In the PC Directory Trees, select the default directory of the selected machine. Point at the [New] command in the [File] menu. File types that can be created are displayed. Click the desired file type.
When the file is selected in the File List, the editor that you specified in the Options menu is displayed. Use this editor for creating NC programs or subprogram. When the file is selected outside of the File List, the Edit File List screen is started. Use this screen for creating the File List. Refer to 5.3. EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS for details of operations in the Edit File List screen.
- 271 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
5.2.5
Creating New Directories in the PC

1 2 In My Computer (in the PC Directory Trees), click the directory in which you want to create a new directory to specify the selected directory as the PC side current management group. In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking in the PC Directory Trees, click the [Create Directory] command. Then, the [Create Directory] dialog box appears. When the command is executed from the menu displayed by right-clicking, right-click on a place in which neither a file nor directory is displayed in the File List. If you right-click on a file or directory, you cannot use the [Create Directory] command. Enter the name of a directory to be created in the [New Name] text box, then click the <Create> button. Unless you enter a name in the [New Name] text box, the <Create> button does not become effective.
Creating new directories in the PC
- 272 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.2.6
Downloading and Uploading NC Programs

This subsection explains how to download and upload NC programs through communication with NC memory (for the FOCAS2/Ethernet and DNC2 functions) and through communication with a data server (FTP server) (for the data server function).
NOTE When i CELL is used on the CIMPLICITY viewer to download NC programs to or upload NC programs from NC memory, the viewer PC can perform only downloading from the default directory and uploading to the default directory.
5.2.6.1
Communication with the NC memory

1 Click a machine in the Machine List of the Machine List of Connection Target. Then, communication with the clicked machine starts. (The start of communication when a machine is clicked can be suppressed by option setting. For details, see the description of the communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10, "Setting Options". When this option is set, communication is started by clicking the [Start Communication with NC Memory] command in the [Communication] menu.) The PC side File List shows the contents of the default directory set for the machine.
Displays a list of files of the default directory assigned to machine MCN002.
Displaying the List of NC Programs in the Memory of NC
- 273 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
In the Machine List of Connection Target and the File List of the connection destination, the data displayed depends on the connected NC as follows: <Series 30i/31i/32i> Under the name of the connected machine in the Machine List of Connection Target, device and folder information is displayed in a tree structure. In the File List of the connection destination, files of the default folder set in the foreground of the first path of the NC are listed.
Displays information about devices and folders in NC memory of machine MCN002.
Displays NC programs stored in NC memory of machine MCN002.
<Other than Series 30i/31i/32i> When the number of paths of the connected machine is set to two or more on the i CELL setup screen, path information is displayed in a tree structure under the name of the connected machine in the Machine List of Connection Target. When connection to multiple paths is disabled by option setting, only the machine name is indicated. For details, see the description of the communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10, "Setting Options". For a single-path system, only the machine name is indicated. In the File List of the connection destination, files in memory of the first path of the NC are listed.
- 274 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Displays path information of machine MCN003.
Displays NC programs stored in NC memory of machine MCN003.
When the [File List] command of the [Communication] menu is clicked, the File List of the NC memory is updated.
Changing the NC path engaged in communication

When the number of paths of the connection destination machine is set to two or more on the i CELL setup screen, the path to communicate with can be changed. When connection to multiple paths is disabled by option setting, however, the path cannot be changed. For details, see the description of the communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10, "Setting Options". 1 When the [Change Path] command in the [Communication] menu is pointed to, a list of paths is displayed. Click the path with which you want to communicate.
- 275 -

2
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
The communication destination switches to the selected path, and the contents of the File List of the connection destination change to display the file list for the path. In the current management status bar of the connection destination, the currently selected path is displayed. With a CNC other than Series 30i/31i/32i, the currently selected path is highlighted in the Machine List of Connection Target.
Path currently selected
NOTE Even when selecting a path indicated under a machine name in the Machine List of Connection Target, you cannot change the communicating path.
Downloading an NC Program
1 Select the file you want to download from the PC side File List. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the [Ctrl] key. When the connected CNC is Series 30i/31i/32i, you can also select folders.
Perform one of the following operations: A) Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to the File List of the connection destination. When the file is dropped to a blank space or a file in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder for which the File List of the connection destination is displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder displayed in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder (dropping to a folder is enabled only when the Series 30i/31i/32i is connected).
- 276 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
B)
C)
Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to a folder under the name of the connected machine in the Machine List of Connection Target (this operation is enabled only when Series 30i/31i/32i is connected). In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Download] command. When a file is selected in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder for which the File List of the connection destination is displayed. When a folder is selected in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder (downloading to a folder is enabled only when Series 30i/31i/32i is connected).
NOTE 1 When Series 30i/31i/32i is connected, and downloading is specified by selecting the [Download] menu item, files are downloaded to a folder if the folder is selected in the File List of the connection destination. Before the menu operation, check the file or folder selected in the File List of the connection destination. 2 If the connected CNC is a multipath system other than Series 30i/31i/32i, folders indicating path names are displayed in the Machine List of Connection Target. However, downloading to a path not connected cannot be performed. 3 Downloading from a directory of the network drive cannot be performed.
- 277 -

3
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
The [Download NC Program] dialog box for the data to be downloaded is displayed. When only files are downloaded, a dialog box as follows appears: <Downloading files only>
When only folders, or files and folders are downloaded, the dialog box as shown below appears. Select options for folder processing. <Downloading folders>
The following options are provided for folder processing:

Cancel the process when it field. Download only the files. Processing stops when downloading of a file fails. The subsequent files are not downloaded. Only files contained in a selected folder are downloaded. Folders in the selected folder, and files (or folders) in these folders are not downloaded. File names are displayed prior to folder names in the result dialog box. The absolute paths of downloaded folders and files are indicated in the result file(Note).
Display the folders before the files. Absolute path
- 278 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
NOTE When folder downloading is performed, the result of the downloading operation is written in the result file. The contents of the result file are displayed in the Result downloaded folders dialog box described later, so you need not open this file to check the results. The result file is created in %iCELL%\CimProject\Fanuc\Data\. The file name is XXX_FolderDownloadResult.ini, where XXX denotes the machine number. The file is overwritten each time a selected folder is downloaded.
4 Click the <Download> button. When folders are included, the result dialog box as shown below is displayed each time a selected folder is downloaded. When a folder contains a list file, the list file is not downloaded. If downloading fails, an error code is indicated in the Result column.
Selected folder: Indicates the path of the download destination folder.
- 279 -

5
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
The selected files are downloaded to the NC, and the File List of the connection destination is updated to display the latest information.
NOTE If a program with the same name already exists at the download destination, the program is overwritten when the NC parameter that enables overwriting is set. When downloading a program, check if the same program name already exists. Particularly, be careful when using the subprogram transmission function and the list file transmission function.
- 280 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Uploading a NC Program
1 In the File List of the connection destination, click the file you want to upload. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the [Ctrl] key. When the Series 30i/31i/32i is connected , you can also select folders. Perform one of the following operations: A) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the connection destination to the PC side File List. When the file is dropped to a blank space or a file in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File List is displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder. B) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the connection destination to the PC Directory Trees. C) In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Upload] command. When a file is selected in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File List is displayed. When a folder is selected in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder.
A C
NOTE 1 When uploading is specified by selecting the [Upload] menu item, the file is uploaded to a directory if the directory is selected in the PC side File List. Before the menu operation, check the file or directory selected in the PC side File List. 2 Uploading to the root directory of My Computer or to the directory of the network drive cannot be performed.
- 281 -

3
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
The [Upload NC Program] dialog box for the data to be uploaded is displayed. When only files are uploaded, a dialog box as follows appears: <Uploading files only>
When only folders, or files and folders are uploaded, the dialog box as shown below appears. Select options for folder processing. <Uploading folders>
The following options are provided for folder processing:

Cancel the process when it field. Can not overwrite Processing stops when uploading of a file fails. The subsequent files are not uploaded. When there is a file (or a folder) having the same name in the upload destination, the file is not overwritten. Only files contained in a selected folder are uploaded. Folders in the selected folder, and files (or folders) in these folders are not uploaded. File names are displayed prior to folder names in the result dialog box. The absolute paths of uploaded folders and files are indicated in the result file(Note).
Upload only the files.
Display the folders before the files. Absolute path
- 282 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
NOTE When folder uploading is performed, the result of the uploading operation is written in the result file. The contents of the result file are displayed in the Result uploaded folders dialog box described later, so you need not open this file to check the results. The result file is created in %iCELL%\CimProject\Fanuc\Data\. The file name is XXX_FolderUploadResult.ini, where XXX denotes the machine number. The file is overwritten each time a selected folder is uploaded.
4 Click the <Upload> button. When folders are included, the result dialog box as shown below is displayed each time a selected folder is uploaded. If uploading fails, an error code is indicated in the Result column.
Selected folder: Indicates the path of the folder to be uploaded. In File Name on the screen, "/" is displayed.
The selected files are uploaded to the personal computer, and the PC side File List is updated to display the latest information.
NOTE A CNC that supports file name management like Series 30i/31i/32i provides case sensitivity. However, Windows OS does not support case sensitivity. So, a file named AAA and a file named aaa can be created with the CNC. However, if files AAA and aaa are uploaded to the personal computer in this order, file AAA is replaced with file aaa uploaded later.
- 283 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
5.2.6.2
Communication with a Data Server (FTP server)

1 2 From the Machine List or FTP Server List in the Machine List of Connection Target, select a machine. <When selecting a machine from the Machine List> Usually, communication with NC memory starts. Switch the connection by using one of the methods listed below. As the connection is switched, FTP communication with the selected machine starts. Point to the [Change Connect] command in the [Communication] menu. A list of connection destinations is then displayed. Click [Data Server]. Click the [DS] button in the tool bar. <When selecting a machine from the FTP Server List> FTP communication with the selected machine starts. The start of communication when a machine is selected can be suppressed by option setting. For details, see the description of the communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10, "Setting Options". When this option is set, communication is started by clicking the [Start Communication with FTP] command in the [Communication] menu. Under the name of the connected machine in the Machine List of Connection Target, directory information of the connected machine is displayed in a tree structure. If the login directory has been set on the i CELL setup screen, a list of files in the directory is displayed in the File List of the connection destination. If the login directory has not been set, a list of files in the login directory set on the connection destination side is displayed.
Displaying the File List of a connection destination
Displays directory information in the data server of machine MCN002.
Displays files in the data server of machine MCN002.
Each time you click the [File List] command on the [Communication] menu, the File List of the connection destination is updated to the latest information.
- 284 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Downloading a file to the connection destination

1 Select the file you want to download from the PC side File List. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the [Ctrl] key.
Perform one of the following operations: A) Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to the File List of the connection destination. When the file is dropped to a blank space or a file in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder for which the File List of the connection destination is displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder displayed in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder. B) Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to a folder under the name of the connected machine in the Machine List of Connection Target. C) In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Download] command. When a file is selected in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder for which the File List of the connection destination is displayed. When a folder is selected in the File List of the connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder.
- 285 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NOTE When downloading is specified by selecting the [Download] menu item, files are downloaded to a folder if the folder is selected in the File List of the connection destination. Before the menu operation, check the file or folder selected in the File List of the connection destination.
3 The [Downloading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the [Download] button.
The file selected is downloaded to the connection destination, and the File List of the connection destination is updated to the latest information.
NOTE If the contents of a file do not have an NC program format, downloading the file to the data server of Series 30i/31i/32i may change the file contents automatically.
- 286 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Uploading a file from the connection destination

1 2 In the File List of the connection destination, click a file to be uploaded. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the [Ctrl] key. Perform one of the following operations: A) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the connection destination to the PC side File List. When the file is dropped to a blank space or a file in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File List is displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder. B) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the connection destination to the PC Directory Trees. C) In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Upload] command. When a file is selected in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File List is displayed. When a folder is selected in the PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder.
A C
NOTE 1 When uploading is specified by selecting the [Upload] menu item, the file is uploaded to a directory if the directory is selected in the PC side File List. Before the menu operation, check the file or directory selected in the PC side File List. 2 Uploading to the root directory of My Computer cannot be performed.
3 4 The [Uploading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the [Upload] button. The selected NC programs are uploaded from the NC to the computer, and the File List in the Current Management Group is updated automatically.
- 287 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
5.2.7
Copying, Moving, Deleting, and Renaming Connection Destination Files (Directories)

This subsection describes the methods of copying, moving, deleting, and renaming directories and files on a connection destination (such as the NC memory, Data Server, and personal computer). The following shows the functions provided for each communication function:
Communication function Reader FOCAS2/ DNC2 puncher Ethernet (*1) (*1)
(*1)
Function Operations on file Copy Move Delete Rename Operations on directory Copy Move Delete Rename
Data server
(*1)
(*1)
*1
These functions are available only when Series 30i/31i/32i is in use.
NOTE When the communication function is FOCAS2/Ethernet (Series 30i/31i/32i), none of the functions can be used if the device to be operated is a memory card or data server instead of NC memory.
Copying files of the connection destination

NOTE 1 When the communication function is FOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i), DNC2, or reader/puncher, files cannot be copied. 2 With Series 30i/31i/32i, files cannot be copied unless the EDIT mode is set (FOCAS2/Ethernet).
1 Click a file to be copied in the File List of the connection destination. To select multiple files to be copied, click the files while holding down the [Ctrl] key.
- 288 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Perform a menu operation or drag and drop operation. A) Menu operation In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Copy] command. Alternatively, press the [Ctrl+C] keys. The selected file is then registered in the work list. (The work list is not displayed.) Proceed to step 3. B) Drag and drop operation Drag the selected file to the directory in the Machine List of Connection Target or the File List of the connection destination then drop the file there while holding down the [Ctrl] key. (The dragged and dropped file is not registered in the work list.) The [Copy File] dialog box is displayed. Proceed to step 5.
3 4 5
From the directory in the Machine List of Connection Target or the File List of the connection destination, select and click a copy destination. Click the [Paste] command on the [Communication] menu or the right-click menu in the File List of the connection destination, or press the [Ctrl+V] keys. The [Copy File] dialog box is displayed. Click the <Copy> button.
- 289 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NOTE 1 When a copy source and copy destination are located in the same directory, the file cannot be copied. 2 Even when a file has been copied, the registered file is not cleared from the work list. Such a file can be copied to another directory in succession. 3 The registered file can be cleared from the work list by pressing the [Esc] key. 4 When a file is copied using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function, the subprogram transmission function is not executed. 5 When a file in a data server (FTP server) is copied, a virtual copy operation is implemented by uploading the file to the personal computer once then downloading it to a specified directory.
Moving files of the connection destination

NOTE 1 When the communication function is FOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i), DNC2, or reader/puncher, no file can be moved. 2 With Series 30i/31i/32i, files cannot be moved unless the EDIT mode is set (FOCAS2/Ethernet).
1 2 Click a file to be moved in the connection destination File List. To select multiple files to be moved, click the files while holding down the [Ctrl] key. Perform a menu operation or drag and drop operation. A) Menu operation In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Cut] command. Alternatively, press the [Ctrl+X] keys. The selected file is then registered in the work list. (The work list is not displayed.) Proceed to step 3. B) Drag and drop operation Drag the selected file to the directory in the Machine List of Connection Target or the File List of the connection destination then drop the file there. (The dragged and dropped file is not registered in the work list.) The [Move File] dialog box is displayed. Proceed to step 5. From the directory in the Machine List of Connection Target or the File List of the connection destination, select and click a move destination. Click the [Paste] command on the [Communication] menu or the right-click menu in the File List of the connection destination, or press the [Ctrl+V] keys. The [Move File] dialog box is displayed. Click the <Move> button.
3 4 5
- 290 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
NOTE 1 When a move source and move destination are located in the same directory, the file cannot be moved. 2 When the [Move File] dialog box is closed, the registered file is cleared from the work list. 3 The registered file can be cleared from the work list by pressing the [Esc] key. 4 When a file is moved using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function, the subprogram transmission function is not executed. 5 When a file in a data server (FTP server) is moved, a virtual move operation is implemented by uploading the file to the personal computer once then downloading it to a specified directory.
Deleting files and directories of the connection destination

NOTE When the communication function is FOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i) or DNC2, only deletion of files can be performed. When the communication function is reader/puncher, neither files nor directories can be deleted.
1 Click a file or directory (hereinafter simply referred to as a file) to be deleted in the File List of the connection destination. To select multiple files to be deleted, click the files while holding down the [Ctrl] key. When you perform any of the operations below, a dialog box for confirmation of deletion appears. Press the [Delete] key. Click the [Delete] command in the [Communication] menu. In the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Delete] command.
If the <Delete> button is clicked, the selected file is deleted from the NC memory. If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the deletion is canceled.
- 291 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NOTE 1 When a directory is deleted, all files and directories included in the directory are deleted. 2 Deleted files and directories are completely removed from the connection destination. Take special care when deleting files and directories.
Renaming files or directories of the connection destination

NOTE When the communication function is FOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i), DNC2, or reader/puncher, neither files nor directory can be renamed.
1 2 Click a file or directory to be renamed in the File List of connection destination. In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Rename] command. The [Rename File] dialog box is displayed.
Enter a new name in the [New Name] text box then click the <Change> button. Unless a name is entered in the text box, the <Change> button does not become effective.
- 292 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.2.8
Referencing and Editing Connection Destination Files

1 2 Click a file to be referenced in the File List of the connection destination. In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [View] command. The specified file is automatically uploaded, and the viewer set in the [Option] dialog box is activated.
Referencing a file of the connection destination
To terminate [File Viewer], click [Exit] on the menu.
- 293 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NOTE 1 [File Viewer] allows you to view only one file at once. If you browse another file while you are browsing the current file, the [File Viewer] displays the contents of the newly selected file. 2 [File Viewer] is a text viewer. It does not allow you to view binary files. 3 The largest file size that [File Viewer] allows you to view is 32 Kbytes. When you browse files exceeding this size limit, only the first 32 Kbytes of the file are displayed. 4 You can also specify third-party viewer software in the [Options] dialog box. Refer to "5.2.10 Setting Options" for details.
Editing a file of the connection destination

NOTE If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in the [Options] dialog box, the [Edit] menu is not displayed.
1 2 Click a file to be edited in the File List of the connection destination. In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Edit] command. The specified file is automatically uploaded (temporarily saved on the personal computer), and the viewer set in the [Option] dialog box is activated.
- 294 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Upon completion of editing, terminate the editor. If a file is saved during editing, the system asks you whether to download the saved file to the NC as shown below.
NOTE 1 If a file is not saved, the file cannot be downloaded. 2 If the program name (program number) of a file is changed to a new number, check if a file with the same new program name exists on the NC. If the NC parameter that enables overwriting is set, the program is overwritten. 3 A saved file is deleted when download operation is completed or you click <No>. 4 When the device to be operated in Series 30i/31i/32i is a memory card or data server instead of NC memory, edited programs cannot be downloaded. - When download operation fails
1 If download operation fails, an error message is displayed. Note down a displayed message, then click the <OK> button.
- 295 -

2
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
A file before editing and a file after editing are temporarily saved on the personal computer. The system asks you whether to save those files under arbitrary names on the personal computer. Click <Yes> to save them. Click <No> not to save them. When <No> is selected here, the temporarily saved files are deleted.
When the files are to be saved, the [Save File] dialog box is displayed. Enter a full-path file name to be assigned to each of the files before and after editing (i.g., D:\Program Files\O0001.dat). Then, click the <Save> button. The <Cancel> button can be used to cancel save operation. (The temporarily saved files are deleted.)
If an incorrect path is specified (if a nonexistent directory is specified), the message indicated below is displayed. Check the entered path and directory. Pressing the buttons perform the following operations: <Abort> : Stops save operation. (The files are deleted.) <Retry> : Performs another save operation according to the same path. <Ignore> : Returns the screen display to the [Save File] dialog box.
From the error message noted down, determine the cause of the failure in downloading the NC program. Correct the cause then retry to download the NC program.
- 296 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.2.9
Creating a New Connection Destination Directory
Creating a new directory on the connection destination

NOTE Only when the communication function is FOCAS2/Ethernet (Series 30i/31i/32i only) or data server (FTP server), a new directory can be created.
1 In the Machine List of Connection Target, click the directory in which you want to create a new directory to specify the selected directory as the current management directory of the connection destination. In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking in the File List of the connection destination, click the [Create Folder] command. The [Create Folder] dialog box is then displayed. When the command is executed from the menu displayed by right-clicking, right-click on a place in which neither file nor directory is displayed in the File List. If you right-click on a file or directory, you cannot use the [Create Folder] command.
Enter the name of the directory to be created in the [New Name] text box, then click the <Create> button. Unless a name is entered in the text box, the <Create> button does not become effective.
- 297 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
5.2.10
Setting Options
Click the [Options] command in the [Tools] menu. The [Options] dialog box will open. After making a setting, click the <OK> button for the setting to become effective. To cancel a setting and return to the previous value, click the <Cancel> button.
Listing tab
In the [Machine List] frame, make a setting related to machine list display of the management group list on the left side of the screen. When the [Display machine which was set up for communication] check box is checked, only those machines that are set for communication are displayed. In the [File List] frame, make settings relating to File List display on your computer. When the [Reflesh File List before sort] check box is checked, the latest file list information is acquired before the File List display order is changed. If this check box is not checked, the File List display order is changed based on the details currently displayed in the File List. NOTE, however, that if the File List has several pages of data, the latest file list information is acquired before the File List display order is changed regardless of the setting of this check box. If the [Not display message at page move] check box is checked, the confirmation dialog box will not be displayed when you switch pages in the File List. If you change the value of the [Number of displayed files in a page] check box, you can change the number of files that can be displayed in one page of the File List. With the [Double click on upper file list] frame and [Double click on lower file list] frame, a type of operation to be performed when you double-click a file object in each File List can be selected.
- 298 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
View, Edit tab
In the [File View] frame, make settings relating to file browsing. If you select the [No External Viewer] option, the File Viewer integrated in NC Program Management is used. If you select the [Use External Viewer] option, you can specify third-party viewer software. Enter the command for starting the editor in the [Viewer command] box. In the [Edit File] fame, make settings relating to file editing. If you select the [No Editor] option, you can no longer edit files or create new files. If you select the [Use Editor] option, you can edit files or create new files using the specified editor. Enter the command for starting the editor in the [Viewer command] box. NOTE, however, that the [Edit File List] screen is used for editing the File List.
- 299 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Communication tab
In the [Communication] frame, make setting relating to communication with the NC. If the [Connect to multi paths CNC] check box is checked, you can specify the NC system with which you are to communicate. If this check box is not checked, communication is carried out with only the 1st of the multiple connected NC systems. Communication with other NC systems is not possible. When the [Communicate to machine when click machine list or ftp server list] check box is checked, clicking a machine name in the Machine List of the management group starts communication with the NC and displays the File List in the NC memory (Data Server hard disk in the case of FTP connection). Clicking an FTP server name in the FTP Server List starts communication with the FTP server and displays the File List in the FTP server hard disk. If this check box is not checked, communication is started by clicking the [Start Communication with NC Memory] command in the [Communication] menu. If the [Display NC memory tree view at high speed.] check box is checked, the NC memory tree view can be displayed more quickly when NC memory is connected. In this case, the mark (+) appears at the left of every directory regardless of whether the directory has sub-directories or not (for Series 30i/31i/32i only). When the [Display FTP tree view at high speed] check box is checked, the tree view of the hard disk of a connected FTP server can be displayed at high speed. In this case, the mark (+) appears at the left of every directory regardless of whether the directory has sub-directories or not.
- 300 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.3
EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS

The Edit List File screen is where you create and edit List Files. The Edit List File screen can be activated by one of two methods: (1) Select [File], [New], then [List File] on the NC Program Management screen, and create a new List File. (2) Select a List File on the NC Program Management screen, and specify [File] then [Edit].
5.3.1
Structure of Edit List File Screen

The figure below shows the Edit List File screen and details when LIST001.LST List File for machine number 1 is being edited.
Directory Registration file directory selection combo box
Menu bar
O number used for extended transfer
Directory name List File name
Contents of List File List Box
Registration file name List Box
Number of records
Buttons for changing order/deleting contents of List File
Buttons for adding/inserting from registration file to List File
File type to be displayed in registration file name list box
- 301 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Directory
Displays the machine name to which the List File currently being edited belongs. The machine name is displayed in the following format: "<3-digit machine number>.<machine name>"
Directory Name
Displays the directory in which the List File currently being edited is saved.
List File Name

Displays the name of the List File currently being edited.
Registration File Directory Selection Combo Box

This combo box is for selecting the directory to be displayed in the [Register File Name] list box. When you select "Same directory as List File", a list of files in the directory currently displayed at [Directory Name] is displayed in the [Register File Name] list box. When you select "Different directory from List File", a dialog box for selecting the drive and directory appears.
File Type To Be Displayed in Registration File Name List Box

Selects the type of file to be displayed in the [Register File Name] list box.
Registration File Name List Box

Displays the file name to be registered to the List File.
Button for Adding/Inserting from Registration File to List File

The <Add> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box is selected. When you press the <Add> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is appended to the end of the [Contents of List] list box. The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to insert is selected in the [Contents of List] list box. When you press the <Insert> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is inserted in front of the record currently selected in the [Register File Name] list box.
List File Details List Box

Displays the details of the List Files currently being edited in the order in which they are to be transferred. [Send Command] displays the instruction details as such as [Pause] and [Skip]. The names of registered NC program files are displayed in their full path at [File Name].
- 302 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Buttons for Changing Order/Deleting Contents of List File

These buttons are for changing the order of List Files and deleting List Files. Each of these buttons are enabled by selecting a line in the [Contents of List] list box. The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top. The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record. The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record. The <Last> button moves the selected record to the end of the records. The <Delete> button deletes the selected record. The <Clear> button deletes all records.
O Number Used for Extended Transfer

In the extended transfer mode, the O number in the registered NC programs is not transferred. If you check the [Set ONo. in Developing] check box, the [ONumber or FileName] text box is enabled, and the O number entered here can be transferred. Enter a 4-digit number. If you uncheck the [Set ONo. in Developing] check box, the O number of the first file registered to the List File is transferred. This setting is ignored in the separate transfer mode.
File Name Used for Extended Transfer

In the extended transfer mode, the file name in the registered NC programs is not transferred. If you check the [Set FileName in Developing] check box, the [ONumber or FileName] text box is enabled, and the file name entered here can be transferred. File names may consist of alphabetic characters (uppercase and lowercase), numeric characters, and four symbols -, +, _, and . (all characters are en characters). If you uncheck the [Set FileName in Developing] check box, the file name of the first file registered to the List File is transferred. This setting is ignored in the separate transfer mode.
Number of Records
Displays the currently registered number of records.
- 303 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
5.3.2
Editing List Files

To create a new List File, click the [New] command in the [File] menu. The [New] dialog box appears.
Creating New List Files
Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Machine] combo box. If you select a machine name in the [Machine] combo box, the default directory of the machine selected in the [Directory] text box is displayed. If you select <Optional Directory> in the [Machine] combo box, select the directory by the button to the right of the [Directory] text box.
NOTE Select the machine name at [Machine], and display the default directory of the machine to communicate with at [Directory]. If you select <Optional Directory> at [Machine], specify a directory other than the default directory at the [Directory] button and create a List File, you will no longer be able to call the List File from the NC.
2 Enter the name of the new List File in the [List File] text box, and press the <Start> button. The file name does not need a file extension. The List File extension set in the Machine Setup screen is added to the file name according to the machine selected in the [Machine] combo box. To edit an existing file, enter the file name in the [List File] text box, and press the <Start> button. When you specify an existing file, a confirmation dialog box for checking if it is OK to delete the file and create a new file appears.
- 304 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Opening Existing List Files

To edit an existing List File, select it from the file list and execute the [Edit] command listed in the [File] menu or the menu displayed by a right-click. You may be already executing the List File editor. If so, execute the [Open] command in the [File] menu. The [Open] dialog box will appear.
1 2
Select the directory containing the List File in the [Machine] combo box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory] text box. When you select the List File name from the list box, the List File name selected in the [ListFile] text box is displayed. You can also enter the List File name to edit directly in the [ListFile] text box. Press the <Open> button.
Registering NC Programs to Transfer to List Files

Use the <Add> or <Insert> buttons. 1 Select the file to register in the [Register File Name] list box. 2 The <Add> button is enabled when you select the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box. When you press the <Add> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is appended to the end of the [Contents of List] list box. Instead of the <Add> button, you can also add files by double-clicking the file to register in the [Register File Name] list box. 3 The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to insert is selected in the [Contents of List] list box. When you press the <Insert> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is inserted in front of the record currently selected in the [Register File Name] list box.
- 305 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Changing the Transfer Order of List Files

Use the <Top>, <Up>, <Down> and <End> buttons. 1 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [Contents of List] list box. 2 The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top. The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record. The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record. The <Last> button moves the selected record to the end of the records. In addition to using the above buttons, you can also change the transfer order by dragging and dropping by the mouse. 1 Press the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [Contents of List] list box with the left mouse button to select. 2 If you move the mouse with the left mouse button held down, the "<" mark appears at the beginning of the record you selected, and a blank record prefixed with the ">" mark is inserted at the record where you want to move the record to. 3 Release the left mouse button. The selected record is moved.
Example: Inserting O0008 between O0005 and O0006.
Deleting Records in List Files

Use the <Delete> or <Clear> buttons. 1 Select the record you want to delete in the [Contents of List] list box. 2 The <Delete> button deletes the selected records. The <Clear> button deletes all records.
Setting the Transfer Instructions to Each Record in the List File

Use the [Edit] menu. To set the transfer instruction to a specified record, use the [Skip], [Pause] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command] menu. To set the transfer instruction to all records following a specified record, use the [Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command] - [All of Records Below Cursor] menu. The meanings of the various commands are as follows: When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and transfer of subsequent records is continued. When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following that record is not carried out and transfer is paused. The pause state can be confirmed in the List File Monitor screen. To cancel the pause, specify the [Cancel] command in the List File Monitor screen.
- 306 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Example of List File transfer Monitor screen
Example: Paused
To cancel a [Skip] or [Pause] specification, use the [Cancel] command.
NOTE The meanings [Cancel] in Edit List File screen and [Cancel] in List File Monitor screen are different. [Cancel] in Edit List File screen [Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by all transmission using specified List Files. [Cancel] in List File Monitor screen [Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by only the List File currently being transferred.
Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows: 1 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [Contents of List] list box. 2 Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu. In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer in the context menu of the right mouse button. 1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [Contents of List] list box, and press the right mouse button. 2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.
- 307 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Registering Files in the Same Directory as List Files Using Only the File Name
Normally, the files to transfer to the List File are registered using their full path. The Option screen allows you to select whether to register only a file name or register the file by its full path. Specify registration by only a file name when you do not want to register a file using its full path to copy a List File to another machine having a different default directory. To set this, click the [Option] command in the [Tool] menu.
In the List Files registered by only a file name, only the file name is displayed even in the [Contents of List] list box.
Overwriting List Files

To save the file currently being edited under the same name, click the [Overwrite] command in the [File] menu.
Saving to List Files Under a New Name

To save the file currently being edited under a new name, click the [Save As] command in the [File] menu. The [Save As] dialog box appears.
1 2 3
Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Machine] combo box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory] text box. Enter the List File name that you want to save to from the [ListFile] text box. Click the <Save> button.
Exiting the Screen

Click the [Exit] Command in the [File] menu.
- 308 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.4
LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS

The List File Monitor screen automatically displays the transfer status according to the List File at each monitor cycle. Use the [Listfile transfer monitor] command in the [Tool] menu on the NC Program Management for activation.
5.4.1
Structure of List File Monitor Screen

The List File Monitor screen is as follows:
Monitor machine number and machine name Menu bar Original List File name
Details of List Files currently being transferred
Monitor Machine Number and Machine Name

Select the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.
Original List File Name

The List File name created in the Edit List File screen is displayed. Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.
- 309 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Details of List Files Currently Being Transferred

This screen monitors and displays the status of List Files currently being transferred at each monitor cycle described later. Transfer instruction Displays the transfer instruction set in the Edit List File screen. File name Displays the file name set in the Edit List File screen. The displayed order is the transfer order. Transfer results Displays the current transfer status: "Complete" Transfer of this record has ended. "Skip" This record has not been transferred, and the next record has been processed. "Pause" This record has not been transferred, and transfer has been paused. Specify [Cancel] to resume transfer. Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.
- 310 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
5.4.2
List File Monitor Operations

Select the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.
Changing the Monitor Machine Changing the Monitor Cycle

If you execute the [Monitor Cycle Set] in the [View] menu, the [Monitor Cycle] dialog box appears. Drag the slider to change the monitor cycle, and press the <OK> button. The monitor cycle default is 10 seconds.
Updating to Latest Monitor Information

If you execute the [Monitor Cycle Set] in the [View] menu, the latest monitor information is displayed regardless of the monitor cycle.
Pausing Monitor Display

To pause monitor display without exiting the screen, press the <Monitor End> button. Each press of this button toggles between <Monitor End> and <Monitor Start>. Whether or not monitor is in progress is displayed on the screen's title bar. If monitor is in progress, "List File Monitor - Monitoring" is displayed, and if monitor is stopped, "List File Monitor - Monitor Stopped" is displayed.
- 311 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Changing the Transfer Instruction

Change the transfer instruction, for example, to cancel the pause transfer instruction or skip a non-transferred record in order to resume transfer of a paused record. To change the transfer instruction, use the [Skip], [Pause] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command] menu. To set the same instruction to all records following a specified record, use the [Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command] - [All of Records Below Cursor] menu. The meanings of the various commands are as follows: When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and transfer of subsequent records is continued. When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following that record is not carried out and transfer is paused. Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows: 1 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [Contents of List] list box. 2 Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu. In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer in the context menu of the right mouse button. 1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [Contents of List] list box, and press the right mouse button. 2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.
- 312 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Changing the Order, Adding and Deleting NC Programs to be Transferred

For all records following a paused record, you can change the order of NC programs to be transferred, add and register new NC programs or delete NC programs. When you execute the [Edit List] command in the [Edit] menu, the Edit screen appears. Operations in this screen are the same as in the Edit List File screen.
NOTE The Edit screen displays records that were registered after the paused record.
- 313 -
6.MACHINING RESULTS
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
MACHINING RESULTS
- 314 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
6.MACHINING RESULTS
6.1
OUTLINE
The machining result screen displays data such as run time and machined parts count of each NC. The following data is displayed: 1. Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, and cutting time (bar chart) 2. Monthly report on machined parts count (bar chart) 3. Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, current time, and machined parts count (table)
NOTE 1 The machining result screen displays data created by the "Run Time/Parts Count display option" of the NC. 2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required. The DNC2 function, however, cannot be used with Series 0. 3 While the NC Program Management screen is displaying a machine connected with DNC2, machining results of the machine cannot be collected.
- 315 -
6.MACHINING RESULTS
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
6.2
SCREEN OPERATION
Use one of the following methods to activate the screen: 1. [Main Menu] <Operation Monitoring> button 2. <Op. Monitoring> tab 3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen <Machining Result> button When the screen is activated, run time is displayed as a bar chart.
- 316 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
6.MACHINING RESULTS
<4> Utilization display
Screen operation
<1> Monthly report list box <2> Graph display change button
<3> Table format display button
<5> Display refresh button
<6> Tool life management display button
<1> Monthly list box
<7> Workpiece process result display button
From the list box, select a desired year and month for result display.
- 317 -
6.MACHINING RESULTS
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
<2> Graph display change button

This button is used to select data to be displayed as a graph. You can choose between run time data and machined parts count data.
- Example of run time display

Run time data accumulated on the NC by the Run Time/Parts Count display option of the NC is displayed as a bar chart.
- Example of machined parts count display

Machined parts count data accumulated on the NC by the Run Time/Parts Count display option of the NC is displayed as a bar chart.
- 318 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
6.MACHINING RESULTS
<3> Table format display button

This button displays data in a table format. In this format, tun time data and machined parts count data is indicated in a table.
- Example of table format display
<4> Utilization display

The ratio of cutting time to power-on time is indicated by percentage. The utilization for the indicated number of days is indicated.

This button updates the screen to display the latest data.

This button displays the tool life management screen.

This button displays the workpiece process result screen.
- 319 -
7.WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS
- 320 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION 7.WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS
7.1
OUTLINE
Workpiece process results are displayed based on data (Machine ID, Workpiece ID, O number, Start time, End time, Process End ID, User area ID, and Sequence number) obtained at the start and end of machining. Three types of display are available: "current progress status display" for displaying the progress status of the workpiece currently being machined, "log display" for displaying the process time and end state of each machined workpiece, and "process end state display" for displaying summarized end state data.
NOTE 1 The "custom macro B" option is required for the NC. 2 If the custom macro common area does not have a free space, the "custom macro variable addition" option is required. 3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.
- 321 -
B-75074EN/04
7.2
SCREEN OPERATION
Use one of the following methods to activate the screen: 1. [Main Menu] <Operation Monitoring> button (The machining result screen is activated.) <Proc. Result> button 2. <Op. Monitoring> tab (The machining result screen is activated.) <Proc. Result> button 3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen <Proc. Result> button When the screen is activated, the screen is displayed in the previously selected format.
Automatic updating
This screen is automatically updated to the latest information at intervals of one minute.
Screen operation
<4> Workpiece specification <2> Display term <6> Display form change button/list box specification list box screen button <1> Display condition <3> Machine specification <7> Display refresh <5> Process plan input change button button/list box button screen button
<8> Display change button
<9> Machining result display button
- 322 -
B-75074EN/04
<1> Display condition change button

This button is used to select a condition for screen display. You can choose from daily reporting, monthly reporting, and term specification.
<2> Display term specification list box

When daily reporting or monthly reporting is selected, only the left-hand list box is used. When term specification is selected, both the left-hand list box and the right-hand list box are used. For daily reporting or term specification, select a year, month, and day from the list box or list boxes. For monthly reporting, select a year and month from the list box. In the case of term specification, a date specified using the left-hand list box is earlier than a date specified using the right-hand list box. Otherwise, process result data is not displayed correctly.
<3> Machine specification button/list box

Each time you click the machine specification button, the list box is enabled or disabled. When the list box is enabled, the button is displayed in light blue. In this case, the process result data of the indicated machine is displayed. When the list box is disabled, the data of all machines is displayed.
<4> Workpiece specification button/list box

Each time you click the workpiece specification button, the list box is enabled or disabled. When the list box is enabled, the button is displayed in light blue. In this case, the process result data of the indicated workpiece is displayed. When the list box is disabled, the data of all workpieces is displayed.
<5> Process plan input screen button

This button is used to display the process plan input screen. The planned number of workpieces to be machined can be input for each machine. Steps (1) and (2) are used for input: (1) On the machine/workpiece extraction screen, extract machines and workpieces for which planned counts are to be input. (2) On the process plan input screen, input planned counts for the range extracted in (1).
- 323 -
7.WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS OPERATION - Machine/workpiece extraction screen
B-75074EN/04
Select a date, machines, and workpieces for which planned counts are to be input.
C. Workpiece A. Date specification B. Machine D. Extract button specification specification list list box list E. Exit button
A. B.
C.
D.
E.
Date specification list box This button is used to select a date. Machine specification list This list is used to select a machine. Multiple machines can also be selected. When you click the fixed cell, all machines can be selected. Workpiece specification list This list is used to select a workpiece. Multiple workpieces can also be selected. When you click the fixed cell, all workpieces can be selected. Extract button This button is used to extract selected machines and workpieces and switches the screen display to the process plan input screen. Be sure to click this button after selecting machines and workpieces. If no machine or no workpiece is selected, an error message is displayed. Clear the error, then select machines and workpieces. Until an error message is cleared, the screen does not accept any event. Exit button This button is used to exit from the process plan input screen.
- 324 -
B-75074EN/04
- Process plan input screen

Input planned counts for extracted machines and workpieces.
E. Button for returning to C. Planned process count clear button the extraction screen A. Planned process B. Planned process D. Process plan selection table count input box count input button
A. B. C. D.
E.
Planned process count input box Input a planned count. After inputting a value, be sure to press the Enter key. Planned process count input button This button inputs a planned count into a cell selected from the process plan selection table. Planned process count clear button This button clears the planned count of a cell selected from the process plan selection table. Process plan selection table This table displays a selection table of extracted machines and workpieces. If planned process counts are already input, their values are displayed. Select a cell from this table. Multiple cells can be selected. Moreover, multiple rows and columns can be selected at a time by selecting the fixed cell. Button for returning to the extraction screen This button returns the screen display to the machine/workpiece extraction screen.
- 325 -
B-75074EN/04
<6> Display form change screen button

This button is used to display the screen for changing the screen display form. The method of machine display, workpiece display, O number display, user area display, and date and time display can be changed. The currently enabled buttons for machine display, workpiece display, O number display, and user area display are displayed in light blue.
D. User area display specification B. Workpiece display specification C. O number display A. Machine display specification E. Exit button specification
F. Current form display
H. New form input box
J. Initialize button I. Change button
G. Current example of display
A. B. C. D. E. F.
G. H.
Machine display specification Select a machine display method. You can choose from No., Name, and No. + Name. Workpiece display specification Select a workpiece display method. You can choose from No. and Name. O number display specification Choose whether to perform O number display. User area display specification Choose whether to perform user area display. Exit button This button enables you to exit from the display form change screen. Current form display The currently specified form of date and time is displayed. For the details of the form, refer to the description of "Format" statement in the "CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Basic Control Engine Operator's Manual". Current example of display An example of the currently specified form is displayed. New form input box Enter a new form. After entering a new form, be sure to press the Enter key.
- 326 -
B-75074EN/04
I.
J.
Change button This button switches the form to the new form. The new form is displayed in the Current Form field, and an example of display is displayed in the Current Form field. Initialize button This button returns the form to the initial value. The initial value is "yy/mm/dd hh:nn:ss" (Example of display: 01/05/09 10:50:20).

This button updates the screen display to the display of the latest data. When the display condition and display term (date) are changed, be sure to update the screen display.

By clicking the "Progress", "Log", "End State", or "Circle Graph" button, the screen display can be changed to the display of the current progress status, log, process end state (table), or process end state (pie chart). Note, however, that Circle Graph can be selected only when a workpiece is specified.
- Current progress status display

When you click the "Progress" button, the screen display switches to this display, canceling the machine and workpiece specification. If machines have a workpiece currently being machined (a workpiece with the latest start time for which end time, process end ID, and user area ID data to be obtained at process end time is not obtained yet), the progress status of such a workpiece is displayed on a machine-by-machine basis. If a workpiece process time and the planned process count of the current date are set, the time (scheduled completion time) of the planned count of the date is displayed based on the setting. For the setting of process time, see Section 2.10, "WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION" in Part III, "SETTING". The following items are displayed: Machine Workpiece O number Start time End plan time Normal completion count (total of quantities with end state ID set to 0 [including cases where the nonuse of end state IDs is set on the setting screen] and set to 1) Planned count All end plan time You can choose whether to display O number data.
- 327 -
7.WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS OPERATION - Log display
B-75074EN/04
When you click the "Log" button, the screen display switches to this display. Log data such as the process time and end state of each machined workpiece is displayed in order of latest start time to oldest start time. Four modes of display are available: no specification, machine specification, workpiece specification, and machine and workpiece specification. For each mode, daily reporting, monthly reporting, or term specification can be selected. Display with no specification All log data is displayed, regardless of machines and workpieces. Display with machine specification The log data of a specified machine only is displayed, regardless of workpieces. In display with machine specification, only sequence numbers are displayed.
NOTE Sequence numbers must be successively assigned to workpieces to be machined on each machine. For the method of sequence number assignment to workpieces to be machined, see Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpieces Process Result" in Part III, "SETTING". An example where assigned sequence numbers are not successive is shown below. This example means that data for sequence numbers 3 and 4 could not be obtained. The cause is a failure by the i CELL to read a transition of the process start signal from OFF (0) to ON (1) (because of the ON time being too short) or a data acquisition attempt made during data deletion. Check the time period for a transition of the process start signal from OFF to ON (Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpiece Process Results" in Part III, "SETTING"), and data deletion execution time (Section 2.11, "DATABASE MAINTENANCE" in Part III, "SETTING"). Example of display
- 328 -
B-75074EN/04
Display with workpiece specification The log data of a specified workpiece only is displayed. Display with machine and workpiece specification The log of a specified combination of a machine and workpiece only is displayed. The display items are listed below. Note, however, that the display items vary, depending on the specification. Machine (when no machine is specified) Workpiece (when no workpiece is specified) O number (displayed only in the case of workpiece display) Process start time Process end time Process time Process end state User area Sequence number (only in the case of machine specification) You can choose whether to display O number and user area data.
NOTE In connection with display time, all logs satisfying a condition are not written to a table at a time. Actually, up to 180 logs (12 pages) can be written to a table at a time. Six pages are written in the upper and lower areas with respect to the desired display line (uppermost display line). So, each time other logs are to be displayed, those logs need to be obtained and written to the table, requiring some time for display. When logs are obtained, the latest information is obtained. This means that if the contents of the database change while pages are switched, the same line does not always display the same log data as previously displayed. - Process end state display
The summarized results based on a displayed process end ID set on the setting screen are displayed. Two types of display are available: table format and pie chart format.
- 329 -
7.WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS OPERATION - Table format
B-75074EN/04
When you click the "End State" button, the screen display changes to this type of display. As with log display, four modes of display are available: no specification, machine specification, workpiece specification, and machine and workpiece specification. For each mode, daily reporting, monthly reporting, or term specification can be selected. The display items are listed below. Note, however, that the display items vary, depending on the specification. Machine (when no machine is specified) Workpiece (when no workpiece is specified) Total process count Planned process count Number of end states summarized (up to 5 in display order) Other When you select a number in the No. column and click the Circle Graph button in the case of display with no specification, display with machine specification, and display with workpiece specification, the data of the selected line can be displayed as a pie chart.
NOTE When you specify, on the setting screen, that the display items (workpiece, end state, and user area) are not used in the three types of display (progress status, log, and end state display), an ID of 0 is saved in the database, and "No Collect" is displayed. If no ID is registered, the comment [No Setting] is displayed after each ID.
- 330 -
B-75074EN/04
- Pie chart format

When you click the "Circle Graph" button, the screen display changes to this type of display. The workpiece process count and process end state extraction results are displayed as a pie chart. This type of display is provided for a specified workpiece. So, if no workpiece is specified, this type of display is disabled. This means that this type of display is provided for two modes: workpiece specification, and machine and workpiece specification. For each mode, daily reporting, monthly reporting, or term specification can be selected. Remaining count data (planned count - normal completion count) and progress data (normal completion count/planned count) are displayed as well.
A. Progress display B. Planned process count display C. Total process count display
D. Pie chart display of process end state
E. Process end state display
A.
B. C. D. E.
Progress display Process progress data (normal completion count/planned count) is displayed as a bar chart. Moreover, remaining count data (planned count - normal completion count) is displayed. Planned process count display A planned process count is displayed. Total process count display A total process count is displayed. Pie chart display of process end state The summarized results of process end state are displayed as a pie chart. Process end state display The summarized results of process end state are displayed using numeric values. Up to five items (optional) and "Others" are displayed.

This button is used to display the machining result screen.

This button is used to display the tool life management screen.
- 331 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 332 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
8.1
OUTLINE
With the NC display and operation function, operations such as NC state display and parameter setting can be performed for each NC. The following NC state indications can be provided with this function: 1. CNC status 2. O number, program number, and file name display 3. Actual position display 4. Actual speed display 5. Modal information display 6. Program check display 7. Diagnosis screen display The following NC operation can be performed: 1. NC parameter setting
NOTE 1 For actual speed display with the M series, the threading/synchronous feed option and a position coder are required. If this option is not specified, a value calculated from the spindle motor speed instead of a feedback value from the position coder can be displayed by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 3118 to 1. 2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.
- 333 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
8.2
SCREEN OPERATION
Use one of the following methods to activate the screen: 1. [Main Menu] <NC Display and Operation> button 2. <NC Disp. & Ope.> tab 3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen <NC Display and Operation> button
Screen operation
<3> NC status information <1> NC machine selection <4> Program number, file name, and sequence number display
<2> NC display and operation switch button
With the NC display and operation function, the operations below are common. <1> NC machine selection From the combo box, select an NC machine and path number.
- 334 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
<2> NC display and operation switching Switch the screen display by clicking a desired button at the bottom of the screen.
[Current Position] button : Displays the current position display screen. [Program Check] button : Displays the program check screen. [Parameter] button : Displays the parameter setting screen. [Diagnosis] button : Displays the diagnosis screen. <3> NC status information NC status information is displayed. (1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
In (1) through (7), status information is displayed as indicated below. Status display in (1) *** : Non-selection MDI : MDI mode Mem : MEMORY mode Edit : EDIT mode Hndl : HANDLE mode Jog : JOG mode Tjog : TEACH in JOG mode THnd : TEACH in HANDLE mode Inc : INCREMENTAL mode Ref : REFERENCE mode Rmot : SCHEDULE mode Test : TEST run mode Status display in (2) **** : Reset Stop : Operation stopped Hold : Operation temporarily stopped Strt : Being started MStr : During tool wait and return operation, repositioning, and motion based on a manual numeric command Status display in (3) *** : Others Motn : During axis movement Dwel : During dwell operation Status display in (4) *** : Non-selection FIN : Waiting for processing Emg : Emergency stop state Reset : Reset state Status display in (5) *** : No alarm issued Alarm: Alarm issued
- 335 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Batt : Voltage drop of the battery for the nonvolatile memory and absolute position detector Status display in (6) M series (including Power Mate i) *** : No editing EDIT : During edited SeaRCH : Search being made OUTPUT : Data being output INPUT : Data being input COMPARE : Comparison being made Label Skip : Label skip state ReSTaRT : Program being restarted HPCC : RISC operation being performed PTRR : Placed in the tool retract and return mode RVRS : Retrace/reverse motion being performed RTRY : Retrace/re-forward motion being performed RVED : Retrace/reverse motion ended HANDLE : During handle interrupt OFfSet : Placed in the tool length compensation value measurement mode Work OFfSet : Placed in the workpiece origin offset measurement mode AICC : In AI contour control operation MEmory-CHecK : Tape memory check being made CusToMer's BoarD : In customer board control operation SAVE : Fine torque sensing data being saved AI NANO : In AI nano control operation AI APC : In AI advanced preview control operation MBL APC : In multi-block pre-read advanced preview control operation T series **** : No editing EDIT : During edited SeaRCH : Search being made OUTPUT : Data being output INPUT : Data being input COMPARE : Comparison being made Label SKip : Label skip state OFfSet : Placed in the tool length compensation value write mode Work ShiFT : Placed in the workpiece shift value write mode ReSTaRT : Program being restarted PTRR : Placed in the tool retract and return mode MEmory-CHecK : Tape memory check being made SAVE : Fine torque sensing data being saved Status display in (7) (valid only for a combined machine tool) T mode : T mode M mode : M mode
- 336 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
<4> Program number and sequence number display

The program number, file name, and sequence number currently selected are displayed. (1) (2) (1) Program number and file name (2) Sequence number
- 337 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
8.3
ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY

The actual position display screen can display the following information: (1) Overall position data (relative position, absolute position, machine position, and distance to go) (2) Relative position (3) Absolute position (4) Machine position (5) Distance to go This screen also displays the following information: (1) Modal information (2) Actual speed information
<1> Actual position display <2> Modal information display
<3> Actual speed information display Example of the actual position display screen
- 338 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
<1> Actual position display The current NC position is displayed. The following information can be displayed: (1) Overall position data (relative position, absolute position, machine position, and distance to go) (2) Relative position (3) Absolute position (4) Machine position (5) Distance to go The following buttons are used for display switching:
Example of overall position display
Example of relative position display
<2> Modal information display Modal information such as G code information is displayed. <3> Actual speed information display The actual speed and spindle speed are displayed.
- 339 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
8.4
PROGRAM CHECK
The program check screen can be used to check the NC program currently being executed. This screen also displays the following information: (1) Modal information (2) Actual speed information
<1> Program check display <2> Modal information display
<3> Actual speed information display Example of the program check screen
<1> Program check screen The NC program currently being executed is displayed. <2> Modal information display Modal information such as G code information is displayed. <3> Actual speed information display The actual speed and spindle speed are displayed.
- 340 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
8.5
PARAMETER SETTING
The parameter setting screen can be used to set NC parameters.
NOTE When setting parameters, place the NC in the following states: Setting data - Set "PARAMETER WRITE" to ENABLE. Operation state - Emergency stop state - Operation stop/halt state in the MDI mode
<1> Parameter setting
Example of the parameter setting screen
<1> Parameter setting Enabling/disabling parameter write operation Click the [PWE off] button to change it to [PWE on]. Click the [PWE on] button to change it to [PWE off] state.
NOTE To change [PWE off] to [PWE on], the NC must be placed in the emergency stop state or stopped/halted in the MDI mode.
- 341 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Parameter search Specify a parameter number to be found, and click the [Find] button. Bit-type parameter A bit-type parameter is set when its check box is checked.
NOTE When parameter write operation is disabled, the title line displays "(Writing Disabled)".
- 342 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
8.6
DIAGNOSIS
The diagnosis screen can display the diagnostic data of the operation state of the CNC including the servo system.
<1> Diagnosis screen
Example of the diagnosis screen
<1> Diagnosis screen Diagnosis items and their statuses are displayed. Diagnostic data search Specify a desired diagnostic data number, then click the [Find] button.
- 343 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NC MAINTENANCE
- 344 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.1
OUTLINE
With the NC maintenance function, operations such as input/output of NC maintenance information and various data items can be performed for each NC. With the NC maintenance function, the following capabilities are available: 1. Alarm history display and external operator message history display 2. Operation history display and history signal setting 3. Various data backup/restoration 4. FROM backup/restoration, SRAM backup 5. Display of history data automatically backed up
NOTE 1 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required. 2 When the i CELL is used on the CIMPLICITY viewer, history data automatically backed up cannot be displayed. 3 With Series 30i/31i/32i, only various data backup/restoration can be performed. The other functions are under development.
- 345 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.2
SCREEN OPERATION
Use one of the following methods to activate the screen: 1. [Main Menu] <Maintenance> button 2. <Maintenance> tab 3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen <Maintenance> button
Screen operation
<3> NC status information <1> NC machine selection <4> Program number, file name, and sequence number display
<2> NC maintenance switch button
With the NC maintenance function, the operations below are common. <1> NC machine selection From the combo box, select an NC machine and path number. For details, see <1>, "NC machine selection" in Section 8.2, "SCREEN OPERATION".
- 346 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
<2> NC maintenance switching Switch the screen display by clicking a desired button at the bottom of the screen.
[Alarm History] button: Displays alarm history data and external operator message history data. [Operation History] button: Displays operation history data and sets history signals. [Data Input/Output] button: Displays the data input/output screen. [FROM/SRAM Backup] button: Performs FROM data backup/restoration and SRAM backup. [Backup Data] button: Alarm history data, external operator message data, and operation history data backed up to the personal computer with the automatic backup function can be displayed. <3> NC status information display NC status information is displayed. For details, see <3>, "NC status information display" in Section 8.2, "SCREEN OPERATION". <4> Program number and sequence number display The program number and sequence number currently selected are displayed. For details, see <4>, " Program number, file name, and sequence number display" in Section 8.2, "SCREEN OPERATION".
- 347 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.3
ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY

The alarm history display screen can display the following information: (1) Alarm history data (2) External operator message history data
NOTE 1 History data being displayed on the alarm history screen is not sampled. 2 For external operator message history display, an optional function, that is, the external message function or the external data input function, is required. To display the external operator message history screen, bit 2 of the NC parameter No. 3112 must be set to 1. 3 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under development.
<1> Alarm history display
Example of the alarm history display screen
- 348 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.3.1
History Data Display

When the alarm history display screen is displayed, two history data items can be checked: (1) Alarm history data (2) External operator message history data Click the [Display Switch] button to switch to a desired screen. Page By clicking the scroll bar, page feed operation can be performed. When you click the [Top] button, the top (oldest) page of history information is displayed. When you click the [End] button, the bottom (newest) page of history information is displayed.
9.3.2
Outputting History Data

History data can be output in text image to an arbitrary folder according to the procedure below. <1> Click the [Output] button. The screen display changes as shown below. The keytop of the [Output] button changes to [Exec.].
Procedure for outputting history data
<2> Specify a desired folder name and file name, then click the [Exec.] button. If no extension is specified, the following extensions are used: Alarm history : .alhis External operator message history : .omhis
Format of alarm history data

The following five items, separated by spaces, are output: <1> Date (yy/mm/dd format) <2> Time (hh:mm:dd format) <3> Alarm number <4> Axis (For alarms not related to axes, 0 is indicated.) <5> Alarm message Example of alarm history output 04/02/24 10:52:03 5136 00 FSSB:NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL 04/02/24 10:51:33 0417 01 SERVO ALARM : AXIS DGTL PARAM
- 349 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Format of external operator message history data

The following four items, separated by spaces, are output: <1> Date (yy/mm/dd format) <2> Time (hh:mm:dd format) <3> Operator message number (When no operator message number is present, 0000 is indicated.) <4> Operator message Example of external operator message history output 04/05/07 09:41:42 0000 OPERATER MESSAGE B 04/04/21 22:21:58 2003 OPERATER MESSAGE A
9.3.3
Clearing History Data

When you click the [Clear] button, the following inquiry appears to confirm that history data may be cleared:
Click the [Yes] button. The history data is cleared.
- 350 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.4
OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY

The operation history display screen can be used to display NC operation history data and set history signals.
NOTE 1 NC operation history data being displayed on the operation history screen is not sampled. To display the operation history screen, bit 5 of the NC parameter No. 3112 must be set to 0, and bit 4 of the NC parameter No. 3106 must be set to 1. 2 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under development.
<1> Operation history display
Example of the operation history display screen
- 351 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.4.1
Operation History Display

This screen displays key input/signal operation performed by the operator, and the history of issued NC alarms. History data History data is displayed as indicated below. Function keys : <POS>, <PROG>, and so forth Address/numeric keys : A to Z, 0 to 9, ;, +, -, and so forth Page/cursor keys : <PAGE_U>, <PAGE_D>, <CUR_U>, <CUR_D>, <CUR_L>, <CUR_R> Soft keys : [SF1], [SF2], [SF3], [SF4], and so forth Other keys : <RESET>, <CAN>, and so forth Signals: G0000.7_ON, G000.7_OFF, and so forth Alarms: PS/0100, OT ALM/xxxx, and so forth * For the meanings of alarms, refer to the operator's manual of each CNC. Date: YY/MM/DD for Japanese MM/DD/YY for English Time: hh:mm:ss
NOTE For the word sub, and path 3, "S_" and "3_" is prefixed, respectively. Example: <S_POS>, S_G, 3_G0000.7_U, 3_PS/0000, and so forth
Page Page feed operation can be performed by clicking the scroll bar. When you click the [Top] button, the top (oldest) page of history information is displayed. When you click the [End] button, the bottom (newest) page of history information is displayed.
- 352 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.4.2
Outputting History Data

History data can be output in text image to an arbitrary folder according to the procedure below. <1> Click the [Output] button. The screen display changes as shown below. The keytop of the [Output] button changes to [Exec.].
Outputting operation history data
<2> Specify a desired folder name and file name, then click the [Exec.] button. If no extension is specified, the following extension is used: .ophis
Format of operation history data

The following three items, separated by spaces, are output: <1> Record type <2> Data for record type <3> Data displayed on the NC screen The following values are set for the first and second items:
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12
1st item Record type MDI in path 1 Signal in path 1 Alarm in path 1 Date Time MDI in path 2 Signal in path 2 Alarm in path 2 MDI in path 3 Signal in path 3 Alarm in path 3
2nd item Data for record type 1 Power-on, 2 Others Always set to 0 Always set to 0 1 Power-on, 2 Others 1 Power-on, 2 Others 1 Power-on, 2 Others Always set to 0 Always set to 0 1 Power-on, 2 Others Always set to 0 Always set to 0
Data for the third item is displayed on the screen. Example of operation history output data 0 1 <RESET> 0 1 <DELETE> 3 1 04/02/24 4 1 10:47:26 2 0 PS/0100 0 0 <SYSTEM>
- 353 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.4.3
Clearing History Data

When you click the [Clear] button, the following inquiry appears to confirm that history data may be cleared:
Click the [Yes] button. The history data is cleared.
9.4.4
History Signal Setting

Click the [Signal Setting] button. The screen changes as shown below, enabling operation history I/O signals to be set.
Setting of I/O signals Set signal names, signal numbers, and bit data subject to I/O signal history data manipulation. Up to 20 data items can be set. All clear When you click the [All Clear] button, all currently set operation history target signal data is cleared. Clear When you click the [Clear] button, the operation history target signal data where the cursor is placed currently is cleared. Display of the operation history screen When you click the [History Display] button, the screen display returns to the operation history display screen.
- 354 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.5
VARIOUS DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION

With the various data backup/restoration function, the following data can be backed up/restored: (1) NC parameters (2) Tool offset data (3) Pitch error compensation data (4) Custom macro variables (in the five hundred) (5) Workpiece origin offset
NOTE For pitch error compensation data, the pitch error compensation function (option) is required. For custom macro variables, custom macro B (option) is required. For workpiece origin offset data, the workpiece coordinate system setting function (option) is required.
<1> Data backup/restoration
- 355 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.5.1
Data Backup
Data can be backed up using the procedure below. <1> From the data type combo box, select a type of data to be backed up. (1) NC parameter (2) Tool offset data (3) Pitch error compensation data (4) Custom macro variables (in the five hundreds) (5) Workpiece origin offset <2> Specify TV check and CTV. Specify TV check and CTV as required. TV check A blank code is inserted into a data block to make a TV check. When this item is checked, the TV check function is enabled. CTV This item is enabled when TV check is set ON. When this item is checked, TV check in a comment is canceled. <3> Specify a folder name for saving backup data. When a folder name is specified, a list of the files in the folder is displayed. <4> Specify a file name for storing backup data. Use one of the two methods: (1) Select a file from the list. (2) Specify a file name directly. <5> Click the [BackUp NC->PC] button to start backup operation. During backup operation, data being backed up is displayed in the list area. * To cancel backup operation, click the [Cancel] button.
- 356 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.5.2
Data Restoration
Data can be restored using the procedure below. <1> From the data type combo box, select a type of data to be restored. (1) NC parameter (2) Tool offset data (3) Pitch error compensation data (4) Custom macro variables (in the five hundreds) (5) Workpiece origin offset <2> Specify TV check and CTV. Specify TV check and CTV as required. TV check A blank code is inserted into a data block to make a TV check. When this item is checked, the TV check function is enabled. CTV This item is enabled when TV check is set ON. When this item is checked, TV check in a comment is canceled. <3> Specify the name of a folder holding data to be restored. When a folder name is specified, a list of the files in the folder is displayed. <4> Specify the name of a file to be restored. Use one of the two methods: (1) Select a file from the list. (2) Specify a file name directly. <5> Click the [Restore PC->NC] button to start restoration operation. During restoration operation, data being restored is displayed in the list area. * To cancel restoration operation, click the [Cancel] button.
9.5.3
File List Refreshing

Click the [List Refresh] button to update the list to the latest state.
- 357 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.5.4
File Deletion
A file on the list can be deleted using the procedure below. <1> Specify the name of a folder where a file to be deleted is held. Specify the name of a folder to be displayed as a list. <2> Specify the name of a file to be deleted. Use one of the two methods: (1) Select a file from the list. (2) Specify a file name directly. <3> Click the [Delete] button. The following inquiry is displayed:
Click the [Yes] button. The specified file is deleted.
- 358 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.6
FROM/SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION

The FROM/SRAM data backup/restoration function can back up, restore, and delete FROM data and can back up SRAM data.
NOTE 1 In FROM data backup/restoration/deletion, only user files created by the machine tool builder or user in FROM can be backed up, restored, and deleted. The system files distributed by FANUC cannot be backed up, restored, and deleted. 2 To restore SRAM data, the NC boot function needs to be used. 3 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under development.
<1> FROM/SRAM data backup/restoration
- 359 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.6.1
FROM Data Backup

FROM data can be backed up using the procedure below. <1> Click the [BackUp NC->PC] button. <2> From the data type combo box, select FROM. <3> From the board name combo box, select the name of the board where the FROM to be backed up is installed. <4> Specify the name of a folder where FROM data to be backed up is to be saved. <5> From the list, select FROM data to be backed up. <6> Click the [Exec.] button to start backup operation. During backup operation, the progress bar indicates the progress status of backup operation. * * To cancel backup operation, click the [Cancel] button. Naming of a backed up FROM file A backed up FROM file is automatically named as follows: FROM-file-name.xxx xxx represents a serial number starting with 000. If a specified folder holds the same FROM file name, a higher number such as 001 and 002 is assigned.
- 360 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.6.2
FROM Data Restoration

FROM data can be restored using the procedure below. <1> Click the [Restore PC->NC] button. <2> From the data type combo box, select FROM. <3> From the board name combo box, select the name of the board where the FROM to be restored is installed. <4> Specify the name of a folder where FROM data to be restored is stored. <5> From the list, select an FROM data file to be restored. <6> Click the [Exec.] button to start restoration operation. During restoration operation, the progress bar indicates the progress status of restoration operation. * To cancel restoration operation, click the [Cancel] button.
NOTE When restoration operation is canceled, FROM data becomes invalid. When the power is turned on next time, the CNC may not start up.
- 361 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.6.3
SRAM Data Backup

SRAM data can be backed up using the procedure below. <1> Click the [BackUp NC->PC] button. <2> From the data type combo box, select SRAM. <3> From the board name combo box, select the name of the board where the SRAM to be backed up is installed. <4> Specify the name of a folder where SRAM data to be backed up is to be saved. <5> From the list, select SRAM data to be backed up. <6> Click the [Exec.] button to start backup operation. During backup operation, the progress bar indicates the progress status of backup operation. * * To cancel backup operation, click the [Cancel] button. Naming of a backed up SRAM file To a backed up SRAM file, a name that can be recognized by the NC boot function is automatically assigned.
NOTE Before SRAM data can be backed up, the NC must be placed in the "emergency stop" state.
9.6.4
File List Refreshing

Click the [List Refresh] button to update the list to the latest state.
- 362 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
9.6.5
FROM Data Deletion

FROM data in an FROM of the NC can be deleted using the procedure below. <1> Click the [BackUp NC->PC] button. <2> From the data type combo box, select FROM. <3> From the board name combo box, select the name of the board where the FROM to be deleted is installed. <4> From the list, select FROM data to be deleted. <5> Click the [Delete] button. The following inquiry appears:
Click the [Yes] button. The FROM data is deleted.
- 363 -
9.NC MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
9.7
BACKUP DATA DISPLAY

The backup data display screen can display the following history data backed up to the personal computer with the automatic backup function: (1) Alarm history data (2) External operator message history data (3) Operation history data
NOTE 1 To display external operator message history data, the optional external message function or the optional external data input function is required. 2 The automatic backup function of the alarm history, external operator message history, and operation history for Series 30i/31i/32i is under development.
Screen operation
<1> Data type selection button
<3> Display button <4> Button for jump to top/end
<2> Display period specification
- 364 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
9.NC MAINTENANCE
The screen operation procedure is described below. <1> Data type selection Select a type of history data to be displayed on the screen. A selection can be made from alarm history, message history, and operation history. No button can be pressed for a type of history data for which a history data file is not created. <2> Display period specification Specify a period for which history data is displayed.
NOTE In the case of operation history data, a display period is based not on the date of the data but on the date when the data was acquired from the NC. (Unlike alarm history data and message history data, duplicate operation history data is not deleted.) The amount of operation history data is huge. So, data read from the NC by each read operation should be displayed on the screen. Example : When data is collected once a day, specify a display period of one day. When data is collected once a week, specify a display period of seven days. If you specify the display of multiple sets of read data (for example, if you specify a display period of two days when data is to be collected once a day), all data cannot be displayed on the screen.
<3> Display button After selecting a type of data and a period of display, press the Display button. The specified data is displayed. <4> Top/End button When data is displayed, you can jump to the top or end of data by pressing the Top or End button.
- 365 -
10.TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
10
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
- 366 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
10.1
OUTLINE
The tool life management screen has the function equivalent to that of the tool life screen of the NC. The screen provides two types of display: tool group list display and tool group detail display. At the time of tool group list display, select a group number and click the [Detail] button to switch the screen display to tool group detail display.
NOTE 1 The tool life management option is required with the NC. With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life management function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1. 2 There are not the tool life management function and option for that in Power Mate i. 3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required. 4 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under development.
- 367 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
10.2
SCREEN OPERATION
Use one of the following methods to activate the screen: 1. [Main Menu] <Operation Monitoring> button (The machining result screen is activated.) <Tool Life Management> button 2. <Op. Monitoring> tab (The machining result screen is activated.) <Tool Life Management> button 3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen <Tool Life Management> button When this screen is activated, a tool group list is displayed.
Automatic update
This screen is updated to the latest information at intervals of one minute.
Screen operation
<1> Display change button <2> Display refresh button
- 368 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION

This button switches the screen display between tool group list display and tool group detail display. At the time of tool group list display, this button is enabled only if a group number is already selected (a group number of the table is clicked and the color of the line is reversed). The keytop of this button displays [Detail] at the time of tool group list display, and displays [List] at the time of tool group detail display.
- Example of tool group list display

A tool group list is displayed. However, a tool group with no tool registered is not displayed.
A. Currently used tool group number display B. Currently selected tool group number display
C. Tool group list
A. B. C.
Currently used tool group number display The currently used tool group number is displayed. When no tool group is currently used, [***] is displayed. Currently selected tool group number display The currently selected tool group number is displayed. When no tool group is currently selected, [***] is displayed. Tool group list Group No. Tool group numbers are displayed. Use Tool No. The order number of each currently used tool is displayed. When no tool is used currently, [-] is displayed. Life The life of each currently used tool are displayed. Count The count of each currently used tool is displayed.
- 369 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
Rest of Life The remaining life of each currently used tool is displayed. This value is the result of subtracting the value of Count from the value of Life. Unused Number The number of tools not used yet is displayed, However, skipped tools are not counted in this number.
- Example of tool group detail display

The state of tools registered in a selected tool group is displayed. For the tool currently used, life information is displayed as well.
A. Currently used tool group number display B. Currently selected tool group number display
C. Tool group detail table
D. Currently used tool detail display
A. B. C.
D.
Currently used tool group number display This display is not used on this screen. Currently selected tool group number display This display is not used on this screen. Tool group detail table Order No. The order number of each currently used tool is displayed. Tool No. Each registered tool number is displayed. State Tool state information is displayed. One of four types of states are indicated: Use, Unused, No Life, and Skip. Currently used tool detail display For each of the items, the same data as for the tool group list is displayed.

Clicking this button updates the screen to display the latest data.

Clicking this button displays the machining result screen.

Clicking this button displays the workpiece process result screen.
- 370 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
11.ALARM AND WARNING
11
ALARM AND WARNING
- 371 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
11.1
OUTLINE
The alarm and warning screen has the [Alarm Message] button and [Warning Log Display] button.
Alarm message
Clicking this button displays the alarm message screen. The alarm message screen shows any current alarm state of a machine by the alarm message if the communication protocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet. If the communication protocol is DNC2, the alarm type is shown instead. Any operator message is shown at the same time.
NOTE 1 FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i can use the operator message display function if the external data input or external message function is provided. Power Mate i does not require any optional function to use the operator message function. 2 To use the alarm message display function, the FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required. To use the operator message display function, the FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required. 3 The operator message display function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under development.
- 372 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
Warning log display

Clicking this button displays the warning log display screen. To view an error log, click the [Log Display] button. To turn off the warning (WRN) lamp, click the [Turn Off Warning Lamp] button. While the WRN lamp is blinking, an error log is automatically displayed.
NOTE 1 If the WRN lamp blinks, activate error log display on the warning log display screen and send the log to FANUC. 2 When the screen is displayed with WebView, error log display is not performed.
- 373 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
11.2
SCREEN OPERATION (1) ALARM MESSAGE SCREEN

Use one of the following methods to activate the screen: 1. [Main Menu] [Alarm and Warning] button (The alarm and warning screen appears.) [Alarm Message] button 2. [Alarm & Warning] tab (The alarm and warning screen appears.) [Alarm Message] button 3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen [Alarm Message] button 4. Click the [ALM] ([OPM]) lamp when the lamp is turned on. When the screen is activated, the screen displays the alarm message or operator message for the machine with the youngest machine number among those machines for which alarms are issued. If there are both an alarm state and an operator message, the information of a machine in the alarm state is displayed.
Automatic update
This screen is updated to the latest information at intervals of one minute.
Method of operation
<2> Machine name display <4> Status display for each path <1> Machine number display <6> Display refresh button
<7> Alarm message display
<8> Operator message display
- 374 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
<1> through <5>

The same information as for the overview screen is displayed.

This button updates the screen display to the latest information.
<7> Alarm message display

Alarms (irrelevant to axes) issued for the displayed machine (all paths) are displayed. The following items are displayed. When FOCAS2/Ethernet is used The following items are displayed: Path Axis ("---" is indicated when the alarm is irrelevant to an axis.) No. Alarm No. Type Message ("No Setting" is indicated when no message is set in the database.) Example
When DNC2 is used The following items are displayed: Path No. Bit Type Example
- 375 -
OPERATION
B-75074EN/04
NOTE When DNC2 is used, only those alarms that are irrelevant to axes can be displayed.
<8> Operator message display

Operator messages issued for the displayed machine are displayed. The following items are displayed: Path (If a distinction between paths is not made, [---] appears.) No. (If no number is assigned, [---] appears.) Message Example
NOTE 1 If four operator messages are displayed on the i CELL setting screen, and a function for displaying four messages is set on the NC, up to four operator messages can be displayed. In other cases, only one message can be displayed. 2 The symbols & and ~ displayed on the NC side are displayed as indicated below. NC side & i CELL side _ ~
- 376 -
B-75074EN/04
OPERATION
11.3
SCREEN OPERATION (2) ALARM LOG DISPLAY SCREEN

Use one of the following methods to activate the screen: 1. [Main Menu] [Alarm and Warning] button (The alarm and warning screen appears.) [Warning Log Display] button 2. [Alarm & Warning] tab (The alarm and warning screen appears.) [Warning Log Display] button 3. Click the [WRN] lamp when the lamp is turned on.
<1> Machine number display button
<2> Warning lamp turn-off button
<1> Log Display

This button displays the error log screen. When [WRN] is blinking, the error log screen is automatically displayed. This button is used to display the error log screen when [WRN] is not blinking, or is used to close the error log screen automatically displayed then re-display the error log screen.
<2> Turn Off Warning Lamp

After correcting the cause of a warning, turn off the warning lamp by clicking this button.
- 377 -
V. USER CUSTOMIZATION
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
1.OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Part V, "USER CUSTOMIZATION", provides information required to customize the i CELL. 1. 2. OVERVIEW This is the chapter you are reading now. ADDING SCREENS This chapter describes the method of adding new screens to the i CELL. DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications of the i CELL database. REFERENCING THE DATABASE This chapter describes the method of referencing the i CELL database from Excel.
Organization of this part
3.
4.
- 381 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
ADDING SCREENS
This chapter describes the method of adding new screens to the i CELL. A new screen to be added must match the screen system (configuration) of the i CELL. This chapter describes items necessary for this purpose. This chapter alose describes DLL usable for screen creation. For details of operating the editor CimEdit for creating screens, refer to "CIMPLICITY HMI CimEdit OPERATORS MANUAL (B-75064EN-1)".
- 382 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.1
SCREEN SYSTEM OF THE i CELL

This section describes the screen system (screen configuration and screen switching) of the i CELL.
2.1.1
Screen Configuration
The screen configuration of the i CELL is outlined below. Basically, the individual screens are hierarchically structured in each function group.
Function Group (Function Overlay Tab) Main Menu Overview Standard Screen (*1) Menu Menu Menu Screen List for Each Machine NC Program Management Machining Result Workpieces Process Result Tool Life Management Function Screen (*2)
NC Program Management Operation Monitoring
NC Display and Operation
Actual Position Display Program Check Parameter Setting Diagnosis
Alarm and Warning
Menu
Alarm Message Warning Log Display
Maintenance
Alarm History Display Operation History Display Data Input/Output FROM/SRAM Backup Backup Data Display
Remote Support
Menu
Remote Support
- 383 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
(*1) Standard screen: Screen that is opened when the function switch tab is selected and has a function for switching to another screen of the same group. In the function groups with no standard screen, the screens (Machining Result, Actual Position Display, and Alarm History Display) displayed at the top of the function screen serve as standard screens. These screens can be called either standard screens or function screens. (*2) Function screen: Screen that has a function such as for data display
2.1.2
Screen Switching
With the i CELL, the screen display can be basically switched in the arrow directions shown in the outline of the screen configuration of Subsection 2.1.1, "Screen Configuration". Example 1 : Overview group When the OverView tab is selected, the screen display switches to the menu. From the menu, the screen display can be switched to Screen List for Each Machine. Example 2 : Operation Monitoring group When the Op. Monitoring tab is selected, the screen display switches to Machining Result. From Machining Result, the screen display can be switched to Workpieces Process Result and Tool Life Management. From Workpieces Process Result, the screen display can be switched to Machining Result and Tool Life Management. From Tool Life Management, the screen display can be switched to Machining Result and Workpieces Process Result. Example 3 : Alarm and Warning group When the Alarm & Warning tab is selected, the screen display switches to Menu. From Menu, the screen display can be switched to Alarm Message and Warning Log Display. The screen display cannot be switched between Alarm Message and Warning Log Display. To switch to another function group, the function switch tab is usually used. However, by using Main Menu, Screen List for Each Machine of Overview, the <Back> button, or the warning and alarm lamps, the screen display can be switched to a particular screen. For screen switch operation, see the relevant items in Part IV, "OPERATION".
- 384 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.2
SCREEN ADDITION
This chapter sequentially describes jobs required to add new screens.
NOTE Before performing screen addition jobs (such as screen creation and modification), be sure to back up the i CELL. For the method of backup, see Chapter 5, "BACKUP AND RESTORATION", in Part II, INSTALLATION".
2.2.1
Determination of Basic Items

This subsection describes the basic items that need to be determined before starting screen addition jobs (such as screen creation and screen modification).
Determination of screen configuration

Determine a configuration for adding a screen. Two major methods are available. <1> A new function group is created, and a screen is added to the group. <2> A screen is added to an existing function group. Depending on the number of screens (functions) to be added and on the mechanism for screen switching, <1> is recommended because new screens can be added more easily and less modifications to the i CELL are required. Assuming that method <1> is used for screen addition, the method of adding a standard screen and function screen is described below. When method <2> is used, only a function screen is added. So, see the relevant items only.
NOTE Up to ten function groups can be used with the current i CELL. However, eight function groups are already used, so that only two function groups can be added.
- 385 -
2.ADDING SCREENS Determination of basic items
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
Determine the basic items indicated in the table below. The items are used in various settings described later.
Basic items Description Name of a function group Character string displayed on a function switch tab. Two rows are used for display in a function switch tab. A character string is to be displayed on each of the upper and lower rows. Selection of whether the function switch tab of a function group is visible when WebView is executed. 0: Visible, 1: Invisible Name of a screen to be opened when you click a function switch tab Actual Cim file name of a standard function 6-digit ID whose 3 higher digits do not duplicate any other standard screen ScreenIDs (*1) Name of a function screen Actual Cim file name of a function screen Standard screen ScreenID whose 3 lower digits are modified. No duplication with other ScreenIDs is allowed. (*1)
Item Function group name Function switch tab character string display (upper row/lower row) Visibility in WebView Standard screen name Standard screen file name Standard screen ScreenID Function screen name Function screen file name Function screen ScreenID
Example User Function Upper row: User Lower row: Function 0: Visible User standard screen StnScr.cim 900000 User function screen FncScr.cim 900001
(*1) Use a number in the nine hundred thousands.
- 386 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.2.2
Modification to the Function Switch Tab

A function switch tab is created based on the setting of the ini file (iCellTabCtl.ini) and is stored in the TabPos.cim file. To modify the function switch tab, first modify the ini file then make a function switch tab modification on the CimEdit screen. When no new function group is to be created, no modification to the function switch tab is required.
Modifying the ini file

1 2 3 Copy the iCellTabCtl.ini file in the %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory, and create a backup file for safety. Open the iCellTabCtl.ini file. Add data such as names determined in Subsection 2.2.1, "Determination of Basic Items" on the last line of each item as shown in the example below.
Example [Menu] 100000 = "Main Menu" . 108000 = "Remote Support" 900000 = "User Function" [File Name] xxx000 = "File Name" 100000 = "MainMenu.cim" . 108000 = "RemoteDgnMenu.cim" 900000 = "StnScr.cim" [WebView Visibility] '0:Visible, 1:Invisible . 108000 = "1" 900000 = "0" [Tab Text] 100000_0 = "Main" . 108000_1 = "Support" 900000_0 = "User" 900000_1 = "Function" .
Function Group Names
Added Line
Standard Screen File Names
Added Line
Visibility in WebView
Added Line
Character strings displayed in Function Overlay Tab
Added Line
NOTE Do not modify any other lines. Otherwise, the i CELL can malfunction.
4 Upon completion of addition, save and close the file.
- 387 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
Modification to the function switch tab

1 2 3 4 5 Copy the TabPos.cim file in the %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory, and create a backup copy for safety. Activate the i CELL project. (It is recommended that the communication enable check box of each machine be unchecked on the i CELL setting screen before activation.) Open TabPos.cim with CimEdit (file selection > right-click > Edit). Double-click the function switch tab (general-purpose tab control) on the opened TabPos.cim screen (or select the function switch tab > right-click > select the trigger smart object). A message box indicating the path of the ini file to be used for function switch tab creation appears. Click the <OK> button.
A message box indicating the completion of function switch tab creation appears. Click the <OK> button.
Before modification
After modification
This completes modification to the function switch tab. Save and close the screen.
- 388 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.2.3
Creation of a Basic Screen

This subsection describes the method of creating a screen (basic screen) that includes objects (general-purpose objects for i CELL) required on an i CELL screen. However, a sample file (SampleBaseScr.cim) created as described below already exists in the %iCELL%\Sample\screens directory. It is recommended that the sample file be used for a basic screen (when general-purpose objects as used with the current i CELL screen are used). If the sample file is used, this subsection need not be read. In such a case, proceed to Subsection 2.2.4, "Creation of a Standard Screen and Function Screen". A basic screen is used as the base for a standard screen and function screen to be added, as described below. 1 2 3 4 Produce a copy of the TabPos.cim file contained in the %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory in the same directory. Change the name of the produced copy to a proper name. For explanation, the new name BaseScr.cim is assigned to the file used for the basic screen. Open the BaseScr.cim file with CimEdit (file selection > right-click > Edit). Delete the general-purpose tab control (function switch tab), Back button, title bar, message line, and warning and alarm lamps of the BaseScr.cim screen.
- 389 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
Title bar
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
Warning and alarm lamps
Message line
General-purpose tab control
Back button
5 6
7 8
Open the TabPos.cim file with CimEdit (file selection > right-click > Edit). Select all necessary objects from the general-purpose tab control, Back button, title bar, message line, and warning and alarm lamps of the TabPos.cim screen (multiple objects can be selected by clicking each object while holding down the Shift key), then select Edit then Copy from the menu. On the BaseScr.cim screen, select Edit then Paste Special from the menu. A dialog box appears. Select Paste Link then click the <OK> button.
- 390 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
9 10
Select only one pasted object, then right-click then select Properties. The Properties-Link Container dialog box appears. Select the Link Container tab, then change the data in the text box of "Link source file" to TabPos.cim (delete"%iCELL%\CimProject\screens\").
11 12
After making a change, click the <OK> button then close the dialog box. After performing steps 9 to 11 for all pasted objects, save and close the screen.
As described above, if "Paste Link" is executed for an object, a modification to the object can be made only by making a modification to the object in the link source file (TabPos.cim). For details of each pasted object, see Section "GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL". 2.3,
- 391 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.2.4
Creation of a Standard Screen and Function Screen

Both a standard screen and function screen are created based on the basic screen. For a standard screen and function screen to operate according to the i CELL system, the screen variables (screen level variables) need to be set properly. Moreover, a mechanism for screen switching needs to be created.
2.2.4.1
File creation
Produce two copies of the basic screen file in the %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory, then assign a standard screen file name and function screen file name determined in Subsection 2.2.1, "Determination of Basic Items" to the produced copies. When using the sample screen creation file SampleBaseScr.cim, produce two copies of the file in the %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory. In the explanation below, the sample file names are used. That is, the name of the standard function screen is StnScr.cim, and the name of the function screen file is FncScr.cim.
- 392 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.2.4.2
Setting the screen variables (screen level variables)

Set the screen variables of the standard screen and function screen. 1 2 3 Open each file with CimEdit (file selection > right-click > Edit). Select Format then Screen Properties from the menu. The Properties-Screen dialog box appears. Select the Variables tab.
Set each variable indicated in the table below. To match the sample settings in Subsection 2.2.1, "Determination of Basic Items", the values to be set in StnScr.cim and FncScr.cim are also described.
- 393 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
Setting of screen variables Description Tab number of the function group to which the screen belongs. From top to bottom, the tab numbers are 0, 1, 2, ..., and 9. (*1) Value that does not duplicate any other screens of the function group to which the screen belongs. The value is 0 for the screen that is displayed when the tab is selected. Initial value: -1 (*2) Initial value: -1 (*2) Initial value: 0 (*2) Text character string for representing the name of the function screen to which the screen belongs Text character string for representing a screen name
B-75074EN/04
Variable FanucTabCtl_FirstSelected
StnScr.cim 8
FncScr.cim 8
FanucTabCtl_SubID
FanucTabCtl_ID FanucTabCtl_TabSelected FanucTabCtl_UsedOption FNC_TBar_Menu FNC_TBar_ScrName FNC_MLine_DspMsg
-1 -1 0 User Function
FNC_MsgFlag
FNC_ErrFlag FNC_DspFlag
User standard screen Text character string to be displayed. This character string Message needs to be enclosed in double quotation marks ("). Initial value: "Message" (*3) 0 Whether a message is to be displayed is indicated. 0 (initial value): Not displayed, Other than 0: Displayed (*3) Whether an error has occurred is indicated. 0 0 (initial value): Normal, Other than 0: Error (*3) 0 Whether screen display is being processed is indicated. 0 (initial value): Not being processed, 1: Being processed (*3)
-1 -1 0 User Function User function screen Message
0 0
(*1) The newly usable value is 8 or 9. (*2) Do not change the value. If a value other than the initial value is set, the function switch tab can malfunction. (*3) The value need not be changed. The values of these variables are changed by a script or action to control the screen (general-purpose objects for the i CELL). For details of the general-purpose objects for the i CELL, see Section 2.3, "GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL". 5 6 When all screen variables have been set, click the <OK> button, then close the dialog box. Save the screen.
- 394 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.2.4.3
Screen switching
With the function switch tab, the screen display can be switched only between the standard screens of individual function groups, and the screen display cannot be switched between screens in the same group. To switch to another screen, a mechanism for switching to a standard screen needs to be created. This subsection describes the method of creating a mechanism for screen switching by using a screen switching action. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Open the StnScr.cim file with CimEdit (file selection > right-click > Edit). Open the Properties-Screen dialog box (select Format then Screen Properties from the menu), then select the Procedures tab. Click the <New> button then select the Actions tab. Enter an appropriate name (e.g., OverlayFncScr) in Procedure Name then click the <New> button. After setting "Overlay screen" in the action type field, enter the screen name (FncScr.cim) then select the basic project (CIMPROJECT). Click the <OK> button to return to the Properties-Screen dialog box. Click the <OK> button to end the creation of the procedure. Select Tools then Text Button from the menu then place the text button at an appropriate location. Open the Properties-Object dialog box of the placed text button (object selection > right-click > Properties), then select the Events tab. Click the <Create> button. Set "Mouse Down" in the event field, then set the procedure OverlayFncScr created previously in the action field. Click the <OK> button to end the creation of the event. Save the screen.
By setting a desired file name as a switching file name, a mechanism for switching directly from a particular screen to another screen can be created in a similar way. Example Menu Operation Monitoring (Machining Result) Screen List for Each Machine Tool Life Management As described above, a standard screen and function screen can be created according to the i CELL system. By adding various objects to these screens later on, customized screens can be created.
- 395 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.3
GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL

This section describes the objects (general-purpose objects) shared by each screen of the i CELL. By using all of these objects, a screen similar to the i CELL screen produced by FANUC can be created. A screen similar to the i CELL screen produced by FANUC can also be created without using these objects.
2.3.1
General-Purpose Tab (Function Switch Tab) Control

The tabs represent the individual function groups set in the ini file (iCellTabCtl.ini).
Setting
The screen variables below need to be set.
FanucTabCtl_FirstSelected Tab number of the function group to which the screen belongs. From top to bottom, the tab numbers are 0, 1, 2, ..., and 9. Value that does not duplicate any other screens of the function group to which the screen belongs. The value is 0 for the screen that is displayed when the tab is selected. Initial value: -1. Do not change the value. Initial value: -1. Do not change the value. Initial value: 0. Do not change the value. (*1) Whether an error has occurred is indicated. 0 (initial value): Normal, Other than 0: Error Whether screen display is being processed is (*1) indicated. 0 (initial value): Not being processed, 1: Being processed
FanucTabCtl_SubID
FanucTabCtl_Id FanucTabCtl_TabSelected FanucTabCtl_UsedOption FNC_ErrFlag FNC_DspFlag
(*1) With the general-purpose tab control, the variables are used as an operation execution condition. Execution condition: FNC_ErrFlag=0 and FNC_DspFlag1
- 396 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
Operation
When you double-click a tab, the screen display switches to the corresponding function screen.
2.3.2
Back Button
When you click the Back button, the screen currently open is closed and the screen that was previously open is opened.
Setting
FNC_ErrFlag FNC_DspFlag Whether an error has occurred is indicated. 0 (initial value): Normal, Other than 0: Error (*1) Whether screen display is being processed is indicated. 0 (initial value): Not being processed, 1: Being processed
(*1)
(*1) With the general-purpose tab control, the variables are used as an operation execution condition. Execution condition: FNC_ErrFlag=0 and FNC_DspFlag1
Operation
When you click the Back button, a procedure is executed to close the screen currently open and open the screen that was previously open.
2.3.3
Title Bar
The title bar displays a package name ("Integrated Package" by default), menu (function) name, screen name, and date and time (CIMPLICITY system point value).
Package name
Menu (function) name
Screen name
Date and time
Setting
FNC_TBar_Menu FNC_TBar_ScrName Text character string for representing a menu (function) name Text character string for representing a screen name
Operation
When a screen is opened, the menu (function) name, screen name, and date and time information are acquired and displayed.
- 397 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.3.4
Message Line
The message line displays a message.
Message
<OK> button
Setting
The screen variables and procedure below need to be set. Screen variables
FNC_MLine_DspMsg
FNC_ErrFlag FNC_MsgFlag
Text character string to be displayed. This character string needs to be enclosed in double quotation marks ("). Example: "Error occurred." Whether an error has occurred is indicated. (*1) 0 (initial value): Normal, Other than 0: Error Whether a character string is to be displayed is indicated. (*1) 0 (initial value): Not displayed, Other than 0: Displayed
(*1) With the message line, the variables are used as an operation execution condition. Execution condition: FNC_ErrFlag 0 or FNC_MsgFlag0 Procedure
ErrorFlagLow
Procedure executed to set FNC_ErrFlag=0. Ensure that the action FNC_ErrFlag=0 is included.
Operation
A message is displayed. When an error occurs, a message is displayed with FNC_ErrFlag0 (red characters). In other cases, a message is displayed with FNC_MsgFlag0 (blue characters). When FNC_ErrFlag0, the <OK> button is displayed. When you click this button, an event for calling the procedure ErrorFlagLow (setting FNC_ErrFlag=0 by action) occurs, and the message and button are hidden.
- 398 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.3.5
Warning and Alarm Lamps

The warning and alarm lamps post the output of a warning and alarm (operator message).
Warning lamp
Alarm (operator message) lamp
Setting
The points below need to be set.
FNCSYSP.F_WARNING
FNCSYSP.F_ALARM
FNCSYSP.F_OPM
Whether a warning is output with the i CELL is indicated. 0: Not output, 1: Output Whether an alarm is output with the NC is indicated. 0: Not output, 1: Output Whether an operator message is output with the NC is indicated. 0: Not output, 1: Output
These points are automatically set by the i CELL, so that the user need not set these points.
Operation
When FNCSYSP.F_WARNING=1, the warning lamp blinks in yellow. When FNCSYSP.F_ALARM=1, the alarm lamp blinks in red. When FNCSYSP.F_OPM=1 and FNCSYSP.F_ALARM1, the alarm lamp blinks in purple, and the character string changes from "ALM" to "OPM". If you click a blinking lamp, the screen display switches to a screen that provides detailed information.
- 399 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.4
ScreenID.ini
ScreenID.ini is the ini file for setting a screen ID (ScreenID) and is stored under the %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen directory. By setting the screen ID of each screen in this file, the selection of a machine with the machine selection control is enabled. When using the machine selection control, be sure to set this file.
2.4.1
File Modification
Modify the file according to the procedure below. 1 2 3 Copy the ScreenID.ini file stored under the %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen directory and create a backup file for safety. Open the ScreenID.ini file. By using the ScreenID determined in Subsection 2.2.1, "Determination of Basic Items", make the following additions as described in the example below:
Example
Version Information
Correspondence between ScreenIDs and File Names
Correspondence between Item Names and ScreenIDs
[Ini] Version=1.0.0.1 [FileName] 100000=MainMenu.cim . 108000=RemoteDgnMenu.cim 900000=StnScr.cim 900001=FncScr.cim [ScreenID] MainMenu=100000 . RemoteDgnMenu=108000 StnScr=900000 FncScr=900001
Added Line
Added Line
NOTE Do not modify the other lines. Otherwise, the i CELL can malfunction.
4 After making all necessary additions, save and close the file.
- 400 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.5
iCELL_ErrorMessage
iCELL_ErrorMessage is the OLE automation module (Active X DLL) used to write an error log related to the i CELL to the log file. iCELL_ErrorMessage is installed in iCELL_ErrorMessage.DLL. Use this module when writing a user-specific error log.
2.5.1
ErrorMessage
An error log is written to the log file. This class is installed in iCELL_ErrorMessage.ErrorMessage within iCELL_ErrorMessage.DLL.
2.5.1.1
Initialize
Method
Performs initialization processing.
- Syntax
object.Initialize LogName
- Setting
LogName
By using a character string expression, set the log identifier of the log file to which an error log is to be written. Set iCELLErrLog.
- Return value
A Boolean value is returned. When the processing is successful, True is returned. When the processing fails, False is returned.
Terminate
Performs termination processing.
- Syntax
object.Terminate
- Return value
None
WriteLog
Writes an error log to the log file.
- Syntax
object.WriteLog Message
- Setting
Message
Set a character string expression to be written to the log file.
- Return value
None
- 401 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.5.1.2
Example of usage
An example of program for writing an error log is provided below. Dim obj As Object Dim bRtn As Boolean Dim Message As String Set obj = CreateObject("iCELL_ErrorMessage.ErrorMessage") If obj Is Nothing Then MsgBox "CreateObject Error" Exit Sub End If bRtn = obj.Initialize("iCELLErrLog") If bRtn = False Then MsgBox "Initialize Error" Exit Sub End If Message = "Error Log Test" obj.WriteLog Message obj.Terminate Set obj = Nothing
- 402 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.6
iCELLDef
iCELLDef is the OLE automation module (Active X DLL) used to read and write data related to the i CELL. Values set on the i CELL setting screen can be acquired using iCELLDef. iCELLDef is installed in iCELLDef.DLL.
2.6.1
iCELLRW
iCELLRW reads and writes i CELL settings. This class is installed in iCELLDef.iCELLRW within iCELLDef.DLL.
2.6.1.1
Method
Reads communication-related settings.
ComDefRead - Syntax
object.ComDefRead Value()
- Setting
Value()
Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensional array of character string type for storing read communication settings. Before calling this method, allocate two-dimensional array elements. Example: ReDim Value(0 to obj.mDispMachine 1, 0 to obj.pComDefItemCount 1) The array element number is to start with 0. On the setting screen, the maximum number of machines dynamically changes. In such a case, allocate an area of up to pMaxMachine-1 instead of mDispMachine-1. On the application screen, the maximum number of machines does not change, so that mDispMachine - 1 is sufficient.
- Explanation
When this method has been executed successfully, communication settings are written into Value(). The first dimension of a two-dimensional array represents machines and the other dimension represents the settings of each machine. Communication settings for the number of machines set in the public variable mDispMachine are set in the array. See the properties starting with pComDef for the meaning of each array element.
- Return value
A Boolean value is returned. When the processing is successful, True is returned. When the processing fails, False is returned. When the processing fails, the cause is set in the public variable mErrorMessage.
- 403 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
iCELLItemNo
Acquires an item number indicating whether the function is enabled for each machine, from the screen ID.
- Syntax
ItemNo = object.iCELLItemNo(ScrID)
- Setting
ScrID ItemNo
Be sure to set ScrID. Specify a screen ID of long type. Item number of long type
- Explanation
When the method iCELLRead is executed, the settings of the i CELL related to each machine can be acquired in a two-dimensional array. With this method, when a screen ID is used, an item number indicating whether the function of the screen ID is enabled for each machine can be acquired. An item number acquired with this method is an element number in the second dimension of a two-dimensional array acquired with iCELLRead. A screen ID to be specified by the argument must already be set in the ScreenID section of the setting file %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen\ScreenID.ini. This method checks the settings of this ini file to determine which function the specified screen ID represents, and returns the corresponding item number in a two-dimensional array.
- Return value
When an integer greater than 0 is returned, it represents an item number. If a screen ID not registered in the ini file, or a screen ID that has no distinction between the enabled and disabled states is specified, -1 is returned.
iCELLRead
Reads settings related to the i CELL.
- Syntax
object.iCELLRead Value()
- Setting
Value()
Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensional array of character string type for storing read i CELL settings. Before calling this method, allocate two-dimensional array elements. Example: ReDim Value(0 to obj.mDispMachine 1, 0 to obj.piCELLItemCount 1) The array element number is to start with 0. On the setting screen, the maximum number of machines dynamically changes. In such a case, allocate an area of up to pMaxMachine-1 instead of mDispMachine-1. On the application screen, the maximum number of machines does not change, so that mDispMachine - 1 is sufficient.
- 404 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
- Explanation
When this method has been executed successfully, i CELL settings are written into Value(). The first dimension of a two-dimensional array represents machines and the other dimension represents the settings of each machine. i CELL settings for the number of machines set in the public variable mDispMachine are set in the array. See the properties starting with piCELL for the meaning of each array element.
- Return value
Initialize
- Syntax
object.Initialize Path
- Setting
Path
Set the %iCELL%\CimProject\ directory by using a character string expression. It is assumed that under this directory, a directory storing the ini file under the fanuc directory is configured. When the CIMPLICITY execution project environment variable SITE_ROOT is specified, this argument is omissible.
- Explanation
When this method has been executed successfully, the values of the public variables indicated below become valid. For details of each public variable, see Subsection 2.6.1.2, "Public variables".
mLanguage mDispMachine mMachineItemCount mScrIdCount mScrOverViewId mDirectory
Display language Maximum number of machines Number of machine setting items Number of screens within the screen master Screen ID specified for overview with a selected machine Directory of a setting file
- Return value
MachineRead
Reads machine settings.
- Syntax
object.MachineRead Value()
- 405 -
2.ADDING SCREENS - Setting
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
Value()
Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensional array of character string type for storing read machine settings. Before calling this method, allocate two-dimensional array elements. Example: ReDim Value(0 to obj.mDispMachine 1, 0 to obj.pMachineItemCount 1) The array element number is to start with 0. On the setting screen, the maximum number of machines dynamically changes. In such a case, allocate an area of up to pMaxMachine-1 instead of mDispMachine-1. On the application screen, the maximum number of machines does not change, so that mDispMachine - 1 is sufficient.
- Explanation
When this method has been executed successfully, machine settings are written into Value(). The first dimension of a two-dimensional array represents machines and the other dimension represents the settings of each machine. Machine information for the number of machines set in the public variable mDispMachine is set in the array. See the properties starting with pMachine for the meaning of each array element.
- Return value
ScreenIdRead
Reads the screen master.
- Syntax
object.ScreenIdRead Value()
- Setting
Value()
Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensional array of character string type for storing read screen information. Before calling this method, allocate two-dimensional array elements. Example: ReDim Value(0 to 1, 0 to obj.mScrIdCount 1) The array element number is to start with 0.
- Explanation
When this method has been executed successfully, set screen information is written into Value(). The first dimension of a two-dimensional array represents the settings of each screen. In the first item (0), a screen ID is set. In the second item (1), a cim file name is set. The second dimension represents types of screens. Screen information items as many as the value set in the public variable mScrIdCount are set in the array.
- 406 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
- Return value
Terminate
- Syntax
object.Terminate
- Return value
None
- 407 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.6.1.2
mDirectory
Public variables
Indicates the directory of a setting file.
- Syntax
object.mDirectory
- Explanation
This variable is of character is %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\. string type, and its path
mDispMachine
Indicates the maximum number of machines.
- Syntax
object.mDispMachine
- Explanation
This variable is of long type, and indicates the maximum number of machines. This value can be changed only through the setting screen. This means that this value indicates the number of machines to be connected by the user. Reference the property pMaxMachine for the maximum number of machines that can be connected according to the specification. When executing the method MachineRead(), allocate areas as many as this value for the elements of the first dimension of the array. Do not change the value through an application program.
mErrorMessage
Indicates an error message.
- Syntax
object.mErrorMessage
- Explanation
When the method fails, the cause is written into this variable. This variable is of character string type.
mLanguage
Indicates a display language.
- Syntax
object.mLanguage
- Explanation
This variable is of long type, and indicates a display language (0: Japanese, 1: English). Do not change the value through an application program.
- 408 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
mScrIdCount
Indicates the number of screen registered in the screen master.
- Syntax
object.mScrIdCount
- Explanation
This variable is of long type and indicates the number of screens registered in the FileName section of the screen master %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen\ScreenID.ini.
mScrOverViewId
Indicates a screen ID for representing an overview screen.
- Syntax
object.mScrOverViewId
- Explanation
This variable is of long type, and indicates a screen ID for representing an overview screen.
mVersion, mServicePack
Indicates the version and service pack information of the i CELL.
- Syntax
object.mVersion object.mServicePack
- Explanation
These variables are of character string type. When the i CELL has version 1.3 and service pack 1, mVersion indicates "1.3", and mServicePack indicates "1".
- 409 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.6.1.3
Properties
pComDefD2ALTimeout, pComDefD2DatagramLen, pComDefD2EOTTimeout, pComDefD2NakRetry, pComDefD2OutputTimeout, pComDefD2Retry, pComDefD2Timeout

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the method ComDefRead are indicated. All of these properties are DNC2-related setting items. These properties are valid only when the value of pComDefProtocol is DNC2.
- Syntax
object.pComDefD2ALTimeout
- Explanation
When ComDefRead is executed, settings are loaded into a two-dimensional array. In the second dimension of the two-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these property numbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.)
pComDefD2ALTimeout
pComDefD2DatagramLen pComDefD2EOTTimeout pComDefD2NakRetry pComDefD2OutputTimeout pComDefD2Retry pComDefD2Timeout
Time-out period of the application layer (in seconds), represented by a number from 30 to 120 Maximum datagram length, represented by a number from 80 to 256 EOT time-out period (in seconds), represented by a number from 1 to 60 Maximum NAK retry count, represented by a number from 1 to 10 Output time-out period (in seconds), represented by a number from 1 to 60 Maximum retry count, represented by a number from 1 to 10 Non-response time-out period (in seconds), represented by a number from 1 to 60
pComDefFEC4Address, pComDefFEC4Enable, pComDefFEC4Timeout, pComDefFEEnable, pComDefFEFwLibTimeout, pComDefFEIPAddress, pComDefFETCPPort, pComDefFEUDPPort

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the method ComDefRead are indicated. All of these properties are FOCAS2/Ethernet-related setting items. These properties are valid only when the value of pComDefProtocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet.
- Syntax
object.pComDefFEC4Address
- 410 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
- Explanation
pComDefFEC4Address pComDefFEC4Enable pComDefFEC4Timeout pComDefFEEnable C4 server address, represented by a character string in the "192.162.0.1" format Number for indicating whether a C4 server is to be used: 1 for used and 0 for not used C4 server time-out period, represented by a number from 1 to 9999. The unit is 10 ms. Number for indicating whether communication settings are enabled or disabled: 1 for enabled and 0 for disabled Time-out period for the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication function, represented by a number from 1 to 9999. The unit is the second. IP address of an NC, represented by a character string in the "192.162.0.1" format TCP port number of an NC, represented by a number from 5001 to 65535 UDP port number of an NC, represented by a number from 5001 to 65535
pComDefFEFwLibTimeout
pComDefFEIPAddress pComDefFETCPPort pComDefFEUDPPort
pComDefItemCount
Returns the number of communication setting items.
- Syntax
object.pComDefItemCount
- Explanation
When executing the method ComDefRead, allocate areas as many as this value for the elements of the second dimension of the array.
pComDefProtocol
This property returns the communication protocol.
- Syntax
object.pComDefProtocol
- Explanation
This property returns an integer starting with 0. The ordinal element number of the communication protocol in an array read with the method ComDefRead is indicated. As the element indicated by this property in the array, " " (blank character string: no communication protocol is set), object.pProtocolFE (FOCAS2/Ethernet), object.pProtocolDNC2(DNC2), or object.pProtocolRP (Reader/Puncher) is set.
- 411 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
pComDefRPDownloadAttr, pComDefRPUploadAttr
These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the method ComDefRead are indicated. All of these are setting items related to Reader/Puncher communication. These are valid only when the value of pComDefProtocol is object.pProtocolRP.
- Syntax
object.pComDefRPDownloadAttr
- Explanation
pComDefRPDownloadAttr pComDefRPUploadAttr
Number for representing the download attribute Number for representing the upload attribute
pComDefSerialBaudRate, pComDefSerialDataCode, pComDefSerialDataLen, pComDefSerialEnable, pComDefSerialParity, pComDefSerialPort, pComDefSerialStopBit

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the method ComDefRead are indicated. All of these are setting items related to the serial line. These properties are valid only when the value of pComDefProtocol is object.pProtocolDNC2 or object.pProtocolRP.
- Syntax
object.pComDefSerialBaudRate
- Explanation
pComDefSerialBaudRate
pComDefSerialDataCode
pComDefSerialDataLen
pComDefSerialEnable
One of the following baud rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 Data code represented by one of the following character strings: ASCII, ISO, EIA Data length represented by one of the following numbers: 7, 8 Information about enabled/disabled state. 1: Enabled, 0: Disabled
- 412 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
pComDefSerialParity
2.ADDING SCREENS
Parity represented by one of the following character strings NONE No parity ODD Odd parity EVEN Even parity Serial communication port number, represented by a number from 1 to 64 Stop bit, represented by one of the following character strings: 1, 1.5, 2
pComDefSerialPort pComDefSerialStopBit
piCELLItemCount
This property returns the number of i CELL setting items.
- Syntax
object.piCELLItemCount
- Explanation
When executing the method iCELLRead, allocate areas as many as this value for the elements of the second dimension of the array.
piCELLOverViewEnable, piCELLRunTimeEnable,piCELLWorkResultEnable, piCELLAlarmEnable, piCELLToolLifeEnable, piCELLNCDispOpeEnable, piCELLOperatorMessageEnable

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the method iCELLRead are indicated.
- Syntax
object.piCELLOverViewEnable
- Explanation
When iCELLRead is executed, settings are loaded into a two-dimensional array. In the second dimension of the two-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these property numbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.) Each item is disabled when the value is 0, and each item is enabled when the value is 1.
piCELLOverviewEnable piCELLRunTimeEnable piCELLWorkResultEnable piCELLAlarmEnable piCELLToolLifeEnable piCELLNCDispOpeEnable piCELLOperatorMessageEnable
Overview Run time Machining result Alarm Tool life NC display/operation/maintenance Operator message
pMachineItemCount
This property returns the number of machine setting items.
- Syntax
object.pMachineItemCount
- 413 -
2.ADDING SCREENS - Explanation
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
When executing the method MachineRead, allocate areas as many as this value for the elements of the second dimension of the array.
pMachineNo, pMachineName, pMachineNCType, pMachineNCSpec,pMachinePath01-pMachinePath10, pMachinePMC

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the method MachineRead are indicated.
- Syntax
object.pMachineName
- Explanation
When MachineRead is executed, settings are loaded into a two-dimensional array. In the second dimension of the two-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these property numbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.)
pMachineNo pMachineName pMachineNCType
pMachineNCSpec
pMachinePath01-10
pMachinePMC
Machine number from 1 to 999 Machine name. When the length is 0, no machine is set. NC type. One of the following character strings is set: " "(Blank character string: No machine is set.) object.pNCTypeFS0C(FS0C) object.pNCTypeFS15A(FS15A) object.pNCTypeFS15B(FS15B) object.pNCTypeFS16i(FS16/18/21i) object.pNCTypePMiDH(Power Mate i D/H) object.pNCTypeFS30i(FS30i) object.pNCTypeFS31i(FS31i) object.pNCTypeFS32i(FS32i) object.pNCTypeFS0i(FS0i) object.pNCTypeOther(others) NC specification, represented by a character string such as M, T, and TT. object.pNCSpecFS16iM(M) object.pNCSpecFS16iT(T) object.pNCSpecFS16iTT(TT) object.pNCSpecPMiDH(D/H) object.pNCSpecPMiD2(D2) NC specification for each path. One of the following character strings is set: " " (Blank character string: The NC does not have the path.) object.pNCSpecM (M series) object.pNCSpecT (T series) "P" is input for Power Mate. PMC type. One of the following character strings is set: object.pPMCN_NA (N and NA) object.pPMCNB_NB2 (Node-B and NB2) object.pPMCNone (Blank character string: No setting made: Other than above)
- 414 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
pNCSpecM, pNCSpecT
These properties indicate the character string representing an NC specification in machine setting.
- Syntax
object.pNCSpecM
- Explanation
The values of the object.pMachinePath01 to object.pMachinePath10 elements of the second dimension of a two-dimensional array acquired by executing the method MachineRead are " " (blank character string) or the value returned by these properties.
object.pNCSpecM object.pNCSpecT
M series T series
pNCTypeFS0C, pNCTypeFS15A, pNCTypeFS15B, pNCTypeFS16i, pNCTypePMiDH, pNCTypeFS30i, pNCTypeFS31i, pNCTypeFS32i, pNCTypeFS0i, pNCTypeOther
These properties indicate the character strings representing an NC type in machine setting.
- Syntax
object.pNCTypeFS16i
- Explanation
The value of the object.pMachineNCType element of the second dimension of a two-dimensional array acquired by executing the method MachineRead is " " (blank character string) or the value returned by these properties.
object.pNCTypeFS0C object.pNCTypeFS15A object.pNCTypeFS15B object.pNCTypeFS16i object.pNCTypePMiDH object.pNCTypeFS30i object.pNCTypeFS31i object.pNCTypeFS32i object.pNCTypeFS0i object.pNCTypeOther
FS0C FS15A FS15B FS16/18/21i Power Mate i D/H FS30i FS31i FS32i FS0i Others
pProtocolDNC2, pProtocolFE, pProtocolRP

These properties indicate the character string representing a protocol type in communication setting.
- Syntax
object.pProtocolFE
- 415 -
2.ADDING SCREENS - Explanation
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
The value of the object.pComDefProtocol element of the second dimension of a two-dimensional array acquired by executing the method ComDefRead is " " (blank character string) or the value returned by these properties.
object.pProtocolDNC2 Object.pProtocolFE Object.pProtocolRP
DNC2 FOCAS2/Etherenet Reader/Puncher
2.6.1.4
Example of usage
A sample program for indicating a machine number, name, communication protocol, IP address of FOCAS2/Ethernet, whether the setting of FOCAS2/Ethernet is valid, and whether the overview function of the i CELL is provided below. Dim obj As Object Dim bRtn As Boolean Dim Machine() As String Dim ComDef() As String Dim iCELL() As String Dim Count As Long Dim Message As String Set obj = CreateObject("iCELLDef.iCELLRW") If obj Is Nothing Then MsgBox "CreateObject Error" Exit Sub End If bRtn = obj.Initialize() If bRtn = False Then MsgBox obj.mErrorMessage Exit Sub End If ReDim Machine(0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1, _ 0 To obj.pMachineItemCount - 1) ReDim ComDef(0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1, _ 0 To obj.pComDefItemCount - 1) ReDim iCELL(0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1, _ 0 To obj.piCELLItemCount - 1) bRtn = obj.SysDefRead() If bRtn = False Then MsgBox obj.mErrorMessage Exit Sub End If
- 416 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
bRtn = obj.MachineRead(Machine()) If bRtn = False Then MsgBox obj.mErrorMessage Exit Sub End If bRtn = obj.ComDefRead(ComDef()) If bRtn = False Then MsgBox obj.mErrorMessage Exit Sub End If bRtn = obj.iCELLRead(iCELL()) If bRtn = False Then MsgBox obj.mErrorMessage Exit Sub End If For Count = 0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1 Message = Machine(Count, obj.pMachineNo)& ":" & _ Machine(Count, obj.pMachineName) & Chr(13) & Chr(10) & _ ComDef(Count, obj.pComDefProtocol) & "," & _ ComDef(Count, obj.pComDefFEIPAddress) & ", Enable=" & _ ComDef(Count, obj.pComDefFEEnable) & Chr(13) & Chr(10) & _ "OverView=" & iCELL(Count, obj.piCELLOverViewEnable) MsgBox Message Next Count Set obj = Nothing
- 417 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
2.7
MACHINE SELECTION CONTROL

With the ActiveX control dedicated to the i CELL, a machine and path set on the i CELL setting screen can be selected. Moreover, various information items set for a selected machine can be acquired. This section describes the method of using the control.
2.7.1
Overview
The control need not be installed. The control is automatically installed when the i CELL is installed.
Method of installation
Method of inserting the control into the CimEdit screen

Insert the control in the same way as for the alarm viewer OCX attached to CIMPLICITY. From the menu, select Edit then Insert New Object. When the [Insert Object] dialog box appears, select the ActiveX tab then select iCELL_List.McnPathNo.
2.7.2
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Property
Property name Function Background color Background style. 0:Not filled (default), 1:Filled Whether a C4 server is to be used. 1:Used, 0:not used Time-out count for NC power supply determination Whether communication is enabled. True:Enabled, False:Not enabled Number of time-out seconds in communication IP address TCP port number UDP port number Character string representing a connection protocol name. See pComDefProtcol of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object. Character string representing a protocol name. Same as pProtocolDNC2 of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object Character string representing a protocol name. Same as pProtocolFE of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object. Whether the connection protocol is DNC2. 0:Others, 1:DNC2 Whether the connection protocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet. 0:Others, 1:FOCAS2/Ethernet Whether the connection protocol is Reader/Puncher. 0:Others, 1:Reader/Puncher Character string representing a protocol name. Same as pProtocolRP of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object. Gap ratio between the machine display portion and path display portion (*1) Whether this screen is valid on a machine. True:Valid, False:Not valid Whether error messages are to be displayed. False:Not displayed (default), True:Displayed Character string representing an error message
Machine selection control: Property installation list

BackColor BackStyle ComDefFEC4Enable ComDefFEC4Timeout ComDefFEEnable ComDefFEFwLibTimeout ComDefFEIPAddress ComDefFETCPPort ComDefFEUDPPort ComDefProtocol ComDefProtocolDNC2 ComDefProtocolFE ComDefProtocolIsDNC2 ComDefProtocolIsFE ComDefProtocolIsRP ComDefProtocolRP DispArrangeGap EnableThisScrId ErrMsgBox ErrorMessage
- 418 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
Property name Function
2.ADDING SCREENS
No
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Font FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize InstallPath IsInitialize IsOverView McnName McnNameLong McnNo McnNoComboData McnNoComboDispMode McnNoComboEnable McnNoComboVisible McnNoComboWidthRatio McnNoCounts McnNoTitle McnNoTitleColor McnNoTitleEnable McnNoTitleHeightRatio McnNoTitleState McnNoTitleVisible McnNoTitleWidthRatio OverViewImagePath PathName PathNo PathNoComboData PathNoComboDispMode PathNoComboEnable PathNoComboVisible PathNoComboWidthRatio PathNoTitle PathNoTitleColor PathNoTitleEnable PathNoTitleHeightRatio PathNoTitleState PathNoTitleVisible PathNoTitleWidthRatio PcScrMcnListCounts
Font object: Bold, Italic, Name, Size, Underline No font object is displayed in the dialog box of CIMPLICITY, so this property is valid although it duplicates the font object. Path where a project is installed Whether initialization processing has been executed. True:Executed, False:Not executed Whether the screen is an overview screen. True:Overview, False:Others Machine name Long machine name Machine number. 0 when no valid machine is assigned to a screen function. Character string actually displayed in the machine combo box Machine combo box display format 1(mNumber):Number, 2(mName):Name, 3(mNumName):Number.Name, 4(mLongName):Long-name, 5(mNumLongName):Number.Long-name Whether the user is allowed to operate the machine combo box. False:Not allowed, True:Allowed (default) Whether the machine combo box is to be displayed. False:Not displayed, True:Displayed (default) Machine combo box width ratio (*1) Whether a valid machine is assigned to a screen function. True:Assigned, False:Not assigned Text character string for a machine title button Machine title button color Whether the user is allowed to operate a machine title button. False:Not allowed, True:Allowed (default) Machine title button height ratio Machine title button state: False (default), True Whether a machine title button is to be displayed. False:Not displayed, True:Displayed (default) Machine title button width ratio (*1) Path of an image set on the overview Path name Path number Character string actually displayed in the path combo box Path combo box display format 1(pNumber):Number, 3(pNumName):Number.Name Whether the user is allowed to operate the path combo box. False:Not allowed, True:Allowed (default) Whether the path combo box is to be displayed. False:Not displayed, True:Displayed (default) Path combo box width ratio (*1) Text character string for a path title button Path title button color Whether the user is allowed to operate a path title button. False:Not allowed, True:Allowed (default) Path title button height ratio Path title button state: False (default), True Whether a path title button is to be displayed. False:Not displayed, True:Displayed (default) Path title button width ratio (*1) Number of screens in which ScreenID is stored
- 419 -
2.ADDING SCREENS
No Property name
USER CUSTOMIZE
Function
B-75074EN/04
61 62 63 64
ScreenIdListCounts Version VersionButton VersionCombo
Number of setScreenIDs Version information Text button control version information Combo box control version information
(*1) Ratio to the sum of these
McnNoComboWidthRatio
DispArrangeGap
PathNoComboWidthRatio
McnNoTitleWidthRatio
PathNoTitleWidthRatio
- 420 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.7.3
No
Method
Method Function
Machine selection control: Method installation list

1 2 3 4 5 6 Hide Initialize ReadSlectMcnInfo Refresh Save Terminate Hides the control. Initializes the control. Acquires the machine number and path set in the ini file and displays such information on the control. Performs forced update operation. Saves the selected machine number and path number. Terminates the processing of the control.
Hide
Hides the control.
- Syntax
object.Hide
- Return value
None
Initialize
- Syntax
object.Initialize Path
- Setting
Path
Set the %iCELL%\CimProject\ directory by using a character string expression. It is assumed that under this directory, a directory storing the ini file under the fanuc directory is configured.
- Explanation
When this method has been executed successfully, the properties starting with ComDef are enabled.
- Return value
A Boolean value is returned. When the processing is successful, True is returned. When the processing fails, False is returned. When the processing fails, the cause is set in the property ErrorMessage.
ReadSlectMcnInfo
Acquires the machine number and path set in the ini file then displays such information, and sets various information items in properties.
- Syntax
object.ReadSlectMcnInfo PCName, FileName, McnNoInScr
- 421 -
2.ADDING SCREENS - Setting
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
PCName FileName McnNoInScr
Set the local computer name by using a character string expression. Set the CimView screen file name being activated, by using a character string expression. Number of controls set on the screen
- Explanation
When this method has been executed successfully, the machine information currently selected is set in the properties enabled by the method Initialize.
- Return value
A Boolean value is returned. When the processing is successful, True is returned. When the processing fails, False is returned. When the processing fails, the cause is set in the property ErrorMessage.
Refresh
Redraws the control.
- Syntax
object.Refresh
- Return value
None
Save
Saves the machine number and path selected on the screen.
- Syntax
object.Save
- Explanation
The machine number and path number selected on the screen are saved to %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen\ScreenCnf.ini. If a machine drawing is set on the overview screen, the path is also saved.
- Return value
None
Terminate
- Syntax
object.Terminate
- Return value
None
- 422 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
2.ADDING SCREENS
2.7.4
No
Event
Event Function
Machine selection control: Event installation list

1 2 3 4 ChangeMcnNo ChangePathNo ClickMcnNo ClickPathNo Occurs when the machine number is changed. Occurs when the path number is changed. Occurs when a machine title button is clicked. Occurs when a path title button is clicked.
2.7.5
Example of Usage
A sample program for changing the text character string of a machine title button in accordance with the machine combo box display format and displaying the machine number, path, name, and communication protocol is provided below. Dim scr As GefScreen Dim obj As GefObject Dim ole As GefObject Dim pLocalPC As New Point Dim pProjectPC As New Point Dim LocalPC As String Dim ProjectPC As String Dim CurrentDir As String Dim CurrentDirLen As Long Dim CimFileName As String Dim HostName As String Dim McnNoInScr As Integer Dim s As string Set scr = CimGetScreen Set obj = scr.Object.Objects.Item("McnSlct") (*1) Set ole = obj.OleObject ' Initialization pLocalPC.ID = "$LOCAL.COMPUTER" pProjectPC.ID = "$PROJECT.COMPUTER" LocalPC = pLocalPC.GetValue ProjectPC = pProjectPC.GetValue If LocalPC = ProjectPC Then s = Environ$("SITE_ROOT") Else CurrentDir = CurDir$() If Right(CurrentDir, 1) <> "\" Then CurrentDir = CurrentDir + "\" End If CurrentDirLen = Len(CurrentDir) s = Left(CurrentDir, CurrentDirLen - 8) ' 8=screens\ End If
- 423 -
(*1) McnSlct is the name assigned to the machine selection control on the CimEdit screen.
2.ADDING SCREENS
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
If Not ole.Initialize(s) Then MsgBox ole.ErrorMessage End If ' Display HostName = LocalPC CimFileName = FileParse$(scr.FullName, 4) & ".cim" McnNoInScr = 1 If Not ole.ReadSlectMcnInfo(HostName, _ CimFileName, McnNoInScr) Then MsgBox ole.ErrorMessage End If ' Title character setting Select Case ole.McnNoComboDispMode Case 1 ole.McnNoTitle = "machine-number" Case 2, 4 ole.McnNoTitle = "machine-name" Case 3, 5 ole.McnNoTitle = "machine-number.name" End Select MsgBox ole.McnNo MsgBox ole.PathNo MsgBox ole.ComDefProtocol ' Termination processing If ole Is Not Nothing Then ole.Save ole.Terminate Set ole = Nothing End If If obj Is Not Nothing Then Set obj = Nothing End If Set scr = Nothing
- 424 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
3.DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS
3
3.1
DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the specifications of the database (file name: iCELL.mdb) used with the i CELL.
OVERVIEW
The i CELL database stores data used for the Machining Result screen and Workpieces Process Result screen. By operating this database, a display screen different from the one used with the i CELL can be created. Note, however, that this database allows only read operation. When the NC is to collect information not available from the i CELL by using the CIMPLICITY function, the user should create a database separate from the i CELL database.
3.1.1
Operating the Database with the i CELL

With the i CELL, the database is operated as described below. <1> On the i CELL setting screen, information to be stored from the NC in the database is set. <2> When the i CELL is started, information is acquired from the NC with background scripts then is stored in the database. <3> When the i CELL is started, data is acquired from the database, then is processed and displayed on the screen. <4> Some i CELL screens write to the database.
i CELL
i CELL setting screen
<1> Database iCELL.MDB Back ground script <2>
<3>
i CELL screen
<4>
NC
- 425 -
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
3.1.2
i CELL Database
The i CELL database is stored at the following location: Directory name : %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\data File name : iCELL.mdb (%iCELL% indicates the directory where the i CELL is installed.) The database is created using Microsoft Access 97. So, whenever possible, use Microsoft Access 97 to open the database. If a version other than Microsoft Access 97 is used, do not save files. Otherwise, the i CELL can malfunction. For compatibility between versions, contact Microsoft Corporation.
Database storage directory
Access using ODBC and SQL

When the i CELL is installed, the database is registered in ODBC as described below. Database type: System DSN Database name: iCELL Full database path: %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\data\iCELL.mdb (%iCELL% indicates the directory where the i CELL is installed.) On each i CELL screen, the database is accessed using the SQL function through ODBC. For the SQL function, refer to " CIMPLICITY HMI Basic Control Engine Operator's Manual". To access the database by other means such as VB, use ODBC, DAO, and so forth.
Read only
The database allows read operation only. Do not write data and do not modify the table design and data. Otherwise, the i CELL can malfunction. However, the WKPCPlan - workpiece machining count setting table only allows data to be modified and added.
3.1.3
i CELL Database Configuration

At present, the i CELL database has tables used for the Machining Result screen and Workpieces Process Result screen. Those tables are described below.
- 426 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
3.2
3.2.1
MACHINING RESULT
This section describes the tables used with the Machining Result screen.
RunTimeAConfig - Machine Result Setting Table

For each machine, the setting of whether to use the Machining Result screen is stored. Data is set by machine setting on the i CELL setting screen. Do not modify the design and data of the table.
Field name
Data type
Description <relevant items for the basic functions in the part for setting of the operator's manual>
ID McnID Enable
Auto number Numeric type Numeric type
AutoNumber Machine ID (1 to 999) Whether the machining result is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used) <i CELL machine setting>
3.2.2
RunTimeAData - Machining Result Data Table

For each machine, machining result data is stored. Machining result data is acquired from the NC with background scripts. Data is acquired and stored in the table according to the procedure below. <1> When the i CELL project is started, a script for acquiring machining result data is started in the background (at intervals of 30 seconds). <2> From the NC, acquire a cumulative power-on time, operation times (cumulative time of automatic operation) I/II, cumulative cutting times I/II, machined parts count, and total machined parts count. These are the values of parameters created with the Run hour and parts count display of NC option. <3> Acquire the current date/time data. <4> Check if the table has data with the same date as acquired in step <3>. <5> If the table does not have data with the same date, the same value is stored in the First_ field and the Last_ field. If the table has data with the same date, the value is stored in the Last_ field only. Do not modify the design and data of the table.
- 427 -
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
Field name
Data type
Description
ID McnID FirstClock FirstPOn FirstOp1 FirstOp2 FirstCut1 FirstCut2 FirstCnt1 FirstCnt2 LastClock LastPOn LastOp1 LastOp2 LastCut1 LastCut2 LastCnt1 LastCnt2
Auto number Numeric type Date/time type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Date/time type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type
AutoNumber Machine ID (1 to 999) Time of the first data acquisition of the day Cumulative power-on time at FirstClock time [minute] Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at FirstClock time I [ms] Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at FirstClock time II [minute] Cumulative cutting time at FirstClock time I [ms] Cumulative cutting time at FirstClock time II [minute] Machined parts count at FirstClock time Total machined parts count at FirstClock time Time of the last data acquisition of the day Cumulative power-on time at LastClock time [minute] Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at LastClock time I [ms] Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at LastClock time II [minute] Cumulative cutting time at LastClock time I [ms] Cumulative cutting time at LastClock time II [minute] Machined parts count at LastClock time Total machined parts count at LastClock time
Method of collecting data on the Machining Result screen Collect records by specifying the McnID and FirstClock conditions and make calculations according to the following expressions: [Power-on time (seconds)] = ( [LastPOn] - [FirstPOn] ) * 60 [Operation time (seconds)] = ( [LastOp1] - [FirstOp1] ) / 1000 + ( [LastOp2] - [FirstOp2] ) * 60 [Cutting time (seconds)] = ( [LastCut1] - [FirstCut1] ) / 1000 + ( [LastCut2] - [FirstCut2] ) * 60 [Machined parts count] = [LastCnt1] - [FirstCnt1] [Total machined parts count] = [LastCnt2] - [FirstCnt2]
- 428 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
3.3
3.3.1
WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT

This section describes the tables used with the Workpieces Process Result screen.
WKPCMcnName - Workpieces Process Result Setting Table

The name corresponding to a machine ID, and the settings of whether to use the Workpieces Process Result screen and whether to use the optional values of workpieces process result data are set. A name is set as the machine information on the i CELL setting screen. Whether to use the screen and whether to use the optional values of workpieces process result data are set as machine settings on the i CELL setting screen. Do not modify the design and data of the table.
Field name
Data type
McnID McnName
Numeric type Text type
Work Onum Last User Hand Enable
Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type
Machine ID (1 to 999) <Machine information/number> Name character string corresponding to a machine ID (not longer than 20 half-size characters) <Machine information/name> Whether a workpiece ID is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used) <i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/workpiece ID> Whether an O number is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used) <i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/O number> Whether a machining end ID is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used) <i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/machining end ID> Whether a user area ID is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used) <i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/user area ID> Whether handshaking is performed (0:Not performed/1:Performed) <i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting> Whether the Workpieces Process Result screen is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used) <i CELL machine setting>
- 429 -
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
3.3.2
WKPCWorkName - Workpiece ID Setting Table

The name corresponding to a workpiece ID, and the setting of a planned machining time are stored. Data is set in the overall machining result setting on the i CELL setting screen. Do not modify the design and data of the table.
Field name
Data type
WorkID WorkName
Numeric type Text type
PlanTime
Numeric type
Workpiece ID (1 to 99,999,999) <i CELL overall machining result setting/workpiece ID/workpiece ID> Name character string corresponding to a workpiece ID (not longer than 20 half-size characters) <i CELL overall machining result setting/workpiece ID/workpiece name> Planned machining time [sec] <i CELL overall machining result setting/workpiece ID/planned machining time>
3.3.3
WKPCLastStateConfig - Machining End ID Setting

The character string corresponding to a machining end ID, the setting of a display number are stored. Data is set in the overall machining result setting on the i CELL setting screen. Do not modify the design and data of the table.
Field name
Data type
ID LastID LastStr
Auto number Numeric type Text type
Order
Numeric type
AutoNumber Machining end state ID (1 to 9,999) <i CELL overall machining result setting/machining end ID/machining end ID> Character string corresponding to a machining end state ID (not longer than 20 half-size characters) <i CELL overall machining result setting/machining end ID/machining end state> Display number for displaying machining end state on the screen (0 to 5) <i CELL overall machining result setting/machining end ID/display number>
3.3.4
WKPCUserConfig - User Area ID Setting Table

The setting of the character string corresponding to a user area ID is stored. Data is set in the overall machining result setting on the i CELL setting screen. Do not modify the design and data of the table.
Field name
Data type
ID UserID UserStr
Auto number Numeric type Text type
AutoNumber User area ID (1 to 9,999) <i CELL overall machining result setting/user area ID/user area ID> Character string corresponding to a user area ID (not longer than 20 half-size characters) <i CELL overall machining result setting/user area ID/user area>
- 430 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
3.3.5
WKPCPlan - Planned Workpiece Machining Count Setting Table

The settings of a machine ID, workpiece ID, and planned machining count for a planned machining date are stored. Data is set on the planned machining count input screen of the Workpieces Process Result screen. Data can be modified. In this case, enter values according to the list indicated below. However, do not modify the design of the table.
NOTE Do not modify data when the Workpieces Process Result screen is displayed. Otherwise, the screen may not be displayed normally.
Field name Data type Description
ID McnID WorkID PlanNum FirstClock
Auto number Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Date/time type
AutoNumber Machine ID (1 to 999) Workpiece ID (1 to 99,999,999) Planned machining count (0 to 99,999,999) Planned machining date (date only, with no time data)
3.3.6
WKPCData - Workpieces Process Result Data Table

Process result data for a machine and workpiece is stored. Process result data is acquired from the NC with background scripts. Data is acquired and stored in the table according to the procedure below. <1> When the i CELL project is started, a script for acquiring machining result data is started in the background. <2> When the machining start point changes from "0" time "1", machining start data acquisition processing (I) is performed. When the machining start point changes from "1" time "0", machining end data acquisition processing (II) is performed. I. Machining start data acquisition processing The current date/time (machining start time), machine ID, workpiece ID, O number, and sequence number are acquired and stored on the table. Machining end data acquisition processing i. The current date/time (machining end time), machine ID, sequence number, machining end state ID, and user area ID are acquired. ii. From the table, find the latest record whose machine ID (McnID) is the same as that acquired in step i above, that is, the record whose machining start time (FirstClock) is the latest, and acquire the value of the record.
II.
- 431 -
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
iii. Check if there is a record that matches the machine ID and sequence ID acquired in step i and the machining start time acquired in step ii. If such a record is not found, the processing is ended. iv. If such a record is found, check if data is already stored in the fields of the machining end time, machining end state ID, and user area ID of the record. If data is already stored, the processing is ended. v. If data is not stored, store the machining end time, machining end state ID, and user area ID acquired in step i above in that record on the table. Do not modify the design and data of the table.
ID McnID WorkID Onum FirstClock LastClock LastID UserID Snum
Auto number Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Date/time type Data/time type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type
AutoNumber Machine ID (1 to 999) Workpiece ID (0 to 99,999,999) O number (0 to 99,999,999) Machining start time Machining end time Machining end state ID (0 to 9,999) User area ID (0 to 9,999) Sequence number for each machine (1 to 99,999,999)
Method of collecting data on the Workpieces Process Result screen (end state display) Calculate the number of records by specifying necessary conditions among McnID, WorkID, FirstClock, and LastID. For one-month display on a workpiece-by-workpiece basis, for example, calculate the number of records by specifying the values of WorkID, FirstClock, and LastID.
- 432 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE
3.3.7
WKPCDspMcnCnd - Progress Status Display Table

This table is temporarily used to display the current progress status. After this table is displayed, all data is deleted. Do not modify the design of the table.
ID McnID WorkID Onum FirstClock LastClockPlan NormNum PlanNum AllLastClockPlan
Auto number Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Date/time type Date/time type Numeric type Numeric type Date/time type
AutoNumber Machine ID (1 to 999) Workpiece ID (0 to 99,999,999) O number (0 to 99,999,999) Machining start time Planned machining end time Normally ended machining count Planned machining count Planned time for completion of all machining
- 433 -
USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
3.3.8
WKPCDspLastState - Machining End State Display Table

This table is temporarily used to display machining end state. After the table is displayed, all data is deleted. Do not modify the design of the table.
ID McnID WorkID Onum PlanNum ProcNum LastID0
Auto number Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type
LastID1 LastID2 LastID3 LastID4 LastID5 NormNum
Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type Numeric type
AutoNumber Machine ID (1 to 999) Workpiece ID (0 to 99,999,999) O number (0 to 99,999,999) Planned machining count Total machining count Value obtained by subtracting, from the total machining count, the number of machining end state IDs set to 0 and the number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID setting table set to a value from 1 to 5 Number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID setting table set to 1 Number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID setting table set to 2 Number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID setting table set to 3 Number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID setting table set to 4 Number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID setting table set to 5 Normal end count. Sum of the number of LastID1s and the number of machining end state IDs set to 0.
- 434 -
B-75074EN/04
USER CUSTOMIZE 4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE
REFERENCING THE DATABASE

To the i CELL, samples for referencing the database (file name: iCELL.mdb) used with the i CELL from Excel are attached. The samples can be used on a PC where the i CELL server is installed. This chapter describes the samples.
- 435 -
4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE USER CUSTOMIZE
B-75074EN/04
4.1
OVERVIEW
The following Excel samples for referencing the i CELL database are available:
Sample 1. Referencing machining result data

As with the Machining Result screen, database information is displayed as graphs and tables on an Excel sheet. Database information can also be displayed as CSV data. File name: RunTimeA.xls Installation path: %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel (%iCELL% is the folder where the i CELL is installed.)
Sample 2. Referencing workpieces process result data

As with the Workpieces Process Result screen, database information is displayed on an Excel sheet. However, data is displayed in the CSV format, and planned count data cannot be input, and no pie chart can be displayed. File name: WorkProcA.xls Installation path: %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel
4.2
REFERENCING THE ACCESS DATABASE FROM EXCEL

This section describes the method of acquiring data from the Access database by using a VBA script of Excel and displaying the acquired data on an Excel sheet. Specifically, a connection is made to the Access database with ODBC Direct, then data is acquired using SQL statements through a VBA script of Excel then is displayed on an Excel sheet. Users who are familiar with the method need not read this section.
Starting Excel
To display the Excel samples, start Excel by using one of the following methods: Method 1 Double-click an Excel sheet to be used. Method 2 (1) From the menu, select [Start] [Programs], then select [Microsoft Excel] to start Excel. (2) Read an Excel file to be used. When a dialog box for selecting whether to enable macros appears, select Enable in either case.
Starting VBEditer
To edit the VBA script of an Excel sample, start VBEditor according to the procedure below. From the Excel menu, select [Tool] [Macro], then select [Visual Basic Editor] to start VBEditer.
- 436 -
B-75074EN/04
4.2.1
Referencing the Database

This subsection describes the method of referencing, reading from, and writing to the database through VBA of Excel.
Method of reference
To reference the database, ODBCDirect is used. ODBCDirect is a function of DAO used to directly operate the ODBC data source. By using ODBCDirect, operate the database through ODBC with SQL.
Reference setting for DAO

To operate the database by using ODBCDirect through Excel VBA, a reference setting for DAO is required. The method of reference setting is described below. 1 2 From the VBEditer menu, select [Tool] [References] to display the [References] dialog box. Check "Microsoft DAO 3.5 Object Library" in "Available References" list of the [References] dialog box, then click the <OK> button.
The step above enables DAO (ODBCDirect) to be referenced from the VBA code.
- 437 -
B-75074EN/04
Procedure for reading data

The basic procedure for reading data from the database is described below. 1 Declare object variables. Dim tWS As Workspace Dim tCon As Connection Dim tRdSt As Recordset Dim tSQL As String 2 Create an ODBCDirect work space. Set tWS = CreateWorkspace("", "admin", "", dbUseODBC) Use the CreateWorkspace method for creation. By specifying the definition constant dbUseODBC in the argument Type, an ODBCDirect work space can be created. When a work space is created with the CreateWorkspace method, the method returns the Workspace object. By using the Set statement, store the object in the object variable tWS. 3 As the cursor driver, specify the ODBC cursor library. tWS.DefaultCursorDriver = dbUseODBCCursor As a method target object, specify the created Workspace object tWS. 4 Make a connection to the database. Set tCon = tWS.OpenConnection( "iCELL", dbDriverComplete, True, "ODBC;DSN=iCELL;DATABASE=iCELL.mdb") To make a connection, use the OpenConnection method. Specify a data source name in the argument Name, and specify a real data source name in the argument Connect. For a data source name and real data source name of the i CELL, refer to Chapter 3, "DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS". A read-only connection is made by specifying True in the argument ReadOnly. When a connection is made to the database, the method returns the Connection object. By using the Set statement, store the object in the object variable tCon. 5 As a character string, create an SQL statement. tSQL = (SQL statement as a character string) By using a command such as the SELECT command, create an SQL statement for acquiring data.
- 438 -
B-75074EN/04
With the created SQL statement, open the record set. Set tRdSt = tCon.OpenRecordset(tSQL) The OpenRecordset method is used to open the record set. In the argument, specify the created SQL statement character string. As a method target object, specify the created Connection object tCon. When the record set is opened, the method returns the execution result of the SQL statement as the Recordset object. By using the Set statement, store the object in the object variable tRdSt.
Acquire data from the opened record set. Do While (Not tRdSt.EOF) (Data acquisition processing) 'Move to the next record tRdSt.MoveNext Loop In the opened record set, the contents of the start record of the execution results of the SQL statement are automatically referenced. When the data of the referenced record has been acquired, the MoveNext method is used to proceed to the next record. Data is acquired by repeating this processing until the last record of the record set.
Close the record set. tRdSt.Close By using the Close method, close the opened record set.
Disconnect the connection with the database. tCon.Close Use the Close method to disconnect the connection.
10
Free the ODBCDirect work space. tWS.Close Use the Close method to free the created work space.
- 439 -
B-75074EN/04
Procedure for writing data

The basic procedure for writing data to the database is described below.
NOTE The i CELL database is a read-only database. Do not write data, and do no modify the design and data of the tables. Otherwise, the i CELL can malfunction. However, WKPCPlan - workpiece machining count setting table, WKPCDspMcnCnd - progress status display table, and WKPCDspLastState - machining end state display table allow data modification and addition. Do not modify the data of these tables and do not add data to these table when the Workpieces Process Result screen is displayed. Otherwise, the screen may not be displayed normally. For details, see Chapter 3, "DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS".
1 Declare object variables. Dim tWS As Workspace Dim tCon As Connection Dim tRdSt As Recordset Dim tSQL As String 2 Create an ODBCDirect work space. Set tWS = CreateWorkspace("", "admin", "", dbUseODBC) Use the CreateWorkspace method for creation. By specifying the definition constant dbUseODBC in the argument Type, an ODBCDirect work space can be created. When a work space is created with the CreateWorkspace method, the method returns the Workspace object. By using the Set statement, store the object in the object variable tWS. 3 As the cursor driver, specify the ODBC cursor library. tWS.DefaultCursorDriver = dbUseODBCCursor As a method target object, specify the created Workspace object tWS. 4 Make a connection to the database. Set tCon = tWS.OpenConnection( "iCELL", dbDriverComplete, False, "ODBC;DSN=iCELL;DATABASE=iCELL.mdb") To make a connection, use the OpenConnection method.
- 440 -
B-75074EN/04
Specify a data source name in the argument Name, and specify a real data source name in the argument Connect. For a data source name and real data source name of the i CELL, refer to Chapter 3, "DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS". A connection is made with read/write authority granted, by specifying False in the argument ReadOnly. When a connection is made to the database, the method returns the Connection object. By using the Set statement, store the object in the object variable tCon. 5 As a character string, create an SQL statement. tSQL = (SQL statement as a character string) By using a command such as the UPDATE command and the INSERT INTO command, create an SQL statement for writing data. 6 With the created SQL statement, open the record set. Set tRdSt = tCon.OpenRecordset(tSQL) The OpenRecordset method is used to open the record set. In the argument, specify the created SQL statement character string. As a method target object, specify the created Connection object tCon. When the record set is opened, the SQL statement specified in the argument is executed to write to the database. The method returns the Recordset object. By using the Set statement, store the object in the object variable tRdSt. 7 Close the record set. tRdSt.Close Use the Close method to close the opened record set. 8 Disconnect the connection with the database. tCon.Close Use the Close method to disconnect the connection. 9 Free the ODBCDirect work space. tWS.Close Use the Close method to free the created work space.
- 441 -
B-75074EN/04
4.2.2
Displaying Acquired Data

This subsection describes the method of displaying acquired data on an Excel sheet. Use the Range property or the Cells property to display acquired data in a cell.
Setting numeric values in cells

1 When the Range property is used When using the Range property, use the format "Range("matrix")" like "Range("A2")". Represent a column by using a letter like "A". A numeric value can be set in one cell as follows: Range(A1).Value = 1 Range(A2) = 2 [A3] = 3 Basic type Abbreviated type Abbreviated type
Numeric values can be set in multiple cells (A1, A2, A3, A4, A5) at a time as follows: Range(A1:A5).Value = 1
The numeric value set in a variable can be set as follows: Dim X As Long X = 10 Range(A1).Value = X
When the Cells property is used When using the Cells property, use the format "Cells (row, column)" like "Cells (2, 1)". Represent a column by using a numeric value like "1". The Cells property allows a numeric variable to be used as an argument.
- 442 -
B-75074EN/04
A numeric value can be set in one cell as follows: Cells (1, 1).Value = 1 Cells (2, 1) = 2 Basic type Abbreviated type
Numeric values can be set in multiple cells (A1, A2, A3, A4, A5) at a time as follows: Range(Cells (1, 1), Cells (5, 1) ).Value = 1
The numeric value set in a variable can be set as follows: Dim X As Long X = 10 Cells (1, 1).Value = X
A numeric value can be set by using a numeric variable as an argument as follows: Dim i As Long For i = 1 to 5 Cells (i, 1).Value = i Next i
Setting character strings in cells

When setting a character string in a cell, enclose the input characters in double quotation marks ("). When a number enclosed in double quotation marks (") is set in a cell, however, the number is treated as a numeric value. To handle a number as a character string, set the cell format to character string type, or prefix an apostrophe (') to the input number.
- 443 -

1
B-75074EN/04
When a number is set as a character string When an apostrophe (') is prefixed to a number, the number is set as a character string. Range(A1).Value = 001 Treated as the character string 001 Cells (2, 1).Value = 002 Treated as the character string 002 When no apostrophe (') is prefixed to a number, the number is set as a numeric value. Range(A3).Value = 003 Treated as the numeric value 3 because of the absence of an apostrophe (') Cells (4, 1).Value = 004 Treated as the numeric value 4 because of the absence of an apostrophe (')
When a character string is set A character string can be set in a cell as follows: Range(A1).Value = ABC Cells (2, 1).Value = XYZ A date can be set as a character string in a cell as follows: Range(A3).Value = 2002/1/1 Cells (4, 1).Value = 2002/12/31 Time can be set as a character string in a cell as follows: Range(A5).Value = 12:00:00 Cells (6, 1).Value = 23:59:59
- 444 -
B-75074EN/04
4.3
SAMPLE MACHINING RESULT SCREEN

This section describes the method of operating a sample Machining Result screen and provides a detailed description of VBA scripts used. On Excel, the sample displays information similar to information displayed on the Machining Result screen of the i CELL. For details of the Machining Result screen, see Chapter 6, "MACHINING RESULT" in Part IV, "OPERATIONS".
4.3.1
Method of Operation
This subsection describes the method of execution and the method of operation.
Execution result
Double-click the RunTimeA.xls file in the %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel folder. When a dialog box for choosing whether to enable macros appears, select Enable. (%iCELL% is the folder where the i CELL is installed.)
Method of operation
(4) Operation rate display (1) Machine number specification cell (2) Monthly report (5) Graph display change specification button cell (6) List format display (7) CSV format display button button (3) Refresh button
- 445 -
B-75074EN/04
(1) Machine number specification cell

Enter a machine number for which machining results are to be displayed.
(2) Monthly report specification cell

Enter a year and month for which machining results are to be displayed.
(3) Refresh button

This button updates the screen display to display the latest data.
(4) Operation rate display

This field displays the ratio of cutting time to power-on time as a percentage. The operation rate for the indicated number of days is displayed.
(5) Graph display change button

This button is used to select data to be graphically displayed. A selection can be made between run time and parts counts.
Example of run time display

Run time data accumulated on the NC with the NC run time/parts count option is displayed as a bar chart. The displayed data is automatically updated to the latest data at intervals of 1 minute.
- 446 -
B-75074EN/04
Example of parts count display

Parts count data accumulated on the NC with the NC run time/parts count option is displayed as a bar chart. The displayed data is automatically updated to the latest data at intervals of 1 minute.
(6) List format display button

Data is displayed in the list format. In the list format, run time and parts count data is displayed in one list. The displayed data is automatically updated to the latest data at intervals of 1 minute.
Example of list format display
- 447 -
4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE USER CUSTOMIZE (7) CSV format display button
B-75074EN/04
Data is displayed for use in the CSV format. In the CSV format, run time and parts count data is displayed. The displayed data is not automatically updated.
Example of CSV format display
4.3.2
Description of VBA Scripts

To reference the database, various procedures described with VBA scripts of Excel are used. The major procedures are described below. In the descriptions below, the name of a procedure and the name of the module including the procedure are indicated in the following format:
Example: GetRunTimeAData :: RuntimeA
Procedure name :: Module name
- 448 -
B-75074EN/04
4.3.2.1
Database operation procedure

This procedure acquires data from the machining result data table. Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typRunTimeAData). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT o.FirstClock, o.LastClock," & _ "o.FirstPOn, o.FirstOp1, o.FirstOp2, o.FirstCut1, o.FirstCut2, " & _ "o.LastPOn, o.LastOp1, o.LastOp2, o.LastCut1, o.LastCut2, " & _ "o.FirstCnt1, o.FirstCnt2, " & _ "o.LastCnt1, o.LastCnt2 " & _ "FROM RunTimeAData o " & _ "WHERE (o.McnId=" & iMchNo & _ " AND ((o.FirstClock) Between #" & iStDate & "# And #" & iEdDate & "#)) " & _ "ORDER BY o.FirstClock" From the machining result data table, this SQL statement acquires data with McnId and iMchNo matching each other and FirstClock between iStDate and iEdDate in ascending order of FirstClock.
GetRunTimeAData :: RuntimeA
4.3.2.2
Data display processing procedures

Based on data acquired from the database, this procedure collects data in the list format and graph format. Collected data is set in an array of the structure (typDispData). The method of collecting each type of data is as follows: [Power-on time (seconds)] = ( [LastPOn] - [FirstPOn] ) 60 [Operation time (seconds)] = ( [LastOp1] - [FirstOp1] ) / 1000 + ( [LastOp2] - [FirstOp2] ) 60 [Cutting time (seconds)] = ( [LastCut1] - [FirstCut1] ) / 1000 + ( [LastCut2] - [FirstCut2] ) 60 [Machined parts count] = [LastCnt1] - [FirstCnt1] [Total machined parts count] = [LastCnt2] - [FirstCnt2] For power-on time, operation time, and cutting time, the GetDispTime procedure is called to acquire data for display in the list format and graph format. Based on the collected cutting time and power-on time data, an operation rate calculation is made with the GetOpeRate procedure. [Operation rate (%)] = ( [Total cutting time] / [Total power-on time] ) 100
GetDispData :: RuntimeA
- 449 -
B-75074EN/04
ChangeDispDays :: Sheet1
This procedure changes the number of days for list and graph display according to the number of the days of every month acquired with the GetMonthDays procedure. If the number of days remains unchanged from the previous display, however, processing is not performed. For a list, the number of display days is changed. For a run time graph or parts count graph, a data acquisition destination cell for each item of the graph is set.
SetTableData :: Sheet1
This procedure sets list format data in cells. For the number of days acquired with the GetMonthDays procedure, the ForNext statement is repeatedly executed as a loop, and the collected data m_DispData() is set in cells by using the Cells property. Moreover, an operation rate is set in a cell by using the Range property.
SetChartData :: Sheet1
This procedure sets graph format data in cells. For the number of days acquired with the GetMonthDays procedure, the ForNext statement is repeatedly executed as a loop, and the collected data m_DispData() is set in cells by using the Cells property. Moreover, an operation rate is set in a cell by using the Range property.
SetCSVData :: Sheet1
This procedure displays data usable with CSV on Sheet2. In cells, list format data is set. All cells of Sheet2 are deleted together with the format, then the format of the cells is changed to character string. A header portion and display items are set in cells by using the Range property. For the number of days acquired with the GetMonthDays procedure, the ForNext statement is repeatedly executed as a loop, and the collected data m_DispData() is set in cells by using the Cells property.
4.3.2.3
Timer processing procedures

With VBA, the timer control cannot be used. A pseudo timer is created to automatically update data at certain intervals. The OnTime method of the Application object is used to create a pseudo timer. The OnTime method generates an event only once at specified time. So, by calling the OnTime method again when an event is generated, a pseudo timer function is implemented.
InitTimer :: Common
This procedure performs pseudo timer initialization. A timer event generation interval and the name of a procedure to be executed with a timer are acquired.
SetTimer :: Common
This procedure sets a pseudo timer. With the OnTime method, an interval and procedure name acquired with InitTimer are set to start the pseudo timer. Moreover, the timer start flag m_TimerFlg is set to True.
- 450 -
B-75074EN/04
StopTimer :: Common
This procedure sets the timer start flag m_TimerFlg to False to stop the timer.
TimerEvent :: Common
This procedure is the event procedure for the timer set with the OnTime method. After data acquisition and display, the SetTimer procedure is called to set the next timer event.
- 451 -
B-75074EN/04
4.4
SAMPLE WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SCREEN

This section describes the method of operating a sample Workpieces Process Result screen and provides a detailed description of VBA scripts used. On Excel, the sample displays information similar to information displayed on the Workpieces Process Result screen of the i CELL. However, data cannot be automatically updated, planned count data cannot be entered, the display format cannot be changed, and no pie chart can be displayed. The display format is fixed as described below. Machine : Number, name Workpiece : Name O number : Displayed User area : Displayed Time display format : yy/mm/dd h:nn:ss For details of the Workpieces Process Result screen, see Chapter 7, "WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS" in Part IV, "OPERATIONS".
- 452 -
B-75074EN/04
4.4.1
Method of Operation
Double-click the WorkProcA.xls file of the %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel folder. (%iCELL% is the folder where the i CELL is installed.) When a dialog box for choosing whether to enable macros appears, select Enable.
Method of execution
Method of operation
(1) Display condition change button (2) Display period specification cell (6) Refresh button
(4) Workpiece specification button/cell
(3) Machine specification (5) Display change button button/cell
- 453 -
B-75074EN/04
(1) Display condition change button

Select a condition for display. Select Daily, Monthly, or Term.
(2) Display period specification cell

Enter a desired display period in the cell. For specification of Daily or Term, enter year/month/day. For specification of Monthly, enter year/month. For specification of Term, ensure that the date entered on the right side is younger than the date entered on the left side. Otherwise, process result data is not displayed correctly.
(3) Machine specification button/cell

Specify a machine by pressing the machine specification button. When a machine is specified, the button is displayed in light blue, and the process result data corresponding to a machine number and name entered in the cells is displayed.
(4) Workpiece specification button/cell

Specify a workpiece by pressing the workpiece specification button. When a workpiece is specified, the button is displayed in light blue, and the process result data corresponding to a workpiece name entered in the cell is displayed.
(5) Display change button

By clicking the Progress, Log, or End State button, the screen display can be switched to the current progress status, log, or machining end state display. When a button is selected, the button is displayed in light blue.
(6) Refresh button

Based on the display period and display item, data is displayed for use in the CSV format.
Example of display (machining end state display)
- 454 -
B-75074EN/04
4.4.2
Description of VBA Scripts

To reference the database, various procedures described with VBA scripts of Excel are used. The major procedures are described below. In the descriptions below, the name of a procedure and the name of the module including the procedure are indicated in the following format:
Example GetLastStateConfig :: DB_Common
Procedure name :: Module name
4.4.2.1
Database operation procedures

The DB_Common module defines common procedures for acquiring data from the i CELL database.
DB_Common module
GetLastStateConfig :: DB_Common
This procedure acquires data from the machining end ID setting table. Data is acquired in an array of the structure (typLastStateConfig). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT w.LastID, w.LastStr" & _ " FROM WKPCLastStateConfig w" & _ " WHERE w.Order>= 1 AND w.Order<=5" & _ " ORDER BY w.Order" From the machining end ID setting table, this SQL statement acquires LastID and LastStr with Order not less than 1 and not greater than 5 in ascending order of Order.
CheckMcnConfig :: DB_Common
This procedure checks if a machine name and number passed as arguments are set in the workpieces process result setting table. Whether a machine name and number are set is determined from whether acquired data is present. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT wm.McnID, wm.McnName" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm" & _ " WHERE wm.Enable=1 AND wm.McnName='" & iMcnName & "' AND wm.McnID=" & iMcnNo From the workpieces process result setting table, this SQL statement acquires McnID and McnName with Enable set to 1, McnName and iMcnName matching each other ,and McnID and iMcnNo matching each other.
- 455 -
4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE USER CUSTOMIZE CheckWorkConfig :: DB_Common
B-75074EN/04
This procedure checks if a workpiece name passed as an argument is set in the workpiece ID setting table, and acquires the workpiece ID corresponding to the workpiece name. Whether a workpiece name is set is determined from whether acquired data is present. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT ww.WorkID" & _ " FROM WKPCWorkName ww" & _ " WHERE ww.WorkName='" & iWorkName & "'" From the workpiece ID setting table, this SQL statement acquires WorkID with WorkName and iWorkName matching each other.
GetCountWorkProc :: DB_Common
This procedure acquires the number of machining end state IDs from the workpieces process result data table. Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typCountData). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT w." & m_FieldText & ", Count(w.LastID) As CountOfUnitPrice" & _ " FROM WKPCData w" & _ iSQLWhere & _ " AND w.LastID<>NULL" & _ " GROUP BY w." & m_FieldText & _ " ORDER BY w." & m_FieldText From the workpieces process result data table, this SQL statement acquires the number of LastIDs not set to NULL for each m_FieldText in ascending order of m_FieldText. For counting the number of LastIDs, the Count function is used. In the Where clause, iSQLWhere passed as an argument is also used.
GetCountWorkProcPlan :: DB_Common
This procedure acquires total planned machining count from the planned workpiece machining count setting table. Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typCountData). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT w." & m_FieldText & ", Sum(w.PlanNum) As SumOfPlanNum" & _ " FROM WKPCPlan w" & _ iSQLWhere & _ " AND w.McnID<>NULL" & _ " GROUP BY w." & m_FieldText & _ " ORDER BY w." & m_FieldText From the planned workpiece machining count setting table, this SQL statement acquires the total number of PlanNum's with McnID not set to NULL for each m_FieldText in ascending order of m_FieldText.
- 456 -
B-75074EN/04
For counting the total number of PlanNum's, the Sum function is used. In the Where clause, iSQLWhere passed as an argument is also used.
DB_McnCnd module
The DB_McnCnd module defines procedures for acquiring progress status data from the i CELL database.
GetMcnCndData :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure acquires progress status data. Data is created in the progress status display table, and data is acquired from the progress status display table. Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typMcnCnd). The SQL statement is created as follows: tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, wm.McnName, w.WorkID, ww.WorkName, w.ONum," & _ " w.FirstClock, w.LastClockPlan, w.NormNum, w.PlanNum, w.AllLastClockPlan" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT OUTER JOIN WKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID)" & _ " ON wm.McnID=w.McnID" & _ " ORDER BY w.McnID" By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ...ON, this SQL statement connects tables. 1. Connects the workpiece ID setting table with the progress status display table when WorkID matches. 2. Connects the connected tables with the workpieces process result setting table when McnID matches. From the connected tables, each data item is acquired in ascending order of McnID of the progress status display table.
DeleteDspMcnCnd :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure clears the data of the progress status display table. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "DELETE *" & _ " FROM WKPCDspMcnCnd" From the progress status display table, this SQL statement deletes all data by using the DELETE command.
CreateMcnCndData :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure creates data for display in the progress status display table. The latest log information is acquired for each machine. If there is data representing current machining, data is created in the progress status display table by acquiring each data item and calling the write procedure.
- 457 -
4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE USER CUSTOMIZE GetNewLog :: DB_McnCnd
B-75074EN/04
This procedure acquires the latest log information for each machine from the workpieces process result data table. Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typNewLog). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT McnID, Max(FirstClock) as MaxOfFirstClock" &_ " FROM WKPCData" & _ " WHERE McnID<>NULL" & _ " AND FirstClock<>NULL" & _ " GROUP BY McnID" & _ " ORDER BY McnID" From the workpieces process result data table, this SQL statement acquires the maximum value of FirstClock with McnID and FirstClock not set to NULL for each McnID in ascending order of McnID. To acquire the maximum value, the Max function is used.
GetRunData :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure acquires machining in-progress log information based on the latest log information for each machine. Whether machining is in progress is determined from whether data such as end time (LastClock), machining end ID (LastID), and user area ID (UserID) is acquired. Data is acquired in the structure (typRunLog). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, w.WorkID, w.ONum, w.FirstClock, ww.PlanTime, w.LastClock, w.LastID, w.UserID" & _ " FROM WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT JOIN WKPCData w" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID" & _ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_NewLog(iIdx).McnID & _ " AND w.WorkID<>NULL" & _ " AND ((w.FirstClock) =#" & Format(m_NewLog(iIdx).FirstClock, "yyyy/m/d h:n:s") & "#)" By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ... ON, this SQL statement connects the workpiece ID setting table with the workpieces process result data table when WorkID matches. Such data that McnID and FirstClock of the latest log information for each machine match McnID and FirstClock of the connected table, and that WorkID is not set to NULL is acquired.
SetDspMcnCnd :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure sets acquired machining in-progress log information and normal end count data in the progress status display table. The following SQL statement is created: When O number data is absent tSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspMcnCnd" & _ " (McnID" & _ ", WorkID" & _ ", FirstClock" & _
- 458 -
B-75074EN/04
", NormNum)" & _ " VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_RunLog.McnID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.WorkID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.FirstClock & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPc(0).Count & "')" When O number data is present tSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspMcnCnd" & _ " (McnID" & _ ", WorkID" & _ ", ONum" & _ ", FirstClock" & _ ", NormNum)" & _ " VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_RunLog.McnID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.WorkID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.ONum & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.FirstClock & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPc(0).Count & "')" By using the INSERT INTO command, this SQL statement writes acquired machining in-progress log information and normal end count to the progress status display table.
SetDspMcnCnd_WkPcPlan :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure sets planned machining count data in the progress status display table. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " SET w.PlanNum='" & m_CntWkPcPlan(0).Count & "'" &_ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_RunLog.McnID By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes planned machining count to PlanNum of data with McnID of machining in-progress log information matching McnID of the progress status display table.
SetDspMcnCnd_LtCkPlan :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure sets planned machining end time data in the progress status display table. Planned machining end time is acquired by adding planned machining time to the machining start time of machining in-progress log information. Planned machining end time = Machining start time + Planned machining time The following SQL statement is created:
- 459 -
B-75074EN/04
tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " SET LastClockPlan='" & tLtCkPlan & "'" & _ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_RunLog.McnID By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes planned machining end time to LastClockPlan of data with McnID of machining in-progress log information matching McnID of the progress status display table.
SetDspMcnCnd_AllLtCkPlan :: DB_McnCnd
This procedure sets planned total machining end time data in the progress status display table. Planned total machining end time is calculated as follows: Remaining machining count = Planned machining count - Normal end count Planned machining end time = Machining start time + (Planned machining time Remaining machining count) The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " SET AllLastClockPlan='" & tAllLtCkPlan & "'" & _ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_RunLog.McnID By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes planned total machining end time to AllLastClockPlan of data with McnID of machining in-progress log information matching McnID of the progress status display table.
- 460 -
B-75074EN/04
DB_Log module
The DB_Log module defines a procedure for acquiring log data from the i CELL database.
GetLogData :: DB_Log
This procedure acquires log data. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, wm.McnName, w.WorkID, ww.WorkName, w.ONum," & _ " w.FirstClock, w.LastClock, w.LastID, wl.LastStr, w.UserID, wu.UserStr, w.SNum" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCLastStateConfig wl RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCUserConfig wu RIGHT OUTER JOIN WKPCData w" & _ " ON wu.UserID = w.UserID)" & _ " ON wl.LastID = w.LastID)" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID)" & _ " ON wm.McnID=w.McnID" & _ tSQLWhere & _ " ORDER BY w.FirstClock DESC, w.ID DESC" By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ... ON, this SQL statement connects tables. 1. Connects the user area ID setting table with the workpieces process result data table when UserID matches. 2. Connects the connected tables with the machining end ID setting table when LastID matches. 3. Connects the connected tables with the workpiece ID setting table when WorkID matches. 4. Connects the connected tables with the workpieces process result setting table when McnID matches. From the connected tables, each data item is acquired in descending order of FirstClock and ID of the workpieces process result data table. A Where clause (tSQLWhere) is created using CreateSQLWhere.
- 461 -
B-75074EN/04
DB_LastState module
The DB_LastState module defines procedures for acquiring machining end state data from the i CELL database.
GetLastStateData :: DB_LastState
This procedure acquires machining end state data. Data is created in the machining end state display table, and data is acquired from the machining end state display table. Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typLastState). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, wm.McnName, w.WorkID, ww.WorkName, w.ONum, w.PlanNum, w.ProcNum," & _ " w.LastID0, w.LastID1, w.LastID2, w.LastID3, w.LastID4, w.LastID5, w.NormNum" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT OUTER JOIN WKPCDspLastState w" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID)" & _ " ON wm.McnID=w.McnID" & _ " ORDER BY w." & m_FieldText By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ...ON, this SQL statement connects tables. 1. Connects the workpiece ID setting table with the machining end state display table when WorkID matches. 2. Connects the connected tables with the workpieces process result setting table when McnID matches. From the connected tables, each data item is acquired in ascending order of m_FieldText.
DeleteDspLastState :: DB_LastState
This procedure clears the data of the machining end state display table. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "DELETE *" & _ " FROM WKPCDspLastState" From the machining end state display table, this SQL statement deletes all data by using the DELETE command.
CreateLastStateData :: DB_LastState
This procedure creates data for display in the machining end state display table. Data is created in the machining end state display table by acquiring each data item and calling the write procedure.
- 462 -
B-75074EN/04
SetDspLastState_WkPc :: DB_LastState
This procedure sets total machining count data in the machining end state display table. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspLastState" & _ " (" & m_FieldText & _ ", ProcNum)" & _ " VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_CntWkPc(i).ID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPc(i).Count & "')" By using the INSERT INTO command, this SQL statement newly writes acquired total machining count to the machining end state display table.
SetDspLastState_WkPcPlan :: DB_LastState
This procedure sets planned count data in the machining end state display table. Whether there is a record with the same condition is checked using the CheckSameRecord procedure. If there is a record with the same condition, the record is updated. If there is no record with the same condition, a new record is written. The following SQL statement is created: When there is a record with the same condition tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspLastState w" & _ " SET w.PlanNum='" & m_CntWkPcPlan(i).Count & "'" & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" & m_CntWkPcPlan(i).ID By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes planned count to PlanNum. When there is no record with the same condition tSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspLastState" & _ " (" & m_FieldText & _ ", PlanNum) " & _ " VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_CntWkPcPlan(i).ID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPcPlan(i).Count & "')" By using the INSERT INTO command, this SQL statement newly writes acquired planned count to the machining end state display table.
- 463 -
4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE USER CUSTOMIZE CheckSameRecord :: DB_LastState
B-75074EN/04
This procedure checks if there is a record with the same condition in the machining end state display table. Whether there is a record with the same condition is determined from whether acquired data is present. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "SELECT w." & m_FieldText & _ " FROM WKPCDspLastState w" & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" & m_CntWkPcPlan(iIdx).ID This SQL statement acquires m_FieldText in the machining end state display table when m_FieldText matches m_CntWkPcPlan(iIdx).ID.
GetTotalLastID :: DB_LastState
This procedure collects machining end state data from the workpieces process result data table. Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typCountData). The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = " SELECT w." & m_FieldText & ", Count(w.LastID) as CountLastID" & _ " FROM WKPCData w" & _ iSQLWhere & _ " AND w.LastID<>NULL" & _ " AND w.LastID=" & iLastID & _ " GROUP BY w." & m_FieldText From the workpieces process result data table, this SQL statement acquires the number of LastIDs not set to NULL with LastID matching iLastID in ascending order of m_FieldText. For counting the number of LastIDs, the Count function is used. In the Where clause, iSQLWhere passed as an argument is used.
SetDspLastState_LastID :: DB_LastState
This procedure sets machining end state data in the machining end state display table. The following SQL statement is created: tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspLastState w" & _ " SET w.LastID" & iIdx & "=" & m_LastIDTotal(i).Count & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" & m_LastIDTotal(i).ID By using the UPDATE statement, this SQL statement writes the machining end state m_LastIDTotal(i).Count to LastID" & iIdx of data with m_FieldText matching m_LastIDTotal(i).ID.
- 464 -
B-75074EN/04
SetDspLastState_NormNum :: DB_LastState
This procedure sets normal end count data (sum of LastIDs = 0, 1) in the machining end state display table. The following SQL statement is created: When LastID = 0 only tSQLSet = " SET w.NormNum=w.LastID0" When LastID = 0, 1 tSQLSet = " SET m_LastIDTotal(i).Count w.NormNum=w.LastID0+" &
tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspLastState w" & _ tSQLSet & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" & m_LastIDTotal(i).ID By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes the normal end count of data with m_FieldText matching m_LastIDTotal(i).ID.
- 465 -
B-75074EN/04
4.4.2.2
Data display processing procedures

This procedure acquires the display mode. Based on the state of selection from the machine specification button, workpiece specification button, and display change button, the display mode is acquired.
GetDispMode :: Sheet1
SetDispArea :: Sheet1
This procedure displays a header portion and display items on Sheet2. All cells of Sheet2 are deleted together with the format, then the format of the cells is changed to character string. The header portion is displayed with the CreateHeder procedure. The display items are displayed with the CreateItem procedure.
CreateHeder :: Sheet1
This procedure displays a header portion on Sheet2. A header portion is created in each acquired display mode, then is set in cells by using the Range property.
CreateItem :: Sheet1
This procedure displays display items in each display mode on Sheet2. Display items are created in each display mode, then are set in cells by using the Cells property.
GetDispData :: Sheet1
This procedure acquires display data then displays the data on a sheet. Data is acquired and displayed for each display item.
DispMcnCndData :: Sheet1
This procedure displays progress status data. For the number of display data items, the ForNext statement is repeatedly executed as a loop, and the progress status data m_McnCnd() is set in cells by using the Cells property.
DispLastStateData :: Sheet1
This procedure displays machining end state data. For the number of display data items, the ForNext statement is repeatedly executed as a loop, and data is acquired from the machining end state data m_LastState () according to the display mode then is set in cells by using the Cells property.
DispLogData :: Sheet1
This procedure displays log data. For the number of display data items, the ForNext statement is repeatedly executed as a loop, and data is acquired from the log data m_Log () according to the display mode then is set in cells by using the Cells property.
- 466 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX A.HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY
HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY

This appendix explains how to install and register your use of CIMPLICITY for i CELL.
- 469 -
A.HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
A.1
A.1.1
HOT TO INSTALL CIMPLICITY

Installing CIMPLICITY
CIMPLICITY HMI can be installed easily by: Starting installation according to the procedure that matches the device configuration of the computer in use and the way CD-ROM is connected (local drive/network-shared drive) Going on with installation In addition to these two topics, this appendix explains how to install: New options
- 470 -
B-75074EN/04
A.1.2
How to Start Installation

The installation of CIMPLICITY HMI can be started in much the same way as Windows-based software. Strictly speaking, the installation procedure varies depending on which of the following configurations is used: Local CD-ROM drive Shared CD-ROM drive
Installing CIMPLICITY HMI, using a local CD-ROM drive

It is easy to install CIMPLICITY HMI from a local CD-ROM drive. To install the CIMPLICITY software from a local CD-ROM drive, follow this procedure: Insert the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The installation procedure automatically starts. If the procedure does not start automatically, start the installation procedure, following these steps. 1. Open Windows Explorer. 2. Select the CD-ROM drive. 3. (On a network computer) Specify the CD-ROM drive as a network drive and connect it for sharing. 4. (On all computers) Select setup.bat from the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD.
Installing CIMPLICITY HMI, using a shared CD-ROM drive

If a shared CD-ROM drive is used for the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD, CIMPLICITY HMI can be installed, using simple procedures for a computer with the CD-ROM drive and the computer where you are going to install CIMPLICITY HMI. Getting a shared computer ready for CIMPLICITY HMI installation Procedure to be performed on a computer equipped with a CD-ROM drive: 1. Open My Computer. 2. Select the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the mouse's right button to open a POP-up menu, and select Share... from the POP-up menu. 4. Select the Sharing tab for the drive. 5. Select Shared As. 6. Enter a desired name in the Share Name field. 7. Select OK. Procedure to be performed on the computer where you are going to install CIMPLICITY HMI 1. Open My Computer. 2. Click the Map Network Drive button on the toolbar. 3. Select Drive. 4. Specify a path to the CD-ROM in the shared drive. 5. Select OK. The shared drive is now open, enabling you to select setup.bat from the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD.
- 471 -
B-75074EN/04
A.1.3
Newly Installing CIMPLICITY HMI

Once setup.bat is selected from the distribution CD, the CIMPLICITY HMI splash screen appears while the installation procedure is checking the computer. When the check is completed, dialog boxes appear in series to guide you through the remaining installation work. The procedure advances as stated below. Welcome Software Evaluation License Agreement (for enabling you to check the software evaluation license agreement) CIMPLICITY HMI Product Options (for prompting you to set up CIMPLICITY system installation options) Choose Destination Location (for prompting you to select an installation path) HMI Server Options (for prompting you to set up CIMPLICITY function options) Choose Program Group (for prompting you to select a program group) Registration (for prompting you to register at installation) Setup Complete (for informing you that you have succeeded in setup) The CIMPLICITY HMI System setup screen opens with the Welcome dialog box.
- 472 -
B-75074EN/04
If you want to cancel your request for installation, select Cancel. Otherwise, select Next to go to the Software Evaluation License Agreement dialog box.
Read the software license agreement terms carefully. If you agree with the terms, select Yes. If not, select No. Selecting No stops the installation procedure. Selecting Yes brings you to the CIMPLICITY HMI Product Options dialog box.
- 473 -
B-75074EN/04
Select the option you want to install. A list of options appears, and the Change Destination Location dialog box opens.
Select the directory where you want to install the CIMPLICITY HMI software. Selecting Browse... enables you to search through a list of directories. Alternatively, you can use a default directory (c:\CIMPLICITY\HMI). After selecting a desired directory, select Next to keep on installing. The Options dialog box opens to list the products you may want to install.
Select desired components of product options. For some components in the Components list, more than one option is available. When a component is selected, its options are listed in the list box at the right. You can select desired options for individual components. Once selection is completed, select Next to keep on installing. The Choose Program Group dialog box opens.
- 474 -
B-75074EN/04
NOTE Make sure that a component is highlighted, and then select options usable with that component.
Select the program folder (CIMPLICITY\HMI by default) for the CIMPLICITY HMI software and then select Next. A file transfer from the CD-ROM to the specified directory begins. Once installation is completed, the Registration dialog box opens.
- 475 -
B-75074EN/04
At this point, you can register your use of the CIMPLICITY HMI software. However, you are provided with a four-day trial use period after installation. Within this period, you can access the basic system and all installed options of the communication enabler. If you do not acquire a software license before the end of the trial use period, the system license becomes invalid, and the use of its functions is restricted. See A.2.4, "Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License," for information about the restricted functions. If you registered your use of the software, or you selected No in the Registration dialog box, the Site Complete dialog box opens.
For the CIMPLICITY HMI software to function normally, you must restart the computer. This dialog box enables you to restart the computer immediately.
A.1.4
Installing New Options with CIMPLICITY HMI

You can add new options to CIMPLICITY HMI quickly. Procedure for adding new options quickly: 1. Run Setup.bat from the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD-ROM. 2. Select Install CIMPLICITY HMI. 3. Proceed to the CIMPLICITY HMI Setup dialog box. 4. Select Review/Add Options. The Options dialog box appears. 5. Select an option you want to install. 6. Once installation is completed, restart the computer. 7. Do not forget to register your use of the new option.
- 476 -
B-75074EN/04
A.2
A.2.1
REGISTERING USE OF CIMPLICITY

Registering Use of CIMPLICITY HMI Software
If you purchased CIMPLICITY HMI software with license, you must register your use of it before you can access all its functions.
NOTE If you have not registered your use of the software, or you run the demo system, please read A.2.4, "Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License," for descriptions about restricted functions.
This section describes the following procedures. Initial registration Registering for new options and upgrading Transferring the license The section also explains a non-license version and enumerates the related restrictions.
- 477 -
B-75074EN/04
A.2.2
Newly Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI

Before starting the registration sequence, make sure that you have the basic system, communication enabler, and the license of the options you purchased on hand. Registering your use of the system requires: Running the registration program to register information about you and the serial number of the software Getting an authorization code from GE Fanuc Running the registration program and entering the authorization code
Running the registration program

To register your use of the software, follow this procedure: 1. Select CIMPLICITY from the Windows Start menu. 2. Select HMI. 3. Select Registration. The Registration Instructions dialog box opens. 4. Click the New Registration radio button. 5. Select Next to keep on registering. The Registration License Agreement dialog box opens to display terms and conditions related to registration. 6. If you agree with the terms and conditions, select Yes to keep on registering. The Registration User Information dialog box appears. 7. Enter your name, address, telephone number, and fax number. (To get a system authorization code, you need to inform GE Fanuc of all this information.) 8. Select Next to keep on registering. The Registration Serial Number dialog box appears. 9. Enter the serial number of the basic system. 10. Enter the serial numbers of the options and upgrading. 11. Select Next to keep on registering. The Registration Authorization dialog box appears to display the user information, basic serial number, and system key code that are to be reported to GE Fanuc. 12. Select Print Registration to print a copy of the user information, basic serial number, and system key code. Report this registration information to GE Fanuc by fax or telephone. 13. To continue, take either of the following steps: If you have no authorization code, select Quit to terminate the registration sequence, and go to the next topic, "Request to register." After you receive an authorization code from GE Fanuc, you can enter the registration information again into the registration program to complete registration. If you have an authorization code, select Next to keep on registering. See "Entering an authorization code" in this subsection for explanations about how to enter an authorization code.
- 478 -
B-75074EN/04
Request to register
To get an authorization code, contact GE Fanuc of the USA at the following telephone or fax number. When asking for an authorization code, you need to supply your name, user information, basic serial number, and system key code. Fax: (518) 464-4581 Phone: (518) 464-4619 These numbers are usable from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. EST on Monday through Friday except USA national holidays. Requests to register sent by fax or telephone after business hours or on weekends or holidays will be accepted on the following business day. Before contacting GE Fanuc, get ready the following information: User information CIMPLICITY HMI serial number System key code (generated during a registration sequence) When you receive an authorization code from GE Fanuc, take note of it.
Entering an authorization code

The remaining steps of your CIMPLICITY HMI software registration sequence are intended to enter an authorization code. Once you go through them, you will be given all post-registration privileges. To enter your authorization code, follow these steps. 1. Double-click the registration icon for the CIMPLICITY HMI program group to restart the CIMPLICITY HMI registration procedure. 2. Proceed to the Registration Instruction dialog box. 3. Check whether the New Registration radio button is selected. 4. Select Next. 5. Select Yes in the License Agreement dialog box. 6. Select Next in the Registration Serial Numbers dialog box. 7. Select Next in the Registration Authorization dialog box. The Registration System Authorization Code dialog box appears. 8. Enter the authorization code you received from GE Fanuc. 9. Select Next to keep on registering. The Registration Finish dialog box appears. 10. Select OK to exit the registration program. Congratulations. You succeeded in registering your use of the CIMPLICITY HMI software. Now you can perfectly access the basic system and all options you installed and registered for.
NOTE Enter your authorization code within four days after you enter the serial number of your basic system and get a system code. The system code is updated after four days, and the authorization code issued for the old system code becomes invalid.
- 479 -
B-75074EN/04
A.2.3
Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI Options and Upgrading the Functions

You must register for new CIMPLICITY HMI options and upgraded functions before they all become usable.
Registering for new CIMPLICITY HMI options

To register for new CIMPLICITY HMI options, you need to contact GE Fanuc. Registration procedure for new options: 1. Run the registration program from CIMPLICITY HMI in the Windows Start menu. 2. Enter the serial number of each new option. Now you are finished with registering for the new options.
Registering for function upgrading

With the CIMPLICITY HMI system, device I/O counts (for example, 50, 75, 150, 300, 700, and limitless) can be selected for both development and run-time systems. Any of the following function upgrading types can be selected. From low-point to high-point device I/O count From run-time to development system From viewer to server For details about how to order function upgrading, contact a nearby marketing company. Registration procedure for function upgrading: 1. Run the registration program from CIMPLICITY HMI in the Windows Start menu. 2. Proceed to the CIMPLICITY Registration Serial Number dialog box. 3. Select Change. 4. Enter a serial number that matches the basic system for which you want to register. 5. Inform GE Fanuc of your new basic serial number and system key code to get a new system authorization code. 6. Enter the new system authorization code into the CIMPLICITY Registration System Authentication Code dialog box.
NOTE When adding an option in function upgrading, you do no need to contact GE Fanuc. You only have to enter a valid serial number for each desired option you purchased.
- 480 -
B-75074EN/04
A.2.4
Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License

You can run the CIMPLICITY HMI software with no license for demonstration or test purposes. You can: Run the CIMPLICITY demo project or any existing project for two hours, and Create and display windows, using CimEdit and CimView. The following restrictions are applied to demonstration and test run, however. It is impossible for a server or viewer with no license to communicate with CIMPLICITY applications on other computers. A device communication enabler (devcom) with no license can run for only two hours regardless of whether you have a license for the basic system.
- 481 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
NC SETTING
The setting of each type of NC is described below. Refer to Section B.1, "SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B AND Power Mate i" or Section B.4, SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A, in Appendix, when the option board (Ethernet board, FAST Ethernet board, Data Server board, or FAST DATA SERVER) is used. Refer to Section B.2, "SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-B or Section B.5, SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A" in Appendix, when the embedded Ethernet board is used. Refer to Section B.3, "SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B" or Section B.6, SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A,in Appendix, when the Data Server functions is used. Refer to Section B.7, "SETTING UP DNC2," in Appendix, when the DNC2 is used. Refer to Section B.8, "SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER," in Appendix, when the Reader/Puncher is used.
- 482 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.1
SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, AND Series 0i-B/C
This section describes the items required to be set to operate the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions available on the option board for Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, and Series 0i-B/C. Refer to Section B.2, "SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-B," in Appendix for the embedded Ethernet function.
B.1.1
Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for the First Time
CAUTION When the Ethernet board or FAST Ethernet board is used for the first time, consult with your companys network administrator to determine the IP addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communications test. If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communications may be interfered with or the entire network might be adversely affected. Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set, communication errors are caused intermittently. This may result in a CNC's system error. NOTE 1 One of the following option functions is needed when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used: Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details. 2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients connectable to one CNC using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions. Refer to Note 2 in Item Usable CNCs (When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used) in Section 3.1 of Part I for details.
- 483 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.1.2
FOCAS2/Ethernet Parameter Screen

The Ethernet Parameter screen is used to set parameters that are needed to run the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions.
Display
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Place the CNC in MDI mode. Press function key
SYSTEM
5 6
Press the Continuation menu key at the bottom right of the soft key menu. When you press soft key [ETHPRM], the "Ethernet Parameter" screen appears. For the Series 16i/18i/21i-B, to display the "Ethernet Parameter" screen, press soft key [ETHPRM] and then soft key [BOARD]. If parameters have already been registered, the parameter settings are displayed. Enter or update the data using the MDI or soft keys. Select the desired page using the
PAGE PAGE
page keys.
- 484 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
NOTE Already-set data can be deleted. To delete numerical data, enter 0. To delete character data, enter a space (SP).
- 485 -
B.NC SETTING Display items and setting items
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Display items related to the Ethernet functions

The items related to the Ethernet functions are displayed.
Item MAC ADDRESS NUMBER OF SCREENS MAXIMUM PATH HDD EXISTENCE Description MAC address of the Ethernet board or FAST Ethernet board Total number of Ethernet error message screens used by the Ethernet functions Number of control systems in the CNC Indicates whether a hard disk or ATA flash card is mounted on the Ethernet board or FAST Ethernet board. 0: Not mounted. 2: Mounted.
TCP/IP setting items for the CNC

Set the TCP/IP items for the CNC.
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the CNC. (Format: "192.168.0.1") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when the network incorporates a router. (Format: "192.168.0.99")
FOCAS2/Ethernet setting items

Set the items related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet server.
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535. Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number for C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation. Refer to Item "UDP number for C4 service," in Section 3.2 of Part II for details. Set 50.
NOTE When the "TCP/IP setting items for the CNC" have been changed, the power must be turned off then on again.
- 486 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.1.3
Configuring a Small-scale Network

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to run the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions on a small-scale network. These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions. The FOCAS2/Ethernet function client runs on personal computer No.1. The FOCAS2/Ethernet function server runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.
HUB
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Personal computer No.1 CNC No.1 CNC No.2
CNC No.1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address TCP port No. UDP port No. Time interval 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 None 8193 8192 50
CNC No.2 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 None 8193 8192 50
Set these items on the "Ethernet Parameter" screen.
Personal computer No.1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway CNC No.1 IP address Port number CNC No.2 IP address Port number 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None 192.168.0.1 8193 192.168.0.2 8193 Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on the personal computer (Windows OS).
Specify on the setting screen of i CELL. Refer to Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up Communication," in Part III for details.
B.1.4
Configuring a Large-scale Network

Before you configure a large-scale network or add such a network to an existing network, consult your company's network administrator to determine IP addresses, subnet masks, and router IP addresses.
- 487 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.2
SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-B

This section describes the items required to be set to operate the embedded Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i-B. When using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function, see Subsections B.2.1 and B.2.2. When setting an FTP server on a PC and setting the setting information as parameters for the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function), see Subsections B.2.1 and B.2.3. Refer to Section B.1, "Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet of the Option Board for Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, and Series 0i-B/C," for the option board.
B.2.1
CAUTION When the embedded Ethernet function is used for the first time, consult with your companys network administrator to determine the IP addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communications test. If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communications may be interfered with or the entire network might be adversely affected. NOTE 1 One of the following option functions is needed when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used: Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server Boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details. 2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients connectable to one CNC using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions. Refer to Note 2 in Usable CNCs (When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used) in Section 3.1 of Part I for details. 3 If multiple application software products or multiple personal computers access the CNC simultaneously, the communication load on the CNC can increase, resulting in decreased communication speed and degraded CNC screen display processing.
- 488 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.2.2
Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions

This subsection describes the setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
B.2.2.1
FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen

The Ethernet Parameter screen is used to set parameters that are needed to run the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions.
Display
Procedure
SYSTEM
Press the Continuation menu key at the bottom right of the soft key menu. When you press soft key [ETHPRM], the "Ethernet Parameter" screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.
The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.
NOTE The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
- 489 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
6 7
By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data. Switch the screen display with the page keys
PAGE PAGE
If data is already registered, the data is displayed.
- 490 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
Display items and setting items
Display items related to the embedded Ethernet functions

The items related to the embedded Ethernet functions are displayed.
Item MAC ADDRESS Description MAC address of the embedded Ethernet

Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Format: "192.168.1.1") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when the network incorporates a router. (Format: " 192.168.1.254 ")
FOCAS2/Ethernet setting items

Set the items related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet server.
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535. Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number for C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation. Refer to Item "UDP number for C4 service," in Section 3.2 of Part II for details. Set 50.
NOTE The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to the following default values before shipment: IP address : 192.168.1.1 Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 Router IP address : None TCP port No. : 8193 UDP port No. :0 Time interval :0
- 491 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.2.2.2
Configuring a small-scale network

HUB
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Personal computer No.1
CNC No.1
CNC No.2
CNC No.2 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 None 8193 8192 50
B.2.2.3
Configuring a large-scale network

- 492 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.2.3
Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions

This subsection describes the setting required when an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to be set as parameters for the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function).
B.2.3.1
Setting the FTP file transfer function parameters

The Ethernet Parameter screen is used to set parameters that are needed to run the FTP file transfer functions.
Display
Procedure
SYSTEM
Press the Continuation menu key at the bottom right of the soft key menu. When you press soft key [ETHPRM], the "Ethernet Parameter" screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.
The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.
- 493 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
NOTE The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
6 7 By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data. Switch the screen display with the page keys
PAGE PAGE
If data is already registered, the data is displayed.
- 494 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
Display items related to the embedded Ethernet functions

The items related to the embedded Ethernet functions are displayed.
Item MAC ADDRESS Description MAC address of the embedded Ethernet
TCP/IP setting items for the embedded Ethernet functions

Set the TCP/IP items for the embedded Ethernet functions.
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Format: "192.168.1.1") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when the network incorporates a router. (Format: " 192.168.1.254 ")
Setting items for connected host 1, host 2, and host 3

Set the items related to the host computer on which the FTP server runs.
Item PORT NUMBER Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the FTP file transfer functions. Usually, set 21 because the FTP service is used. Specifies the IP address of the host computer. (Format: "192.168.0.101") Specifies the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specifies the password for the above user name. The password must always be specified. (A password of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specifies the directory on the host computer to which the Data Server functions are to log in. (A name of up to 127 characters can be specified.)
IP ADDRESS USERNAME
PASSWORD
LOGIN DIR
NOTE The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to the following default values before shipment: IP address : 192.168.1.1 Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 Router IP address : None TCP port No. : 8193 UDP port No. :0 Time interval :0
- 495 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.2.3.2

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to run the FTP file transfer functions on a small-scale network. These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs by the FTP communication. The FTP server runs on personal computer No.1. The FTP file transfer functions runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.
HUB
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Personal computer No.1
CNC No.1
CNC No.2
CNC No.1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address Connection Port No. host 1 IP address User name Password Login DIR Parameter No. 20 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.0.101 dtsvr dtsvr None 5 Personal computer No.1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway User name Password Login DIR 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr Default
CNC No.2 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.0.101 dtsvr dtsvr None 5
Set these items on the "Parameter" screen.
Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP). Set these items with User Manager of PC (Windows 2000/XP). Set this item with Internet Service Manager of PC (Windows 2000/XP). This is applicable to Peer Web Services.
B.2.3.3

- 496 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.3
SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B AND Series 0i-B/C
This section describes the setting required to operate the Data Server function for Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B and Series 0i-B/C (including the FTP server function). When using the FTP server function of the Data Server, see Subsections B.3.1 and B.3.2. When an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to be set as parameters for the Data Server (to use the Data Server function), see Subsections B.3.1 and B.3.3.
B.3.1
Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for the First Time
1 CAUTION When the Data Server board or FAST Data Server is used for the first time, format the hard disk or ATA card, set the appropriate parameters, and turn the power off then on again. If the Data Server functions are used without performing these operations, normal operation cannot be guaranteed. When Ethernet FTP communication is performed for the first time, consult with your company's network administrator to determine the IP addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communications test. If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communications may be interfered with or the entire network might be adversely affected. Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set, communication errors are caused intermittently. This may result in a CNC's system error. Never turn off the power to the CNC while the hard disk or ATA card (hereinafter simply referred to as the hard disk) is being accessed (while a Data Server function service is being executed). Otherwise, the data on the hard disk may be destroyed. Never turn off the power to the CNC while using its functions, especially the FTP server functions. To guard against hard disk failure, back up the files on the hard disk.
NOTE 1 One of the following option functions is needed when the Data Server functions are used: For details, see the item of "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" of Part I, "OVERVIEW". 2 The Data Server function imposes an upper limit on the number of FTP clients connectable to one CNC. For details, see the note on Usable CNCs (When the Data Server is used)" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" of Part I, "OVERVIEW".
- 497 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.3.2
Setting the FTP Server

This subsection describes the setting required to use the FTP server function of the Data Server.
B.3.2.1
Ethernet parameter screen

The Ethernet Parameter screen is used to set parameters that are needed to run the Data Server functions.
Display
Procedure
SYSTEM
5 6
Press the Continuation menu key at the bottom right of the soft key menu. When you press soft key [ETHPRM], the "Ethernet Parameter" screen appears. For the Series 16i/18i/21i-B, to display the "Ethernet Parameter" screen, press soft key [ETHPRM] and then soft key [BOARD]. If data is already registered, the parameter settings are displayed. Enter or update the data using the MDI or soft keys. Select the desired page using the
PAGE PAGE
page keys.
- 498 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
- 499 -
B.NC SETTING Display items and setting items
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04

Item MAC ADDRESS NUMBER OF SCREENS MAXIMUM PATH HDD EXISTENCE Description MAC address of the Data Server board or FAST Data Server Total number of Ethernet error message screens used by the Ethernet functions Number of control systems in the CNC Data Server board Indicates whether a hard disk or ATA flash card is mounted. 1: Hard disk 2: ATA flash card FAST Data Server Indicates whether an ATA flash card is mounted. 0: Not mounted. 2: Mounted.

Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the CNC. (Format: "192.168.0.1") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when there is a router on the network. (Format: "192.168.0.99")
Setting items for the FTP server

Set the items related to the FTP server.
Item USERNAME Description Specifies the user name on the data server that is to be used when the host computer logs in using FTP. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specifies a password for the above user name. A password must always be specified. (A password of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specifies the directory on the data server to which the host computer is to log in. (A name of up to 127 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD
LOGIN DIR
- 500 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
NOTE 1 When the "TCP/IP setting items for the CNC" have been changed, the power must be turned off then on again. 2 Note that the system differentiates between upperand lower-case characters in "USERNAME" and "PASSWORD," described under "Setting items for the FTP server." 3 The default for "LOGIN DIR," described under "Setting items for the FTP server," is the \NCDATA directory. Only a directory under the \NCDATA directory can be specified for "LOGIN DIR."
- 501 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.3.2.2

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to run the Data Server functions on a small-scale network. These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs by the Data Server. The FTP client runs on personal computer No.1. The FTP server runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.
HUB
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Personal computer No.1 CNC No.2
CNC No.1
CNC No.1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address FTP server User name Password Login DIR 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr None
CNC No.2 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr None
Personal computer No.1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway CNC No.1 NC IP address NC port number NC user name NC password NC Login DIR CNC No.2 NC IP address NC port number NC user name NC password NC Login DIR 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None 192.168.0.1 21 dtsvr dtsvr None 192.168.0.2 21 dtsvr dtsvr None Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on the personal computer (Windows OS).
B.3.2.3

- 502 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.3.3
Setting the Connection Host

This subsection describes the method of setting an FTP server in the PC and setting the setting information as parameters for the Data Server (to use the Data Server function).
B.3.3.1
Ethernet parameter screen

The Ethernet Parameter screen is used to set parameters that are needed to run the Data Server functions.
Display
Procedure
SYSTEM
5 6
Press the Continuation menu key at the bottom right of the soft key menu. When you press soft key [ETHPRM], the "Ethernet Parameter" screen appears. For the Series 16i/18i/21i-B, to display the "Ethernet Parameter" screen, press soft key [ETHPRM] and then soft key [BOARD]. If data is already registered, the parameter settings are displayed. Enter or update the data using the MDI or soft keys. Select the desired page using the
PAGE PAGE
page keys.
- 503 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
- 504 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING

Item MAC ADDRESS NUMBER OF SCREENS MAXIMUM PATH HDD EXISTENCE Description MAC address of the Data Server board or FAST Data Server Total number of Ethernet error message screens used by the Ethernet functions Number of control systems in the CNC Data Server board Indicates whether a hard disk or ATA flash card is mounted. 1: Hard disk 2: ATA flash card FAST Data Server Indicates whether an ATA flash card is mounted. 0: Not mounted. 2: Mounted.

Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the CNC. (Format: "192.168.0.1") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when there is a router on the network. (Format: "192.168.0.99")
Setting items for connected host 1, host 2, and host 3

Set the items related to the host computer on which the FTP server runs.
Item PORT NUMBER Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the data server functions. Usually, set 21 because the FTP service is used. Specifies the IP address of the host computer. (Format: "192.168.0.101") Specifies the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specifies the password for the above user name. The password must always be specified. (A password of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specifies the directory on the host computer to which the data server functions are to log in. (A name of up to 127 characters can be specified.)
IP ADDRESS USERNAME
PASSWORD
LOGIN DIR
NOTE When the "TCP/IP setting items for the CNC" have been changed, the power must be turned off then on again.
- 505 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.3.3.2

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to run the Data Server functions on a small-scale network. These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs by the Data Server. The FTP server runs on personal computer No.1. The FTP client runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.
HUB
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Personal computer No.1 CNC No.2
CNC No.1
CNC No.1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address Connection IP address host 1 Port number User name Password Login DIR Parameter No.20 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.0.101 dtsvr dtsvr None 5 Personal computer No.1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway User name Password Login DIR 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr Default
CNC No.2 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.0.101 dtsvr dtsvr None 5
Set these items on the "Parameter" screen.
Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP). Set these items with User Manager of PC (Windows 2000/XP). Set this item with Internet Service Manager of PC (Windows 2000/XP).
B.3.3.3

- 506 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.4
SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A

This section describes the items required to be set to operate the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions available on the option board for Series 30i/31i/32i-A. Refer to Section B.5, "SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A," in Appendix for the embedded Ethernet function.
B.4.1
CAUTION When the FAST Ethernet is used for the first time, consult with your companys network administrator to determine the IP addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communications test. If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communications may be interfered with or the entire network might be adversely affected. Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set, communication errors are caused intermittently. This may result in a CNC's system error. NOTE 1 One of the following option functions is needed when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used: Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details. 2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients connectable to one CNC using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions. Refer to Note 2 in Item Usable CNCs (When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used) in Section 3.1 of Part I for details.
- 507 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.4.2
FOCAS2/Ethernet Screen
This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 Place the CNC in MDI mode. Press function key
SYSTEM
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 508 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
COMMON screen
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen.
COMMON screen
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of the FAST Ethernet/ FAST Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
SUBNET MASK
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS Description FAST Ethernet/ FAST Data Server MAC address
NOTE The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see "FANUC FAST Ethernet / FAST Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64014EN).
- 509 -
B.NC SETTING FOCAS2 screen
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535. Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number for C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation. Refer to Item "UDP number for C4 service," in Section 3.2 of Part II for details. Set 50.
TIME INTERVAL
NOTE 1 The unit of TIME INTERVAL is 10 ms. The allowable input range is 10 to 65535. Values less than 100 ms cannot be set. 2 If a smaller value is set in TIME INTERVAL, the communication load can increase to adversely affect the performance of the network. Example) If 100 is set, broadcast data is transmitted at intervals of 1 second (1000 ms) (= 100 10).
- 510 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.4.3
Configuring a Small-scale Network

HUB 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T Personal computer No.1
CNC No.1
CNC No.2
CNC No.2 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 None 8193 8192 50 The common setting screen is used for setting. The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for setting.
B.4.4
Configuring a Large-scale Network

- 511 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.5
SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A

This section describes the items required to be set to operate the embedded Ethernet function for Series 30i/31i/32i-A. When using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function, see Subsections B.5.1 and B.5.2. When setting an FTP server on a PC and setting the setting information as parameters for the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function), see Subsections B.5.1 and B.5.3. Refer to Section B.4, "Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet of the Option Board for Series 30i/31i/32i-A," for the option board.
B.5.1
CAUTION When the embedded Ethernet function is used for the first time, consult with your companys network administrator to determine the IP addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communications test. If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communications may be interfered with or the entire network might be adversely affected. NOTE 1 One of the following option functions is needed when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used: Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server Boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details. 2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients connectable to one CNC using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions. Refer to Note 2 in Usable CNCs (When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used) in Section 3.1 of Part I for details. 3 If multiple application software products or multiple personal computers access the CNC simultaneously, the communication load on the CNC can increase, resulting in decreased communication speed and degraded CNC screen display processing.
- 512 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.5.2
Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions

This subsection describes the setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
B.5.2.1
FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions on the Ethernet setting screen.
Procedure
SYSTEM
Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE 1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are made when a connection to the Servo Guide and FANUC LADDER-III is established.
- 513 -
B.NC SETTING COMMON screen
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
COMMON screen
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when the network incorporates a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS AVAILABLE DEVICE Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet. Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
- 514 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT (UDP) NUMBER Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535. Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number for C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation. Refer to Item "UDP number for C4 service," in Section 3.2 of Part II for details. Set 50.
TIME INTERVAL
NOTE 1 The unit of TIME INTERVAL is 10 ms. The allowable input range is 10 to 65535. Values less than 100 ms cannot be set. 2 If a smaller value is set in TIME INTERVAL, the communication load can increase to adversely affect the performance of the network. Example) If 100 is set, broadcast data is transmitted at intervals of 1 second (1000 ms) (= 100 10).
- 515 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet card

The PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following default values, for ease of connection with a servo guide or FANUC LADDER-III. IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1 SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0 ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193 PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 0 TIME INTERVAL :0 If a specified IP address is changed to a blank (space), the specified setting is reset to the default value. The built-in Ethernet port does not have a default value.
- 516 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.5.2.2

CNC No.1
CNC No.2
CNC No.2 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 None 8193 8192 50 The common setting screen is used for setting. The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for setting.
B.5.2.3

- 517 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.5.3
Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions

This subsection describes the setting required when an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to be set as parameters for the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function).
B.5.3.1
Parameter setting screen for the FTP file transfer function

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the FTP file transfer functions.
Procedure
SYSTEM
Soft keys [EMBED] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port is displayed. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE 1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 2 If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set up. However, the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is not necessary usually.
- 518 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
COMMON screen
COMMON screen
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when the network incorporates a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS AVAILABLE DEVICE Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet. Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
- 519 -
B.NC SETTING FTP transfer screen
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Press soft key [FTP TRANS] to display the FTP transfer screen. By using page keys
PAGE PAGE
, the three host computers at connection
destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.
FTP transfer screen (1st page)
FTP transfer screen (2nd page)
Setting item
Item HOST NAME PORT NUMBER Description Specify the IP address of the host computer. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200") Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file transfer function. An FTP session is used, so that "21" is to be specified usually. USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host computer with FTP. (Up to 31 characters can be specified.) PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above. (Up to 31 characters can be specified.) Be sure to set a password. LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the host computer becomes the log-in folder.
- 520 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
Changing the host computer to be connected for the FTP file transfer function
Select a destination. 1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT] to be displayed. Pressing this soft key causes soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.
Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or [CONECT 3]. Destination 1, 2, or 3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the target computer to be connected. When destination 1 is selected
- 521 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.5.3.2

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to run the FTP file transfer functions on a small-scale network. These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs by the FTP file transfer functions. On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server operates. On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file transfer function.
CNC No.1
CNC No.2
CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address Connection Port number host 1 IP address User name Password Login DIR NC parameter No. 20
CNC 2 The COMMON screen is used for setting.
192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 None None 21 21 192.168.0.101 192.168.0.101 Dtsvr dtsvr Dtsvr dtsvr None None 5 5 PC 1
The FTP transfer screen is used for setting.
The parameter screen is used for setting.
IP address Subnet mask Default gateway User name Password Login DIR
192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr Default
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP) is used for setting. "User acount of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP) is used for setting. "Internet service manager" of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP) is used for setting.
B.5.3.3

- 522 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.6
SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A

This section describes the setting required to operate the Data Server function for Series 30i/31i/32i-A (including the FTP server function). When using the FTP server function of the Data Server, see Subsections B.6.1 and B.6.2. When an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to be set as parameters for the Data Server (to use the Data Server function), see Subsections B.6.1 and B.6.3.
B.6.1
Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for the First Time
1 CAUTION When the FAST Data Server is used for the first time, format the ATA Flash card, set the appropriate parameters, and turn the power off then on again. If the Data Server functions are used without performing these operations, normal operation cannot be guaranteed. When Ethernet FTP communication is performed for the first time, consult with your company's network administrator to determine the IP addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communications test. If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communications may be interfered with or the entire network might be adversely affected. Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set, communication errors are caused intermittently. This may result in a CNC's system error. Never turn off the power to the CNC while the ATA Flash card is being accessed (while a Data Server function service is being executed). Otherwise, the data on the ATA Flash card may be destroyed. Never turn off the power to the CNC while using its functions, especially the FTP server functions. To guard against ATA Flash card failure, back up the files on the ATA Flash card.
NOTE 1 One of the following option functions is needed when the Data Server functions are used: For details, see the item of "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" of Part I, "OVERVIEW". 2 The Data Server function imposes an upper limit on the number of FTP clients connectable to one CNC. For details, see the note on Usable CNCs (When the Data Server is used)" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" of Part I, "OVERVIEW".
- 523 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.6.2
Setting the FTP Server

This subsection describes the setting required to use the FTP server functions of the Data Server.
B.6.2.1
Data Server setting screen

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the FTP server functions.
Procedure
SYSTEM
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 524 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
COMMON screen
COMMON screen
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the FAST Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when the network incorporates a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS Description FAST Data Server MAC address
- 525 -
B.NC SETTING Data Server screen (FTP Server)
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen. By using page keys
PAGE PAGE
, the FTP server setting screen is
displayed after the connection destination 1, 2, or 3 screen.
Data Server screen (FTP Server)
Setting item
Item USERNAME Description Specify a user name to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specify the password for the above user name. The password must always be specified. Specify a work folder to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder (home directory) is used as a login folder.
PASSWORD LOGIN FOLDER
- 526 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.6.2.2

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to run the Data Server functions on a small-scale network. These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs by the Data Server. The FTP client runs on personal computer No.1. The FTP server runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.
CNC No.1
CNC No.2
CNC No.1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address FTP server User name Password Login DIR 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr None
CNC No.2 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr None Set these items on the COMMON screen. Set these items on the Data Server screen.
Personal computer No.1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway CNC No.1 NC IP address NC port number NC user name NC password NC Login DIR CNC No.2 NC IP address NC port number NC user name NC password NC Login DIR 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None 192.168.0.1 21 dtsvr dtsvr None 192.168.0.2 21 dtsvr dtsvr None Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on the personal computer (Windows OS).
B.6.2.3

- 527 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.6.3
Setting the Connection Host

This subsection describes the method of setting an FTP server in the PC and setting the setting information as parameters for the Data Server (to use the Data Server function).
B.6.3.1
Parameter setting screen for Data Server functions

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the Data Server functions.
Procedure
SYSTEM
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 528 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
COMMON screen
COMMON screen
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specifies the IP address of the FAST Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specifies the mask address of the network IP address. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specifies the router IP address. Specify this address when the network incorporates a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS Description FAST Data Server MAC address
- 529 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Data Server screens (CONNECT 1, CONNECT 2, CONNECT 3)

Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen. By using page keys
PAGE PAGE
, the three host computers at connection
destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.
Data Server screens (for connection destination 1)
Setting item
Item HOST NAME PORT NUMBER USER NAME Description Specify the IP address of the host computer. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200") Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used. Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specify the password for the above user name. The password must always be specified. Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.
PASSWORD LOGIN FOLDER
- 530 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
Changing the host computer to be connected for the Data Server function
Select a destination. 1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT] to be displayed. Pressing this soft key causes soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.
Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or [CONECT 3]. Destination 1, 2, or 3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the target computer to be connected. When destination 1 is selected
- 531 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.6.3.2

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to run the Data Server functions on a small-scale network. These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs by the Data Server. The FTP server runs on personal computer No.1. The FTP client runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.
CNC No.1
CNC No.2
CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address Connection Port number host 1 IP address User name Password Login DIR NC parameter No. 20
CNC 2 The COMMON screen is used for setting.
192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 None None 21 21 192.168.0.101 192.168.0.101 Dtsvr dtsvr Dtsvr dtsvr None None 5 5 PC 1
The Data Server screen is used for setting.
The parameter screen is used for setting.
IP address Subnet mask Default gateway User name Password Login DIR
192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None dtsvr dtsvr Default
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP) is used for setting. "User acount of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP) is used for setting. "Internet service manager" of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP) is used for setting.
B.6.3.3

- 532 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
B.NC SETTING
B.7
SETTING UP DNC2
Sample NC parameter settings when DNC2 is used as the communication protocol

Item (standard setting value) Output data code (ISO) I/O device No. Stop bit (2) Data code (ASCII) Parity bit (EVEN) CD signal check (disabled) Interface (RS-232-C) BCC check (enabled) ER signal check (enabled) Negative acknowledgement error code (added) Baud rate (9600) No-response timeout (5) EOT timeout (5) No-response retry (5) NAK retry (3) CS-off reception character count (256) Datagram length (256) Map parameter screen (displayed) PMC data (address specification type) Series 16/18 0000.1=1 Series 15 0000.4=0 0020=4 0021=4 0022=4 0023=4 5082=2 0000.2=1 5000.1=0 5000.4=1 5000.0=0 5056.0=0 5056.2=0 5056.3=1 5083=11 5050=5 5051=5 5052=5 5053=3 5054=256 5055=256 5056.4=0 (Note) Series 0-MC ISO=1 Series0-TC ISO=1
0020=10
I/O=10
I/O=10
0131.0=1 0131.3=1 0134.1=1 0134.4=1 0135.3=0 0140.0=0 0140.2=0 0140.3=1 0133=11 0143=5 0144=5 0145=5 0146=3 0148=255 0149=256 -
0051.0=1 0051.3=1 0051.1=1 0051.4=1 0055.3=0 0396.0=0 0396.2=0 0396.3=1 0251=11 0365=5 0366=5 0368=5 0369=3 0370=256 0490=256 389.0=1 -
0051.0=1 0051.3=1 0051.1=1 0051.4=1 0055.3=0 0396.0=0 0396.2=0 0396.3=1 0251=11 0320=5 0321=5 0323=5 0324=3 0325=256 0490=256 389.0=1 -
NOTE The setting indicated above is needed if Series 15B uses PMC-NA (excluding PMC-NA2).
- 533 -
B.NC SETTING
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
B.8
SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER
Sample NC parameter settings when reader/puncher is used as the communication protocol

Item (standard setting value) I/O device No. (1) Stop bit (2) Reception data code (ISO) Device No. Device specifications (Floppy cassette) Baud rate (9600) TV check (enabled) Output data code (ISO) Comment portion TV check EOB punch (LF) Feed punch (disabled) Protection of O8000 to O8999 (enabled) Protection of O9000 to O9999 (enabled) Program registration (all programs) Program registration (addition) Same registration (alarm) M02/M30/M99 (not ending registration) Series 16/18 0020=0 0101.0=1 0101.3=0 Series 10/11/12/15 0020=1 0021=1 5111=2 0000.2=0 5001=1 5110=8 (or 7) 5112=11 0000.0=1 0000.4=0 0000.1=0 (enabled) 0000.3=1 Series 0 I/O=0 0002.0=1 ISO=1 0002.2=0 0038.7=0 0038.6=1 0552=11 TV=1 ISO=1 0018.6=0 (disabled) 0070.7=1 0002.7=1 0011.0=1 2201.0=1 2200.2=1 2200.0=0 2200.1=0 2200.3=1 0389.2=1 0010.4=1 0045.1=0 0045.0=0 0015.6=0 0019.6=1
0102=3 0103=11 0000.0=1 0000.1=1 0100.1=0 (disabled) 0100.3=1 0101.7=1 3202.0=1 3202.4=1 3201.1=0 3201.0=0 3201.2=0 3201.6=1
- 534 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
C.EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS
EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS
This chapter shows some examples of NC operations. When operating an actual NC, refer to the manual of the corresponding NC.
- 535 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
C.1
DNC2
Examples of operations of FANUC Series 16/18

Downloading an NC program (NC program number)
The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC program number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press soft key [+]. Press soft key [READ]. Enter the NC program number "O????". Press soft key [EXEC].
Uploading an NC program (NC program number)

When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press soft key [+]. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Enter the NC program number "O????". This NC program number is used as a key for simultaneous storage. Press soft key [EXEC].
- 536 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
Performing DNC operation of an NC program (NC program number)

When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the NC program number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 Bring the NC into the MDI mode. Press function key <SYSTEM>. Press soft key [+] twice. Press soft key [C-OPER]. A screen appears as shown below.
[COMMUNICATION OPERATION] [DNC FILE SELECTION] -
> MDI **** **** **** ****
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press soft key [STRING]. Enter O????.PRG, where O???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be transferred. Press soft key [INPUT]. Press soft key [STRING]. Bring the NC into the MEM mode. Turn on the DNCI signal from PMC to bring the NC into the RMT mode. When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic operation starts.
- 537 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Examples of operations of FANUC Series 15

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC program number. 1 2 3 4 5 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PROGRAM] to select the program (memory) screen. Press soft key [ ] twice. Press soft key [READ]. Enter ,O????, where O???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be transferred. To enter the comma (,), press the # key while holding down the Shift key. Press soft key [EXEC].

When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PROGRAM] to select the program (memory) screen. Press soft key [ ] twice. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Enter ",O????", where O???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be uploaded. To enter the comma (,), press the # key while holding down the Shift key. This NC program number is used as a key for simultaneous storage. Press soft key [EXEC].
- 538 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC program number. 1 2 3 4 Bring the NC into the TAPE mode. Press soft key [SETING]. Press soft key [CHAPTER]. Press soft key [COMMU. OPERAT]. A screen appears as shown below.
COMMUNICATIONOPERATION DNC FILE SELECTION O0001 N0001
INPUT
TAPE *** STOP **** *** ***
5 6 7
Enter O????.PRG, where O???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be transferred. Press soft key [INPUT]. When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic operation starts.
- 539 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Examples of operations of FANUC Series 0

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC program number. 1 2 3 4 5 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [I/O]. Enter O????, where O???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be transferred. Press soft key [READ].

When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [I/O]. Enter ",O????", where O???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be specified. This NC program number is used as a key for simultaneous storage. Press soft key [PUNCH].
- 540 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC program number. 1 2 3 Bring the NC into the MDI mode. Press function key <DGNOS/PARAM>. Press soft key [MAP]. A screen appears as shown below.
[MAP PARAMETER] (SETTING) DNC FILE SELECTION O0001 N0001
NUM. ( )( )( )(
MDI )( )
4 5 6 7 8 9
Press soft key [STRING]. Enter O????.PRG, where O???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be specified. Press input key <INPUT>. Bring the NC into the AUTO mode. Turn on the DNCI signal from the PMC. When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic operation starts.
If bit 0 of NC parameter 389 is set, the [MAP PARAMETER] screen must be enabled and the [SERVO SETTING] screen must be disabled when the DNC operation is carried out.
- 541 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
C.2
READER/PUNCHER
Examples of operations of FANUC Series 16/18

Downloading an NC program (file number)
The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the file number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [READ]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [F SET]. Press soft key [EXEC].
Uploading an NC program (file name)

When the NC program is saved, the file name is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Enter the NC program number "????". This NC program number becomes the file name of the uploaded program. Press soft key [O SET]. Press soft key [EXEC].

When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Enter the NC program number "????". Press soft key [O SET]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [F SET]. Press soft key [EXEC].
The NC program cannot be uploaded to the PC by using the file number as a key. So, ignoring the file number, the PC finds the NC program number placed at the start of the transferred program and uses it as a key.
- 542 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
Displaying the directory

1 2 3 4 5 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [FLOPPY]. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press the <PAGE > or <PAGE > key to switch between pages.
Deleting an NC program
1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [DELETE]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [F SET]. Press soft key [EXEC].
Performing DNC operation of an NC program (file number)

When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the file number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bring the NC into the MEM mode. Press function key <PROG>. Press soft key [FL. SDL]. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press soft key [SELECT]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [F SET]. Press soft key [EXEC]. When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic operation starts.
- 543 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Examples of operations of FANUC Series 10/11/12/15

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the file number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PRGRM]. Press soft key [READ]. Press soft key [FILE#]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [ALL].
Downloading an NC program (file name)

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the file name. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PRGRM]. Press soft key [READ]. Press soft key [FILE NAME]. Enter the file name "ABC". Press soft key [ALL].

When the NC program is saved, the file name is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PRGRM]. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Press soft key [PRGRM#]. Enter the NC program number "????". This NC program number becomes the file name of the uploaded program. Press soft key [EXEC].
- 544 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX

When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PRGRM]. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Press soft key [FILE#]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [THIS PROGRAM].

1 2 3 4 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PRGRM]. Press soft key [DRCTRY FLOPPY]. Press the <PAGE> or <PAGE> key to switch between pages.
- 545 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Examples of operations of FANUC Series 0-C

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the file number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [READ]. Enter the file number "??". Press function key <INPUT>. Press soft key [EXEC].

When the NC program is saved, the file name is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Enter the NC program number "????". This NC program number becomes the file name of the uploaded program. Press function key <INPUT>. Press soft key [EXEC].

When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [PUNCH]. Enter the NC program number "????". Press function key <INPUT>. Enter the file number "??". Press function key <INPUT>. Press soft key [EXEC].
- 546 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX

1 2 3 4 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [FLOPPY]. Press the <PAGE> or <PAGE> key to switch between pages.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [DELETE]. Enter the file number "??". Press function key <INPUT>. Press soft key [EXEC].

When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the file number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bring the NC into the AUTO mode. Enter the DNCI signal from the PMC to set the RMT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Press soft key [FL.SDL]. Press soft key [SELECT]. Enter the file number "??". Press function key <INPUT>. Press soft key [EXEC]. When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic operation starts.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press soft key [PRGRM]. Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [PRGRM#]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [EXEC].
- 547 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04

When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the file number is used as a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bring the NC into the TAPE mode. Press soft key [PRGRM]. Press soft key [SEARCH]. Press soft key [FILE#]. Enter the file number "??". Press soft key [EXEC]. When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic operation starts.
- 548 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
Examples of operations of FANUC Series 0-A/0-B

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the file number. 1 2 3 4 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Enter N??, where N?? is the file number of the file number to be transferred. Press function key <INPUT> twice.

When the NC program is saved, the file name is used as a key. 1 2 3 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Enter ",O????", where ???? is the NC program number of the NC program to be specified. This NC program number becomes the file name of the uploaded program. Press function key <OUTPT>.
1 2 3 4 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Enter N??, where N?? is the file number of the file number to be specified. Press soft key [DELETE].

When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the file number is used a key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bring the NC into the AUTO mode. Enter the DNCI signal from the PMC to set the RMT mode. Press function key <PRGRM>. Enter N??, where N?? is the file number of the file number to be specified. Press function key <INPUT>. When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic operation starts.
- 549 -
D.ERROR CODES
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
ERROR CODES
- 550 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
D.ERROR CODES
D.1
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ERROR CODES

The following error codes may be issued in downloading or uploading with the NC program management function.
Errors in a program for NC program management (0x00010000 to 0x0001ffff)

0x00010000 An attempt was made to end a communication process, but machines turned out to be currently involved in communication. Terminate communication with all machines, and try to end the communication process again. An attempt was made to start communication with a machine, but the machine turned out to be already involved in communication. It is impossible to issue a communication start command to a machine that is already involved in communication. The machine of interest has not started communication. Check whether the machine has been directed to start communication.
0x00010001
0x00010003
DNC2 communication errors (0x00030000 to 0x0003ffff)

0x00030103 0x00030201 0x00030301 0x00030302 0x00030409 0x00030411 0x00030412 Setup data in the registry of the personal computer could not be read. Check whether the data has been set up correctly. A port open error occurred. Check whether a correct port is used and whether the port setting is correct. The NC sent a negative acknowledgment (reset, error, etc.) Check whether the NC has an instruction stopped by a reset or an error. The ER signal is not set. Check whether the NC power is turned off. Check whether anything is wrong with the RS-232-C cable. The NC did not respond for a prescribed period during communication. Check whether the NC has hung up. The NC sent a negative acknowledgment (reset, error, etc.) Check whether the NC has an instruction stopped by a reset or an error. The ER signal went down. Check whether the NC power is turned off. Check whether anything is wrong with the RS-232-C cable. A retry-over occurred. If communication has not yet been established at all, check parameters related to DNC2 between i CELL and the NC. If this error has occurred suddenly, check whether the NC is normally operating. Check whether the socket interface can be used on Windows OS. The i CELL may not be installed correctly. Check whether the socket interface can be used on Windows OS. Check whether the communication process is active. A DNC2 command error occurred. The error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code. Modify parameter settings so that the error code is returned from the NC. The NC sent a T_NP negative acknowledgment. An error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code. Modify parameter settings so that the error code is returned from the NC. T_NP above and T_BD, M_NR, M_NP, and M_IL below represent types of negative acknowledgments from the NC in DNC2 communication. For details, see Part II, "PROTOCOLS" in "FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E)." The NC sent a T_BD negative acknowledgment. An error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code. Modify parameter settings so that the error code is returned from the NC.
0x00030413
0x00030501 0x00030502 0x00030503 0x00030601
0x00030602
0x00030603
- 551 -
D.ERROR CODES
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
0x00030604
0x00030605
0x00030606 0x00030607 0x00030609 0x00030f02 0x00030f03 0x00030f04 0x00030f05
0x00030f06
0x00030f09 0x00030f0c 0x00030f0d
The NC sent an M_NR negative acknowledgment. An error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code. Modify parameter settings so that the error code is returned from the NC. The NC sent an N_NP negative acknowledgment. An error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code. Modify parameter settings so that the error code is returned from the NC. The NC sent an N_IL negative acknowledgment. An error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code. Modify parameter settings so that the error code is returned from the NC. No O number is specified. Alternatively, an illegal value is specified. Check whether a correct O number is specified. Another instruction is being executed. Make a retry after the execution ends. The specified tool post path number is not 0. With DNC2, specify 0 as the tool post path number. An unsupported request code was received. Check the argument to the function. An unsupported information read (ReadVariable) instruction was received. Check the argument to the function. An unsupported information write (WriteVariable) instruction was received. Check the argument to the function. The number of information items specified for an information read instruction or information write instruction is 0. Specify a value between 1 and the maximum permissible value as the number of information items. An illegal combination of tool offset values was specified. Specify tool offset values appropriate for the type of the NC used. The specified address cannot be converted. Check whether the PMC number and the address character in the PMC area are correct. The number of read data items is smaller than the number of data items specified for the information read (ReadVariable) instruction. Check whether the specified range is correct.
Reader/puncher communication errors (0x00040000 to 0x0004ffff)

0x0004100a A file deletion from the NC was specified and ended in failure. Check whether the file is present and whether a correct file attribute was specified for the deletion. A transmission/reception request command from the NC side contains an illegal character. The characters that can be used are lower-case and upper-case alphabetic characters, numerals, blank, period (.), comma (,), and hyphen (-). The characters may be garbled because of the communication settings such as transfer rate and stop bit. Check the communication settings. If a non-FANUC NC is used, check that the command sent from the NC is the same as the command that would be sent from a FANUC NC. A transmission/reception request command received from the NC has 32 characters or more. If a non-FANUC NC is used, check that the command sent from the NC is the same as the command that would be sent from a FANUC NC. The data received from the NC includes the DC4 code, but the ER code has not yet been received. A reset may have been made on the NC side. Ignore this error if it occurs when a reset is made by the NC. A TV check error occurred. Check the data to be uploaded. The file to be downloaded could not be found. Check that the file to be downloaded is present.
0x0004100f
0x00041010
0x00041018 0x0004101c 0x00041021
- 552 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
D.ERROR CODES
0x00041024
0x00041025
0x00041026
0x00041028
0x0004102c
Automatic ISO/EIA discrimination could not be executed for the NC program uploaded to the computer. The automatic ISO/EIA discrimination is made on the basis of the LF character included in a hundred characters read from the beginning of the file. However, no LF character was sent (0x0a: ISO; 0x80: EIA). Check the contents of the data to be uploaded. The data being uploaded does not contain any O number. A data upload with a file number specified requires an O number in the data. Check the data to be uploaded. Upload the data, specifying a file name instead of a file number. The data being uploaded contains a character O or a colon (:), which is not followed by any number. Check the data to be uploaded. In the automatic ISO/EIA discrimination of an NC program uploaded to the computer, an illegal character was found. Check the data to be uploaded. The upload or download data contains an illegal character. For the upload data, the computer carries out an automatic ISO/EIA discrimination. The characters may have been garbled because of a wrong communication setting. For the download data, check whether the data in the computer is written in ASCII.
Ethernet communication errors (0x00060000 to 0x0006ffff)

0x00060102 0x00060106 0x00060107 0x0006010c A specified machine number is invalid. Check the machine number registered in the Machine Configuration dialog box. An Ethernet communication process was stopped because a request to stop it was received. The NC with a specified machine number is already performing another process. Wait for a while, and then rerun. An NC program number specified in a download or upload request is out of the valid range. Check whether the NC program number is in a range between 1 and 9999 (1 to 99999999 when 8-digit NC program numbers are supported). It is impossible to connect to the NC over an Ethernet network. Check the connection of the Ethernet cable according to Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up Communication," in Part III, "Setting." Also check whether the IP address and TCP port number match those set up in the NC. It is impossible to connect to the C4 server. Check the connection of the Ethernet cable according to Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up Communication," in Part III, "Setting." Also check whether the IP address and UDP port number match those set up in the NC. You need to make the UDP port set up in the NC match the entry of the services file on the PC. Check the setting of FANUC_C4_SERVER according to Section 3.2, "Information to be Automatically Saved to the TCP/IP Service File," in Part II, "Installation." An existence signal from the NC was interrupted. It is likely that the NC power is off or an Ethernet cable has not been attached. So, processing is impossible. Check the NC power and Ethernet cables. An NC program requested for downloading or DNC operation has no O number. Check the contents of the NC program. The number of valid characters for file paths is exceeded. Check the number of characters. A folder could not be created on the PC side. Check the folder name. A file having the same name as a folder is present. The file cannot be overwritten by the folder. There is a file or folder that cannot be uploaded or downloaded. Check the results of uploading or downloading. A file could not be created on the PC side. Check the file name.
0x00060123
0x00060128
0x0006012a 0x0006012e 0x00060131 0x00060132 0x00060133 0x00060134 0x00060135
- 553 -
D.ERROR CODES
0x00060136 0x0006013a 0x00060200 0x00060201 0x00060202 0x00060203 0x00060204 0x00060205 0x00060206 0x00060207 0x00060208 0x000604f0 0x000604ff(1) 0x000604ff(2) 0x000604ff(3) 0x00060505(1) 0x00060505(2)
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
0x00060505(3) 0x00060505(4) 0x00060505(5) 0x00060505(6) 0x00060507 0x00060508 0x0006050b 0x0006050c
Write to the result file failed. A folder having the same name as a file is present. The folder cannot be overwritten by the file. There is a file or folder name format error. Check the file or folder name. A specified file or folder name cannot be found. Check whether the file or folder is present. Too many files are registered. The same file name is already present. Downloading by overwriting an existing program cannot be performed. Check bit 2 of NC parameter No. 3201. A specified file or folder is selected on the NC side. Cancel the selection, then retry. There is no program within a specified range. Check whether a program is registered. The NC program area is destroyed. Check the contents. NC data contains a syntax error. Check the contents. When the TV check is valid, a block containing an odd number of characters (including LF at the end of the block) is detected. The NC power is turned off during communication over the Ethernet, or the Ethernet cable is broken. Check the power supply and cable. A program cannot be deleted in the MDI mode. Use a mode other than the MDI mode. A selected program cannot be deleted in a mode other than the EDT mode. A program cannot be selected when another program is already running. The 140 BP/S alarm condition has occurred in the NC. It is impossible to perform downloading to a program selected in the NC. The 73 BP/S alarm condition has occurred in the NC. It is impossible to perform overwrite-downloading to an existing program. Check bit 2 of NC parameter 3201. The 72 BP/S alarm condition has occurred in the NC. An attempt was made to register more programs than the maximum number of programs that can be registered with the NC. Delete unnecessary programs. It is impossible to upload a program that is not in the NC. It is impossible to select a program that is not in the NC. It is impossible to delete a program that is not in the NC. An NC program cannot be deleted because the memory protection key is on. Turn off the memory protection key. If the 70 BP/S alarm condition occurs in the NC: The memory depleted in the NC when a program was being downloaded. Delete unnecessary programs, and try to download the program again. A specified series number is incorrect. Specify a correct series number. A program cannot be downloaded in the MDI mode. Put the NC in the EDT or MEM mode.
Other errors (0x10010000 to 0x1009ffff)

0x10010003 The PC memory was depleted during execution. Terminate unnecessary applications or increase the size of the virtual memory to allocate more memory.
- 554 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
D.ERROR CODES
0x10011102 0x10011103 0x10011009 0x10011106 0x10011107 0x10011108 0x10011130 0x10011132 0x10013001 0x10013101 0x1002010a 0x1002010b 0x1002010c 0x1002010e 0x10020111 0x10020112 0x10020113 0x10020115 0x10020118
0x10022011
0x10022022 0x10022023 0x10022035 0x10022052 0x10022053 0x10022054 0x10022055
The PC memory was depleted during initialization. Terminate unnecessary applications or increase the size of the virtual memory to allocate more memory. The specified machine number is invalid. It is impossible to communicate with a machine not set up in the Configuration dialog box. The specified file number is invalid. Check whether the specified file number is 1 or greater. The default directory holds fewer files than a specified file number. Check the file number. The specified file name is invalid. No default directory is specified in the Configuration dialog box. Specify one. An attempt to detect a file failed. Check whether the file is write-protected and whether another process has opened it by locking it. An attempt to get a port number from the services file failed. Check whether the "FANUC_PCFA_CDA" entry has been registered with the services file. An attempt to get a port number from the services file failed. Check whether the "FANUC_PCFA_CDA" entry has been registered with the services file. A download file is not found. Check whether there is a download file. A download file cannot be opened. Check the file attribute of the download file. A download file has no O number. Check whether the file contains an O number. An error occurred in reading a download file. An error occurred in closing a download file. An error occurred in moving a file to be written over for uploading. Check the file attribute of the file. An error occurred in creating an upload file. Check whether the directory setting is correct. An error occurred in writing an upload file. An error occurred in closing an upload file. If a directory on the network is used, check that the network is normal. Data whose highest bit (bit 8) is 1 was found. Check to see whether the NC program to be transferred is using invalid characters (such as kanji or half-size katakana). Refer to Section 4.2, "NC Program Format," in Part I, "Overview," for explanations about the unicode. The O number of a download file is 5 digits (9 digits or more when 8-digit numbers are supported) or more. Keep the O number within four digits (within 8 digits when 8-digit numbers are supported). The O number of a download file is 0. Do not use 0 as an O number. The buffer has overflowed in a flash stop state. Keep the data between the end code of the NC program and an EOF code or the next O number within several ten bytes. The subprogram calling depth exceeded the limit (8 levels, or 15 levels for Series 30i/31i/32i). Keep the subprogram calling depth within 8 levels (within 15 levels for Series 30i/31i/32i). An attempt to open a subprogram file failed. Check the access permission for subprograms. Check whether another process is using the subprogram. There is no file that corresponds to a subprogram call. Check whether the subprogram file exists. Another O number was found in a subprogram file. No multivolume configuration is supported for subprogram files.
- 555 -
D.ERROR CODES
0x10022056 0x10022058 0x10022059 0x10022062 0x10022091 0x10022092 0x10022093 0x100220a1 0x100220a2
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
0x100220a3 0x100220a4 0x100220a5 0x10022104 0x10022105 0x10022107 0x10022108 0x1002210a 0x1002210b 0x1002210d 0x1003000b 0x1003000c 0x10040102 0x10040106 0x1004010f 0x10040110 0x10040111
A subprogram file has no M99. The subprogram must have M99. A subprogram name does not match the O number in the file. The subprogram name must be the same as the O number in the file. M02 or M03 was found in a subprogram file. Subprogram files cannot use M02 or M03. M99 was found in the main program for an expanded subprogram. The main program for an expanded subprogram cannot contain M99. An attempt to open a transfer file failed. Check the access permission for transfer files. Check whether another process is using the transfer file. There is no transfer file. Check whether the transfer file exists. In a list simultaneous transfer, a transfer file has no O number. In a list simultaneous transfer, each file specified in the list must have an O number. (The O number of a list file is used only in a list expansion transfer.) A line in the NC program is longer than 320 characters. Keep any line that contains a subprogram call within 320 characters. A P code is 0. Specify an O number (1 to 9999, or 1 to 99999999 when 8-digit numbers are supported) that is valid for the P code. A P code is higher than 9999. Specify an O number (1 to 9999, or 1 to 99999999 when 8-digit numbers are supported) that is valid for the P code. There are duplicate P codes. Do not specify more than one P code in a line that contains a subprogram call. There are duplicate L codes. Do not specify more than one L code in a line that contains a subprogram call. An attempt was made to transfer an O number that was already transferred. Check whether two or more files specified in the list have the same O number. An MFC file exception occurred. An attempt to move an original file in overwrite-uploading. Check whether another process is using the original file. An attempt to create an upload file failed. Check whether there is a directory where the upload file is to be created. Check the access permission for the directory where the upload file is to be created. An attempt to write to an upload file failed. An attempt to close an upload file failed. An attempt was made to perform overwrite-uploading for a read-only file. Check whether the specified file name and other information are correct. An attempt to open setup data in the registry of the PC failed. Check whether the registry of Windows OS is disrupted. An attempt to read setup data from the registry of the PC failed. Check whether the registry of Windows OS is disrupted. The specified machine number is invalid. The computer name of the specified PC is invalid. A file name or its full path name has not been specified in downloading or uploading where they should be. An O number specified for uploading, downloading, selection, or deletion is invalid. Check whether the O number is in a range between 1 and 9999 (1 to 99999999 when 8-digit numbers are supported). An executable file for a communication process was not found.
- 556 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
D.ERROR CODES
0x1004011c(1)
0x1004011c(2) 0x1004011d 0x10040121 0x10040122 0x10040123 0x10040124 0x10040125 0x10040126 0x10040127 0x10040128 0x1004020f 0x10040210 0x10060001
0x10060002
0x10060003 0x10060004 0x10060005 0x10060006
0x1006000a 0x1006000b 0x1006000c 0x1006000d 0x1006000f 0x10060010 0x10060011 0x10060012
The TCP/IP protocol has not been set up. Check the Network Protocol tab on Control Panel to see if the TCP/IP protocol has been set up. Also check whether your PC can share the network with a Windows PC on which the TCP/IP protocol is already set up and communicate with it using the ping command. CDA Manager is not running. If CDA Manager cannot start normally, check whether "FANUC_PCFA_CDA" has been set up in the services file. Each data line in this file must end with a new-line code. No machine has been specified in the Configuration dialog box. The folder name is incorrect. Check the folder name. There are too many hierarchical levels. Check the number of hierarchical levels. Characters that cannot be handled by the NC are included. Check the character string. The O number is too long. Check whether the O number is within the range from 1 to 9999 (1 to 99999999 when 8-digit numbers are supported). The file name is too long. Check the number of characters. The folder name is too long. Check the number of characters. A folder or file name is not specified. The specified folder of file name (path format) is incorrect. Check the specified character string. Communication Manager is not running. "FANUC_PCFA_APP" has not been set up in the services file. An attempt was made to open a list file that is already open. Close the list file, and rerun. An attempt to open a list file failed. If you are trying to operate a machine-specific list file, check whether a transfer is completed and the machine number is valid. If you are trying to operate an existent original list file, check whether no other process is operating the same file and the specified file name is correct. If you are trying to create an original list file, check whether the specified file is correct. The specified list file was not found. Check whether the specified list file is valid. An attempt to close a list file failed. The specified list file is already closed. Application software attempted to execute a function (mathematical formula) for a transfer auxiliary function (instruction sequence). Check whether the function call is valid. The record flag of a specified record is incorrect. The flag indicates that the function (mathematical formula) you attempted to operate cannot be executed. Check the record flag. An attempt to lock the header field failed. An attempt to lock a specified record field failed. A function (mathematical formula) for original list files was executed for a machine-specific list file. A function (mathematical formula) for machine-specific files was executed for an original list file. An attempt to seek a specified record failed. An attempt to read from a list file failed. An attempt to read data of an expected size from a list file failed. Check the contents of the list file.
- 557 -
D.ERROR CODES
0x10060013 0x10060014 0x10060015 0x10060016 0x10060017
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
0x10060018
0x10060019 0x1006001a 0x1006001b 0x1006001c 0x1006001d 0x1009F001
0x1009F004
0x1009F005
An attempt to write to a list file failed. An attempt to write data of an intended size to a list file failed. Check the contents of the list file. The O number flag of a specified record is incorrect. Check the specified O number flag. An attempt to unlock the header field failed. An attempt to unlock a specified record field failed. An attempt to open the registry failed. Check whether the registry is set up correctly. In the registry, a directory (HELPER_MACHINE_LIST_DIR) where machine-specific list files are to be created has not been set up. Set up the registry correctly. An attempt to read a key from the registry failed. Check whether the registry is set up correctly. An attempt to read a value from the registry failed. Check whether the registry is set up correctly. The header flag for a machine-specific list file does not indicate "transfer in progress." Check whether the header flag indicates "transfer in progress." An attempt to modify a record that was already transferred failed. The list file does not contain a record having a specified record number. Check the number of records. The PC memory was depleted during execution. Terminate unnecessary applications or increase the size of the virtual memory to allocate more memory. A machine specified for Ethernet communication has not been connected to the network correctly. Check the connection of the Ethernet cable and the setting of the network. Check whether the "FANUC_C4_SERVER" value in the services file is the same as the "UDP port number" of "ETHPRM" in the NC. It is impossible to connect to FANUC C4 Server. By selecting [Control Panel] - [Service], check whether FANUC C4 Server has started correctly. Alternatively, check whether "127.0.0.1" has been set in [C4 Server Host Name] in the machine configuration screen.
Errors returned from NC to computer during communication (0x20020000 to 0x2002ffff)

0x2002ffba 0x2002ffb9 0x2002ffce 0x2002ffcd 0x2002ffcc 0x2002ffcb Command syntax error Command communication procedure error The program number is a negative number. Program number format error The specified axis is not present. Too many data items were requested. No data can be read. If this error occurs when a tool offset value is read, the offset number may be an illegal value. If this error occurs when a custom macro variable is read, the macro variable number may be an illegal value. If this error occurs when tool life management data is read, the tool group number may be an illegal value. The axis command is incorrect. A request is being executed. A request is being cancelled. An interrupt request was made. This error occurs when a reset is made. A timeout occurred.
0x2002ffca
0x2002ffc9 0x2002ffc6 0x2002ffc5 0x2002ff00 0x2002fdff
- 558 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
D.ERROR CODES
0x2002fdfe 0x2002fdfd 0x2002fdfc 0x2002fdfb 0x2002fdfa 0x2002fdf9 0x2002fc0c 0x2002fc0b 0x2002fc0a 0x2002fc09
0x2002fc08 0x2002fc07 0x2002fc06 0x2002fc05 0x2002fc04 0x2002fc03 0x2002fc02 0x2002fc01 0x2002fba8
0x2002fba7
0x2002fba6
0x2002fba5
0x2002fba4 0x2002fba3 0x2002fba2 0x2002fba1 0x2002fba0 0x2002fb9f
0x2002fb9e
The line is busy. There are remaining data. The file name is incorrect. An open request was refused. If the error occurs in downloading by FANUC Series 0, the NC may be in the alarm state. If the error occurs in uploading by FANUC Series 0, the NC may be in the alarm state. An edit request was refused. Busy state The selected file is not present. If this error occurs when an NC program is selected, the desired NC program may not be present. A warning occurred when a file was selected. A start request was refused. If this error occurs at a cycle start, the NC may be executing another program. The NC is not in the automatic operation mode. If this error occurs at a cycle start, the NC may not be in the automatic operation mode. If this error occurs when an NC program is selected, the NC may not be in a correct mode. A file selection request was refused. If this error occurs when an NC program is selected, the NC may be executing or editing another program. If this error occurs with FANUC Series 0, Series 16, or Series 18, the NC may be in the alarm state. A file deletion request was refused. The file is protected. A file deletion request was refused or caused a warning to be made. An editing request was refused. The directory cannot be found. A directory read request was refused. The directory file name is illegal. An error occurred in the window library on the NC side. The command is not executed. If this error occurs with FANUC Series 16 or Series 18 when an NC program is deleted, the specified NC program may be running. If this error occurs with FANUC Series 0 when an NC Program is deleted, the NC may be in the alarm state. The machine code is inappropriate. The major data classification is inappropriate. If this error occurs when an NC variable is read or written, the value of the variable address may be illegal. If this error occurs when a custom macro variable is written, for instance, the macro variable number may be illegal. The middle data classification is inappropriate. The minor data classification is inappropriate. If this error occurs when an NC variable is read or written, the value of the variable address may be illegal. If this error occurs when PMC data is written, for instance, the PMC number may be illegal. The data length is inappropriate. The data type is inappropriate. The data is inappropriate. A command error occurred. The option is not provided. If this error occurs when a custom macro variable is written, the option corresponding to the specified macro variable number may not be provided. If this error occurs when a tool offset value is written, the option corresponding to the specified offset number may not be provided.
- 559 -
D.ERROR CODES
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
0x2002fb9d 0x2002fb9c 0x2002fb9b 0x2002fb9a 0x2002fb99 0x2002fb98 0x2002fb97 0x2002fb96 0x2002fb95 0x2002fb94 0x2002fb93 0x2002fb92 0x2002fb46 0x2002fb45 0x2002f62d 0x2002f625 0x2002f61f 0x2002f61e
The file cannot be found. If this error occurs when an NC program is deleted, the specified NC program may not be present. The file is protected. The directory area cannot be found. The NC memory area is insufficient. Reading is inhibited. Writing is inhibited. If this error occurs when an NC program is deleted, the specified NC program may be protected. A write attempt ended in failure. A read attempt ended in failure. The device is not effective. The system is not ready. The status is not effective. If this error occurs with FANUC Series 0 or Series 15 when an NC program is deleted, the specified NC program may be busy. The data does not match. The window expansion option is not provided. Another error occurred. Writing is inhibited. If this error occurs when data is downloaded, files with file numbers in the nine thousands or eight thousands may be protected. The data cannot be found. If this error occurs in uploading, the NC program may not be present. The program has already been present. If this error occurs in downloading, the program may be overwrite-protected. The NC memory area is insufficient. If this error occurs in downloading, the NC memory may have no free space.
- 560 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
E.DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS
DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS

This appendix explains CIMPLICITY points used by i CELL. These points can also be used on a screen added by the user. In this case, however, the user is allowed only to read points. The user must not write points. These points created by i CELL are not covered by the CIMPLICITY point license. When the user purchases a point license, the user is to calculate the number of user-specific points added by the user other than i CELL points (for example, the number of those peripheral device points that are added by using PLC) and purchase a license matching the number of those points.
- 561 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
E.1
OVERVIEW
A point is created for a machine of which communication protocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2. No point is created for a machine with the reader/puncher interface.
Restrictions by communication protocol
E.1.1
CIMPLICITY Points and i CELL

CIMPLICITY manages data as a "point." A point is a variable that has a defined value. i CELL displays CIMPLICITY point values on the screen, adds them up, and saves the sum to a database. The following chart shows the relationships between CIMPLICITY points and i CELL.
CIMPLICITY <6> i CELL <6> <6> CIMPLICITY point <3> <5> <4> i CELL setting NC NC connection function <5> NC NC
<1> i CELL configuration <2> screen <3>
<1> The i CELL configuration screen reads the point setting of CIMPLICITY. <2> By acting on the i CELL configuration screen, the operator adds machines and modifies i CELL functions. According to what the operator performed, the i CELL configuration screen changes the CIMPLICITY points. <3> The i CELL configuration screen saves the i CELL setting. It also reflects a change to the CIMPLICITY point setting to CIMPLICITY. <4> The NC connection function reads the i CELL setting. <5> The NC connection function communicates with the NC according to the i CELL setting it read. Values read from the NC are reflected to the CIMPLICITY points, and the CIMPLICITY point values are written to the NC. <6> i CELL reads the i CELL setting, and reads and writes CIMPLICITY point values according to the i CELL setting. It also displays the point values on the screen, and adds them up and saves them to a database.
- 562 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
E.1.2
Point Naming Rules

i CELL uses two types of points. One type (machine-specific point) is used for individual machines separately, and the other type (i CELL -common point) is used in common throughout i CELL.
Machine-specific points
The name of each machine-specific point consists of two parts. The first part identifies the machine and series, and the second part identifies the type of the point. A period "." is used to separate the parts. The format of the point name is: FNCxxxy.<identifier> where: FNC is a fixed character string. xxx is a three-digit machine number. It can range from 001 to 999. y is a two-digit series number.
Point type - If there is only one NC series, all points for that machine - If there are two or more NC series, points for series 1 - If there are two or more NC series, points not related to series If there are two or more NC series, points for series 2 y value 01 02
<Identifier> identifies a point type. Example) The name of a point is "FNC0011.F_AL" if the machine number is 1, the series number is 1, and the identifier is "F_AL" (NC alarm).
i CELL -common points
The i CELL -common points are independent of machines. The name of each i CELL -common point consists of two parts. The first part is a fixed character string, and the second part identifies the point name. A period "." is used to separate the parts. The format of the point name is: FNCSYSP.<identifier> where: FNCSYSP is a fixed character string. <identifier> identifies a point type.
- 563 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
E.2
E.2.1
LIST OF POINTS
Machine-Specific Points
The following table summarizes machine-specific points. The meaning of each column header of the following table is as follows:
Point name Data type Reading interval i CELL function Value and meaning Indicates the name of a CIMPLICITY point. The first part "FNCxxxy." of the point name is left out; only the identifier is indicated. Indicates the type of CIMPLICITY point data. Indicates the interval at which the point value is updated. Characters E and D indicate the communication protocol to which a point is applied. E : FOCAS2/Ethernet D : DNC2 Indicates the i CELL function for which the point is used. Indicates the value that the point can take and the meaning of the value.
Each value of the item "i CELL function" corresponds to the function name for a check box displayed on the Function tab of the i CELL machine screen. (To open the i CELL machine screen, select i CELL and Machine from the tree in the i CELL configuration screen, and double-click a desired machine in the grid.) For example, if you turn on the overview function in the i CELL configuration screen, the point that has the i CELL function value "Overview" in the following table is added to CIMPLICITY. If you turn off the function, the related points are deleted from CIMPLICITY. Clicking the Disable All button in the i CELL machine screen deletes all points related to the machine of interest from CIMPLICITY. The NC connection function reads values from the NC regularly, and writes them to CIMPLICITY points. The item "Reading interval" in the table indicates the interval at which the values are read. If the value of a CIMPLICITY point is changed, the NC connection function writes the new value to the NC immediately.
NOTE As the PMC address used for a point, the PMC address for the first path of an NC is indicated. When a multipath NC is connected, the PMC address for each path is used.
- 564 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
Reading interval E : One second D : Ten seconds E : One second E : One second E : One second i CELL function Overview Alarm Alarm

Value and meaning NC alarm signal. The value is 1 if there is an alarm condition in the NC. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off. Alarm number not related to NC axes. The value is -1 if no alarm condition has occurred. Alarm number related to NC axes. The last number is an axis number. The value is -1 if no alarm condition has occurred. Points as many as the number of NC axes are created. Alarm number not related to NC axes. If more than one alarm condition occurs simultaneously, up to eight are held in the array. Alarm number related to NC axes. The last number is an axis number. If more than one alarm condition occurs simultaneously, up to eight are held in the array. Points as many as the number of NC axes are created. Alarm attribute number not related to NC axes. If more than one alarm condition occurs simultaneously, up to eight are held in the array. Thie is used in Series 30i/31i/32i. Alarm attribute number related to NC axes. The last number is an axis number. If more than one alarm condition occurs simultaneously, up to eight are held in the array. Points as many as the number of NC axes are created. Thie is used in Series 30i/31i/32i. Bit flag indicating the alarm occurrence status Point of an individual machine indicating whether information is collected in the background. The value is 1 if the information is collected. The value is 0 if the information is not collected. (Note 3) Point of an individual path indicating whether information is being collected in the background. The value is 1 if the information is being collected. The value is 0 if the information is not being collected. Point for specifying the value of F_COM_ACTIVATE for each path. The value is the same as the value of F_COM_ACTIVATE. The meaning of the value is also the same as that of F_COM_ACTIVATE. Point used when "Selected by Point" is selected for "Re-connection on Communication Error" in communication setup on the setup screen. Point of the ORed F_COM_COND value of each machine. The F_COM_COND values of all the paths are ORed. The meaning of the value is the same as that of F_COM_COND. (Note 3)
Point name F_AL F_ALARM0 F_ALARM1 to 32
Data type BOOL INT INT INT Array with eight elements INT Array with eight elements INT Array with eight elements INT Array with eight elements DINT BOOL
F_ALARMNO0
Alarm
F_ALARMNO1 to 32
E : One second
Alarm
F_ALARMTYPE0
E : One second
Alarm
F_ALARMTYPE1 to 32
E : One second D : Ten seconds -
Alarm
F_ALI F_COM_ACTIVATE
Alarm (Note 1)
F_COM_COND
BOOL
- (Note 1)
F_COM_ON
BOOL
- (Note 1)
F_COM_RETRY
BOOL
- (Note 1)
F_COM_STATUS
BOOL
- (Note 1)
- 565 -

Point name Data type Reading interval
APPENDIX
i CELL function
B-75074EN/04
Value and meaning NC emergency stop signal. The value is 0 if the NC is at an emergency stop. Otherwise, it is 1. It is invalid if the NC power is off. The NC types and PMC addresses are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i Bit 4 of G0008 FS16i/18i/21i Bit 4 of G0008 Power Mate i D/H Bit 4 of G0008 FS0i Bit 4 of G0008 FS15 Bit 4 of G0000 FS0 Bit 4 of G0121 NC emergency stop signal. The value is 0 if the NC is at an emergency stop. Otherwise, it is 1. It is 1 also if the NC power is off. Eight bits (No. 1) of the PMC area for indicating the state of the NC. The NC types and PMC addresses are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i F0000 FS16i/18i/21i F0000 Power Mate i D/H F0000 FS0i F0000 FS15 F0000 FS0 F0148 It is invalid if the NC power is off. Eight bits (No. 2) of the PMC area for indicating the state of the NC. The NC types and PMC addresses are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i F0001 FS16i/18i/21i F0001 Power Mate i D/H F0001 FS0i F0001 FS15 F0001 FS0 F0149 It is invalid if the NC power is off. NC ready signal. The value is 1 if the NC is ready to operate. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off. Indicates an error in the NC connection function NC automatic operation-in-progress signal. The value is 1 if the NC is in automatic operation. Otherwise it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off. The value is 1 if there is an operator message. Otherwise, the value is 0. Character string of the operator message. This is valid if F_OPM is 1. Points 1 to 4 are created according to the number of NC operator messages. Operator message number. The value is -1 if there is no operator message. Points 1 to 4 are created according to the number of NC operator messages. Used within the NC connection function Indicates whether the NC power is on or off. The value is 1 if the power is on. Otherwise, it is off.
F_ESP
BOOL
E : One second D : Ten seconds
Overview
F_ESPV
BOOL
Overview
F_F0
BOOL Array with eight elements
Overview
F_F1
BOOL Array with eight elements
Overview
F_MA F_NCC_ERROR F_OP F_OPM F_OPMM1 to 4
BOOL STRING BOOL BOOL STRING Array with 255 elements INT BOOL BOOL
E : One second D : Ten seconds E : One second D : Ten seconds E : One second E : One second E : One second -
Overview - (Note 1) Overview ALARM ALARM
F_ OPMN1 to 4 F_POINT_GROUP F_PWR
ALARM -(Note 1) - (Note 1)
- 566 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
Reading interval i CELL function

Value and meaning Number of parts processed by the NC. The NC types and parameter number are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i 6711 FS16i/18i/21i 6711 Power Mate i D/H 6711 FS0i 6711 FS15 107 Total number of parts processed by the NC. The NC types and parameter number are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i 6712 FS16i/18i/21i 6712 Power Mate i D/H 6712 FS0i 6712 FS15 108 Cumulative cutting time (in millisecond units) of the NC. The NC types and parameter number are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i 6753 FS16i/18i/21i 6753 Power Mate i D/H 6753 FS0i 6753 FS15 103 Cumulative cutting time (in minute units) of the NC. The NC types and parameter number are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i 6754 FS16i/18i/21i 6754 Power Mate i D/H 6754 FS0i 6754 FS15 104 NC operation time (in millisecond unites) (cumulative time during which automatic operation is in progress). The NC types and parameter number are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i 6751 FS16i/18i/21i 6751 Power Mate i D/H 6751 FS0i 6751 FS15 101 NC operation time (in minute unites) (cumulative time during which automatic operation is in progress). The NC types and parameter number are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i 6752 FS16i/18i/21i 6752 Power Mate i D/H 6752 FS0i 6752 FS15 102
Point name
Data type
F_RUNTIME_A_CNT1
DINT
E : One minute D : Ten seconds
Machining Result
F_RUNTIME_A_CNT2
DINT
Machining Result
F_RUNTIME_A_CUT1
DINT
Machining Result
F_RUNTIME_A_CUT2
DINT
Machining Result
F_RUNTIME_A_OP1
DINT
Machining Result
F_RUNTIME_A_OP2
DINT
Machining Result
- 567 -

Point name Data type Reading interval
APPENDIX
i CELL function
B-75074EN/04
Value and meaning Cumulative time during which the NC power is on (in minute units). The NC types and parameter number are as listed below. FS30i/31i/32i 6750 FS16i/18i/21i 6750 Power Mate i D/H 6750 FS0i 6750 FS15 100 NC servo ready signal. The value is 1 if the servo section can run normally. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off. NC automatic operation pausing signal. The value is 1 if the NC is not in automatic operation. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off. NC states Created from F_OP, SA, STL, SPL, MA, AL, and ESPV. For details, see "Displaying the overview status." 1: Power off. 2: At a stop. 3: In a pause. 4: Running. 5: Reset. 6 At an emergency stop. 7: NC ready. 9: Alarm. Holds a temporary value for calculating F_STATUS (No. 1). Holds a temporary value for calculating F_STATUS (No. 2). NC automatic operation starting signal. The value is 1 if the NC is starting automatic operation. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off. Used by the NC to inform the PC of the end of machining. (Note 2) Used by the PC to inform the NC that the PC has confirmed the end of machining when handshaking is used. (Note 2) Used by the NC to inform the PC whether to use handshaking. (Note 2) Used by the NC to inform the PC of a process end ID. (Note 2) Used by the NC to inform the PC of the O number for machining. (Note 2) Used by the NC to inform the PC of the sequence number that identifies a machining process. (Note 2) Used by the NC to inform the PC of the beginning of machining. (Note 2) Used by the PC to inform the NC that the PC has confirmed the beginning of machining when handshaking is used. (Note 2)
F_RUNTIME_A_PON
DINT
Machining Result
F_SA
BOOL
F_SPL
BOOL
E : One minute D : Ten seconds E : One minute D : Ten seconds E : One minute D : Ten seconds E : One minute D : Ten seconds E : One minute D : Ten seconds E : One minute D : Ten seconds E : One minute E : One minute E : One minute E : One minute E : One minute E : One minute E : One minute E : One minute
Overview
Overview
F_STATUS
REAL
Overview
F_STATUS1
REAL
Overview
F_STATUS2
REAL
Overview
F_STL
BOOL
Overview Workpiece process result Workpiece process result Workpiece process result Workpiece process result Workpiece process result Workpiece process result Workpiece process result Workpiece process result
F_WKPC_END F_WKPC_END_OK F_WKPC_HANDSHAKE F_WKPC_LAST_ID F_WKPC_O_NUM F_WKPC_S_NUM F_WKPC_START F_WKPC_START_OK
REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL
- 568 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
Reading interval E : One minute E : One minute i CELL function Workpiece process result Workpiece process result

Value and meaning Used by the NC to inform the PC of the user area ID. (Note 2) Used by the NC to inform the PC of the workpiece ID. (Note 2)
Point name F_WKPC_USER_ID F_WKPC_WORK_ID
Data type REAL REAL
NOTE 1 If one of these points is added, the others of them are also added together. Each of these points is deleted if all of the others are deleted. 2 See Subsection 2.9.1, "Workpiece Process Result," in Part III, "Setting," for detailed descriptions about the points related to workpiece process results and their meaning. 3 If the communication protocol is DNC2, multiple processes cannot be handled simultaneously. To transfer an NC program file from the NC program management screen, the background information collection from the NC must be stopped. If the machine selected on the NC program management screen uses DNC2, change the value of F_COM_ACTIVATE to 0 in order to stop the background information collection from the NC. Check the F_COM_STATUS value to see that the information collection has stopped. The F_COM_STATUS value changes from 1 to 0 when the information collection stops. Then, an NC program file can be transferred. When the machine is deselected (that is, when the NC program file transfer stops), return the F_COM_ACTIVATE value to 1 in order to resume information collection from the NC. For the F_COM_STATUS value and overview status display, see the subsequent description.
- 569 -
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Displaying the overview status

The status character strings such as [Running] and their display colors on the overview screen are determined as follows. <1> Read the PMC area to obtain the OP, SA, STL, SPL, MA, AL, and ESP signals of the NC. To do this, create the following points. Then, read the data.
Point CNC Name FS30i/31i/32i FS16i/18i/21i Power Mate i FS0i FS15, FS15i F_F0 F_F1 F_ESP F_F0 F_F1 F_ESP F_F0 F_F1 F_ESP Array element count 8 8 None 8 8 None 8 8 None Address PMC area Bit #7 OP MA #6 SA #5 STL #4 SPL AL ESP MA SA OP STL ESP OP MA SA STL SPL AL ESP SPL AL #3 #2 #1 #0
F0000 F0001 G0008 F0000 F0001 G0000 F0148 F0149 G0121
FS0
<2> Create F_OP, F_SA, F_STL, F_SPL, F_MA, and F_AL from the points listed above. Create F_ESPV from the ESP signal. <3> Calculate F_STATUS from the combination of F_OP, F_SA, F_STL, F_SPL, F_MA, F_AL, and F_ESPV. On the basis of the F_STATUS value, the color animation function of the screen determines the character string to be displayed and its color on the overview screen. In addition to the PMC area signals listed above, F_COM_COND is also checked. If the machine is connected by DNC2, the value of F_COM_COND becomes 0 while the NC program management screen is displayed. In the meantime, neither PMC area signals nor machining results are collected.
- 570 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F_STATUS is calculated and displayed on the overview screen, as illustrated below

F_STATUS calculation formulae and statuses displayed on the overview screen Yes Com.Hold Gray Yes F_MA=0 1= Power Off Gray Yes F_ESPV=0 6= Emergency Red Yes F_AL=1 9=Alarm Red 2= Stopped Colorless F_SPL=1 3= Hold Colorless F_STL=1 4= Running Green Yes F_OP=0 5=Reset Colorless Yes Yes F_SA=0 7= NC Ready Colorless Yes
F_COM_ COND=0
E.2.2
i CELL -Common Points

The following table summarizes only the i CELL -common points that are related to the user. In the same manner as for machine-specific points, the identifiers (the second part) of each point name are indicated. i CELL -common points always reside in the system, and their values indicate the current status of the system. Therefore, the table does not have the "i CELL function" or "reading interval" column, unlike the table for machine-specific points.
Point name F_ALARM F_OPM F_WARNING
Data type BOOL BOOL BOOL
Range and meaning of value The value becomes 1 if an alarm condition occurs in even one of the connected machines. It is 0 if no alarm condition has occurred in any machine. The value becomes 1 if at least one connected machine has an operator message. The value becomes 0 if all the machines have no operator message. The value is 1 if any warning condition has occurred in i CELL. Otherwise, it is 0.
- 571 -
F.SETTING UP PC
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
SETTING UP PC
This appendix describes the settings of various PCs. For the setting of IIS, see Section F.1, "SETTING UP IIS". For the setting of an FTP server, see Section F.2, "SETTING UP FTP SERVER".
- 572 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
F.1
SETTING UP IIS
This appendix explains how to set up IIS for use by the i CELL Web function. Once you are finished with installing i CELL, you set up IIS.
NOTE If the OS is Windows NT, see subsections F.1.1 and F.1.2 written for Windows NT. If the OS is Windows 2000, see subsections F.1.3 and F.1.4 written for Windows 2000.
F.1.1
Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows NT

The WEB directory is in the directory where i CELL is installed. The access permission for this directory is given to the "IUSR_ICELL" user created according to Subsection 2.2.6, "Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT," in Part II, "Installation." 1. Select [Properties] of [WEB Directory] [Access Permission] of [Security] [Add] [Show Users], and add the "IUSR_ICELL" user by specifying the type of the access permission as [Full Control].
- 573 -
F.SETTING UP PC
2.
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
In the dialog box shown above, click [OK] to give the "IUSR_ICELL" user the [Full Control] access permission for the [WEB Directory.]
F.1.2
Constructing Web Sites for Windows NT

Making the i CELL Web function operable requires constructing a Web site on IIS. 1. 2. Select [Start] [Program] [Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack] [Microsoft Internet Information Server,] and click [Internet Service Manager] to start the Microsoft Management Console. Stop the [Default Web Site], which is initially set up, by selecting it with the mouse, right-clicking, and selecting Stop.
- 574 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
3.
Add "i CELL Web Site" by selecting the computer icon with the mouse, right-clicking, and selecting [New] [Web Site.]
4.
The "New Web Site" wizard screen opens. Enter "i CELL Web Site" in the [Web Site Description], and click [Next.]
5.
If you do not restrict the IP addresses to be used on the Web site, click [Next.]
- 575 -
F.SETTING UP PC
6.
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Specify the WEB directory (for example, C:\FANUC\ICELL\WEB) in the directory where i CELL is installed as the path to your home directory, and click [Next.]
7.
Make sure that [Allow Read Access] and [Allow Script Access] are on as the access permissions for your home directory, and click [Finish.]
8.
Select [iCELL Web Site,] right-click, and click Properties.
- 576 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
9.
Click the Directory Security tab, and click [Edit] for Anonymous Access and Authentication Control.
10. Click [Edit] for [Allow Anonymous Access] on [Authentication Methods.]
11. Enter "IUSR_ICELL" in [Username] on "Anonymous User Account," and leave [Password] blank, then click [OK.]
- 577 -
F.SETTING UP PC
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
12. Click [OK] on "Authentication Methods." 13. Click the Documents tab, delete "Default.htm" and "Default.asp," and add "Login.asp" as "Default Document," and then click [OK.]
14. Select [iCELL Web Site] with the mouse, right-click, and click [Start.]
- 578 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
15. [iCELL Web Site] opens.
Now you have constructed the Web site. When exiting Microsoft Management Console, you will see the following message. Click [Yes.]
- 579 -
F.SETTING UP PC
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
F.1.3
Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows 2000

The WEB directory is in the directory where i CELL is installed. The access permission for this directory is given to the "IUSR_ICELL" user created according to Subsection 2.1.5, "Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000," in Part II, "Installation." 1. Select [Properties] of [WEB Directory] [Add] of [Security] [Show Users], and add the [IUSER_ICELL] user, then click "OK".
2.
In the Name list box, select [iCELL], check the Allow check box of Full Control, then click [OK].
- 580 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
F.1.4
Constructing Web Sites for Windows 2000

Making the i CELL Web function operable requires constructing a Web site on IIS. 1. Select [Start] [Program] [Administrative Tools] [Internet Service Manager]. The "Internet Information Services" start. 2. Stop the [Default Web Site], which is initially set up, by selecting it with the mouse, right-clicking, and selecting Stop.
3.
Add "iCELL Web Site" by selecting the computer icon with the mouse, right-clicking, and selecting [New] [Web Site.]
4.
The "Web Site Creation Wizard" screen appears. Click [Next].
- 581 -
F.SETTING UP PC
5.
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Enter [iCELL Web site] in the [Description] box. Then, click [Next].
6.
If you do not restrict the IP addresses to be used on the Web site, click [Next.]
7.
Specify the WEB directory (for example, H:\Program Files\FANUC\iCELL\WEB) in the directory where i CELL is installed as the path to your home directory, and click [Next.]
- 582 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
8.
Check that [Read] and [Run scripts [such as ASP]] are selected as access permissions for the home directory. Then, click [Next].
9.
Click [Finish.]
10. Select [iCELL Web Site,] right-click, and click Properties.
- 583 -
F.SETTING UP PC
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
11. Click the Directory Security tab, and click [Edit] for Anonymous Access and Authentication Control.
12. Click [Edit] for [Anonymous access] on "Authentication Methods."
13. Enter "IUSR_ICELL" in [Username] on "Anonymous User Account," and leave [Password] blank, then click [OK.]
14. Click [OK] on "Authentication Methods."
- 584 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
15. Click the Documents tab, delete "Default.htm" and "Default.asp," and add "Login.asp" as "Default Document," and then click [OK.]
16. Select [iCELL Web Site] with the mouse, right-click, and click [Start.]
17. [iCELL Web Site] opens.
Now you have constructed the Web site.

- 585 -
F.SETTING UP PC
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
F.2
SETTING UP FTP SERVER

This section explains how to set up an FTP server on the PC.
NOTE If the OS is Windows NT, see subsection F.2.1 written for Windows NT. If the OS is Windows 2000, see subsection F.2.2 written for Windows 2000.
F.2.1
Peer Web Services for Windows NT

1 2 3 Select [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel] > [Network]. In the [Network] dialog box, select the [Service] tag. Check if "Microsoft Peer Web Server" exists in [Network Services]. If "Microsoft Peer Web Server" does not exist, it needs to be installed. So, click the [Add] button. If "Microsoft Peer Web Server" exists, an FTP server needs to be additionally installed. Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Microsoft Peer Web Services] > [Peer Web Services Setup], then proceed to 5. When you click the [Add] button, the [Select Network Service] dialog box appears. Select "Microsoft Peer Web Server" then click the [OK] button. The [Peer Web Services Setup] dialog box appears. In [Options], check "Internet Service Manager" and "FTP Service". (Check other services as required.) After checking the services, click the [OK] button. The [Publishing Directories] dialog box appears. Set the root directory to be accessed by FTP, then click the [OK] button. The installation of "Microsoft Peer Web Services" starts.
Installing Per Web Services
4 5
6 7
- 586 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
Setting an FTP server

1 Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Microsoft Peer Web Services] > [Internet Service Manager].
2 3
The [Microsoft Internet Service Manager] dialog box appears. Select a computer whose [Service] is set to "FTP", then execute [Properties] > [Service Properties] on the menu. The [FTP Service Properties] dialog box appears. Display the [Service] tag, then uncheck the [Allow only anonymous connections] check box, then click the [OK] button.
This completes the setting of an FTP server of Peer Web Services.
- 587 -
F.SETTING UP PC
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Setting a login user

1 2 3 Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [User Manager]. Select [User] > [New User] from the menu. The [New User] dialog box appears. Enter necessary information such as a user name.
Click the [Groups] button, then set a group to which you belong. Depending on the group set here, the actual read/write access right can be affected when FTP-based communication is performed. So, set a group carefully.
5 6
Click the [OK] button. The screen display returns to the [New User] dialog box. When you click the [OK] button, the user name is registered, and you can log in using the user name and password.
- 588 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
F.2.2
Internet Information Service for Windows 2000

1 2 3 Set the CD-ROM of Windows 2000. Click [Install Add-On Components]. Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button.
Installing Internet Information Service (IIS)
The [Internet Information Services (IIS)] dialog box appears. Check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server].
Click the [OK] button. The screen display returns to the previous screen. Click the [Next] button to install the necessary files.
- 589 -
F.SETTING UP PC
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
Setting an FTP server

1 2 3 Select [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel]. Start [Administrative Tools] by double-clicking. Double-click [Internet Services Manager], then start [Internet Information Services].
4 5
Select a computer, then display the menu by right-clicking, then select Properties. Select [FTP Service] in Master Properties, then click the [Edit] button.
Select the [Home Directory] tag.

- 590 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
Check [Read] and [Write] of [FTP Site Directory]. As [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. When a file is displayed in the UNIX format, whether the file is accessible can be determined.
Upon completion of setting, click the [Apply] button.
The dialog box shown above is displayed. Select [Default FTP Site] then click the [OK] button. With the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory "\Inetpub\ftproot" (drive where Windows 2000 is installed) becomes the home directory. Only those directories under this directory can be accessed. So, with the default setting, NC programs need to be managed under this directory.
- 591 -
F.SETTING UP PC
10
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
To access a directory other than this directory, a new FTP site needs to be created. In this case, select and right-click a computer in the [Internet Information Services] dialog box of step 3 above, then select [New] > [FTP Site] from the menu, then set a home directory and so forth. If a new FTP site is created, make a setting in the [Internet Information Services] dialog box of step 3 above so that the created FTP site is enabled. For details, refer to online help information and so forth.
Setting a login user

1 2 3 Select [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel]. Double-click the icon of [Users and Passwords]. Click the [Add] button, then enter necessary information such as a user name.
Click the [Next] button, then enter a password for the specified user name.
- 592 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
F.SETTING UP PC
Click the [Next] button, then set an access right to be granted. Depending on the access right set here, the actual access right for reading from/writing to files can be affected when FTP-based communication is performed. So, set an access right carefully.
Click the [Finish] button. The user name is registered, and the user can log in using the user name and password.
- 593 -
G.CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET

This appendix explains a sample contract for dialup connection.
- 594 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
G.CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET
G.1
EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIALUP CONNECTION

As for a dialup connection method, your Internet service provider will usually give you a work procedure that matches the provider's facility. You should use this work procedure rather than that described below. The following are an example contract and setting method presented for reference purposes. If you enter into a contract for dialup connection with an Internet service provider, you receive the following information. 1. Access point (telephone number) 0555-30-xxxx 2. Dialup authentication ID test123 3. Dialup authentication password xY3PU 4. Primary DNS server IP address 202.248.xxx.yyy 5. Secondary DNS server IP address 202.219.aaa.bbb 6. SMTP server name or IP address smtp.test.com 7. POP server name or IP address pop.test.com 8. Mail account user123 9. Mail password TR4EW 10. Mail address [email protected] Set items 1, 2, and 3 in your dialup router. Enter items 4 and 5 in "DNS" of "Microsoft TCP/IP Properties."
- 595 -
G.CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
See Subsection 2.1.3, "Setting the DNS (Mail Function) For Windows XP," Subsection 2.2.3, "Setting the DNS (Mail Function) For Windows 2000," or Subsection 2.3.3, "Setting the DNS (Mail Function) For Windows NT," in Part II, "Installation," for details.
Enter item 6 in "Mail Server" of "Mailer Configuration." Enter item 10 in "Mail Source Address" of "Mailer Configuration." See Section 3.2, "Mailer," in Part III, "Setting," for details.
You do not need to enter item 7, 8, and 9 because the i CELL mail function receives no mail at the PC where i CELL is running.
- 596 -
B-75074EN/04
APPENDIX
H.CALLING FANUC LADDER-III
H
H.1
CALLING FANUC LADDER-III

This appendix describes how to start FANUC LADDER-III from i CELL.
NOTE To use this function, FANUC LADDER-III must be purchased and installed in addition to i CELL. The i CELL install CD does not contain FANUC LADDER-III.
OVERVIEW
If both i CELL and FANUC LADDER-III are installed on a PC, FANUC LADDER-III can be executed from the i CELL screen for a machine selected on the overview screen. This function is enabled regardless of whether i CELL or FANUC LADDER-III is installed earlier.
NOTE 1 FANUC LADDER-III of Ver. 2.10 or after is necessary. 2 Before starting FANUC LADDER-III from i CELL, set up FANUC LADDER-III so that it can communicate independently with the NC. For details, refer to the operator's manual of FANUC LADDER-III. 3 FANUC LADDER-III and the NC must be connected by Ethernet. Use the value input on the i CELL setup screen as the IP address of the NC. 4 If the server PC and viewer PC are configured by CIMPLICITY viewer, install FANUC LADDER-III to each PC on which FANUC LADDER-III is to be executed. If both the server PC and viewer PC display the FANUC LADDER-III screen, the two PCs require FANUC LADDER-III. 5 The screen cannot be displayed in the Web view.
- 597 -
H.CALLING FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-75074EN/04
H.2
OPERATION
To start FANUC LADDER-III, follow these steps. 1 Select a machine on the overview screen. 2 Click the "FANUC LADDER-III" button. Now, FANUC LADDER-III of the selected NC starts.
NOTE If FANUC LADDER-III is not installed, this button is not displayed.
- 598 -
B-75074EN/04
INDEX
INDEX
<A>
ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL .................4 About The NC Program Management Window ............ 259 ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT....................... 237 ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU ............................. 245 ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY.................................. 338 ADDING SCREENS..................................................... 382 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows 2000 .............................................................. 580 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows NT ................................................................. 573 ALARM AND WARNING........................................... 371 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY .................................... 348 Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories .... 209 Automatic Data Backup ................................................ 169 Available drive required for sharing the i CELL installation directory ..................................................... 209 Available drive required for sharing the NC program root directory................................................................. 210 COMMUNICATION ....................................................133 Communication Setting.................................................155 Communication with a Data Server (FTP server) .........284 Communication with the NC memory...........................273 Configuring a Large-scale Network ...............487, 492, 496, 502, 506, 511, 517, 522, 527, 532 Configuring a Small-scale Network ...............487, 492, 496, 502, 506, 511, 517, 522, 527, 532 Confirming Backup Archive File Paths.........................105 Confirming Data Server Communication Setting..........148 Confirming the Contents of the Backup Archive File ...106 Confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication Setting ...........................................................................138 CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET..........................594 Constructing Web Sites for Windows 2000 ..................581 Constructing Web Sites for Windows NT .....................574 CONTRACT WITH INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS...................................................................26 Copying an Overview Prepared Beforehand .................252 Copying the Backup Archive File .................................108 Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files (and Directories) in the PC....................................................265 Copying, Moving, Deleting, and Renaming Connection Destination Files (Directories) ......................................288 Creating a New Connection Destination Directory .......297 Creating New Directories in the PC ..............................272 Creating Operation Results .............................................45 Creation of a Basic Screen ............................................389 Creation of a Standard Screen and Function Screen .....392
<B>
Back Button................................................................... 397 BACKUP ...................................................................... 103 BACKUP AND RESTORATION................................. 102 BACKUP DATA DISPLAY......................................... 364 BASIC FUNCTIONS.................................................... 114 Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files in the PC ... 269
<C>
CALLING FANUC LADDER-III ................................ 597 CANCELING THE SETTINGS ................................... 232 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED MACHINES.................................................................. 252 Checking CIMPLICITY Viewer Communication......... 231 Checking Communication between the Viewer PC and Each NC ........................................................................ 229 Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and Communication ..................................... 203 CHECKS....................................................................... 229 CIMPLICITY Points and i CELL ................................. 562 CIMPLICITY VIEWER ............................................... 202 Clearing History Data ........................................... 350, 354 CNC ..................................................................................9
<D>
Data Backup ..................................................................356 Data display processing procedures ...................... 449, 466 Data Restoration............................................................357 Data Server Communication Setting .............................146 Data Server setting screen .............................................524 DATABASE MAINTENANCE....................................176 Database operation procedure ............................... 449, 455 DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS .................................425 Description of VBA Scripts .................................. 448, 455 DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS..........................561 Details of List File Batch Transfer Function ...................41 Details of List File Expended Transfer Function ............42
i-1
INDEX
Details of the Subprogram Batch Transfer Function....... 38 Details of the Subprogram Expanded Transfer Function 39 Determination of Basic Items........................................ 385 DIAGNOSIS ................................................................. 343 DIALOG BOX CONFIGURATION............................. 119 Display Format Alteration............................................... 53 Display Information ............................................ 46, 49, 55 DISPLAY TABLE ........................................................ 201 Displaying a Dialog Box When the Project Has Not Been Updated................................................................ 126 Displaying Acquired Data............................................. 442 DNC2 ............................................................................ 536 DNC2 Communication Setting ..................................... 142 Download Tab............................................................... 156 Downloading and Uploading NC Programs .................. 273
B-75074EN/04
General-Purpose Tab (Function Switch Tab) Control...396
<H>
History Data Display.....................................................349 History Signal Setting ...................................................354 HOT TO INSTALL CIMPLICITY ...............................470 How to Change Settings ................................................121 HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY 469 How to Start Installation ...............................................471
<I>
i CELL -Common Points...............................................571 i CELL Database ...........................................................426 i CELL Database Configuration....................................426 i CELL MACHINE .......................................................161 iCELL_ErrorMessage ...................................................401 iCELLDef......................................................................403 iCELLRW .....................................................................403 If an Attempt to Reflect Point Settings to CIMPLICITY Fails .......................................................127 IMPLEMENTATION OF THE MAIL FUNCTION BY DIAL-UP CONNECTION ..............................................64 IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND WEB FUNCTION WITH 24-HOUR CONNECTION ...67 INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE TCP/IP SERVICE FILE ...................................98 INSTALLATION......................................................91, 92 Installing CIMPLICITY ................................................470 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows 2000.................................................................................83 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows XP ...................................................................................78 Installing i CELL...........................................................108 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000......82 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT ........89 Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP.........77 Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT........88 Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000 .....81 Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server ..............................................................................76 Installing New Options with CIMPLICITY HMI .........476 Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows NT ...................................................................90 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 ...............................83
<E>
EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS ................. 301 Editing List Files........................................................... 304 Editing the Overview Screen......................................... 253 ERROR CODES ........................................................... 550 ErrorMessage ................................................................ 401 Ethernet parameter screen ..................................... 498, 503 Event ............................................................................. 423 EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIALUP CONNECTION............................................................. 595 Example of Usage ......................................... 402, 416, 423 EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS............................ 535 EXECUTION................................................................ 232
<F>
File creation .................................................................. 392 File Deletion.................................................................. 358 File List Refreshing............................................... 357, 362 File Modification........................................................... 400 Flow of Setting.............................................................. 185 FOCAS2/Ethernet Parameter Screen ............ 484, 489, 513 FOCAS2/Ethernet Screen ............................................. 508 FROM Data Backup...................................................... 360 FROM Data Deletion .................................................... 363 FROM Data Restoration................................................ 361 FROM/SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION...... 359
<G>
General Tab................................................................... 152 GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL . 396
i-2
B-75074EN/04
INDEX
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT MACHINE SETTINGS....................................................................151 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ERROR CODES ...551 NC PROGRAM TRANSFER .........................................30 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC....................32 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC Program Management Screen ........................................................30 NC SETTING................................................................482 NC SETTINGS ............................................................. 179 NETWORK CONFIGURATION ...................................24 Newly Installing CIMPLICITY HMI............................472 Newly Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI...................478
Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows NT .................................. 90 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows XP .................................. 78 Internet Information Service for Windows 2000........... 589 ITEM NAME ................................................................ 200 ITEMS COMMON TO THE SCREENS ...................... 242
<L>
List File Monitor Operations......................................... 311 LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS........ 309 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................. 40 List File Transfer Monitor and Control Function ............ 42 LIST OF POINTS ......................................................... 564 Logon Screen ................................................................ 194
<O>
Opening the Configuration Dialog Box.........................119 Opening the IcellBkupRstr Dialog Box.........................103 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ......................................6 Operating the Database with the i CELL ......................425 OPERATION ........................................................ 246, 598 OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY ............................351 Operation History Display ............................................352 OPERATION MONITOR...............................................44 OPERATION RESULT SCREEN ..................................45 Outputting History Data ........................................ 349, 353 OVERVIEW MENU.....................................................247
<M>
MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION .................... 128 Machine Detail Screen .................................................. 195 MACHINE INFORMATION ....................................... 130 MACHINE SELECTION CONTROL.......................... 418 Machine Selection Screen ............................................. 194 Machine-Specific Points ............................................... 564 Machining Result .......................................................... 179 MACHINING RESULT........................................ 427, 314 MAIL ............................................................................ 182 MAIL CONFIGURATION ........................................... 187 Mail Destinations .......................................................... 183 MAIL FUNCTION ......................................................... 63 Mail Message and Message Point ................................. 184 MAILER ....................................................................... 186 MAIN MENU ............................................................... 244 Menus............................................................................ 120 Message Line ................................................................ 398 Method .......................................................... 401, 403, 421 Method of Operation ............................................. 445, 453 Modification to the Function Switch Tab...................... 387
<P>
PARAMETER SETTING .............................................341 Parameter setting screen for Data Server functions.......528 Parameter setting screen for the FTP file transfer function .........................................................................518 Peer Web Services for Windows NT.............................586 PERSONAL COMPUTER/HARDWARE......................18 PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE .......................21 Planned Parts Count Input...............................................54 POINT FOR WEB ........................................................198 Point Naming Rules ......................................................563 Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for the First Time....................... 497, 523 Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for the First Time .............................................................. 483, 488, 507, 512 PREFACE ......................................................................p-1 PREPARATION ..................................................... 72, 203 PREPARATION (FOR Windows 2000) .........................79
<N>
Names of Screen Components ...................................... 242 NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION ........................ 57, 332 NC MAINTENANCE ............................................. 59, 344 NC PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................. 34 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ......................... 27, 255 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS.................................................................... 159
i-3
INDEX
PREPARATION (FOR Windows NT)............................ 84 PREPARATION (FOR Windows XP)............................ 74 Procedure for Setting the Server PC.............................. 221 Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC ............................ 226 PROGRAM CHECK..................................................... 340 PROJECT PROPERTY................................................. 129 Properties ...................................................................... 410 Property......................................................................... 418 Public variables ............................................................. 408
B-75074EN/04
SCREEN OPERATION (2) ALARM LOG DISPLAY SCREEN .......................................................................377 SCREEN OPERATION (2) SCREEN LIST FOR EACH OVERVIEW MACHINE ..................................251 Screen Switching................................................... 384, 395 SCREEN SYSTEM OF THE i CELL ...........................383 ScreenID.ini ..................................................................400 Selecting Information to be Backed Up ........................104 Selecting Information to be Restored ............................108 SEND TEST..................................................................191 SETTING ......................................................................221 Setting Change and CIMPLICITY Project....................124 Setting Flow ..................................................................196 Setting for Sharing the Server PC (Required When Windows XP Is Used) ...................................................213 Setting Options..............................................................298 Setting the Connection Host.................................. 503, 528 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B AND Series 0i-B/C .............................497 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A .................................................................523 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000......81 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT ........86 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP.........76 SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-B .................................................................488 SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A .................................................................512 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions.......................489 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions.......................513 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, AND Series 0i-B/C........................................................483 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A...............................507 Setting the FTP file transfer function parameters..........493 Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions................ 493, 518 Setting the FTP Server .......................................... 498, 524 Setting the screen variables (screen level variables) .....393 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000.80 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT ...85 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP ...75 Setting up Communication.................................... 117, 133 SETTING UP DNC2.....................................................533
<R>
READER/PUNCHER ................................................... 542 Reader/Puncher Communication Setting ...................... 144 Referencing and Editing Connection Destination Files. 293 REFERENCING THE ACCESS DATABASE FROM EXCEL.......................................................................... 436 REFERENCING THE DATABASE............................. 435 Referencing the Database.............................................. 437 Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI Options and Upgrading the Functions ............................................... 480 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000................................. 82 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server ..................... 77 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT ................................... 89 REGISTERING USE OF CIMPLICITY ...................... 477 Registering Use of CIMPLICITY HMI Software ......... 477 RESTORATION ........................................................... 108 RunTimeAConfig - Machine Result Setting Table ....... 427 RunTimeAData - Machining Result Data Table ........... 427
<S>
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................ s-1 SAMPLE MACHINING RESULT SCREEN............... 445 SAMPLE WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SCREEN ....................................................................... 452 Saving the Backup Archive File.................................... 107 SCREEN ADDITION ................................................... 385 Screen Configuration .................................................... 383 SCREEN OPERATION ...................................... 236, 259, 316, 322, 334, 346, 368 SCREEN OPERATION (1) ALARM MESSAGE SCREEN ....................................................................... 374 SCREEN OPERATION (1) OVERVIEW SCREEN .... 249
i-4
B-75074EN/04
INDEX
<W>
Warning and Alarm Lamps ...........................................399 WEB..............................................................................192 WEB FUNCTION...........................................................66 WEB INITIAL CONFIGURATION.............................197 Web Screen Flow ..........................................................193 WKPCData - Workpieces Process Result Data Table...431 WKPCDspLastState - Machining End State Display Table .............................................................................434 WKPCDspMcnCnd - Progress Status Display Table ....433 WKPCLastStateConfig - Machining End ID Setting ....430 WKPCMcnName - Workpieces Process Result Setting Table .............................................................................429 WKPCPlan - Planned Workpiece Machining Count Setting Table .................................................................431 WKPCUserConfig - User Area ID Setting Table..........430 WKPCWorkName - Workpiece ID Setting Table.........430 Work Flows for Adding and Deleting Machines...........122 Work with the File List in the PC..................................262 Workpiece Machining Result Data .................................48 WORKPIECE MACHINING RESULTS .......................48 Workpiece Process Result .............................................165 WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS ...........................320 Workpieces Process Result ...........................................179 WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT ...........................429 WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................173
Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication.............. 134 SETTING UP FTP SERVER ........................................ 586 Setting up i CELL ......................................................... 118 SETTING UP IIS .......................................................... 573 Setting up Machine Information.................................... 117 Setting up NC Program Management............................ 117 Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT .... 87 SETTING UP PC .......................................................... 572 SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER............................ 534 Setting up the Number of Machines According to Order Password ............................................................. 115 Setting up the Number of Machines to be Connected and the Functions to be Used ........................................ 117 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000................................................................................. 79 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT ................................................................................... 84 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP ................................................................................... 74 SRAM Data Backup...................................................... 362 Starting Backup............................................................. 106 Starting Restoration....................................................... 109 Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project................... 125 Structure of Edit List File Screen .................................. 301 Structure of List File Monitor Screen............................ 309 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION ................... 36 SWITCHING AMONG THE SCREENS ..................... 239
<T>
TERMINATING THE i CELL PROJECT.................... 238 TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU .......................... 246 Timer processing procedures......................................... 450 Title Bar ........................................................................ 397 Tool Life ....................................................................... 181 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ............................... 55, 366 Trigger Point and Trigger Criteria................................. 183
<U>
UNINSTALLATION ............................................ 100, 101 Upload Tab.................................................................... 158 Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License .................. 481
<V>
VARIOUS DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION ........... 355
i-5
Revision Record
FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL OPERATORS MANUAL (B-75074EN)
04
Oct., 2004
- Applicable to Version 2.0 - Applied to Series 30i/31i/32i, and Series 0i, WindowsXP, and CIMPLICITY HMI v6.1 - Addition of explanations for functions to the NC program management screen
03
- Applicable to Version 1.3 - NC program management is applied to the Data Server (FTP server). Sep., 2003 - Addition of explanations related to Automatic data backup function - Addition of explanations related to User customization
02
- Applicable to Version 1.2 - Applied to DNC2 and Reader/Puncher connection Nov., 2002 - Addition of explanations to use on the CIMPLICITY viewer
01
Oct., 2001
Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Add explanation of Point Customization and CNC Communication Mode
1. Type of applied technical documents Name Spec.No./Version
FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-75074EN/04
2. Summary of change
Group
Name / Outline
New, Add, Correct, Delete
Applicable Date
Basic Function
Add the following addtions and collections - PREFACE - II. INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION - III . SETTING 2. BASIC FUNCTIONS - III. SETTING 2.4 PROJECT PROPERTY - V. USER CUSTOMIZE 2. ADDING SCREENS
Addition Correction
Immediately
Optional Function Unit Maintenance parts Notice Correction Another This document is available for A08B-9510-J920#EN version 2.1
TITLE:
FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL OPERATORS MANUAL B-75074EN/04-1

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
1/9
(1) Replace the following explanation of the "PREFACE"
PREFACE
This manual describes the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL that operates on a personal computer (called PC for short). The FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL is an application that runs on the CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition. Using the Ethernet, DNC2, reader/puncher, or Data Server communication function available with an CNC produced by FANUC, the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL transfers data such as NC programs between the CNC and personalcomputer. This manual is applicable to FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL Version 2.1.
(2) Replace the following explanation of the "Related manuals" in the "PREFACE"
Related manuals This manual also covers FANUC NCs, their communication functions, and CIMPLICITY related to the use of this software. However, this manual does not cover all required information. Refer to the following manuals in addition to this manual: (1) CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Online help
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
2/9
(3) Replace the following bitmap in item 1 of the "II.INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION"
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
3/9
(5) Replace the following explanation and bitmap in item 3 of the "II.INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION"
3.
On the installation component select screen, the buttons indicating the server and viewer components of the CIMPLICITY viewer are displayed. When you want to install i CELL on the server PC of the CIMPLICITY viewer or does not want to use the CIMPLICITY viewer, select the "server" component. When you want to install i CELL on the viewer PC of the CIMPLICITY viewer, select the "viewer" component. When you don't want to install i CELL and you want to create your specified screens and points, select "CNC Communication Mode"
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
4/9
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
5/9
(10) Replace the following bitmap in item 7 of the "II.INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION"
2
2.2.1
(11) Replace the following explanation of the "III. SETTING
2. BASIC FUNCTIONS"
BASIC FUNCTIONS
(--- 3rd paragraph ---) It is necessary to make it a development server temporarily by using OEM Key when a setting is changed when run time server of CIMPLICITY is used. Refer to the chapter "System management", in the CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition online help for the details of OEM Key.
(12) Add the following NOTE to the "III.SETTING 2.2.1 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box"
Opening the Configuration Dialog Box

To open the Configuration dialog box of i CELL, from the Windows Start menu, select Start, Program, CIMPLICITY i CELL, and Configuration. NOTE Please don't operate points or edit scripts on the CIMPLICITY workbench during iCELL setting screen is running.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
6/9
(13) Replace the following explanation and bitmap in the "III.SETTING 2.4 PROJECT PROPERTY"
2.4
PROJECT PROPERTY
Selecting Project from the menu bar of the Configuration dialog box, then Property from the Project menu displays the Project Property dialog box. < In case of i CELL > < In case of CNC communication mode >
This dialog box lets you make the settings related to the entire i CELL project and CNC communication mode.
Connect Machine Count Specify the number of machines you want to connect. You can specify as many machines as the total number of machines allowed for the available order passwords. The range of numbers you can enter is displayed to the right of the entry box. CAUTION It is impossible to include, as a target for deletion, any machine for which functions are enabled in i CELL settings. To include a machine as a target for deletion, make sure that all i CELL functions are disabled for the machine. It is impossible to include, as a target for deletion, any machine for which has points created by point customization. To include a machine as a target for deletion, make sure that there are no points which are created by point customization of the machine to delete.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
7/9
If you want to use any functions from NC Connection to Web in the i CELL project, turn on the corresponding check boxes to select the functions. The tree displays the setting items for the selected functions.
CNC Connection To transfer data between CIMPLICITY and the CNC, turn on this check box. Be sure to turn on the check box. Program Management i CELL Mail Web To perform program management on a PC, turn on this check box. Be sure to turn on the check box. To use i CELL, turn on this check box. Be sure to turn on the check box. To use the main function, turn on this check box. To use the Web function, turn on this check box. This item can be selected only on a Windows 2003 server, Windows 2000 server or Windows NT server. For a Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000Professional or Windows NT workstation, the Webfunction cannot be selected because it is unavailable.
Custom Point Point Name Rule Setting To use the Custom Points function, turn on this chek box. To use Point Name Rule Setting, turn on this chekbox. This check box is displayed ati CNC communication mode. Refer to the "V User Customize 6.4 Point Name Rule Setting" for details. Read Data from CNC This box lets you set the method of reading data from the CNC. Sequential Parallel Data is sequentially read for each CNC every reading cycle. Data is read at the same time for each CNC every reading cycle. Refer to the " V. USER CUSTOMIZE 5.5.1 Read Methods and Read Intervals - Parallel Process and Sequential Process " for details. Please check the "Parallel" when you use iCELL.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
8/9
Point Setting Notification
This box lets you set whether to enable the Point Setting Notification. The FOCAS2/Ethernet connection is required for this function. Use Don't use To use this function turn on this check box. To don't use this function turn on this check box. Refer to the " V. USER CUSTOMIZE 5.5.8.3 Point Setting Notification" for details. When you change this setting, please select the "Script" of the "Project" menu to display the "Init/Term scripts general setting" dialog. Then click <OK> button to set Point Setting Notification again.
Machine Number Format in Log
This box lets you set the machine number format in logs. Serial Number of Each Path Number of Each IP Address Sequential numbers for each CNCs system number are used. The machine of same Internet Protocol address assumes the same machine number, and Pxx (xx are system number) which shows the system number at the head of each log is added. Please refer to the "V. USER CUSTOMIZE 5.5.7 Log"
2
01
EDIT
(14) Replace the following explanation in the "V.USER CUSTOMIZE 2. ADDING SCREENS"
ADDING SCREENS
(--- 3rd paragraph ---) For details of operating the editor CimEdit for creating screens, refer to the "Screens" section of CIMPLICITY HMI online help.
TITLE:

SHEET
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
9/9

Add explanation of Point Customization and CNC Communication Mode
1.Type of applied technical documents Name Spec.No./Ed.

B-75074EN/04
2.Summary of Change New Add Correct Delete Add Applicable Date Immediately
Group
Name/Outline
Basic Function
The following explanations are added to Section V "USER CUSTOMIZATION" of B-75074EN/04. 5. Point Customization 6. CNC Communication Mode
Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another

This document is available for A08B-9510-J920#EN version 2.1
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
1/98

Add the following explanation after the section "V.USER CUSTOMIZATION 4.REFFERENCING THE DATABASE" of "B-75074EN/04". Index
5 5.1 POINT CUSTOMIZATION.............................................................................................................................................. 5 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................................................................. 5
5.1.1 5.1.2
5.2
Description of Point Customization ................................................................................................................ 5 Communicable Data ........................................................................................................................................ 6

POINT SETTING..................................................................................................................................................... 7
5.2.1
5.2.1.1 5.2.1.2
Read intervals.................................................................................................................................................. 7
Display ...................................................................................................................................................... 8 Setting....................................................................................................................................................... 8
5.2.2
5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.2.2.3
Point List ....................................................................................................................................................... 11

Display .................................................................................................................................................... 11 Creating new points ............................................................................................................................... 11 Editing, deletion, renaming, and duplication........................................................................................ 16
5.2.3
5.2.3.1 5.2.3.2 5.2.3.3 5.3
Point Group.................................................................................................................................................... 21
Display .................................................................................................................................................... 21 Creating new point group control points............................................................................................... 21 Editing, deletion, and renaming ............................................................................................................ 24
CIMPLICITY SCRIPT SETTING ......................................................................................................................... 27
5.3.1 5.3.2
5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2
Initiation and Termination Scripts............................................................................................................... 27 Setting............................................................................................................................................................ 28

Init/Term Scripts General Settings ....................................................................................................... 29 Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings .......................................................................................................... 31
5.3.3
5.4
Settings in the Initialization/Termination Scripts....................................................................................... 35

POINTS FOR DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ................................................................................................................ 39
5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7

5.5
PMC Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 39 Custom Macro Variables ............................................................................................................................... 43 Parameters..................................................................................................................................................... 45 Alarm Numbers ............................................................................................................................................. 47 Alarm Types................................................................................................................................................... 49 Number of Operator's Message..................................................................................................................... 51 Operator's Message Strings .......................................................................................................................... 53
CNC CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 55
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
2/98
5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6
Read Methods and Read Intervals - Parallel Process and Sequential Process .......................................... 55 Write Methods and Write Intervals.............................................................................................................. 57 Point Group.................................................................................................................................................... 57 CNC Power Status Monitor Function........................................................................................................... 58 Reconnection Function in the Event of a Communication Error in Read/Write Processes ....................... 59 Reconnection Function in the Initialization Process during CNC Connection Initiation and in the Power
ON Initialization Process ................................................................................................................................................... 61 5.5.7

5.5.7.1 5.5.7.2 5.5.7.3 5.5.7.4
Logs ................................................................................................................................................................ 61
PWRLOG CNC power status .............................................................................................................. 62 CPULOG Progress of internal processing .......................................................................................... 63 RTLOG CNC data read and point write time .................................................................................... 63 NCRTLOG CNC data read process time ............................................................................................ 65
5.5.8
5.5.8.1 5.5.8.2 5.5.8.3 5.5.8.4 5.5.8.5 5.5.8.6 5.5.8.7 5.5.8.8 5.5.8.9
CNC Connection Control Points ................................................................................................................... 66

Result Point ............................................................................................................................................ 66 End Point ................................................................................................................................................ 67 Point Setting Notification Point............................................................................................................. 67 Error message storage point .................................................................................................................. 69 Power status monitor point.................................................................................................................... 69 Communication enable instruction point .............................................................................................. 70 Communication status monitor point.................................................................................................... 70 Communication reconnection instruction point .................................................................................... 71 Point Group Control Point ..................................................................................................................... 71
5.5.9
6 6.1
CNC Connection Termination....................................................................................................................... 72
CNC COMMUNICATION MODE ................................................................................................................................. 73 OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................................................ 73
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3

6.2
Description of CNC Communication Mode................................................................................................... 73 Comparison between i CELL and CNC Communication Mode ................................................................... 74 Procedure for Using CNC Communication Mode ........................................................................................ 75
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT............................................................................................................................ 76
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5

6.3
Available CNCs.............................................................................................................................................. 76 Ethernet Boards and CNC Options .............................................................................................................. 76 Network Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 76 Number of CNCs Connected ......................................................................................................................... 76 CIMPLICITY HMI ........................................................................................................................................ 76
INSTALLATION AND ORDER PASSWORD REGISTRATION ........................................................................ 77
6.3.1 6.3.2
6.3.2.1 6.3.2.2
Installation..................................................................................................................................................... 77 Registering an Order Password .................................................................................................................... 77

Creating target projects ......................................................................................................................... 77 Registering an order password .............................................................................................................. 78
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
3/98
6.4
POINT NAME RULE SETTING........................................................................................................................... 80
6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3

6.4.3.1 6.4.3.2 6.4.3.3
Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 80 Point Name Rules of CNC Communication Mode........................................................................................ 81 Using Point Name Rule Setting.................................................................................................................... 83
Enabling and disabling the Point Name Rule Setting Function .......................................................... 83 Displaying the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box............................................................................. 85 Setting point name rules........................................................................................................................ 86
6.4.4
6.4.4.1
Setting Examples........................................................................................................................................... 98
Using the point name rules of another project...................................................................................... 98
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
4/98
5
5.1
5.1.1
POINT CUSTOMIZATION
This chapter describes how to add CIMPLICITY points for inputting new CNC data to and outputting it from i CELL. This function can be used in i CELL 2.1 or later.
OVERVIEW
Description of Point Customization
Point Customization is a function for creating CIMPLICITY points necessary for performing communication with a CNC by using the function for communication with a CNC (CNC CONNECTION). It can be used in i CELL or in CNC Communication Mode, which is one of the operating modes of i CELL. For an explanation of CNC Communication Mode, see chapter 6, "CNC COMMUNICATION MODE". Point Customization can be used in i CELL 2.1 or later only if the FOCAS1/Ethernet or FOCAS2/Ethernet is used. For an explanation of the operating environment to be assumed if the FOCAS1/Ethernet or FOCAS2/Ethernet is used, refer to "When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Part I, "General", in the i CELL Operator's Manual. Also, a CIMPLICITY HMI development server is required. (The FOCAS2/Ethernet contains the functions of the FOCAS1/Ethernet, and the FOCAS1/Ethernet and the FOCAS2/Ethernet are collectively referred to as the FOCAS2/Ethernet throughout the remainder of this document.) Point Customization can be configured with the "Custom Point" tree in the i CELL Configuration dialog box, shown below.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
5/98
5.1.2
Communicable Data
By setting points using Point Customization, it is possible to communicate data of the kinds given in the table below with a CNC. It should be noted that a CNC requires an option to communicate some kinds of data. For details of each data kind, see Section 5.4, "POINTS FOR DATA INPUT/OUTPUT".
No 1 2 3 4
Data kind PMC data Custom macro variable Parameter Alarm number Alarm type
Valid data range G,F,X,Y,R,A,T,K, C,D,M,N,E Local variable Common variable Axis/non-axis Axis/non-axis
Reading O O O O O
Writing O X O O X
Option that a CNC requires
Custom macro (custom macro B) option
Number of operator's message Operator's message strings
1st to 4th messages
External message function or external data input function option For an explanation of the CNC editions for enabling the 2nd to 4th messages in the Series 16i /18i /21i, see Subsection 5.4.6, "Number of Operator's Message". The function for the Series 30i /31i /32i A is under development.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
6/98
5.2
POINT SETTING
This section describes how to set CIMPLICITY points using Point Customization. The basic procedure for setting points is as follows: <1> Set read intervals. (See Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals".) <2> Create points. (See Subsection 5.2.2, "Point List".) <3> Set points. (See Subsection 5.2.2, "Point List".) <4> Create Point Group Control Points. (See Subsection 5.2.3, "Point Group".) <5> Set Point Group Control Points. (See Subsection 5.2.3, "Point Group". If you add or change a point to i CELL, please terminate i CELL Configuration dialog box, then execute "iCELL Project" from the start menu, then execute [Configuration Update] from the [Project] menu.
5.2.1
Read intervals
This subsection describes how to set the intervals at which to read CIMPLICITY point data from CNCs. There are two methods of reading, a parallel process and a sequential process. In a parallel process, read instructions are issued to each CNC at the same time at each read interval. This can shorten the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but will increase the CPU load at the peak of the read process. In a sequential process, read instructions are issued to one CNC at a time at each read interval. This will increase the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but can keep the increases in CPU load low at the peak of the read process. For a parallel process, three different read intervals can be set for each CNC; for a sequential process, three different read intervals common to all CNCs can be set. No matter which process is used, the read interval settings will have a great impact on CPU load. Care must be exercised so that the read interval settings are sufficiently large as compared with the time required to actually read data from CNCs to prevent the CPU utilization at the peak of the process from reaching 100%. For details of the read methods, see Subsection 5.5.1, "Read Methods and Read Intervals - Parallel Process and Sequential Process". The time required to actually read from CNCs can be output to a log. For an explanation of how to do this, see Subsection 5.3.2, "Setting"; for details, see Subsection 5.5.7.3, "RTLOG CNC data read and point write time".
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
7/98
5.2.1.1
Display
From the tree on the left-hand side of the i CELL Configuration dialog box, select [Custom Point]>[Read Interval], and the read interval list will appear. For a parallel process, a list of the read intervals for each CNC is displayed; for a sequential process, the read intervals (up to three different intervals) common to all CNCs are displayed. <Display shown for a parallel process> <Display shown for a sequential process>
5.2.1.2
Setting
This subsection describes how to set read intervals. The setting procedure can be started by first displaying a read interval list, described in Subsection 5.2.1.1, "Display".
Changing read intervals

<1> Use either of the following methods to display the Read Interval dialog box: Select the record to be changed, then select [Property] from the [Edit] menu. Double-click the record to be changed. <2> Set a numeric value and a unit, and click the <OK> button. <Display shown for a parallel process>
Numeric value
<Display shown for a sequential process>
Unit
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
8/98
Number
Number of the machine for which a read interval is to be changed. This item is displayed for a parallel process only. Name of the machine for which a read interval is to be changed. This item is displayed for a parallel process only. Intervals at which CNC Connection reads values from machines. If i CELL is used, Interval 1 and Interval 2 cannot be changed. Set a numeric value in the range permitted for the unit selected. 10 millisecond Second Minute Hour 0-999 0-999 0-999 0-99
Name
Interval 1 - 3
<Multiple Machines> Button
Used to apply the settings for the current machine to other machines. Clicking this button causes a dialog box to appear, allowing the read interval settings to be applied to multiple machines. This item is displayed for a parallel process only.
Applying read intervals to multiple machines

For a parallel process, it is possible to set the same settings for multiple machines, using the method described below. <1> Use either of the following methods to display the Read Interval dialog box: Select the record of the machine whose read interval settings are to be applied, and select [Property] from the [Edit] menu. Double-click the record of the machine whose read interval settings are to be applied. <2> Click the <Multiple Machines> button to display the Apply Read Interval for all machines dialog box. <3> From the Applicable Machines list, select a machine to which the same settings are to be applied, and click the <Add> button. <4> The selected machine is added to the Target Machines list. <5> Click the <OK> button.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
9/98
Applicable Machines Taget Machines <Add> Button
List of machines to which the settings can be applied. List of machines to which the settings are to be actually applied. Used to add a machine selected from the Applicable Machines list to the Target Machines list. Used to add all the machines in the Applicable Machines list to the Target Machines list. Used to delete a machine selected from the Target Machines list from the list. When deleted from the list, the machine will be added to the Applicable Machines list. Used to delete all the machines in the Target Machines list from the list. When deleted from the list, the machines will be added to the Applicable Machines list.
<Add All> Button <Delete> Button
<Delete All> Button
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
10/98
5.2.2
Point List
Point List is used to create CIMPLICITY points for data input/output and to make various settings. NOTE Those points that are in use with i CELL cannot be edited, deleted, renamed, duplicated, or duplicated to other machines.
5.2.2.1
Display
From the tree on the left-hand side of the i CELL Configuration dialog box, select [Custom Point]>[Point List], and the Point List window will appear. Various operations can be started by displaying this window first.
5.2.2.2
Creating new points

This subsection describes how to create new points for data input/output. The procedure can be started by first displaying the Point List window, described in Subsection 5.2.2.1, "Display".
Use one of the following methods to display the Create Point dialog box: From the [Edit] menu, select [New]. Select the last record (blank record), and select [Property] from [Edit]. Double-click the last record (blank record). <2> Make the setting for each item (referring to [Create Point]), and click the <Create> button. <3> The Point Property dialog box appears. <4> Make the setting for each item (referring to [Point Property]), and click the <OK> button.
<1>
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
11/98
[Create Point]
Communication
Machine Path Point Name
Name of the machine for which to create a point. Path of the machine for which to create a point. Name of the point to create. Set the character string to follow "FNCxxxyy.U_" (where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path number). A string of 32 characters including "FNCxxxyy.U_" can be set. Data kind of the point to create. Available kinds are PMC data, custom macro variable, parameter, alarm number/type, and number of operator's message/operator's message string. Data class of the point to create. Available classes are Boolean, Analog, and Text. Depending on the data kind selected, some data classes may not be selectable. Indicates the status of communication with CNCs. Used to create a set point.
Data Kind
Data Class
Communication <Create> Button
NOTE When the Create Point dialog box is displayed and a machine is selected, the power status of the machine is checked. For operation with the setting that suppresses the use of a C4 server, if the power of the machine is OFF, it takes the FwLib time-out time, set in [Communication setting], to check the power status. If it is obvious that the power of the machine is OFF, the power status check time can be shortened by enabling a C4 server when creating a point and disabling a C4 server when actually communicating with the machine.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
12/98
[Point Property]
Communication Data range check
Detailed setting area
Point Name
Name of the point to create. The value set in the Create Point dialog box is displayed. Data kind of the point to create. The value set in the Create Point dialog box is displayed. Data class of the point to create. The value set in the Create Point dialog box is displayed. Allows description of the point to create. Select from Interval 1, Interval 2, and Interval 3. For an explanation of setting each interval, see Subsection 5.2.1.2, "Setting". Data type of the point to create. Selectable data types are BOOL, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, and REAL. Depending on the data class selected, some data types may not be selectable. For the BOOL type only, allows specification of the bit to be referenced with a number between 0 and 7. For other types, set the bit
Data Kind
Data Class
Description Read Interval
Data Type
Bit Offset
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
13/98
offset to 0. Elements NOTE1 Read Only NOTE1 Specify the number of data elements to read and write. For the BOOL type, specify 1 or a multiple of 8. Place a check to make the point read only. Do not place a check to make it read-and-write enabled. Depending on the data kind selected, the point can only be made read only. Make detailed settings for creating a point. Depending on the data kind selected, the items that can be set differ. Specify whether to use the Default Point Group. If the Default Point Group is used, when a point is created, it is automatically set in the Default Point Group. If the Default Point Group is not used, it is necessary to set a Point Group with point group setting. Indicates the status of communication with CNCs. If "Com.Enable" is displayed, a data range check is performed when a point is created (when the <OK> button is clicked) (Data Range Check:Enable). If "Com. Disable" is displayed, the data range check is not performed (Data Range Check:Disable). Indicates whether a data range check is enabled. If "Enable" is indicated, the system communicates with CNCs when the <OK> button is clicked to check whether the data is in the valid data range. If it is outside the valid data range, an error message such as the one on the next page will be displayed. When the power of a CNC is turned on, clicking this button allows the communication status to be checked. This button is displayed only if the settings are such that a C4 server is not used and the power is OFF.
Detailed setting area
Use Default Point Group
Communication
Data range check NOTE2
<Check Com.> Button
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
14/98
For details of each item, see Section 5.4, "POINTS FOR DATA INPUT/OUTPUT". NOTE1 If a point is made read-and-write enabled and a value other than 1 is set for Elements, when the value of any element is changed, the values of all elements are written to the CNC. For data elements that need to be written individually, set them at separate points and set 1 for Elements. NOTE2 If [Com. Status] indicates Com. Disable, the data range check is not performed, so that points may be created with invalid CNC settings. Be sure to create points after checking that communication is enabled. If creating a point when communication with CNCs is not possible, use the following procedure to perform a point data range check again before communicating with CNCs: (1) Select the point to check, select [Property] from the [Edit] menu to display the Point Property dialog box. (2) Check that [Data Range Check] indicates "Enable" before clicking the <OK> button.
Data range check:
Error example If a data range check detects an error, an error message such as the following is displayed. In this example, 10 data elements are set in addresses starting with PMC R9990.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
15/98
5.2.2.3
Editing, deletion, renaming, and duplication

This subsection describes each of editing, deletion, renaming, and duplication operations. Each operation can be started by first displaying the Point List window, described in Subsection 5.2.2.1, "Display". NOTE Those points that have been set in the mail and Web functions cannot be deleted or renamed. Also, those points that have been set in the formulas for other points, etc. cannot be edited,
Editing
Change the settings of a point as follows: <1> Use either of the following methods to display the Point Property dialog box: Select the point to edit, and select [Property] from the [Edit] menu. Double-click the point to edit. <2> Change settings as desired, and click the <OK> button. For an explanation of each item, see [Point Property] in Subsection 5.2.2.2, "Creating new points".
Deletion
Delete a point as follows: Select the point to delete, and select [Delete] from the [Edit] menu.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
16/98
Deleting multiple points

Delete multiple points at a time as follows: <1> From the [Edit] menu, select [Multi Delete]. <2> The Delete multiple points dialog box appears. delete, and click the <OK> button.
Select the points to
List of Points Search <Select All> Button <Unselect All> Button
List of points that can be deleted. Specify the condition for the points that can be displayed on the list of points. Used to select all the points contained in the list of points. Used to unselect all the points selected in the list of points.
Renaming
Rename a point as follows: <1> From the [Edit] menu, select [Rename]. <2> The ReName Point dialog box appears. Enter a new name and click the <OK> button.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
17/98
Original Name New Name
Point to rename. New name for the point. Set the character string to follow "FNCxxxyy.U_" (where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path number). A string of up to 32 characters including "FNCxxxyy.U_" can be set.
Duplication
Copy a point to the same machine as follows: <1> Select the point to copy, and from the [Edit] menu, select [Duplicate]. <2> The Duplicate Point dialog box appears. In the To field, enter a point name, and click the <OK> button.
From To
Name of the source point. Name of the point to be newly created by duplication. Set the character string to follow "FNCxxxyy.U_" (where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path number). A string of up to 32 characters including "FNCxxxyy.U_" can be set. Specify whether to use the Default Point Group. If the Default Point Group is used, when a point is created, it is automatically set in the Default Point Group. If the Default Point Group is not used, it is necessary to set a Point Group with point group setting.
Duplicating to other machines

It is possible to duplicate a point to other machines, with the same name and the same settings. In the name, the xxx (machine number) of "FNCxxxyy.U_..." is changed to the machine number of the machine to which the point is copied.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
18/98
<1> Select the point to duplicate to other machines, and from the [Edit] menu, select [Dup. to other Mcn]. <2> The Dup. to other Mcn dialog box appears. Select the machine(s) to which the point is to be copied, and click the <OK> button.
Applicable Machines
List of machines to which the point can be copied. Communication statuses are also displayed. If a communication status is not displayed, this indicates that the power of the machine is ON and the point settings are appropriate. Communication statuses are as follows: Switched Off Com. Disable Out of range Data Type Error Sign Error The power is OFF. Communication has failed. The point settings are not appropriate. The data type is not appropriate. The sign of the data type is not appropriate.
Target Machines
List of machines to which the point will actually be copied. The communication statuses are also displayed. The communication statuses are the same as those displayed with applicable machines. Specify whether to use the Default Point Group. If the Default Point Group is used, when a point is created, it is automatically set in the Default Point Group. If the Default Point Group is not used, it is necessary to set a Point Group with point group setting.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
19/98
NOTE The point is duplicated as that a point on the same path. not possible to copy it as that on a different path. Example) Machine 1 (path 3), machine 2 (path 1), machine 3 (path 4) O: Duplication enabled, X: Duplication disabled A. Duplication from machine 1 to machine 2 Machine 1 (path 3) Machine 2 (path 1) Point on path 1 O Point on path 2 X Point on path 3 X B. Duplication from machine 1 to machine 3 Machine 1 (path 3) Machine 3 (path 4) Point on path 1 O Point on path 2 O Point on path 3 O
It is
NOTE When a point is edited or is duplicated to other machines, the power status of the machine is checked. For operation with the setting that suppresses the use of a C4 server, if the power of the machine is OFF, it takes the FwLib time-out time to check the power status (for duplication to other machines, FwLib time-out time multiplied by the number of machines to which the point is to be copied). If it is obvious that the power of the machine is OFF, the power status check time can be shortened by enabling a C4 server when creating a point and disabling a C4 server when actually communicating with the machine.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
20/98
5.2.3
Point Group
Multiple points grouped together are referred to as a Point Group. By using the Point Group function to set a group of points for constant reading and another group of points for reading only when necessary, it is possible to reduce network load. A Point Group must have a single BOOL type point corresponding to it. This point is called the Point Group Control Point. While the value of this control point is True, reading from the points in the group is performed. If the value of the control point is False, reading from the points in the group is not performed. Multiple Point Groups may be set. Reading from points not in a Point Group is not performed; all points from which to read data must be set in a Point Group. For details of Point Groups, see Subsection 5.5.3, "Point Group".
5.2.3.1
Display
From the tree on the left-hand side of the i CELL Configuration dialog box, select [Custom Point]>[Point Group], and a list of Point Group Control Points appears.
5.2.3.2
Creating new point group control points

This subsection describes how to create new Point Group Control Points. The procedure can be started by first displaying the list of Point Group Control Points, described in Subsection 5.2.3.1, "Display". <1> Use one of the following methods to display the Create Point Group Control Point dialog box: From the [Edit] menu, select [New]. Select the last record (blank record), and select [Property] from the [Edit] menu. Double-click the last record (blank record).
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
21/98
<2>
Make the setting for each item (referring to [Create Point Group Control Point]), and click the <Create> button. <3> The Point Group dialog box appears. <4> Add the points to be set with the control point to be created to the Target Point area, and click the <OK> button.
[Create Point Group Control Point]
Machine
Name of the machine for which to create a control point. To create a control point common to machines, select "Common". Path of the machine for which to create a control point. The path cannot be changed. If "Common" is selected for Machine, nothing is displayed. Name of the control point to create. If a machine is selected for Machine, set "FNCxxx01.U_"; if Common is selected, set the character string to follow "FNCSYSP.U_" (where xxx is a machine number). A string of 32 characters including "FNCxxx01.U_" or "FNCSYSP.U_" can be set. Data class of the control point to create. Boolean is selected.
Path
Point Name
Data Class
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
22/98
[Point Group]
Control Point
Name of the control point. The name set in the Create Point Group Control Point dialog box is displayed. Allows description of the point to be created. Initial value of the control point. Specify 0 or 1. If the value of the control point is 1 (True), reading from the points in the group with the control point is performed. If the value is 0 (False), reading from the points in the group is not performed. Displays a list of points that can be set with the control point. Those points that have already been set with other control points are not displayed. Specify the condition for the points that can be displayed in the Applicable Point area. Displays a list of points to be set with the control point. Number of points to be set with the control point.
Description Initial Value
Applicable Point
Search Target Point User Point Count
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
23/98
i CELLPoint (reference)
Displays a list of i CELL points currently set with the control point. No points are displayed if a new control point is to be created. Points are displayed only if i CELL is used. Displays the number of i CELL points currently set with the control point. 0 if a new control point is to be created. A number is displayed only if i CELL is used.
i CELL Point Count
5.2.3.3
Editing, deletion, and renaming

This subsection describes each of editing, deletion, and renaming operations. Each operation can be started by first displaying a list of Point Group Control Points, described in Subsection 5.2.3.1, "Display". NOTE 1 The default control point (control point for use with i CELL) cannot be deleted or renamed. 2 Those control points that have been set in the mail and Web functions and in the formulas for other points, etc. cannot be deleted or renamed.
Editing
Change the points currently set with a control point as follows: <1> Use either of the following methods to display the Point Group dialog box: Select the control point to edit, and select [Property] from the [Edit] menu. Double-click the control point to edit. <2> Change settings as desired. <3> Click the <OK> button.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
24/98
Control Point Description Initial Value
Name of the control point. Allows description of the control point. Initial value of the control point. Specify 0 or 1. If the value of the control point is 1 (True), reading from the points in the group with the control point is performed. If the value is 0 (False), reading from the points in the group is not performed. Displays a list of points that can be set with the control point. Those points that have already been set with other control points are not displayed. Specify the condition for the points that can be displayed in the Applicable Point area. Displays a list of points to be set with the control point. Those points that have already been set are also displayed. Number of points to be set with the control point. Displays a list of i CELL points currently set
Applicable Point
Search Target Point
User Point Count i CELL Point
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
25/98
(reference) i CELL Point Count
with the control point. Points are displayed only if i CELL is used. Displays the number of i CELL points currently set with the control point to be set. A number is displayed only if i CELL is used.
Deletion
Delete control points as follows: Select the control point to delete, and from the [Edit] menu, select [Delete].
Renaming
Rename control points as follows: <1> From the [Edit] menu, select [Rename] to display the ReName Point dialog box.
<2>
Enter a new name, and click the <OK> button. Point to rename. New name for the point. Set the character string to follow "FNCxxxyy.U_" (where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path number). A string of up to 32 characters including "FNCxxxyy.U_" can be set.
Original Name New Name
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
26/98
5.3
CIMPLICITY SCRIPT SETTING

Initiation and termination of CNC Connection must be linked to the initiation and termination of the target program. Linking requires that appropriate settings be made in the two scripts of CIMPLICITY, em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl. Making various settings in the [Script] dialog box in the Configuration dialog box causes the settings to be reflected in em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl. This section describes how to make settings in the [Script] dialog box. It also describes how to set various options of CNC Connection. NOTE 1 When i CELL is used, there is no need to make settings in particular because the settings in CIMPLICITY scripts have already been made. Except if the settings of point setting completion notification points have been changed and except for special cases, it is recommended that the settings be left unchanged. 2 If CNC Communication Mode is used for the first time, the initiation and termination of CNC Connection are not linked to the initiation and termination of the target project because settings have not been made in CIMPLICITY scripts. Be sure to make settings in CIMPLICITY scripts.
5.3.1
em_init.bcl
Initiation and Termination Scripts
This script is automatically executed when the project is initiated. The initiation process for CNC Connection is inserted there. The setting file and various options for use with CNC Connection are also set there. Clicking the <OK> button in the [Script] dialog box causes the settings to be inserted into em_init.bcl as a script. The settings that have been written before the insertion remain unchanged. For information on customizing em_init.bcl, see Subsection 5.3.3, "Settings in the Initialization/Termination Scripts". When CNC Connection is started, the icon shown below appears in the task bar.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
27/98
em_term.bcl
This script is automatically executed when the project is terminated. The termination process for CNC Connection is set there. Clicking the <OK> button in the [Script] dialog box causes the settings to be inserted into em_term.bcl as scripts. The settings that have been written before the insertion remain unchanged. For information on customizing em_term.bcl, see Subsection 5.3.3, "Settings in the Initialization/Termination Scripts".
5.3.2
Setting
With the procedure below, it is possible to make settings in em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl and set various options for CNC Connection. <1> From the [Project] menu in the i CELL Configuration dialog box, select [Script] to start the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window. <2> Make the setting for each item (referring to Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term Scripts General Settings"). <3> Click the <Detail> button to start the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window. <4> Make the setting for each item (referring to Subsection 5.3.2.2, "Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings"), and click the <OK> button. <5> The Init/Term Scripts General Settings window reappears. Click the <OK> button to exit from the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window. NOTE If settings are changed, exit from the setting session by clicking the <OK> button in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window. If the setting session is exited by clicking the <Cancel> button in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window, all changes (including any changes made in the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window) will be canceled, preventing them from being reflected in the scripts.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
28/98
5.3.2.1
Init/Term Scripts General Settings

This subsection describes each of the items that can be set in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window. This subsection also describes whether the settings can be changed in i CELL and in CNC Communication Mode.
Item 1.
Init script File File name of the CIMPLICITY initiation script. The setting cannot be changed in i CELL or CNC Communication Mode.
Item 2.
Term script File File name of the CIMPLICITY termination script. The setting cannot be changed in i CELL or CNC Communication Mode.
Item 3.
Comm. setting File Name of the setting file for CNC Connection. i CELL: CNCSetting.txt (cannot be changed) CNC Communication Mode: CimVrtlCnc.cfg (cannot be changed)
Item 4. Project Target project name. The setting cannot be changed in i CELL or CNC Communication Mode. Item 5. Result Point Name of the initiation result storage point. i CELL: Cannot be changed.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
29/98
CNC Communication Mode: Any point name may be used. If the specified point does not exist in the target project, the point will be created when the Configuration dialog box is exited. For details, see Subsection 5.5.8.1, "Result Point". Default = FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS Item 6. End Point Point for termination instructions. i CELL: Cannot be changed. CNC Communication Mode: Any point name may be used. If the specified point does not exist in the target project, the point will be created when the Configuration dialog box is exited. For details, see Subsection 5.5.8.2, "End Point". The default is FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END. Item 7. Point Setting Notification Point for point setting completion notification. A name is displayed only if the Point Setting Notification Function is used. i CELL: Cannot be changed. CNC Communication Mode: Any point name may be used. If the specified point does not exist in the target project, the point will be created when the Configuration dialog box is exited. For details, see Subsection 5.5.8.3, "Point Setting Notification Point". The default is FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY. <Detail> Button Used to make detailed settings. See Subsection 5.3.2.2, "Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings". <Default> Button Used to change all items in the initialization/termination scripts (including those in the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window) to their defaults.
NOTE It is not possible to delete any of Result Point, End Point, and Point Setting Notification newly created in this window from the Configuration dialog box. If they need to be deleted, delete them from the CIMPLICITY Workbench.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
30/98
5.3.2.2
Group 1
Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings

This subsection describes each of the items that can be set in the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window. The items are divided into Groups 1 and 2.
Item 1.
C4 Server Host name of the C4 server. Default = 127.0.0.1
Item 2.
Retry Interval Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if a communication error occurs in the initialization process or in reading/writing during initiation or if initialization fails when the power is switched from OFF to ON. Default = 30000
Item 3.
Additional time to the terminal process timer Additional time (ms) to the terminal process timer. Default = 5000
Item 4.
Terminal waiting time of communication thread Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of a communication thread. Default = 180000 NOTE
Item 5.
Terminal waiting time of dialog thread Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of a dialog thread. Default = 5000
Item 6.
Terminal waiting time of log thread
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
31/98
Terminal waiting time (ms) of a log thread. Default = 5000 Item 7. Retry interval in busy case Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if a write process is busy. Default = 1000 Item 8. Retry number in busy case Number of retries to be assumed if a write process is busy. Default = 2 <Default (Only Detail)> Button Used to change all items (of groups 1 and 2) in the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window to their defaults. This does not change the items in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window. NOTE The time required for a termination process varies depending on the number of CNCs connected. If the following message appears during termination, it is possible that the termination process is not completed in the default timeover time.
If this occurs, change the setting of Terminal waiting time of communication thread (item 4). Also, the following are recorded in the CimVrtlCnc Error Log: Example 1: There is no response of the completion of end preparation from a [thread-name]. Example 2: End Processing of [thread name] went wrong. Example 3: There is no response from a [thread-name]. (ErrNo.0x???.0x?) where [thread-name] is replaced by one of the following character st rings: Point setting thread Point change surveillance thread Power supply check thread Writing thread Reading thread (1) Reading thread (2) Reading thread (3)
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
32/98
Group 2
Item 1.
Check PWE of CNC on writing parameter Whether to the CNC parameter write enable setting when changing the values of CNC parameters from a personal computer. Check placed: Check Check not placed: Not check (default)
Item 2.
Log power status of CNC (PWRLOG) Whether to output CNC power ON/OFF status changes to the log. Check placed: Output (default) Check not placed: Not output For details of the log, see Subsection 5.5.7.1, "PWRLOG CNC power status".
Item 3.
Log Internal progress (CPULOG) Whether to output the log for checking the progress of internal processing. Check placed: Output Check not placed: Not output (Default) For details of the log, see Subsection 5.5.7.2, "CPULOG Progress of internal processing".
Item 4.
Log real read time (RTLOG) Whether to output the real read process time for each CNC and for each read interval (time required to read CNC data and time required to write to a point) to the log. Check placed: Output Check not placed: Not output (default)
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
33/98
For details of the log, see Subsection "5.5.7.3, "RTLOG CNC data read and point write time" Item 5. Log CNC read time (NCRTLOG) Whether to output the read process time for each CNC and for each read interval to the log. Check placed: Output Check not placed: Not output (default) For details of the log, see Subsection 5.5.7.4, "NCRTLOG CNC data read process time". Item 6. Change the point value *** when error Whether to set the value of a point to an invalid value (***) in the event of a communication error. Check placed: Set it to an invalid value (default) Check not placed: Not set it to an invalid value Item 7. Exclusive control in getting FOCAS2/Ethernet library handle Whether to execute exclusive control in getting a FOCAS2/Ethernet library handle. Check placed: Execute exclusive control Check not placed: Not execute exclusive control (default) Item 8. Write the value of CNC to CIMPLICITY on every time How to write the values read from the CNC to CIMPLICITY points. Check placed: Write every time Check not placed: Write only when values differ (default) <Default (Only Detail)> Button Used to change all items (of groups 1 and 2) in the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window to their defaults. This does not change the items in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window.
NOTE Creating a log causes communication processing speed to decrease. Set the log creation options only if required; usually, refrain from creating logs other than those created by default.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
34/98
5.3.3
Settings in the Initialization/Termination Scripts

Clicking the <OK> button in the [Script] dialog box causes the settings to be written to em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl. This subsection describes these settings. This subsection should be read only if em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl need to be customized in CNC Communication Mode. If i CELL is used, this subsection need not be read for proper operation. The settings made in the [Script] dialog box are inserted into em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl, as described below. Insertion start position The system searches for the lines "' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>>" and "' <<FConfig.exe Script End>>" and, if they exist, replaces the portion between them with the settings. If they do not exist, the system inserts the settings at the line subsequent to Sub Main(). Settings to be inserted ' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>> ...Initiation/termination processes for CNC Connection that have been set in the [Script] dialog box... ' <<FConfig.exe Script End>> The part between "' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>>" and "' <<FConfig.exe Script End>>" is overwritten with the settings. The other part will remain unchanged.
Initiation process for CNC Connection that is written to em_init.bcl em_init.bcl can contain the following scripts for the initiation of CNC Connection. (Some are written on more than one line.) The "Argument No." column indicates the item numbers in "Command line arguments of CNC Connection" on the next page.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
35/98
Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 19
Initiation process for CNC Connection that is written to em_init.bcl Argument Script Description No ' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>> Insertion start comment Dim FNC_TaskID As Long Variable declaration Dim FNC_Process As Long Variable declaration Dim FNC_ExeData as String Variable declaration Dim FNC_InstallDir as String Variable declaration Dim FNC_ProjectDir as String Variable declaration FNC_InstallDir = i CELL installation directory "C:Program FilesFANUCiCELL" FNC_ProjectDir = Environ$("SITE_ROOT") PointSet End Point initialization "FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END", 0 FNC_ExeData = Command line arguments are crated on the 11th FNC_InstallDir + to 16th lines. "binCIMVrtlCNC.exe 1 Communication setting file name /F=" + FNC_ProjectDir + 2 Project name "CimVrtlCnc.cfg /P=CIMPROJECT" FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData + " /PWE=1 3 Check PWE of CNC on writing parameter = Yes /C4=127.0.0.1 4 C4 Server /R= FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS 5 Result Point /Q= FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END" 6 End Point FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData + " /PWRLOG=1 7 Log power status of CNC (PWRLOG) = Yes /CPULOG=0 8 Log Internal progress (CPULOG) = No /RTLOG=0 9 Log real read time (RTLOG) = No /NCRTLOG=0" 10 Log CNC read time (NCRTLOG) = No FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData + " /RUNFALIB=0 11 (None) /EVERYWRITE=0 12 Write the value of CNC to CIMPLICITY on /RETRY=30000 13 every time=No /KEEPOLD=0" 14 Retry Interval Change the point value *** when error = Yes FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData + " /TIMEOUT1=5000 15 Additional time to the terminal process timer /TIMEOUT2=180000 16 Terminal waiting time of communication thread /TIMEOUT3=5000 17 Terminal waiting time of dialog thread /TIMEOUT4=5000" 18 Terminal waiting time of log thread FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData + " /EXCLUSIVEFWLIB=0 19 Exclusive control in getting FOCAS2/Ethernet /WRETRY=1000 library handle = No /WRETRYNUM=2" 20 Retry interval in busy case 21 Retry number in busy case FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData + " /PSET_NOTIFY= 22 Point Setting Notification name (only if a Point FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY" Setting Notification Point is used) FNC_TaskID = Shell(FNC_ExeData) Initiation of CNC Connection ' <<FConfig.exe Script End>> Insertion end comment
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
36/98
Command line arguments of CNC Connection The command line arguments, represented by "/???", used in the initiation process for CNC Connection are as described below. The "Item in the Configuration dialog box" column indicates where in the [Script] dialog box each argument is set. Command line arguments of CNC Connection No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Command line argument /F=[file-name] /P=[project-name] /PWE=[0/1] /C4=127.0.0.1 /R=[point-ID] /Q=[point-ID] /PWRLOG=[0/1] /CPULOG=[0/1] /RTLOG=[0/1] /NCRTLOG=[0/1] /RUNFALIB=0 /EVERYWRITE=[0/ 1] /RETRY=[retry-inter val] /KEEPOLD=[0/1] /TIMEOUT1=time /TIMEOUT2=time /TIMEOUT3=time Item in the Configuration dialog box Name of the setting file for CNC Connection General (Default =CimVrtlCNC.cfg) Item 3 Specification of the name of the target project General (CIMPLICITY project on which to execute CNC Item 4 Communication Mode) Whether to check the PWE of the CNC when writing Detail, Group 2 parameters. 0:Check, 1:Not check (default = 0:Check) Item 1 Host name of the C4 sever Detail, Group 1 Set 127.0.0.1. Item 1 Name of the initiation result storage point General (Default =FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS) Item 5 Name of the point for termination instructions General (Default = FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END) Item 6 Whether to record power ON/OFF status changes to the log Detail, Group 2 0:Not output, 1:Output (default = 1:Output) Item 2 Whether to record the progress of internal processing to the Detail, Group 2 log Item 3 0:Not output, 1:Output (default = 0:Not output) Whether to record the read process time for each machine to Detail, Group 2 the log Item 4 0: Not output, 1:Output (default = 0:Not output) Whether to record the read process time for CNC data to the Detail, Group 2 log Item 5 0:Not output, 1:Output (default = 0:Not output) Be sure to set 0. (None) Whether to write the values read from the CNC to Detail, Group 2 CIMPLICITY every time Item 8 0:Write only when values differ, 1:Write every time (Default = 0) Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if initialization fails Detail, Group 1 (Default = 30000ms) Item 2 Whether to set the value of a point to an invalid value (***) Detail, Group 2 in the event of a communication error. Item 6 0:Set, 1:Not set (default = 0:Set) Additional time (ms) for the terminal process timer Detail, Group 1 (Default = 5000ms) Item 3 Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of a Detail, Group 1 communication thread Item 4 (Default = 180000ms) Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of a dialog Detail, Group 1 th d Description
13 14 15 16 17
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
37/98
18 19 20 21 22
/TIMEOUT4=time /EXCLUSIVEFWLI B =[0/1] /WRETRY=time /WRETRYNUM=nu mber of retries /PSET_NOTIFY =[point-ID]
thread (Default = 5000ms) Terminal waiting time (ms) of a log thread (Default = 5000ms) Whether to execute exclusive control in getting a FOCAS2/Ethernet library handle 0:Not execute, 1:Execute (default = 0:Not execute) Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if a write process is busy (Default = 1000ms) Retry number to be assumed if a write process is busy (Default = 2:Yes) Point Setting Notification name (Default = FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY)
Item 5 Detail, Group 1 Item 6 Detail, Group 2 Item 8 Detail, Group 1 Item 7 Detail, Group 1 Item 8 General Item 7
Termination process for CNC Connection that is written to em_term.bcl em_term.bcl can contain the following scripts for the termination of CNC Connection. The "Argument No." column indicates the item numbers in "Command line arguments of CNC Connection" on the previous page. Termination process for CNC Connection that is written to em_term.bcl Argument Script Description No. ' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>> Insertion start command PointSet 6 Termination by setting End Point to 1 "FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END", 1 ' <<FConfig.exe Script End >> Insertion end comment
Line 1 2 3
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
38/98
5.4
POINTS FOR DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

This section provides a detailed description of the items of the data kinds that can be set at points for data input/output. It also describes examples of specifying individual points.
5.4.1
PMC Data
Items
Data Class Description Read interval Boolean, Analog Allows description of the point. Select from among intervals 1, 2 and 3 specified as described in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals". BOOL, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT For the non-array BOOL type only, allows specification of the bit to be referenced with a number between 0 and 7. For other types, set the bit offset to 0.
Data Type Bit Offset
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
39/98
Elements Read Only Address Number Specific method
BOOL: 1 or a multiple of 8 only Other: Number of addresses to read and write Read only or read-and-write enabled G, F, X, Y, R, A, T, K, C, D, M, N, E PMC address number Set the method of specifying the PMC to input/output. A method can be specified only for the Series30i /31i /32i. The following methods can be specified: Series16 i-compatible(1st PMC) Input data to and output data from the first PMC in the same way as the Series16i . 1st PMC, 2nd PMC, 3rd PMC, Dual-check safety PMC Input data to and output data from each PMC unit. Path Can be specified for G and F addresses only. It causes data to be input to and output from the PMC set on a specified path.
It is not possible to write data to the entire address F and X area or to addressees R9000 to R9999. Note also that data must not be written to addresses K0017 to K0019 or to addresses K900 to K999. In the Series30i /31i /32i, multipath PMCs can be used, and G and F addresses can be allocated freely to each path of a CNC. For example, in the Series16i, addresses starting with G0000 are always allocated to the G area of path 1, but in the Series30i /31i /32i, G2000 of the third PMC and subsequent addresses can be allocated to the G area of path 1.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
40/98
Allocation examples for PMCs Series16i CNC Path 1 G0000 F0000 G1000 Path 2 F1000 PMC
Series30i CNC Path 1 G0000 F0000 G1000 Path 2 F1000 Signal I/F G2000 F2000 G3000 F3000 2nd PMC PMC 3rd PMC
With a path specification, regardless of the allocation of a CNC path to a PMC, the G and F addresses according to the CNC path are accessed. For both G and F addresses, set values starting with 0 for numbers. Note that unlike in the Series16i, in which offsets are used, such as 0 for path 1 and 1000 for path 2, values starting with 0 must always be set. A path specification is effective to reading G and F addresses in the Series30i /31i /32i and to writing to G addresses. Example) Comparison of specification methods for reading the G0 area of the second path in the Series16i /30i for the "allocation examples for PMCs" on the previous page
Series16i Series30i Address: Address: or Address: G, Number: G, Number: G, Number: 1000 0000, Specific method: 3000, Specific method: Path 2nd PMC
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
41/98
Specification examples
a) If Point Name: R0200, Data Type: BOOL, Bit Offset: 0, Elements: 8, and Number: 200 R0200(0) = R0200#0 data R0200(1) = R0200#1 data R0200(2) = R0200#2 data R0200(3) = R0200#3 data R0200(4) = R0200#4 data R0200(5) = R0200#5 data R0200(6) = R0200#6 data R0200(7) = R0200#7 data b) If Point Name: R0200, Data Type: SINT, Bit Offset: 0, Elements: 3, and Number: 200 R0200(0) = R0200 data R0200(1) = R0201 data R0200(2) = R0202 data
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
42/98
5.4.2
Custom Macro Variables

Reading and writing custom macro variables requires that a custom macro (custom macro B) be contained in the CNC.
Items
Data Class Description Read interval Data Type Bit Offset Elements Read Only Number Analog (fixed) Allows description of the point. Select from among intervals 1, 2, and 3 specified in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals". REAL (fixed) 0 (fixed) Number of addresses to read and write Read only or read-and-write enabled Custom macro variable number NOTE 1 NOTE2
NOTE1 If a value greater than 0 is specified for Elements (for an array), as many elements as the value are read from and written to the specified address. NOTE2 Only common variables can be read-and-write enabled; local variables can be read only.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
43/98
a) If Point Name: CMV0900, Elements: 3, and Number: CMV0900(0) = Custom macro number 900 data CMV0900(1) = Custom macro number 901 data CMV0900(2) = Custom macro number 902 data 900
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
44/98
5.4.3
Parameters
Items
Data Class Description Read interval Data Type Bit Offset Boolean, Analog Allows description of the point. Select from among intervals 1, 2, and 3 specified in Subsection 5.2.1 , "Read intervals". BOOL, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL For the BOOL type only, allows specification of the bit to be referenced with a number between 0 and 7. For other types, set the bit offset to 0. For a non-axis type: 1 For an axis type: Number of axes to read (equal to or less than the number of controlled axes) NOTE1 Read only or Read-and-write enabled Parameter number
Elements
Read Only Number
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
45/98
Axis Number
For a non-axis type: 0 For an axis type: Number of axes (equal to or less than the number of controlled axes) NOTE1
NOTE1 For an axis type parameter with no axis number specified (Axis number = 0), an array of axes may be specified. The number of array elements must be equal to or less than the number of controlled axes. For an axis type parameter with an axis number specified (Axis number not equal to 0) and for a non-axis type parameter, set 1 for Elements.
a) If Point Name: PA3623, Data type: SINT, Bit offset: 0, Elements: 3, Number: 3623, and Axis number: 0 PA3623 (0) = Data for the 1st axis of parameter 3623 PA3623 (1) = Data for the 2nd axis of parameter 3623 PA3623 (2) = Data for the 3rd axis of parameter 3623 b) If Point Name: PA3715A3, Data type: BOOL, Bit offset: 2, Elements: 1, Number: 3715, and Axis number: 3 PA3715A3 = #2 data for the 3rd axis of parameter 3715 c) If Point Name: PA3715, Data type: BOOL, Bit offset: 2, Elements: 3, Number: 3715, and Axis number: 0 PA3715(0) = #2 data for the 1st axis of parameter 3715 PA3715(1) = #2 data for the 2nd axis of parameter 3715 PA3715(2) = #2 data for the 3rd axis of parameter 3715
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
46/98
5.4.4
Alarm Numbers
Items
Data Class Description Read interval Data Type Bit Offset Elements Read Only Axis Number Analog (fixed) Allows description of the point. Select from among intervals 1, 2, and 3 specified in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals". INT (fixed) 0 (fixed) Maximum number of alarms to read for the specified axis Read only (fixed) Axis number (equal to or greater than the number of controlled axes) 0: Alarm not related to the axis
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
47/98
a) If Point Name: ALMA0, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 0 ALMA0 (0) = Number of the first alarm not related to the axis ALMA0 (1) = Number of the second alarm not related to the axis ALMA0 (2) = Number of the third alarm not related to the axis A value of -1 is placed if no alarm is generated. b) If Point Name: ALMA1, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 1 ALMA1 (0) = Number of the first alarm of the first axis ALMA1 (1) = Number of the second alarm of the first axis ALMA1 (2) = Number of the third alarm of the first axis A value of - 1 is placed if no alarm is generated.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
48/98
5.4.5
Alarm Types
Items
Data Class Description Read interval Analog (fixed) Allows description of the point. Select from among intervals 1, 2 and 3 specified as described in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals". INT (fixed) 0 (fixed) Maximum number of alarms to read for the specified axis Read Only (fixed) Axis number (equal to or greater than the number of controlled axes) 0: Alarm not related to the axis
Data Type Bit Offset Elements Read Only Axis Number
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
49/98
a) If Point Name: ALMTA0, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 0 ALMTA0 (0) = Alarm type for the first alarm not related to the axis ALMTA0 (1) = Alarm type for the second alarm not related to the axis ALMTA0 (2) = Alarm type for the third alarm not related to the axis A value of -1 is placed if no alarm is generated. b) If Point Name: ALMTA1, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 1 ALMTA1 (0) = Alarm type for the first alarm of the first axis ALMTA1 (1) = Alarm type for the second alarm of the first axis ALMTA1 (2) = Alarm type for the third alarm of the first axis A value of -1 is placed if no alarm is generated.
Alarm types
The table below gives the alarm types that can be acquired. Series 16i /18i /21i, Series 30i /31i /32i Value Power Mate i D/H, Series 0i 0 P/S100 Parameter write switch ON 1 P/S000 Input of parameters that require power off 2 P/S101 I/O error 3 P/S, other Foreground P/S 4 Overtravel alarm Overtravel/external data input error 5 Overheat alarm Overheat alarm 6 Servo alarm Servo alarm 7 System alarm Data input/output error 8 APC alarm Macro alarm 9 Spindle alarm Spindle alarm 10 P/S5000 to P/S5999, punch press Other alarms alarm 11 Laser alarm Alarm related to the malfunction prevention function 12 Unused Background P/S 13 Rigid tapping alarm SYNC EXCESS ERROR 14 Unused Reserved 15 External alarm message External alarm message 16 Unused Reserved 17 Unused Reserved 18 Unused Reserved 19 Unused PMC error
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
50/98
5.4.6
Number of Operator's Message

Reading the number of operator's message or operator's message strings requires that the external message function or external data input function option be contained in the CNC. The function in the Series16i /18i /21i that reads four numbers of operator's messages or operator's message strings can be used in CNCs of the following editions and later. CNC type 16i T 16i M 18i T 18i M 21i T 21i M Edition B1F1 14 B0F1 15 BEF1 14 BDF1 15 DEF1 9 DDF1 9
NOTE 1 To enable the second to fourth messages in the Series16i /18i /21i, 0i, bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 must be set. 2 In the Power Mate i D/H, only the first message is enabled. 3 In the Series30i /31i /32i, this function is under development and cannot be used.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
51/98
Items
Data Class Description Read interval Analog (fixed) Allows description of the point. Select from among intervals 1, 2 and 3 specified as described in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals". INT (fixed) 0 (fixed) 1 (fixed) Read only (fixed) Kind of operator's message For the Series16i /18i /21i, 0i First message 1 Second message 2 Third message 3 Fourth message 4 For the Power Mate i D/H First message 1
Data Type Bit Offset Elements Read Only Kind of operator's
a) If Point Name: OPMN4 and Kind of operator's: 4 OPMN4 = Number of the fourth message A value of -1 is placed if no operator's message is generated.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
52/98
5.4.7
Operator's Message Strings

Available CNCs, the necessary CNC options and parameters, and others are the same as those described in the preceding subsection, Subsection 5.4.6, "Number of Operator's Message".
Items
Data Class Description Read interval Text (fixed) Allows description of the point. Select from among intervals 1, 2 and 3 specified as described in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals". STRING (fixed) 0 (fixed) 255 (fixed) Read only (fixed)
Data Type Bit Offset Elements Read Only
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
53/98
Kind of operator's
Kind of operator's message For the Series16i /18i /21i, 0i First message 1 Second message 2 Third message 3 Fourth message 4 For the Power Mate i D/H First message 1
Specification example
a) If Point Name: OPMM1 and Kind of operator's: OPMM1 = First message string 1
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
54/98
5.5
CNC CONNECTION
CNC Connection performs CIMPLICITY point input/output by communicating with CNCs. CNC Connection is used in i CELL and in CNC Communication Mode. This section describes the main specifications of CNC Connection.
5.5.1
Read Methods and Read Intervals - Parallel Process and Sequential Process
There are two methods of reading CIMPLICITY points from CNCs, a parallel process and a sequential process. A parallel process and a sequential process cannot be used at the same time. A parallel process and a sequential process differ as described below.
Parallel process
Read instructions are issued to each CNC at the same time at each read interval. This can shorten the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but will increase the CPU load at the peak of the read process.
Sequential process
Read instructions are issued to one CNC at a time at each read interval. This will increase the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but can keep the increases in CPU load at the peak of the read process.
Difference between parallel and sequential processes in reading (if communicating with two CNCs) Parallel process
2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
Sequential process
Read interval 1
Time
Read interval
Time
and
represent the times required to read data from CNCs 1 and 2.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
55/98
No matter which process is used, the read interval settings will have a great impact on CPU load. Care must be exercised so that the read interval settings are sufficiently large as compared with the time required to actually read data from the CNCs to prevent the CPU utilization at the peak of the process from reaching 100%. The time required to actually read from CNCs can be recorded to a log. For details, see Subsection 5.5.7.3, "RTLOG CNC data read and point write time". For a parallel process, three different read intervals can be set for each CNC; for a sequential process, three different read intervals common to all CNCs can be set. It is possible to specify which of these read intervals to use on a point-by-point basis. This function makes it possible to set the data that is to be updated frequently and the data that is not on a point-by-point basis. If multiple read intervals are set, they are processed in parallel. The figure below shows an outline of a parallel process and a sequential process.
Setting of read intervals Parallel process Sequential process
2 1 2 1
Duplicate
2 1 2 1
2 1 2 1
1 2
Duplicate Duplicate
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2
Duplicate
2 1
1 2
1 2
Read interval 1 Read interval 2
Time
Read interval 1 Read interval 2
Time
and
represent the times required to read data from CNCs 1 and 2.
If there are reads from the same CNC at the same time, the reads are performed in parallel. For an explanation of how to set read methods and set read intervals, refer to Section 2.4, "PROJECT PROPERTY" in Part III, "SETTING", in the i CELL Operator's Manual and see Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals", respectively.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
56/98
5.5.2
Write Methods and Write Intervals

As for the writing from CIMPLICITY points to CNCs, when a value at a CIMPLICITY point is changed, it will immediately be reflected in the CNC. Unlike reading, writing is not performed periodically.
5.5.3
Point Group
Multiple points grouped together are referred to as a Point Group. Using the Point Group function to set a group of points for constant reading and another group of points for reading only when necessary, it is possible to reduce network load. Setting a Point Group is effective only to the reading from points. As for the writing to points, if a value at a CIMPLICITY point is changed, it will immediately be reflected in the CNC, regardless of whether a Point Group is set or not. A Point Group must have a single BOOL type point corresponding to it. This point is called the Point Group Control Point. While the value of this control point is True, reading from the points in the group is performed. If the value of the control point is False, reading from the point in the group is not performed. Point group
Point group A for constant reading Point group A Control point A Point A1 Point A2
Point group A
Point group B for reading when necessary Point group B Control point B Point B1 Point B2
Point group A is for constant reading, so control point A must always be set to True. Point group B is for reading only when control point B is set to True.
Control point A Point A1 Point A2 Point group B Control point B Point B1 Point B2
True False
True False
Read interval
Time
represents an execution of a read
represents a stoppage of a read.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
57/98
Multiple Point Groups may be set. Reading from points not in a Point Group is not performed; all points from which to read data must be set in a Point Group. A Point Group is not related to a particular machine; it is possible to set points in different machines in a single Point Group. For an explanation of how to set Point Groups, see Subsection 5.2.3, "Point Group".
5.5.4
CNC Power Status Monitor Function

This function monitors the power ON/OFF state of a CNC, and sets True at the power status monitor point if the power is ON and False if it is OFF. For an explanation of power status monitor points, see Subsection 5.5.8.5, "Power status monitor point". In older versions, the power status could be monitored only in a same-network configuration such as that shown in Fig. A, but in version 1.4 or later, the state can be monitored in a different-network configuration such as that shown in Fig. B. Note, however, the CNC power status monitor function differs in the time required to recognize the power OFF state of a CNC depending on the network configuration. In the same-network configuration shown in Fig. A, there occurs a delay of only several seconds from the time the power of the CNC turns OFF until CNC Connection recognizes it. In the different-network configuration shown in Fig. B, on the other hand, the time set for FwLib time-out is required until CNC Connection recognizes the power OFF state. For an explanation of setting FwLib time-out, refer to Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication" in Part III, "SETTING", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.
Network A PC CNC CNC PC Router

The PC and the CNCs all belong to the same network.
The PC and the CNCs belong to different networks connected via a router.
Network B CNC CNC
Fig. A Same-network configuration
Fig. B Different-network configuration
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
58/98
5.5.5
Reconnection Function in the Event of a Communication Error in Read/Write Processes

Due to poor communication line quality, a communication error may occur in a read/write process although the CNC power status monitor function, described in Subsection 5.5.4, "CNC Power Status Monitor Function", decides that the power is ON. It is possible to make settings so that a reconnection is made in such a case, i.e., a communication is terminated and another communication is started. It is possible to select a reconnection method from three types, Disable/Select by Point/Enable. Note that selecting a reconnection method is effective only if the personal computer and the CNCs are in a same-network configuration such as that shown in Fig. A in Subsection 5.5.4, "CNC Power Status Monitor Function". The reconnection function is always enabled in a different network configuration such as the one shown in Fig. B.
Reconnection method
Disable Does not make a reconnection automatically. If a communication error occurs, any subsequent reading from or writing to the CNC will be canceled. If the power status of the CNC turns OFF and then back ON, a reconnection will be made. Select by Point Used to specify whether to make a reconnection according to the value of a point. The point used for this purpose is called the communication reconnection instruction point. For an explanation of communication reconnection instruction points, see Subsection 5.5.8.8, "Communication reconnection instruction point". If a communication error occurs, CNC Connection sets the communication reconnection instruction point to True. The user application must monitor the communication reconnection instruction point, and if it becomes True, perform appropriate action such as notifying the operator of the communication error, so that the operator can decide whether to make a reconnection. To make a reconnection, set the communication reconnection instruction point to False. If the communication reconnection instruction point becomes False, CNC Connection makes a reconnection. If a reconnection cannot be made, a reconnection is attempted at every specified retry time until it is successful. If this function causes a reconnection to be attempted, a log called
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
59/98
"Retry Connection (2)" will be created in "CimVrtlCnc Error Log" regardless of whether it is a success or a failure. After a reconnection is successful, this log will not be created. If a communication error occurs, CNC Connection sets the communication reconnection instruction point to True, and upon realizing that the power OFF state of the CNC subsequently, CNC Connection sets the communication reconnection instruction point to False. Enable Makes a reconnection automatically if a communication error occurs. If a reconnection cannot be made, a reconnection is attempted at every specified retry time until it is successful. If the quality of the communication line is poor, it is possible that an error recurs immediately after a connection is made. If a communication error frequently occurs, improve the quality of the communication line, rather than relying on the reconnection function. When the function is enabled, use caution because communication errors may go unnoticed even if they frequently occur. If this function causes a reconnection to be attempted, a log called "Retry Connection (1)" will be created in "CimVrtlCnc Error Log" regardless of whether it is a success or a failure. After a reconnection is successful, this log will not be created.
Setting method
For an explanation of setting a reconnection method, refer to Subjection 2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication" in Part III, "SETTING", in the i CELL Operator's Manual. For an explanation of setting the retry time to be assumed if a reconnection is attempted, see "Group 1" in Subsection 5.3.2.2, "Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings".
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
60/98
5.5.6
Reconnection Function in the Initialization Process during CNC Connection Initiation and in the Power ON Initialization Process
If a communication error occurs when CNC Connection is initiated and is executing an initialization process, a retry is always made and if the retry is successful, a log called "Retry Initialization" is created in "CimVrtlCnc Error Log". Also, if a communication error occurs in initialization at the time of switching from power OFF to ON, a retry is always made and if the retry is successful, a log is output to "Retry Connection". For an explanation of setting the reconnection retry time in the initialization process during initiation and in initialization at the time of switching from power OFF to ON, see "Group 1" in Subsection 5.3.2.2, "Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings".
5.5.7
Logs
The error status, the progress, and other information are recorded to logs. Whether to output the progress can be specified with the appropriate initiation-time option. For an explanation of specifying the option, see Subsection 5.3.2, "Setting". In the event of an error, view "CimVrtlCnc Error Log" and "CimVrtlCnc Detail Log", using the log viewer installed together with i CELL or CNC Communication Mode. As the machine number to be output to a log, the path-specific serial number or the IP address-specific number may be specified. For the path-specific serial number, the serial numbers allocated sequentially to the individual machines on a path-by-path basis, starting with the path number 1 of the machine number 1, will be machine numbers. For the IP address-specific number, machines with the same IP address are allocated the same machine number, and Pxx (where xx denotes a path number), indicating the path number, is added at the beginning of each log. As for those logs that do not depend on the machine number (file read failures, application initiations/terminations, total process time at each read interval, etc.), the machine number is assumed 0, and Pxx is not added. Pxx is not added, either, if only one path is set. Settings and the machine numbers output to a log will be as follows:
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
61/98
Examples) Machine information in the Configuration dialog box Path number Machine number 1 1 1 2 2 3 1 5 1 Machine number output to a log Path-specific serial number 1 2 3 4 5 IP address-specific number 1 2 2 3 4
The machine number to be output to a log can be set with the appropriate project property. Refer to Section 2.4, "PROJECT PROPERTY", in Part III, "SETTING", in the i CELL Operator's Manual. NOTE Creating a log causes communication processing speed to decrease. Set the log creation options only if required; usually, refrain from creating logs other than those created by default. The following explains logs in detail.
5.5.7.1
PWRLOG CNC power status

Changes in the power ON/OFF state of each CNC are output to CimVrtlCnc Detail Log. The log is output only when a power status change occurs. It is used to survey the power status acquisition process.
Log format
Power Log: Old=previous New=present Reboot=restart Msg=message Old New ReBoot Msg Previous power status. 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Present power status. 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Whether a restart has been done. 0 = No restart done, 1 = Restart done Whether a power message has been sent. 0 = Not sent, 1 = Sent
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
62/98
Example) <For a machine number in the setting file> Power Log: Old=1 New=0 Reboot=0 Msg=0 <For an IP address-specific machine number (path number: P01 Power Log: Old=1 New=0 Reboot=0 Msg=0
1)>
5.5.7.2
CPULOG Progress of internal processing

The progress of internal processing is output to CimVrtlCnc Detail Log. It is used to survey the CPU utilization.
Log format
Power Log: Processing thread number - processing message number Thread Number Number of the machine on which processing is performed + thread number. Thread numbers are as listed below. 0x10 0x2X 0x30 0x40 0x50 0x60 0x70 0xFF Message Number MsgMng thread NCRead thread NCWrite thread PtSet thread OnChng thread C4Chk thread TimMng thread Dialog box
Number of the message processed with the PreTranslateMessage function on the thread.
Example) If the WM_CHECKPOWER(0x07F9) message is processed on the C4Chk thread with the machine number 1 <For a machine number in the setting file> CPU Log: 0160 - 07F9 < For an IP address-specific machine number (path number:1)> P01 CPU Log: 0160 - 07F9
5.5.7.3
RTLOG CNC data read and point write time

The process time for each CNC and for each read interval is output to CimVrtlCnc Detail Log. An output process time is the total of the time for the power check process performed at each read interval, the time for the process for reading data from a CNC, and the time for the process for creating the data to be written to a CIMPLICITY point. If the read is a sequential process, the total of the process times of all machines for each read interval is also output.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
63/98
It is used to survey the process time at each read interval.
Log contents (1) - If the read is a parallel process

The total of the times for the processes performed at each read interval of a CNC is output to the log.
CNC1 read process

Power check process time Time for the process for Time for the process reading data from the for creating the data CNC to be written Real read process time (log output time) Specified read interval
Idle time
Log contents (2) - If the read is a sequential process

Besides the same data as that for a parallel process, the total of times for the read processes of all CNCs is output to the log.
Read process for CNC1 Log output time Read process for CNC2 Log output time Idle time
Total of the times for the processes for all machines (log output time) Specified read interval
Log format
R Time Log: TID=Read interval /Process time R TotalTime Log: TID=Read interval /Process time Read interval Process time Read interval at which the process is performed. 0 = Interval 1, 1 = Interval 2, 2 = Interval 3 Time required for the process (ms).
Example 1) If the read is a parallel process, the machine number is 1, the read interval is 1, and the process time is 50 [ms] <For a machine number in the setting file> R Time Log: TID=0000 /50 <For an IP address-specific machine number (path number: 1)> P01 R Time Log: TID=0000 /50 Example 2) If the read is a sequential process, the machine number is 1, the read interval is 1, the process time is 50 [ms], and the total process time is 100 [ms] <For a machine number in the setting file>
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
64/98
R Time Log: TID=0000 /50 R TotalTime Log: TID=0000 /100
5.5.7.4
NCRTLOG CNC data read process time

The time for the read process for each CNC and for each read interval is output to CimVrtlCnc Detail Log. An output read process time is the time for the process for reading data from a CNC at each read interval. It is used to survey read process time.
Log contents
The time for the process for reading data from a CNC for each CNC read interval is output to the log.
CNC1 read process Power check process time Time for the process for reading data from the CNC (log output time) Real read process time Specified read interval Time for the process for creating the data to be written Idle time
Log format
NC R Time Log: TID=Read interval /Process time Read interval Process time Read interval at which the process is performed. 0 = Interval 1, 1 = Interval 2, 2 = Interval 3 Time required for the process (ms).
Example) If the machine number is 1, the read interval is 1, and the process time is 10 [ms] <For a machine number in the setting file> NC R Time Log: TID=0001 /10 <For an IP address-specific machine number (path number: 1)> P01 NC R Time Log: TID=0001 /10
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
65/98
5.5.8
CNC Connection Control Points

This subsection describes the points for controlling the operation of CNC Connection and for monitoring the operation state. Of these points, a single point necessary for a project can be created as described in Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term Scripts General Settings". If i CELL is used, default points other than Point Setting Notification Points are created in advance. Also, the single point necessary for each CNC or for each path of a CNC is automatically created when the communication settings for the machine are made.
5.5.8.1
Result Point
This is the point for storing the results of initiating CNC Connection, and a single Result Point is necessary for a project. In CNC Communication Mode, a Result Point may be created with any name. For an explanation of how to create a Result Point, see Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term Scripts General Settings". Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name Detail INT 1 -1 FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS, or any name A value is set by CNC Connection. When the initiation process for CNC Connection terminates, a result will be set. If operation is normal, 0 is set; if an error such as "no setting file found" occurs, a positive error code is set.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
66/98
5.5.8.2
End Point
This is the point for terminating CNC Connection, and a single End Point is necessary for a project. In CNC Communication Mode, an End Point can be created with any name. For details of how to create an End Point, see Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term Scripts General Settings". Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name Detail BOOL 1 False FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END, or any name A value is set by the user. Setting the value to True causes CNC Connection to terminate.
5.5.8.3
Point Setting Notification Point
Overview
The Point Setting Notification Point is used to notify that a user application is ready to use points when i CELL or CNC Communication Mode is initiated. The Point Setting Notification Point is of two types, general Point Setting Notification Point and path-specific Point Setting Notification Point. When a path-specific Point Setting Notification Point becomes TRUE, this means that a series of communications for the path terminates and the application is ready to reference the points on the path. A path-specific Point Setting Notification Point is NONE at initiation, and becomes TRUE when the following processes terminate: (1) CNC power ON/OFF status check (2) In the power ON status, reading of data at all read intervals If, however, 0 m/s is specified as a read interval, the point is set TRUE with no reading. Those points that are not contained in a Point Group and those points for which the initial value of the Point Group Control Point is 0 so that no read instructions are issued are set TRUE when the process (1) is performed. They are also set TRUE if an error occurs in the above processes. A general Point Setting Notification Point becomes TRUE when all path-specific Point Setting Notification Points become TRUE. Path-specific and general Point Setting Notification Points change from NONE to TRUE only once when CNC Communication Mode is initiated.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
67/98
Then, they remain constant values until CNC Communication Mode is terminated.
Path-specific Point Setting Notification Point

This is the point for the notification of the completion of path-specific point setting. If the Point Setting Notification Function is used, a single path-specific Point Setting Notification Point is required for each path of a CNC. Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name BOOL 1 None FNCxxxyy.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY (where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path number) A value is set by CNC Connection. The value is set to True when path-specific point setting is completed.
Detail
General Point Setting Notification Point

This is the point for the notification of the completion of general point setting. If the Point Setting Notification Function is used, a single general Point Setting Notification Point is required for each project. In CNC Communication Mode, a general Point Setting Notification Point may be crated with any name. For an explanation of how to create a General Point Setting Notification Point, see Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term Scripts General Settings". Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name Detail BOOL 1 None FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY, or any name A value is set by CNC Connection. The value of this point becomes True when all path-specific Point Setting Notification Points become True.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
68/98
5.5.8.4
Error message storage point

This is the point for storing an error message if an error occurs in CNC Connection. An error message storage point is required for each CNC. Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name Detail STRING 256 None FNCxxx01.F_NCC_ERROR (where xxx is a machine number) A value is set by CNC Connection. If an error occurs, an error message is set at this point. The same message is also recorded in the error log.
5.5.8.5
Power status monitor point

This is the point for monitoring the power ON/OFF status of the CNC to which i CELL or CNC Communication Mode is connected. A power status monitor point is required for each CNC. Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name Detail BOOL 1 None FNCxxx01.F_PWR (where xxx is a machine number) A value is set by CNC Connection. The value becomes True if the CNC power status is ON and False if OFF.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
69/98
5.5.8.6
Communication enable instruction point

This is the point for instructing whether to perform communication with the CNC to which i CELL or CNC Communication Mode is connected. A single communication enable instruction point is required for each path of a CNC. After issuing instructions using this point, check the response, using a communication status monitor point, described in Subsection 5.5.8.7, "Communication status monitor point". Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name BOOL 1 True FNCxxxyy.F_COM_ON (where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path number) A value is set by the user. If the value is True, communication with the CNC is performed; if False, it is not performed.
Detail
5.5.8.7
Communication status monitor point

This is the point for making a response to instructions to enable or disable communication, as described in Subsection 5.5.8.6, "Communication enable instruction point". A single communication status monitor point is required for each path of a CNC. Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name BOOL 1 None FNCxxxyy.F_COM_COND (where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path number) A value is set by CNC Connection. When instructions are received from a communication enable instruction point, this point assumes the same value as that of the communication enable instruction point.
Detail
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
70/98
5.5.8.8
Communication reconnection instruction point

This is the point for instructing whether to make a reconnection if a communication error occurs due to poor communication line quality. single point is required for each CNC. Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name Detail BOOL 1 False FNCxxx01.F_COM_RETRY (where xxx is a machine number) A value is set by the user. If a communication error occurs, and the value is True, a reconnection is made; if False, a reconnection is not made.
5.5.8.9
Point Group Control Point

This is the point for controlling a Point Group, and each Point Group requires a single Point Group Control Point. A Point Group Control Point can be created with any name. For an explanation of how to make Point Group Control Points, see Subsection 5.2.3, "Point Group". Data Type Elements Initial Value Point Name BOOL 1 True or False Default: FNCxxx01.F_POINT_GROUP Any name: Name for a machine = FNCxxx01.U_??? (where xxx is a machine number) Name common to machines = FNCSYSP.U_??? A value is set by the user. If the value is True, data is read from the points related to this point; if False, data is not read from the points.
Detail
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
71/98
5.5.9
CNC Connection Termination

When CNC Connection terminates, various threads also terminate. Thread termination wait times are related as shown in the figure below. If the default is such that an application cannot terminate normally because of no response from a thread, specify a child thread termination wait time longer than the default. If the child thread termination wait time is shorter, the application may not be terminate normally.
Dialog box termination process Terminal process timer Additional time to the terminal process timer Termination wait time for the child thread in the dialog box Termination wait time for a log thread
Termination process for a child thread of a communication thread Termination wait time for a child thread of a communication thread
The timeover time for the default termination wait time for a child thread of a communication thread is 180 seconds. In this case, the maximum wait time until CNC Connection terminates is 195 seconds, including the timeover time of 15 seconds in other processes. If the termination process terminates normally, CNC Connection terminates in a shorter time.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
72/98
6
6.1
6.1.1
CNC COMMUNICATION MODE

This chapter describes CNC Communication Mode, which is one of the operating modes of i CELL. This function can be used in i CELL 2.1 or later.
OVERVIEW
Description of CNC Communication Mode
CNC Communication Mode, one of the operating modes of i CELL, is a mode in which only the function for communicating with a CNC (CNC Connection) of all the i CELL functions is used. Whether to use i CELL functions or use CNC Communication Mode can be specified on the installation window when i CELL is installed. CNC Communication Mode can be used only when FOCAS2/Ethernet is used for communication. Also, a CIMPLICITY HMI development server is required. If CNC Communication Mode is installed, functions other than CNC Connection (such as NC program management, CNC display and operation, operation result management, and maintenance) cannot be used.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
73/98
6.1.2
Comparison between i CELL and CNC Communication Mode

The differences between i CELL and CNC Communication Mode are as given in the table below.
Comparison item Contents of the CIMPLICITY project to be installed
i CELL The various functions of i CELL are installed (such as program management, CNC display and operation, operation result management, and maintenance). The points for use with the various functions of i CELL are automatically created during machine setting. Those points that are required by the user must be created using Point Customization. 5
CNC Communication Mode Applications must be created by the user.
Point creation method
Those points that are required by user applications must be created using Point Customization.
Number of CNCs that can be connected during installation Maximum number of CNCs that can be connected using CNC connection options Method of communication with the CNC
20
75
FOCAS2/Ethernet, RS-232-C (DNC2, reader/puncher) 5 10 15
FOCAS2/Ethernet
Drawing numbers of A08B-9510-J940 available CNC connection A08B-9510-J941 options A08B-9510-J942 NOTE Hatched drawing numbers are for CNC Communication Mode only. They cannot be used with i CELL.
A08B-9510-J940 A08B-9510-J941 A08B-9510-J942 A08B-9510-J943 A08B-9510-J944 A08B-9510-J945 A08B-9510-J946 A08B-9510-J947 A08B-9510-J948
5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70
NOTE
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
74/98
6.1.3
Procedure for Using CNC Communication Mode

The procedure for using CNC Communication Mode is as follows: Step 1 Install CNC Communication Mode 2 Create the CIMPLICITY project to use CNC Communication Mode (target project) 3 Enter an order password in the Configuration dialog box 4 Set the number of machines connected Where described in this manual
6.3.1 Installation 6.3.2.1 Creating target projects 6.3.2.2 Registering an order password
Section 2.4, PROJECT PROPERTY, III. Setting NOTE Section 2.5, MACHINE INFORMATION, III. Setting NOTE Section 2.6, COMMUNICATION, III. Setting NOTE
5 Set machine information 6 Set up communication with the machines 7 Set points 8 Add the initiation/termination processes for CNC Communication Mode to the script of the target project
5.2 POINT SETTING 5.3 CIMPLICITY SCRIPT SETTING
NOTE Section in the i CELL Operator's Manual where it is described.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
75/98
6.2
6.2.1
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Available CNCs
Available CNSs are the same as those when FOCAS2/Ethernet is used with i CELL. Refer to "When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT", in Part I, "GENERAL", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.
6.2.2
Ethernet Boards and CNC Options

Ethernet boards and CNC options are the same as those when FOCAS2/Ethernet is used with i CELL. Refer to "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options " in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" in Part I, "GENERAL", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.
6.2.3
Network Configuration
The network configuration is the same as that when the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used with i CELL. Refer to Section 3.3, "NETWORK CONFIGURATION", in Part I, "GENERAL", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.
6.2.4
Number of CNCs Connected

Using CNC Communication Mode requires that the basic order password supplied with the installation CD be entered in the same way as with i CELL. Up to 75 CNCs can be connected using the order passwords of CNC connection options.
6.2.5
CIMPLICITY HMI
A development server is required.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
76/98
6.3
INSTALLATION AND ORDER PASSWORD REGISTRATION

This chapter describes how to install CNC Communication Mode so that it can be used, as well as how to register an order password. Register an order password on a single personal computer only once. If two or more target projects are to be used, once an order password is registered, there is no need to register it for all the target projects. (If an attempt is made to register the same order password twice or more, an error message "As entered Order Password is already registerd, you can not regist it." is displayed and registration fails.)
6.3.1
Installation
NOTE It is not possible to install i CELL and CNC Communication Mode at the same time. Perform installation with the following procedure: <1> Insert the installation CD of i CELL. If the installer is not automatically started, execute "Setup.exe", located in the root directory of the CD. <2> In the installation component select window, select "CNC Communication Mode".
6.3.2
Registering an Order Password

Before registering an order password, create a target project (CIMPLICITY project to use CNC Communication Mode).
6.3.2.1
Creating target projects

<1> Start the CIMPLICITY workbench. <2> When the workbench appears, select [New]>[Project] from the [File] menu. <3> Make the following settings, and click <Create>. Project Options Protocols Enter a project name. Place a check next to "Basic Control". Do not place a check next to any item.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
77/98
<4> When the Project Property dialog box appears, make the settings for the necessary items and click <OK>. <5> When the CIMPLICITY project wizard appears, click <Exit>. <6> The workbench for the created project appears. If "Select OK to start this project." appears, click <Cancel>. <7> Create a single dummy virtual point. The point may have any point name and point class. <8> From the [Project] menu of the workbench, select [Update configuration] to update. <9> Exit from the workbench.
6.3.2.2
Registering an order password

<1> From the Start menu, select [Program]>[CIMPLICITY iCELL]>[iCELL configuration] to start the Configuration dialog box. <2> When the "Select Project" dialog box appears, select the project file*.gef of the target file and click <OK>. The figure below shows an example where the project C:CncCom uses CNC Communication Mode.
<3> When the created CIMPLICITY project is selected for the first time, the following confirmation dialog box appears. Click <OK>.
<4> Confirm that at least one point is registered with the CIMPLICITY project.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
78/98
If a point has been created as described in Subsection 6.3.2.1, "Creating target projects", click <OK>. If there is no point, create a dummy virtual point, then click <OK>. The dummy virtual point may have any name and class.
<5>
The Configuration dialog box appears.
<6> From the [Project] menu, click [Machine count configuration], and register an order password. For an explanation of how to register an order passwords, refer to Section 2.3, "MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION", in Part III, "SETTING", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
79/98
6.4
6.4.1
POINT NAME RULE SETTING

Overview
A point name to create in the point customization window requires a first part representing a machine number and a path number, followed by a user-specifiable point identifier. Point name rules are the rules for the first part representing a machine number and a path number. By using Point Name Rule Setting, it is possible to change the point name rules in the point customization window to those for the user. As the figure below shows, the point name rules of CNC Communication Mode applies to the points to be created in the point customization window.
Point name rules of CNC Communication Mode FNC+3-digit machine number+2-digit path number
Area for entering a user-specifiable point identifier
By using Point Name Rule Setting, it is possible to create point names using the point name rules for the user, as the figure below shows.
Change them to the point name rules for the user
NOTE The Point Name Rule Setting Function can be used only when Point Customization is used in CNC Communication Mode in i CELL 2.1 or later. If Point Customization is used with i CELL, the Point Name Rule Setting Function cannot be used.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
80/98
What this function cannot do Point Name Rule Setting is the function that enables setting of name rules by the user for each machine number and path number. Even by using Point Name Rule Setting, it is not possible to set irregular point names. Nor is it possible to set the same point name for different machines or different paths. Example) Neither point (1) nor (2) can be set for a machine with the machine number 3 and the second path: Point (1) MCN3_PATH2.D1000 Point (2) M3_P2.D1001
6.4.2
Point Name Rules of CNC Communication Mode

Points for use in CNC Communication Mode are largely divided into two types, machine-specific point and machine-unrelated point. By using Point Name Rule Setting, it is possible to change the Point Name Rules for the names hatched in the figure below, i.e., the Point Name Rules for machine-specific points and the Point Name Rules for common Point Group points of all machine-unrelated points. (For the unhatched points, marked with a *1) symbol, any point names may be specified in the "Init/Term Scripts General Settings" dialog box in the [Project] menu.)
Point for the first path of a machine Per-machine Point for each path of a machine Point Point for a common point group point Machine-unrelated Result Point, End point, Point Setting Notification Point *1)
Machine-specific point
The name of a machine-specific point consists of a first part identifying the machine and the path and a second part identifying the type of the point, the parts being separated with a period ".". The point name format is as follows: FNCxxxyy.<identifier> where FNC is a fixed character string. xxx is a three-digit machine number. It can range from 001 to 999. yy is a two-digit path number. <identifier> is a name identifying the type of the point.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
81/98
Example) The point name with a machine number of 1, a path name of 1, and an identifier of "F_AL" (CNC alarm) is "FNC00101.F_AL".
Machine-unrelated point
The name of a machine-unrelated point consists of a first part, which is a fixed character string, and a second part identifying the point name, the parts being separated with a period ".". The point name format is as follows: FNCSYSP.<identifier> where FNCSYSP is a fixed character string. <identifier> is a name identifying the type of the point. By using Point Name Rule Setting, it is possible to change the Point Name Rules for common Point Group points of all machine-unrelated points. Machine-unrelated points include Result Points, End Points, and Point Setting Notification Points, which can be set in the [Script] dialog box in the [Project] menu.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
82/98
6.4.3
Using Point Name Rule Setting

Use Point Name Rule Setting with the following procedures: Subsection 6.4.3.1, "Enabling and disabling the Point Name Rule Setting Function" Subsection 6.4.3.2, "Displaying the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box" Subsection 6.4.3.3, "Setting point name rules" The procedures are described in detail below.
6.4.3.1
Enabling and disabling the Point Name Rule Setting Function

First, enable the Point Name Rule Setting Function. To enable this function, place a check in the [Point Name Rule Setting] checkbox in the [Project Property] menu. The Point Name Rule Setting Function can be used in CNC Communication Mode only; this checkbox is not displayed if i CELL is installed.
Placing a check in the "Point Name Rule Setting" checkbox in the [Project Property] menu must be performed after one of the steps given below. In other words, the function must be enabled after an order password is set and before communication is set up. Set an order password Set the number of machine Set machine information
[Point Name Rule Setting] CheckBox setting
Set up communication (data communication and control points are created)
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
83/98
Set points (data communication and control points are created)
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
84/98
Conditions under which this function can be enabled and disabled Performing [Communication setting] causes control points for use in CNC Communication Mode to be created, so that the enable/disable setting of this function cannot be changed. It should be noted that points are created when [Communication setting] is performed before data communication points and Point Group Control Points are created. Point creation with [Script] in the [Project] menu can be executed at any time, regardless of the enable/disable setting of [Point Name Rule Setting].
If, after points are created using the point name rules of CNC Communication Mode, the enable/disable setting of this function is to be changed, first delete all data communication points and Point Group Control Points, then delete all communication settings made with [Communication setting]. There is no need to delete the machine settings made with [Machine setting].
6.4.3.2
Displaying the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box

The point name rules for the user may be set in the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box. The Point Name Rule Setting dialog box can be displayed in either of two ways below: (1) Set all machine information first, then set the point name rules for all machines With this method, set all machine information first, then place a check in the "Point Name Rule Setting" checkbox to enable the function. When it is enabled, [Point Name Rule Setting] is added to the [Project] menu. Selecting it causes the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box to appear.
CAUTION [Point Name Rule Setting] is not displayed in the [Project] menu unless a check is placed in the "Point Name Rule Setting" checkbox to enable the function. (2) Set the machine information for one machine, then set the point name rules for that machine, and repeat the steps for other machines With this method, place a check in the "Point Name Rule Setting" checkbox before setting machine information. Click the [Machine Information] tree in the left window, and set machine information.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
85/98
At this time, provided that a check is placed in the "Point Name Rule Setting" checkbox, clicking the <OK> button in the machine information window causes the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box to automatically appear.
6.4.3.3
Setting point name rules

To use the point name rules for the user, set the four point name rules listed below: Rule for data communication point name Control point name rule (1) Machine point Control point name rule (2) Path point Control point name rule (3) Point-group point This subsection describes how to enter these rules. When this window appears for the first time, the same point name rules as those of CNC Communication Mode are set. Enter the point name rules for the user.
<2> Control point name rule (1) Machine point
<1> Rule for data communication point name <3> Control point name (2) Path point
<4> Control point name rule (3) Point-group point
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
86/98
Making entries in the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box Enter the setting for each item as described below: (1) To enter the setting for each of the items A, C, and D under [Rule for data communication point name], use the mouse or the tab key to select the desired gravity area and enter a character string. (2) In cells in table format, enter settings as described below: Select the desired cell, using the mouse or the cursor and tab keys as appropriate. After the cell is selected, pressing <ENTER> or <Space> bar allows an input operation to be started at the end of the existing character string. After the cell is selected, entering an alphanumeric character causes the existing character string to be deleted, allowing an input operation to be started with the first character entered. After the cell is selected, pressing the <BackSpace> key causes the existing character string to be deleted, allowing an input operation. Pressing the <Esc> key during an input operation causes the cell to return to the state before input. Upon completion of an input operation, perform one of the following: - Press <ENTER> - Move from the cell using the up or down cursor key - Click another location with the mouse (3) Click the <Save> button, and the point name rules will be saved. (4) Click the <Cancel> button to cancel the entries.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
87/98
Conditions under which point name rules can be set The conditions under which point name rules can be set are as given in the figure below. Those items whose settings cannot be changed are displayed gray. To change such items, the following procedure is necessary: Items A, C, and D under <1> [Rule for data communication point name] Delete the data communication points and Point Group Control Points for all machines. Item B under <1> Rule for data communication point name and control point name rules <2> to <4> Delete the communication settings for all machines.
Point creation with [Script] in the [Project] menu can be executed at any time, regardless of the enable/disable setting of [Point Name Rule Setting].
<2> Control point name rule (1) Machine point Cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed <1> Rule for data communication point name The settings for items A, C, and D cannot be changed if a data communication point is set on any of the paths of the machines for which communication settings have been made. The setting for item B cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed.
<3> Control point name rule (2) Path point Cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed.
<4> Control point name rule (3) Point-group point Cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
88/98
<1>
Rule for data communication point name Under [Rule for data communication point name], set the point name rules for points for CNC data input/output. "FNCxxxyy.U_", displayed in the window, is the rule for data communication point names in CNC Communication Mode. Change this rule to that for the user.
Items A, C, and D can be changed even after [Communication setting] is performed, but once a data communication point is created, they cannot be changed for the path on which it is created. Item B cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed. Those items that cannot be changed are displayed gray. In the "Point Name Example" area, a point name example to be created with the rule specified with A, B, C, and D, set as in the figure above is displayed. "(PointName)" is replaced by a point name identifier, such as "D1000", entered in the point customization window. Whenever a cell in the "Setting" grid for B is selected, the display under "Point Name Example" is updated using the setting for the selected path. The number in parentheses () represents the character string length of the point. If the number of characters permitted for a point name is exceeded, the number is displayed red. If this occurs, an error message is displayed during storage.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
89/98
The items under [Rule for data communication point name] are as follows:
Rule for data communication point name No Item Description Specify the character string to be added at the beginning of all data communication point names. It is possible to select not to specify any character string. It is recommended to set a character string that makes it possible to distinguish the points for use in CNC Communication Mode from other device points such as PLC points. The character string must start with an alphabetic character or an underscore. Specify the character strings used to identify machine and their paths. A setting is required for each machine set in the machine information window. For a machine with multiple paths, a setting is required for each path. This item is required. Be sure to set character strings different from other settings. If a setting is deleted or if the same setting as another setting is set, an error message is displayed. When this window is displayed for the first time after machine names are set through Machine setting, the following character strings are automatically set: - For a path number of 1, the machine name is set. - For another path number, the machine name + "??" is set. Specify the character string to be placed between A+B above and D below. It is possible to select not to set it. It is recommended to set a "." so that points can be easily displayed in a tree on the CIMPLICITY workbench. Character string to be placed in the middle of a data communication point name. It is possible to select not to set it. Value in CNC Communication Mode "FNC"
1 A. FNC
2 B. xxxyy
3-digit machine number + 2-digit path number Example: A machine number of 5 and a path number of 8 result in "00508".
3 C. .
"."
4 D. U_
"U_"
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
90/98
<2>
Control point name (1) Machine point Under [Control point name (1) Machine point], set the point name rule for control points that use machine numbers of all control points other than data communication points. The settings cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed. Those items whose settings cannot be changed are displayed gray.
The left side of the grid shows the point names in CNC Communication Mode minus the character string "FNCxxxyy.U_" as determined with the point name rule, such as F_PWR. In the right side labeled "Setting", enter settings to change these point names. Each setting requires the character string $MCN$, which is converted into a machine number during point name setting. $MCN$ is replaced by the machine number of each machine with a path number of 1 of the values set for "xxxyy" (item B) under <1> Rule for data communication point name.
Example: If the following is set for "xxxyy" (item B) under <1> Rule for data communication point name
Converted into CTL.MCN01_P1.POWER.
In the "Point Name Example" area, the point name resulting from combining the setting in a cell selected from the "Setting" area with the setting of a path selected from the "Setting" area for item B under [Rule for data communication point name] is displayed. Enclosed in parentheses () is the number of characters of the point name. If the number of characters permitted for a point name is exceeded, the number is displayed red. If the
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
91/98
<Save> button is clicked in this state, an error message appears, and storage is canceled; correct the point name rule. The settings are as follows:
No Item (default) 1 F_PWR (FNC$MCN$.F_PWR) 2
Control point name (1) Machine point Description ($MCN$ is required.) Power status monitor point name rule setting Set the name rule for a point for representing the power ON/OFF status of each machine. Be sure to set this item. F_NCC_ERROR Error message storage point name rule setting Set the name rule for a point for indicating an error that has (FNC$MCN$.F_NCC_ERROR) occurred in CNC Communication Mode. Even if this function is not used, be sure to set this item. F_COM_ACTIVATE Communication enable instruction point name rule setting Set the name rule for a point for instructing whether to (FNC$MCN$.F_COM_ACTIVATE) perform communication with the CNC to which CNC Communication Mode is connected. Be sure to set this item. F_COM_STATUS Communication status monitor point name rule setting Set the name rule for a point for checking a response to a (FNC$MCN$.F_COM_ STATUS) communication enable instruction point. Be sure to set this item. F_COM_RETRY Communication reconnection instruction point name rule setting (FNC$MCN$.F_COM_ RETRY) Set the name rule for a point for using the communication reconnection function by specifying a point name in CNC Communication Mode. Even if this function is not used, be sure to set this item. F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY Communication start notification point name rule setting (FNC$MCN$.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY) Set the name rule for a point for using the communication reconnection function by specifying a point name in CNC Communication Mode. Even if this function is not used, be sure to set this item.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
92/98
<3>
Control point name rule (2) Path point Under [Control point name rule (2) Path point], set the point name rule for control points that use path numbers of all control points other than data communication points. The settings cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed. Those items whose settings cannot be changed are displayed gray.
Each setting requires the character string $MCNPATH$, which is converted into a machine number and a path number during point name setting. $MCNPATH$ is replaced by "xxxyy" (item B) set under <1> Rule for data communication point name.
Converted into CTL.MCN01_P2.COM_ON.
In the "Point Name Example" area, the point name resulting from combining the setting in a cell selected from the "Setting" area with the setting of a path selected from the "Setting" area for item B under [Rule for data communication point name] is displayed. Enclosed in parentheses () is the number of characters of the point name. If the number of characters permitted for a point name is exceeded, the number is displayed red. If the <Save> button is clicked in this state, an error message appears, and storage is canceled; correct the point name rule.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
93/98
The settings are as follows:
No 1
Control point name rule (2) Path point Items (default) Description ($MCNPATH$ is required.) F_COM_ON Communication enable instruction point name rule setting (FNC$MCNPATH$. F_COM_ON) Set the name rule for a point for instructing whether to perform communication with the CNC to which CNC Communication Mode is connected. Be sure to set this item. F_COM_COND Communication status monitor point name rule setting (FNC$MCNPATH$.F_COM_COND) Set the name rule for a point for checking a response to a communication enable instruction point. Be sure to set this item. F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY Point Setting Notification name rule setting (FNC$MCNPATH$. Set the name rule for a point for the notification of a power F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY) ON/OFF check and a completion of data reading. Be sure to set this item.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
94/98
<4>
Control point name rule (3) Point-group point Under [Control point name rule (3) Point-group point], set the point name rule for Point Group Control Points. The settings cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed. Those items whose settings cannot be changed are displayed gray.
A point name example to be created with the settings is displayed In the "Point Name Example" area. In the "Point Name Example" area, the point name resulting from combining the setting in a cell selected from the "Setting" area with the setting of a path selected from the "Setting" area for item B under [Rule for data communication point name] is displayed. Enclosed in parentheses () is the number of characters of the point name. If the number of characters permitted for a point name is exceeded, the number is displayed red. If the <Save> button is clicked in this state, an error message appears, and storage is canceled; correct the point name rule.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
95/98
The settings are as follows:
No Items (default) 1 FNCxxxyy. (FNC$MCN$.)
Control point name rule (3) Point-group point Description Machine-specific Point Group Control Point name rule setting If any Point Group Control Point name is to be created with Point Customization, the point name rule "FNCxxxyy.U_zzzz" is applied. As described earlier, xxxyy is a 3-digit machine number and a 2-digit path number, and a point name may be specified for the identifier zzzz. For the setting for "FNCxxxyy.U_", set the character string to replace "FNCxxxyy.U_" of the point name rule above. This setting requires the character string $MCN$, which is replaced by a machine number during point name setting. $MCN$ is replaced by the machine number of each machine with a path number of 1 of the values set for "xxxyy" (item B) under <1> Rule for data communication point name. 2 FNCSYSP.U_ Common Default Point Group Control Point name setting (FNCSYSP.U_) When a machine-independent, common Point Group Control Point name is created with Point Customization, "FNCSYSP.U_zzzzz" is created. A point name may be specified for zzzzz. For the setting of "FNCSYSP.U_", set the character string for use in place of FNCSYSP.U_. Note however that $MCN$, which is replaced by a machine name, and $MCNPATH$, which is replaced by a machine name + path name, cannot be used. 3 F_POINT_GROUP Machine-specific Default Point Group Control Point name setting (F_POINT_GROUP When a data communication point is created for a machine, the Default Point ) Group Control Point "FNCxxxyy.F_POINT_GROUP" is created. For the setting of "F_POINT_GROUP", set the character string for use in place of F_POINT_GROUP. Note however, that $MCN$, which is replaced by a machine name, and $MCNPATH$, which is replaced by a machine name + path name, cannot be used.
Converted into PG.MCN01_P1.POINT_GROUP.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
96/98
CAUTION It is not possible to set the same identifier for a data communication point name and a machine-specific point group point name. Example If the point name rules shown in the figure below are set, it is not possible to create both DATA.MCN01_P1.U_TEST_POINT and PG.MCN01_P1. U_TEST_POINT.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
97/98
6.4.4
6.4.4.1
Setting Examples
Using the point name rules of another project
It is possible to copy the point name rules of one project created in CNC Communication Mode to another project in CNC Communication Mode. (1) Create a new CNC Communication Mode project. When the following message appears, click <OK>, and wait for the Configuration dialog box to be activated.
(2) When the Configuration dialog box appears, copy the point name rule file created for another project in CNC Communication Mode to the new project before placing a check in the [Point Name Rule Setting] checkbox in [Property]. There is no need to exit from the Configuration dialog box. The point name rule file is located in the following folder: project-folderFanucDataPointNameRule.ini (3) After copying the point name rule file to the new project, place a check in the [Point Name Rule Setting] checkbox in [Property] in the Configuration dialog box. When the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box appears, the point name rule created for the project is displayed.
CAUTION Be sure to copy the point name rule file PointNameRule.ini before placing a check in [Point Name Rule Setting] with [Property] in the Configuration dialog box.
TITLE:

SHEET
01
EDIT
05.05.19
DATE
Matsukura DESIGN
Newly registered
DRAW.NO.
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
98/98

Fanuc Cimplicity I Cell Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc Cimplicity I Cell Operator

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc Cimplicity I Cell Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC CIMPLICITY

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING AND CAUTIONS ON THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL

Warning and caution on DNC operation

Exclusive file control

Organization of this manual

Directory where the i Cell is installed

NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................ 34 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION ................................................... 36

LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................................................. 40

WORKPIECE MACHINING RESULTS........................................................ 48

Planned Parts Count Input......................................................................................54 Display Information ...............................................................................................55

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................ 55

NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION .......................................................... 57 NC MAINTENANCE .............................................................................. 59 MAIL FUNCTION .................................................................................. 63

II. INSTALLATION 1 2 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................... 71 PREPARATION..................................................................................... 72

PREPARATION (FOR Windows 2000)........................................................ 79

PREPARATION (FOR Windows NT)........................................................... 84

UNINSTALLATION ............................................................................. 100

BACKUP AND RESTORATION.......................................................... 102

III. SETTING 1 2 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 113 BASIC FUNCTIONS............................................................................ 114

DIALOG BOX CONFIGURATION.............................................................. 119

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT MACHINE SETTINGS ........................ 151

2.10 2.11 2.12

MAIL .................................................................................................... 182

3.2 3.3 3.4

WEB .................................................................................................... 192

4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5

CIMPLICITY VIEWER ......................................................................... 202

SETTING ................................................................................................... 221

EXECUTION.............................................................................................. 232 CANCELING THE SETTINGS................................................................... 232

IV. OPERATION 1 2 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 235 SCREEN OPERATION........................................................................ 236

MAIN MENU ........................................................................................ 244

OVERVIEW MENU.............................................................................. 247

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT......................................................... 255

5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10

EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS ................................................. 301

LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS ........................................ 309

MACHINING RESULTS ...................................................................... 314

WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS .................................................. 320

NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION ........................................................ 332

NC MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 344

OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY............................................................. 351

VARIOUS DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION.............................................. 355

FROM/SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION........................................ 359

9.7 10.1 10.2 11.1 11.2 11.3

10 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 366

11 ALARM AND WARNING..................................................................... 371

V. USER CUSTOMIZATION 1 2 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 381 ADDING SCREENS ............................................................................ 382

SCREEN ADDITION.................................................................................. 385

GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL................................. 396

ScreenID.ini ............................................................................................... 400

iCELL_ErrorMessage ................................................................................ 401

iCELLDef ................................................................................................... 403

MACHINE SELECTION CONTROL .......................................................... 418

DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................... 425

MACHINING RESULT ............................................................................... 427

WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT......................................................... 429

REFERENCING THE DATABASE...................................................... 435

(4) (4) (*4)

(4) (4) (*4) -

(4) (4) (*4) -

(4) (4) (*4) -

(3) (4) (3) (4) (*4) -

(5) (5) (5) (7) -

(1) (1) (1) (6) (6) (6) (7) (7)